OF THE [ Ai No Division Range / ~r~s2. Shelf^. .:. : L Received tLz&t J^fS^- l z-13. H PRESENTED TO THE g. Library of the University of California, s |4^^£Sl^; ■&, \ (£cA. fldr A. S>. 1873, J O/ Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from Microsoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/compendiousgrammOOcrosrich COMPENDIOUS GREEK GRAMMAR. COMPENDIOUS GRAMMAR OF THE 'Com L &n di&uLZ GREEK LANGUAGE. By ALPHEUS CEOSBT, PROFESSOR EMERITUS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN DARTMOUTH COLLEGE. wooLWOETHrsejgBESBE^^ company, 51, 53, & 55 JOHN STREET, NEW YORK, HI STATE STREET, CHICAGO. 1871. 7f3 " The Language of the Greeks was truly like themselves, it was con- formable to their transcendent and universal Genius The Greek Tongue, from its propriety and universality, is made for all that is great, and all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and under every Form of writing." — Harris's Hermes, Bk. III., Ch. 6. 11 Greek, — the shrine of the" genius of the old world; as universal as our race, as individual as ourselves ; of infinite flexibility, of indefatigable strength, with the complication and the distinctness of Nature herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was excluded ; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English ; with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the summer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and the intensity of jEschylus ; not compressed to the closest by Thucydides, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thunders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean touch of Demosthenes! " — Coleridge's Study of the Greek Classic Poets. Vignette: Temple of Theseus at Athens. ''Athens, the eye of Greece." — Milton. 9f3 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, BY ALPHEUS CROSBY, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. University Press: Welch, Bigelow, & Co., Cambridge. PREFACE. The motto on the title-page, from old Theognis if not the older Cleobulus, indicates the principle on which this treatise has been prepared. There has been throughout an earnest effort to carry nothing to excess, neither insertion nor omission, but to write that " Middle " Grammar which, it might be hoped, the old moralist would approve, if he were at my side. The Tables, that mnemonic associations may not be disturbed, are throughout the same as in the larger grammar upon which this is based ; and so little of prac- tical precept has been omitted from the text of the latter, that many might regard this condensed edition as still large enough for the ob- ject stated in the original preface to the fuller work : " to supply what was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text- books ; viz., a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scientific and complete to accompany him through his whole course." Even slight variations of phraseology have been avoided, with few and unimportant exceptions ; and the division here made into sections and their parts, and the references to these, apply throughout to the fuller edition ; so that the two editions might even be used together in the same class without inconvenience. They are really one and the same work, unum et idem ; except that the screw of compression, which had been before so severely applied, has here received a few more turns. It must be confessed, however, that the arguments in favor of a short grammar have far less strength for the Greek than for the Latin. The study of the latter language is usually commenced at an earlier age, and when the learner is wholly new to philological ac- quisition ; and it is also commenced by many who contemplate only a brief course of classical study, and who therefore find in a brief gram- mar, supplemented here and there by an able teacher, a supply of their wants. , On the other hand, most of our students, in beginning the study of Greek, have in view a college course ; and they begin it with the experience and mental strength derived from the acquisi- tion of the Latin. They know already how to use a grammar as, what it mainly should be, a book of constant reference; and are more troubled by not finding in it what they seek, than by the pres- ence there of much that is not immediately needed, — with which, COMP. GR. /* _ — ^10 PREFACE. however, as lying before the eye, they are gaming without effort some acquaintance in anticipation of future wants. At least they will better know, — a large part of knowledge, — where tojind what they want. It may be added that the Greek, from the much greater fulness of its forms and variety of its constructions, cannot be as adequately treated as the Latin, except in a larger volume. Mr. Marsh, in his able Lectures on the English Language, thus distinguishes : " The grammar of the Greek language is much more flexible, more tolerant of aberration, less rigid in its requirements, than the Latin. The precision, which the regularity of Latin syntax gives to a period, the Greek more completely and clearly accomplishes by the nicety with which individual words are defined in meaning ; and while the Latin trains us to be good grammarians, the Greek elevates us to the highest dignity of manhood by making us acute and powerful thinkers." The greater need of explanation which results from this fulness and freedom, calls for additional space ; for, as Professor Cur- tius has well remarked, " Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and combining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that whieh has been learned, and permanently impress it upon the mind." In respect to form, the present treatise should not be judged as an independent work, but as a condensed edition of a larger work, from the form of which it was deemed important to depart as little as pos- sible. Thus, some references to authors, which are there fully made, are here given partially in preference to omitting them altogether. For fuller illustration and explanation on many points, will the reader pardon, once for all, a reference to the larger grammar ? And will he permit the statement of principles and acknowledgments in its preface to be here understood without repetition, — the rather for a reason which will appear in the next paragraph ? The occurrence of some spaces in printing the Revised Grammar presented a temptation to adorn it with a few extracts. In the pres- ent form of printing, these spaces do not occur ; and, from a reluc- tance to part with these gems, room has been found for them here, — where, indeed, they seem to be placed even more appropriately, as a fit introduction to the book. In their original position, they be- long to sections 796, 171, 724, and 799. The last of these passages is selected the rather because its author is Professor of Modern Lan- guages, not of Greek, and is especially eminent as a Sanskrit scholar ; as that in § 800, with a quotation above, because they occur in Lec- tures, not on the Greek, but on the English Language, and by one who has gained such distinction, both in public life, and by his PREFACE. 5 scholarship in other than classic fields. The teacher of Greek, whose judgment might be suspected of partiality, would not perhaps ven- ture upon the strength of expression employed by the statesman- scholar. A. C. "The reasons why we spend so long a time in acquiring a mastery over the Greek Language are manifold. We do so partly because it is one of the most delicate and perfect instruments for the expres- sion of thought which was ever elaborated by the mind of man, and be- cause it is therefore admirably adapted, both by its points of resemblance to our own and other modern languages, and by its points of difference from them, to give us the idea, or fundamental conception, of all Gram- mar ; i. e. of those laws which regulate the use of the forms by which we express our thoughts. "Again, Greek is the key to one of the most astonishing and splendid regions of literature which are open for the intellect to explore, — a literature which enshrines works not only of imperishable interest, but also of imperishable importance, both directly and historically, for the development of human thought. It is the language in which the New Testament was first written ; and into which the Old Testament was first translated. It was the language spoken by the greatest poets, the greatest orators, the greatest historians, the profoundest philosophers, the world has ever seen. It was the language of the most ancient, the most elo- quent, and in some respects the most important of the Christian fathers. It contains the record of institutions and conceptions which lie at the base of modern civilization ; and at the same time it contains the record, and presents the spectacle, of precisely those virtues in which modern civiliza- tion is most deficient. " Nor is it an end only ; it is also a means. Even for those who never succeed in reaping all the advantages which it places within their reach, it has been found to be, in various nations and ages during many hundred years, one of the very best instruments for the exercise and training of the mind. It may have been studied irrationally, pedantically, and too exclusively ; but though it is desirable that much should be super- added, yet with Latin it will probably ever continue to be — what the great German poet Goethe breathed a wish that it always should be — the basis of all higher culture." — Earrar's Greek Syntax. Inflection. — " Greek presents the most perfect specimen of an inflectional, or synthetic language. A language which gets rid of in- flections as far as possible, and substitutes separate words for each part of the conception, is called an analytic language ; and next to the Chi- nese, which has never attained to synthesis at all, few languages are more analytic than the English. A synthetic language will express in one word what requires many words for its expression in an analytic language : e. g. ir€X €to j abierat, il s'en etait alle. " The advantage of synthetic language lies in its compactness, precision, and beauty of form ; analytic languages are clumsier, but they possibly admit of greater accuracy of expression, and are less liable to misconcep- tion. If they are inferior instruments for the imagination, they better O PREFACE. serve the purposes of reason. Splendid efflorescence is followed by ripe fruit. The tendency of all languages, at least in historic times, is from synthesis to analysis, e. g. from case-inflections to the use of prepositions, and from tense-inflections to the use of auxiliaries. This tendency may be seen by comparing any modern language with its ancestor, e. g. Italian with Latin, Modern with Ancient Greek, Bengali with Sanskrit, Persian with Zend, German with Gothic, or English with Anglo-Saxon. " It is most important to observe that no inflection is arbitrary. Among all the richly multitudinous forms assumed by the Greek and Latin verbs, there is not one which does not follow some definite and ascertainable law. Parsing loses its difficulty and repulsiveness, when it is once understood that there is a definite recurrence of the same forms in the same meaning, and that the distorted shape assumed by some words is not due to arbi- trary license, but to regular and well understood laws of phonetic corrup- tion." — Do. (from § 7 - 14 of Pt. I. ). Prosodial Distinctions. — " Both accent and quantity have, and must have some play in all languages. So long as speech is dic- tated by thought and feeling, will men mark the more pregnant words and syllables with a superior tension of the voice. And so long as con- sonants remain solid, will it take a longer time to get over two of them in pronunciation than over one. In Greek, both accent and quantity were powerfully developed, so that whereas accent, the intellectual element, overbore quantity in prose, in verse on the other hand quantity, the musical element, overbore accent." — Clyde's Greek Syntax. The Greek Problem. " What the inhabitants of the small city of Athens achieved in philosophy, in poetry, in art, in science, in poli- tics, is known to all of us ; and our admiration for them increases ten- fold if, by a study of other literatures, such as the literatures of India, Persia, and China, we are enabled to compare their achievements with those of other nations of antiquity. The rudiments of almost everything, with the exception of religion, we, the people of Europe, the heirs to a fortune accumulated during twenty or thirty centuries of intellectual toil, owe to the Greeks ; and, strange as it may sound, but few, I think, would gainsay it, that to the present day the achievements of these our distant ancestors and earliest masters, the songs of Homer, the dialogues of Plato, the speeches of Demosthenes, and the statues of Phidias, stand, if not un- rivalled, at least unsurpassed by anything that has been achieved by their descendants and pupils. "How the Greeks came to be what they were, and how, alone of all other nations, they opened almost every mine of thought that has since been worked by mankind ; how they invented and perfected almost every style of poetry and prose which has since been cultivated by the greatest minds of our race ; how they laid the lasting foundation of the principal arts and sciences, and in some of them achieved triumphs never since equalled, is a problem which neither historian nor philosopher has as yet been able to solve. Like their own goddess Athene, the people of Athens seem to spring full-armed into the arena of history ; and we look in vain to Egypt, Syria, or India for more than a few of the seeds that burst into such marvellous growth on the soil of Attica." — Lectures on the Science of Language, by Max Muller, Professor of Modern European Languages in the University of Oxford ; Second Series. PREFACE TO THE TABLES. The following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Gram- mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater con- venience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular arrangement are too obvious to require remark; nor is it less obvi- ous, that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when printed together, than when scattered throughout a volume. The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been constructed are the following : — I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gram- matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only the material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which as- sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student has learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm that he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of nine forms instead of three ? why, in his daily exercises in declen- sion, must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weari- ness of the teacher's ear ? II. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine grammarians. For a single example, where not a few might be cited, the second future active and middle, which, except as a eu- phonic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly rejected. III. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impres- sion, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluper- fect, the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as reg- ularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name ; when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect or pluperfect ; eighty, which have the second aorist active ; fifty, which have the second aorist or future passive; forty, which have the second aorist middle; and thirty which have the third future? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers. From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in writing Greek, to employ the form in -fie8ov, little suspecting that it is only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that the learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere in- 8 PREFACE. vention of the Alexandrine grammarians ? The teacher who meets with it in his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier called the Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, " to gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would never see again." And yet, in the single paradigm of tvtttna, s, icipas, &c. 17 B. Liquid, 6-qp, pis, avrjp, &c. 18 C . Pure, ids, ols, iroXis, iinrefo, ■f)X&, vavs, yivos, &-qs, &c. . 22 xii. Adjectives of Three Termi- nations, /aw/jos, t)8ijs, &c. . 23 xiii. Numerals, ds,86o,Tpeis,kc. 25 xiv. Active Participles, XiW,&c 26 xv. Substantive Pronouns . . 27 xvi. Adjective Pronouns, 6, &c. 28 B. Comparison . . 29 C. Conjugation. i. Distinctions classified ... 30 ii. Formation of the Tenses. . § 31 in. Analysis of the Verb . . 32 IV. Translation of wa^u) ... 34 v. Subjective Affixes analyzed and compared .... 35 vi. Objective Affixes analyzed and compai*ed . . . . 36 vii. General Paradigm, Xi5w . 37 2\nroi>, iriiroida, irpi^rju . 38 Viii. Classes of Verbs. a. Mute, rpijSw, T&avw, &c. . 39 B. Liquid, dyy^Ww, (palvw . 40 c. Double-Consonant ... 41 D. Pure. i. Contract, Ttp.Gj, , drjpw, ir\£u), &c. 42 Latin Analogies ... 43 ii. Barytones in -«, 66b), &c. 44 iii. Verbs in -fii, fontfu, Tldrjpu, 8i8o)/M, deiKvvfu, t-qiXL, dpi,' elfii, (prjpi, &c. 45 E. Preteritives, otda, ^,ucu, &c. 46 ix. Relation of Tenses and Stem- forms 47 x. Dialectic Forms .... 48 xi. Classes & Notation of Stems 49 xii. Catalogue of Verbs ... 50 D. Numerals . . 52 E. Pronominal Correlatives 53 F. Table of Derivation 54 G. Significant Elements 55 III. SYNTAX. A. General Principles ... 56 B. Figures of Syntax .... 67 C. Forms of Analysis and Parsing 72 D. Chief Rules of Syntax . . 76 IV. PROSODY AND PRO- NUNCIATION. A. Table of Feet ..... 77 B. Metrical Description and Analysis ...... 78 C. Methods of Pronunciation . 79 Greek Appendix . . 80 CONTENTS. It Introduction. — Dialects § 81 BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. c. Apostrophe, or Elision . 127 Dialectic Variations . . .130 Ch. 4. Consonants . . . .137 Old Semivowels 138 Euphonic Changes, A. In Formation of Words 147 B. In Connection of "Words 161 c. Special Rules . . . .165 Dialectic Variations . . .167 Ch. 1. Characters . . . . § 90 History of Orthography . . 97 Ch. 2. Figures 99 Ch. 3. Vowels 106 Syllabication Ill i. Precession 113 ii. Union of Syllables . . .117 A. Contraction . . . .118 B. Crasis 124 BOOK II. ETYMOLOGY. Divisions and Definitions . . 172 Ch. 1. Principles of Declen- sion 173 A. Gender 174 b. Number, c. Case . . . 178 D. Methods and General Rules 180 e. History of Declension . .186 Ch. 2. Declension of Nouns. i. First Declension . . . .194 Dialectic Forms . . . .197 II. Second Declension . . .199 Dialectic Forms . . . .201 in. Third Declension . . . 202 a. Mutes 203 B. Liquids 208 c. Pures 212 Dialectic Forms . . . .221 iv. Irregular Nouns . . . 223 Ch. 3. Adjectives .... 229 Ch. 4. Numerals .... 239 Ch. 5. Pronouns. i. Substantive 243 ii. Adjective 249 Ch. 6. Comparison .... 256 I. Of Adjectives, a. By -rcpos, -TaTos . . 257 b. By -fo>v, -ottos . . . 260 c. Irregular 262 ii. Of Adverbs 263 History of Comparison . . 264 Ch. 7. Principles of Conju- gation 265 A. Voice 266 B. Tense 267 c. Mode 269 D. Number and Person . . 270 e. History of Conjugation . 271 Ch. 8. Prefixes of Conjuga- tion. i. Augment 277 ii. Reduplication .... 280 in. In Composition . . . 282 Dialectic Use 284 Ch. 9. Affixes of Conjuga- tion. I. Classification and Analysis 285 A. Tense-Signs . . . .288 B. Connecting Vowels . . 290 c. Flexible Endings. . . 295 II. Union with the Stem. A. Consonant Changes . . 304 b. Vowel Changes . . . 309 c. -MI Form 313 D. Complete Tenses . . .317 Dialectic Forms 321 Ch. 10. Stem of the Verb . 336 I. Prime Stems 340 ii. Euphonic Stems . . . 341 in. Emphatic Stems . . . 346 iv. Adopted Stems .... 358 Ch. 11. Formation of Words 359 1. Of Simple Words . . .362 A. Nouns 363 B. Adjectives 373 c. Pronouns 377 d. Verbs 378 E. Adverbs 380 ii. Of Compound Words . . 383 BOOK III.. SYNTAX. General Remarks 391 Ch. 1. The Substantive. I. Agreement 393 II. Use of Cases 397 12 CONTEXTS. A. Nominative . . . . § 400 B. Genitive 403 I. Of Departure . . . 404 1. Separation. . . . 405 2. Distinction . . . 406 II. Of Cause 410 A. 1. Origin .... 411 2. Material ... 412 3. Supply .... 414 4. Partitive . . . 415 b. 1. Motive, &c. . . 428 2. Price, Value, &c. 431 3. Sensible and Men- tal Object . . 432 4. Time and Place . 433 c. Active . . ' . . . 434 D. Constituent . . . 435 1. Property . . . 440 2. Relation ... 441 C. Dative Objective ... 448 i. Of Approach .... 449 1. Nearness .... 450 2. Likeness .... 451 II. Of Influence . . . 452 D. Dative Residual . . . 465 I. Instrumental and Modal 466 II. Temporal and Local . 469 E. Accusative 470 i. Of Direct Object, &c. . 472 Double Accusative . . 480 li. Of Specification . . 481 in. Of Extent .... 482 iv. Adverbial . . . . 483 F. Vocative 484 Remarks on the Cases . . 485 III. Use of Numbers, Gen- ders, and Persons . 488 Rules of Agreement . . 492 Ch. 2. Adjective and Pro- noun. i. Agreement .... 504 ii. On the Adjective . . 506 in. Use of Degrees ... § 510 iv. Use of the Article. A. Broad Use .... 516 b. Article Proper . . . 520 V. On the Pronoun . . . 535 A. Personal, &c. ... 536 B. Avt6s 540 c. Demonstrative . . . 542 p. Indefinite 548 e. Relative 549 F. Complementary and In- terrogative .... 563 G. "AWos and "Erepos . . 567 Ch. 3. The Verb. I. Agreement 568 II. Use of the Voices . . 575 a. Active 577 b. Middle 578 C. Passive 586 III. Use of the Tenses . . 590 A. Definite and Indefinite 591 b. Complete 599 c. Interchange .... 602 IV. Use of the Modes. A. Intellective .... 613 Use of &»'. . . . 618 i. Final Clauses . . . 624 ii. Conditional . . . 631 in. Relative & Temporal 640 iv. Complementary . . 643 v. Interchange . . . 649 b. Volitive ..... 655 c. Incorporated. . . . 657 i. Infinitive .... 663 Ii. Participle .... 673 in. Verbal in -t£os . . 682 Ch. 4. The Particle ... 684 A. The Adverb .... 685 B. The Preposition ... 688 c. The Conjunction . . 700 Observations .... 703 Ch. 5. Arrangement. . . 718 BOOK IV. PROSODY. Ch. 1. Quantity and sification . . I. Natural Quantity II. Local Quantity III. Versification . A. Dactylic Verse B. Anapaestic Verse c Iambic Verse . d. Trochaic Verse e. Other Metres Ver 725 726 734 740 747 751 755 760 764 Ch. 2. Accent . . . I. General Laws . . II. In Vowel Changes III. In Inflection . . IV. In Construction. A. Grave Accent . B. Anastrophe . . c. Proclitics . . . d. Enclitics . . . V. In Formation . . 766 770 772 775 784 785 786 787 789 GREEK TABLES OETHOGEAPHY AND OETHOEPY. 1. The Alphabet. (§ 90 - 92.) Order. I. Forms. Large. Small. A a Roman Letters. a Names. *AX$a Alpha Numeral Power. 1 II. B ft 6 b BrJTa Beta 2 III. r 7, f g>n TdfjLfxa Gamma 3 IV. A 8 d AeAra Delta 4 V. E € S *E \^l\6v Epsilon 5 VI. Z c z Zrjra Zeta 7 VII. H V e *Hra Eta 8 VIII. •e o, & th Gqra Theta 9 IX. i i i 'itora Iota 10 X. K K, X c Kcnrna Kappa 20 XI. A X 1 Adfipda Lambda 30 XII. M /* m MO Mu 40 XIII. N V n NO Nu 50 XIV. 37 \ X sr Xi 60 XV. o 5 *0 lUKpoV Omicron 70 XVI. n 7T, tS P m Pi 80 XVII. p P>Q r C P<5 Bho 100 XVIII. 2, C a, s s Siyfxa Sigma 200 XIX. T T,l t TaO Tail 300 XX. Y V y *Y ^rAo'j; Upsilon 400 XXI. $ <£ P h $r Phi 500 XXII. X X ch xr Chi 600 XXIII. ¥ # ps ¥i Psi 700 XXIV. a CO o il /xeya Omega 800 F, F, r f Bav Van 6 EPI- SEMA. Q q sh KoTnra 2av Koppa San 90 900 14 TABLES. §2. 2. Comparison of Alphabets. Hebrew. K Aleph A 3 Beth B i Gimel T n Daleth A n He E 1 Vav F T Zayin n Hheth 13 tfet » Yodh 3 Kaph S LamedhA D Mem M 1 Nun N Greek. a Alpha P Beta •y Gamma 8 Delta € E psilon F Vau I Zeta t] Eta 9 Theta i Iota k Kappa X Lambda p Mu v Nu (97, 98.) Latin. A a B b G D E F Z II I, J i,j C,Kc,k L 1 M m N n Hebrew. D Samekh V Ayin 3Pe y Tsadhe p Qoph "1 Resh \U Shin nTav Greek. 2 Phi XX Chi ¥>|/Psi il m mega 3. Ligatures. (90. 2.) OS/ D 00 at airo av yap 77 yev yp h Bia » €K €V ft & eiri €V 7)V teal XX fiev o? ov irept pa pi po S 1 sr tut T t a Oat <7, Guttural, or k Mutes, k, y, X, Dental, or t Mutes, t, 8, 0, ( Liquids, X, ft, v, p, 7 nasal, Semivowels, j SiMlants ( Pure, , a£ia, Ave • Perispome : ov, 6pS>, avtio. Paroxytone : \va>, raplas. Proparoxytone : Xdtos, iXvere. Properispome : o-vkov, ripare. 1G ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. §6. 6. Figures affecting Letters and Sounds (99 s). 5. Uniting : Sykeresis, Contraction, Crasis, 1. Adding : Prothesis, Epenthesis, Paragoge, Extension. 6. Resolving : DliERESIS. 2. Subtracting: {Initial) Aph^eresis, (Medial) Syncope, (Final) Apocope, Apostrophe. 7. Shortening : . Systole. 3. Transposing: Metathesis. 4. Exchanging : Antithesis. Assimilation. 8. Lengthening: Diastole. Synizesis. i. Attenuating : Precession. 7. Contraction of Vowels (115 s). In the columns in § 7 and 8, the first of the vowels or consonants affected hy the change is placed at the left, and the second at the top, hoth in common type. The result of the change is in full-face type, in a line with the first and beneath tbe second. The paren- theses enclose regular changes in the union of the stem and affixes of verbs. The labial, palatal, or lingual mute with which v final combines as a, is represented by I or p. Some changes are placed below the columns, and some special cases are enclosed in brackets. »)

d ecp CO ceo a] d €1 ai 61 Tl (• [Augm, €1 i *i Tl [Ion. Oil €U CO 01 ov- «1 n Tl *i Tl CO Co ai (ov 01 CO 01 ov Ob ov d VI ov *1 tp CO ov Tl co CO I I 1 v(p) at av 9 €1 €V *l *] n 1)V 01 ov * cov r I CO) CO V V v wi v te & eta a, ote & oia ot, ova co & ov, v'C v. In Augment, eav tjv & av, ,t 36* i T, A0 (* ♦ |X|X d>0 ITT (par) la p8 [ucp] [«r, tl ", 7, X (6 X 7H- X9 kt \ar) pa 7 8 [•cxi o-tr, I r, 5, e j <°" K era cr9 [t8] err 8ar) la V cr, crt ?> crcr ((ve Y K ua v6) air IV iJ as K o-p. va Kf YY j crtr 1* t>\ XX, pp pp & v8p, j/^cr v V 1 Ace. av, 7)v OV v, a * Voc. a, 7) € | OV # # Plur. Nom. at, 01, | a €? 1 « Gen. wv cov G>V Dat. ats ots € 12. in. Elements of the Affixes. In the column of Flexible Endings, the figures denote the Declensions ; the small full-face letters are signs of relation or case, and the full-face capitals are signs of number ; while those to which G. is attached also in- dicate gender. See 186 - 189. Con necting V< jwels. Flexible Endings. Dec. 1. Dec. II. Dec.ITI. Sing. Nom. a(i,) O * s. Fern. 1, *. Neut. 2, v G. ; 3, * Gen. a(tl) * (o0) os. 2 and Masc. 1, 0. Dat. «(1) * X. Ace. ■w O * v, a. Neut. 3, *. Voc. a(n) 0(€) * * Plur. Nom. a • # Es. land 2, E. Neut. "AG. Gen. a ° i * oN. Dat. a fc * (E2i). 3, JX. 1 and 2, iS. Ace. a * * (vS) aS. Neut. "A G. Du. N. A.V. a * E. G. D. a O * iN. 3, 01N. §14. AFFIXES AND PARADIGMS COMPARED. 19 13. iv. Affixes Analyzed and Compared with the Latin. The Affixes, printed in full-face type or italics, are preceded by their analyses in common type. Hyphens separate the Connecting Vowels from the Flexible Endings. Dec. I. E ec. II. De c. Ill Masc. Fem M. F. Neut M. F. Neut. S.N. U O-l V n t a-i ce o-i 6 [i] i Ab. a-e a o-e *r*i A. 0.-V av, ijv o-v ov v,& * a-m am o-m Um em [im] * V. a-* a, tj 0-* € 1 0-J> ov *r=N .] * a-* a 0-* 2 1 o-m itm = N. * P.N. a-e at o-e oi I *-a a es 1 a a-e ce o-e i | *-a a es 1 a [ia\ G. a-cjv CUV O-WV 0>V (OV a-um driim [um] o-um orum[ilm] #ra [iiim] D. a-is ais o-ts 01S s dolos 56X&) 86Xoiv DEC. III. M. F. Swine. v 6eu>v fxvimv fiovo-au rpane^au 0)5(01/ pvwv D. tols deals fXVLCllS fxovaais rpane^ais Arpeibcov 'Arpeidais 'Arpeidas *Arpeioa 'Arpeidaiv Mercury, Hermes < Epp(eds )fjs 'Epp(eov )ov 'Eppie'q. )y f Epp(edv )rjv 'Epp(4a )?} Epp(eai )ai f Epp{ecov)cov 'Epp^a^ais 'Epp(eds )as 'Epp(ed )a 'Epp(eaiv)a2v north wind. boreas j3o(peds)ppas fio{peov)ppd /3o(pea )ppa fio(pedv)ppdv /3o(p voov, vovv voe, vov vooi, vol VOCOV, VCOV VOOLS Vols voovs, vovs v6a>, vco VQOIV, VOLV temple. fanum 6 Vd6s : vaov vaco, vaov vecos veco veco vecov, [vedi vaoi, veco I vecov vaois, vecos vaovs, vecos vaco, veco vaolv, vecov The Lat. S. N. r6 Gr. rov D. rco P. N. to: Gr. TCOV D. Tols D.N. rco Gr. rolv egg, ovum chov COOV coco cha coco co oilv cave, antrum avrpov avrpov avrpco avrpa tivrpcov civrpois avrpco livrpotv b. NEUTER. apple, malum prjXov pr)Xov prfXco prjXd prjXcov prjXois prjXco prjXoiv part, membrum poptov popiov popico poptct popicov popiois popico popioiv OS oareov, ocrrovv OCTT€OV, OCJTOV dare co, ocrrco oared, oara oarecov, oarcov oareocs, 6aro7s ocrre'co, oorco oarreoiv, oarolv § 16. c. Dec. II. 199s: Gender 176 ; v(oos)ov$, 6X*> a. Qktpos D. <£Xe/3i' A. (pXefia P. D. <£Xe>/a v. Nouns of the Third Declension. MUTE. — a. Masculine and Feminine. b. palatal. 6,t], goat, i), hair. ati 0pl$ aiyos alyi atya aiyes aly&u al£l aiyas aiye alyoiv 6, raven. 6, lynx. Kopa£ Xvy£ KopaKos Xvyieos KopaKi XvyTa (pCOTCOV (pCdO-l (pare (pooroiv Neuter. - rb, liver. r]Trdp t)Tvd.TOS rJ7rari i)TTara riTrdroav ijnaai rjnaTf rjTrdroiv LINGUAL. rb, horn. Kepds Keparos, Kepari, Kepdra, Kepdroav KepdoL Kepdre, Keparoiv, corau icepdos, Kepcos Kepa'i, Kepa Kepaa, Kepa Kepdoov, K€p(0V Kepae, Kepd Kepdoiv, Kepav rb,ear. ovs tiros' biTL Qtra COTOiV coal . aire &TQIV § 17. f. Dec. III. 202 s : Gender 177. Mutes : 7«J(ts)+, ^(ks)€, lyn(cs)^, £\wi(ds)s, 151 ; yv{7rp)ira, K\e?(8p)v, 160 e, 204 a ; (6)rpix6s 159 b ; 68(outs)o{>5 den(ts)s, 6b(ovTcn)ovax, yiy{afTs)as gig(ants)as, \4(om-s)av le(ons)o, ddpa(prs)p, 153, 156, 205 ; 7r(o5s)ovs pe(ds)s 214 a; &v(aKT)a, rrai, §19. LIQUIDS. PURE. 23 (a. Not syncopated.) 18. B. LIQUID. 6, beast S. K %> fera G. #>7pos D. %u A. ^pa P.N j$pcc G. 6rjpa>v D. 6r)p 6, fish. iX^vs tX^vos Ix&tX IxOvif l x 6v iX&v€S [IxQvs] lx&vaiv lx8$o~i iX&vas, ix^vs Ix&ve [lx&>] IxBvoiv 7), echo. r)x<*> echo r}x(oos)ovs Tjxioi )oi rj X (oa )» rj X ol 204 b; cru!p,(aT)a, 0(wr)<5s, ^7r(ar)ap, 160. Contraction 207: K\ets 122, 'Oir(6€is)ov6rwv 778 b. — O. E. 6 7/)ity, -virbs, gryps, -yphis, GKIFFIN, *Apa\f/, -afios, Arab, t) a\ay£, -ayyos, phalanx, -angis, df)s, Otjtos, hired man, 7) XapTrds, -d5os, torch, LAMP, 7) xdpis, -t-ros, grace, i) vd^, -kt6s, nox, -ctis, night, 6 dpdKtav, -ovtos, draco, dragon, 6 ipds, -dvros, thong ; rb TrolTj/ma, -aros, poema, -atis, poem, to fipap, -aros, day, rb rtpas, -cltos, prodigy, rb tibwp, tibaros, water. § 18. c. Liquids 208 s : 67)(ps)p, Xi^ew^v, jH(vs)s, 153, 156, 208 ; \ipto-i, d-qpo-i, 154, 157 ; x 6 / 00 '^ 224 f ; avep 208 f ; Kv[o]vbs canis, ira.T[e]pl 24 THIRD DECLENSION. PURES. §19. b. Masculine and Feminine (continued). S. N. 17 ndXts city 6 7tt)xvs cubit 6 irnrevs knight rj pavs ship Gr. noXeos 7rr)x ea >* miretas veoas D. noXe'i, 7r6Xei "^VX^ ^X 64 iTrnei, Irnrel vnt A. noXip 7rrjx vv inned vavv V. TrdXt 7T7Jx v trnrev (ypav) P. N. iroXees, ndXeis 7rr)x €€S > irr)X €CS twees, Inlets, -rjs vrjes Gr. iro\ea>p Trrjx €u>v l 7r VX^ )V 'l *T7retov peeop D. 7ro\eac 7rf}x €(rc imrevcn paver I A. TTuXeas, noXeis 7rrjx eas ) irr)X ecs hnreds, imrels paiis D. N". noXee, ttoXt] Gr. TTokeoLP TrrjxeoiP nnree lirireow peolv S. K. Soncparns Socrates 'HpaKXerjs, Gr. Saacpareos, 'ScoKpdrovs 'Hpa/cXe'eos 1 , D. 2a>/cparei', Sco/cpdrei 'HpajcAeVt, A. Soo/cpaVea, 2a)/cpdr^, -7p 'Hpa/cXeea, V. Sco/cpares 'HpdfcXeey, 'HpaxAJ}? Hercules 'Hpa/cXeovs 'HpaxXeei, 'HpcwcXet 'HpaxXe'a, 'HpaicX^ 'HpaKXeis ["HpcucAes] c. Ketjter. S. N. to yepas honor G. D. P.N. Gr. D. D.K Gr. yepaos, yepa'i yepcas yepat yepaa, yepa yepdcop, yepoop yepacri yepae, yepa yepdoip, yepav to yepos yepeos, yepe'i, yepea yepecop yepecri race genus yepovs generis yepei generi yepq genere yep&p generum generibus to acTTv town aareos, acrrecos aorei', aarev acrrea, oxttt) drrTeatP aareari ye pee yepn yepeoLP, yepolp acrTee QO-TeOLP pat[e]ri, &p[e]va, 210 ; dvdpos 146 ; &p(ept(v ' fjcpi (3lr]p^- Dor. av • 'ATpet5ai>, Ovpav. D. ais, Old, aio-i(v ' rater 1 dvpaiviv. Ion.T|p.,-r}v ZeO TXov Ot'5t7rou OiSuroSa, -77 P. N. [Ales, Zr>es] G. Ot5i7r65a;j>', A. -as S. N. G. D. A. V. P.N. G. D. A. D.N. G. Attic. 6,son. Homeric. vl6s vl6s vlou, vlios vlov vlq>, vlel vlcp, vlbit vlbv vie" vtt vTos, vlios vli, vU'C, vlel via, vita viol, vleis vies, vties, vleis vldv, vUuv vlQv, vtetav viols, vtto~L vlolai, vldai, vlovs, vleis vlas, vUas vld>, vUe vldiv, vUoiv T)or:\c.7],ship. Ionic. vavs [vets] vqvs [Vt^us] pd6s pt)6s, vebs vat vrft vavv \yav\ vr\a y via \yrjvv] pStt vye$, vies vaCiv vrjOiVy ve&v yavalyvdefffft vrfval, vr\eao~i, vfaaot, vaas vijas, vias \?au(pt. S. N. G. D. P.N. G. D. D.N. G. S. N. G. D. A. V. P.N. G. D. A. Attic. rb> spear. Homeric. 56pv Poet. 8bpv Sbparos, 5op6s 8ovp6s (yoivaros) Sbpari, 8opl, 56pei dovpl botipan Sbpara, 8opar(j)v 8bpacri Sbpare Sopdroiv 8bprj Sovpa Sotipara Soiipwv Sotipeo-an, doijpao'L Sovpe to,- cave. Homeric. 6, stone, o-ireos cnretos Xaas atrelovs Xaos cirqC Xai" A. Xaav (/cXea) cireiwv Xdcov airkaai, cir^ecro-i \deo~o~t Xae Homeric Paradigms. 6, Tcnight. 77, city. lirireus irbXis linrijos (TvSeos) ttoXios, tttoXios, ttoXcos, ttoXtjos linrrj'C (Hy]XeC,-el) iroXi, irroXe'C, iroXei ? iroXrji lirirrja (Tv8ed,-rj) iroXiv, tttoXlv (77-6X770, Hes.) 6'Cv limed (p.dvTi A. 106) t7T7r?jes, i7T7rets ? xoXtes, iroXrjes 8'1'es iTTTTrjUV iroXliov 6'lWVi 6, 77, sheep. 8is 8'ios, olos l-mrevai (dpio~rri- TroXiecrcri (iirdX^eaiv) lirirrjas [eaai) iroXias, iroXls or iroXeis, woXrjas olCjv 6teo~ dyrjpdoiv, dyrjpcov b. Oi 1 the Third Declension. 6, i) (male) rb o, i) (pleasing) to 6, 7] (two-footed) rb S.N. tipprju appeu evxdpis evx a pi bl7T0VS b'nrovv G. dppevos evxdplros dl7To8oS D. appeui evxdpiTi blTTobl A. appeva e&xdpiTa, evxapw binoba, blnovv V. dppev evxapt- binov P.N. appeves appeva evxdpvres evx&pvra blirobes binoba G. dppevcov evxapiToav bi7r6bcov D. appeal evxdpicri binooi A. appevas. evxdpvras biirobas D.N. appeve evxdpire b'nrobe G. appevoiv evya/MTOCP bnroboiv 6, 7), (evident) rb 6, r) (greater) rb S. N. (raqjrjs i vacpes p.ei£cov major p,el£ov majus G. o~o(pfj A. ao(pov uo-e<», XP vo ~ XP v XP V(r ** Xpvaeav, xP vo ~ mv Xpvaeais, XP V(TC " S Xpvacas, XP V 2()0 » 120 s, 772 c, 777 b. — 0. E. L\t.os friendly, diKaios just, fiaicpos long, exOpoj hostile, ddpbos dense, ku ^Oft<5i/ D. Xapiecri Xapt-eaaais f)8eai 7)8eicus A. XapUvras Xapuaaas fjdtas, r)8els rjdelas D.N. Xap'ievrc Xapiecrcra fjbee f)8ela G. XapcevToiu Xapuo-craiv r)8eoiv rj8€iaiv 24. Of the Three Declensions. o (magnus' ) rj (great) rb S.N. p-eyas peyaXtj fieya G. peydXov peydXrjs D. peydXco peydXrj A. peyav p.eyaXr)v Y. peydXe P.N. peydXot peydXat peydX G. peydXcov peydXav D. ptydXois peydXais A. peydXovs peydXds D.N. peydXco peydXd G. fiiyaXcKV peydXaiv 6 (multus) i) (much) rb 7roXvs noXXr) TToXv noXXov 7roXXrjs 7ToXX<0 ttoXXt} TToXvV 7roXXr)v multi, many 7ToXXoi noXXai 7toXXd 7ToXX(i)V noXXcov TToXXois noXXals noXXovs noXXas yapieai, iracri, 154 s; ttcLv, irdurwv, Train, 729. 2, 778 b; t)M 219. — 0. E. T&\(avs)as wretched (M. Voc. rd\au), Tep(evs)7\v tener, tended, avfjiTrds (JECTI\ r ES. NUMERALS. §24. to P. of al ra npaov irpaoi, 7rpaus npauai irpaia irpaeow 7rpaeia>v , 1 7rpdois, npaeai 7Tpaeiacs iTpaeai irpdovs, wpaels irpaelds 25. xiii. Declension of Numerals. m. (unus) F. (one) N. S. N. els pid eu Gr. evos p-tas D. ivi pia A. tva p.idv M. (nullus) F. (no one) n. u.,none. ovdets ov8ep,ia ovdeu P. ovdeves ovdevos ovdepias ovdevcov ovdevi ovdepia ovdcai ovbiva ovdefxiav ovdtvas M. F. N., both. M.F.N., two. M. F. N. D. N. A. ap ambo, -se, -o 8vo, 8va> duo duae duo G-. D. dpcpolv amborum, &c. dvolv, late Gr. 8velv P. late D. 8vo~l m.f. (three) N. M. f. n. P. N, Tpeis rpi'a tres tria Gr. Tptoii/ trium D. Tptori tribus A. rpels tres M. F. (quatuor, four) N. reVcrapey, reVrapes reaaapa, rerrapa Tecradpcov, reTTapcov Teaaapo-i, Terrapa-i Teo~o~apas, rerrapas § 24. a. See 236 ; TroXtfs 213 c, 217 b ; Trpaeta 233 a, Trpoets 121. g. Homeric Forms of iroXds. S. K. 7T0Xl5s, TOvXfc iroXXbs 17 7T0XXlJ G. ToXios 7ToXX?}s D. (TroXet? Jlscll.) 7T0XXy 7roXXf7 A. iroXtiv, irovXvv iroXXtfj' iroXXf)v, irovXtiv Tb iroXi, irovXrf, ToXXbv P.N. iroXees, iroXets iroXXol iroXXai (iroXea Msch.) ToXXd G. iroXeuv ttoXX&v iroXXdcou, rroXXeuv D. 7roXep luentium 6evra>p Beicrwp D. Xvovai Xvovo~ais luentibus Beiari Beio~ais A. Xvovras Xvovaas luentes Bepras Beio-as D.N. Xvovt€ Xvovo~a flePTe Beicra G. Xvovroiv Xvovaaw Bivroip Beiaaip c. Present Contracted. d. Liquid Future. 6 (vivens) i] (living) rb 6 (dicturus) 17 (about to say) rb S. N. $(auv)(av £"(doi;)ai;ra £(dov)crr)s ipovvTos ipoijcrvi D. £(do)T€ f(aoi5)(ocrd ipovvre ipo6CTT}S P.N. ciSorey eiSuuu elSora eorcoTes' eoreocrai ecrrcora D. elbocri elctvlais eorcocri icrTa>o-ais § 26. j. Participles 234. 1 : \6(opts)uv, \6G> vos - -€- o-- - - -€- - -»- crcp- -CO- Flexible Ending. -6S -COV -iv, -cri(v -us[n.-u] -6 -Xv Dncontracted and Contract Forms. ifi(io)ov e//,(ei')oi ifU 72/z(v)(av via(£wv)u>v o~{£iav)iav •^(eti^tv ^(eii^tv O"0£crt ■?j/i(^as)as u,u(eas)as acpal v(Qfiv)£av crU>lV A. \\vuL v6 o~v II rvvrj a£o\ o~ev\ \\, flfA/A vfjiias, -^as ||#/^u.e \\o~G>'C, a(tiv eC J llloj elo, Wev]- or Feoj FcOj Fe?o, F^e^J ol\ \\eoc- or Fotj Fcot ej /u^jll e^ • or Feio}V, Cjv L(fi(v\JT(f>L(v\ \\ ias j -tas \ £ \ \\ cr0€?- as, o-0asj [n. (rcft^aj] \\)£\)\ S *'• b. Keflexive. 1 Pers. S. G. m. (of myself) f. efiavrov ifxavTrjs 2 Pers. m. (of thyself) f. aeavrov, o-avrov creavrrjs, cravrrjs D. e/xavTop ifiavrfj creavrco, aavrco creavry, cravrij A. efxavrov efiavrrjv aeavrov, cravrov creavrrjv, a avrrju p. a D. A. rjfx&p avrcov rjfxcov avrcov r)u.lv avrols 17/xtv avrals rj/xds avrovs rjjxds avras vficov avrcov vfxlv avrols vfxds avrovs Vfxcov avrcov v/xlv avrals v/JLas avrds 3 Pers. m., of himself. S. G. eavrot), avTou D. eatrra), avrco A. iavrov, aiirov f., ofJierself , eavrrjs, avrrjs eavrfj, avrfj eavrrjv, avrrjv N., of itself. eavro, avro p. a. eavrcov, avrcov eavrcov, avrcov D. eavrols, avrols eavrals, avrals A. eavrovs, avrovs eavras, avras eavra, avra or P. G. o-(f)(dv avrcov, D. crcfilcriv avrols -als, A. acfids avrovs -as c. Eeciprocal. M. (of one another) F. N. P. Gr. aXXjjXa)!' aXX^Xcop D. dXkr)\ois dXXr)Xais A. dXXrjXovs dXXrjXds aXXrjXd M. N. F. D. A. dXXrjXw aXX^Xa Gr. aXXrjXoiv dXXr)Xaiv d. Indefinite, m. F. n., such a one. S. 1ST. 6, r), ro 8elva Gr. rov, rfjs delvos D. too, rfj delvi A. rov, rrjv, to del va If. p. oi delves rcov deivcov * tovs delvas g. Additional Forms. TV D., TOlJ tu, B. reo, rev] reosj Teusj reous, reov D. rLv d. b. re te, rO j rlv D. vfxes D. v/nfiiup M. vfiiv, 5/xtJ/ D. P. vjxk, v/uLfie D. Feflepj M., eovs D. B., eelo E. Fot j M., iv or Iv D., 5 B. Fej iE., wj'I D. P. ttV P., 'a/iiV D., &/x/xe- A. 'd>e D. [, •Tfjv • 2 Pers. cretovrov, -77s, -$, 77-, -6v, -r)v ' 3 Pers. eiovrov, -77s, -y, -rj, -6v, -r)v, -6, PI. -G>v, -eiov, -ol 130 a, Theoc. 14. 46, aXXdXouri Pind. P. 4. 397, fee Ep. Dual dXXrjXouv 201 b, K. 65. GR. TAB. 2* : C 34 PRONOUNS. §28. 28. xvi. Adjective Pronouns. I. Definite. a. Article. b. Relative. c. Iterative. S.N. G. M. (the) 6 TOV F. N. 9 rd •rijs M.(qui) F.(who) OS T) O ov hs n. M.(ipse) avros avrov F. (very, same) n. avrr) avTo avTrjs D. A. TOP i ov % avra avrov avTrj aVTJ]V P.N. G. D. A. oi TCOV TOIS TOVS at ra* raiff ray ol avrolv avrd avralv d , Demonstrative. S.N. G. D. A. M. (this) F. obe hie rjde hsec rovde rrjade r<3Se TJjde Tovde Trjvde N. rode hoc M. (hie) OVTOS TOVTOV tovtm ■ TOVTOV F. (this) jr. avrq tovto TaVTTJS TaVTT} ravrrjv P.N. o18e hi aide hae TO& hasc OVTOl avrai ravrd G. Ts, 'a, &, arts, ras, auras, rq.de, ratirav, rav, avrav • iEol. rot's, rat's. j. Article 250 : 6, rd, 199 ; rd), tolv, 234 e. Dialectic Forms : Old Norn. PI. roi A. 447, Hdt. 8. 68. 1, Theoc. 1. 80, Msch. Fere, 424, rat T. 5, Pind. 0. 13. 25, Ar. Eq. 1329. k. Relative 250 : 8 199. D. F. : Ep. Gen. 8ov a. 70, ftjs n. 208, § 135. 1. Iterative 251 : avrd 199. So decline &\\es alius, other, and taettos ille, tlmt (iceivos p. I., B. 37, Hdt. 3. 74, ktjvos m., Sap. 2. 1, r^os i>., Theoc. 1. 4). D. F. : M. adreov, -iio* -4wv, -toiai, -4ov$, F. - covtivcov, orcop a>vrivcov [arra D. rial t'kti oio~rio~i, orois alanai A. riva? rivas ovanvas aanvas D.N. rivi rive &TIVC anve G. TlVolv rivoiv OLVTIVOIV aivTivoiu m. Demonstrative 252 : oStos, aVrrj, 252 b. Decline roidade, -aSe, -6vde, and roiovros, -airy], -ovrov or -ovro (199 a), talis, stick, rocroade (232 a) and tovoQtos tantus, so much, rrfKiKoaSe and tw'Kikovtos so old, rvvvovros tantillus, so small. D. F. : for rwvde, roiffde, by a kind of double declen- sion, Poet, rdvbewv Ale. 127 Bk., Ep. rolcdeai vewTcpos veciraTOS at d>lX(UT€pOS iXcuTaTOS aKpar^o-raTOs XaXt'cTTaros €S aKpaTecrrepos XaX^orepos p.eXdvT€pos IS * p.eXdvTaTOS 3. Root. (1)1 OV or fjSiwv ^8tov scribebam, I was writing. AORIST. 2-ypcuJ/a scrips^ I wrote. PLUPERFECT. c-ycYpd^civ scripseram, I lead written. §32. DISTINCTIONS AND ELEMENTS. 37 1. Decided, or Actual. INDICATIVE, ■ypdcjxo scribo, I am writing. C. MODES. I. DISTINCT. A. Intellective. 2. Undecided, or Contingent, a. Present Contingence, SUBJUNCTIVE. •ypda> scribam, /3. Past Contingency OPTATIVE. -ypdcf>oip.L scriberem, i" might write. I may write. B. VOLITIVK. IMPERATIVE. "Ypd<|>€ scribe, Write. n. INCORPORATED. A. Substantive. B. Adjectire. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Ypd<|>6iv scribere, ^pdcfwov scribens, To write. Writing. 31. ii. Formation of the Tenses. Library & Catlfofnta- Prefixes. Augm. Tenses. Affixes. Active. Middle. Present, ta,\u o|xcu, u,cu Imperfect, ov, V cu,t)v, p/nv Future, 0*0) cropcu ( 2 Future, i Aorist, era *](!?)> Subjunctive. Optative. i, General Sign ; -jit Form Middle. Vowels (290 s). it], Aorist Passive ; -fu Form Active. 01(0117), Pres., Fut., Perf., Fut. Perf. cu(etct, eie), Aorist Act. and Mid. Imperative, Infinitive, Participle. «(o), Imv. ) Present, Future, Future €(«), Inf. \ Perfect ; Perfect Ac- o, Par. ) tive. a(o), Aorist Active and Middle. *, Perf. and Aor. Pass. ; -p. Form. i. Flexible Endings (295 s). A. Subjective. Sing. 1 2 Pri. -£(/u,*) -s( t,acri) -}t€V -T6 -VT(j/,ej/,0-a>) •mils -tls -?i£(runt,re) Du. 2 3 p n p n -TOV -TOV -TOV -TTJV P Imv. -9(flf,s,e,0 Z. -*(to) pm -T*> -^0 pn npmn pm n -T€ -VTft)V, -TWO'aV -to -nto p n pmn -TOV -TWV r r r r Inf. -v,-vai,-i L. -r*(se) rd Part, -vt-s (r-s) -nt-s -tur-tis B. Objective. Sing. 12 3 py p v p v Pri. -|«u - s-eri-m (t-tj-s s-eri-s P. 2 s v'-i-sti k'-€ v'-i-t K'-a-ixcvv'-i-mus K'-a-Te v'-i-stis (/c < -a->'T)K < d(riv < -e- K'-a-rov [runt t. c. f. [era-m K 4 -€l-V, K*-T] V*- k'-€i-s v'-era-s k'-€i v'-era-t k'-ci-tc [crav ic'-ei-o-av, k'-€ k'-ci-tov K'-eC-Trjv k'-w v'-eri-ni k'-'q-S v'-eri-s k'-x| v'-eri-t k'-cd-jjlcv K 4 -1]-T€ k'-w-o-l k'-tj-tov T. C. F. k'-oi-ju v'-isse-m k'-oi-s v'-isse-s k'-oi v'-isse-t K*-Ol-(JL€V k'-oi-tc k'-01-€V k'-oi-tov k'-oC-ttjv k'-€-T6 K'-^-Taxrav, k'-6-vto>v K*-6-TOV k'-^-twv k'-I-vch v'-is-se (k'-o-t -s)k'ws (K'-o-cr-a)^^^ (k'-o-t) k'os k'-o-t-os K'-vC-as f. Aorist Pass., 2 Aorist Pass. (0'e-^)eV *** 0'tJ-fWV 0'tl-T€ 0'r]-o-av 0*1] -to v 0'^-TTJV T. C. F. 6'w-p.ev 0'T]-T6 0'u-OT. 0'tj-TOV (Pc-iri-fiWdriv 0'€£t]-|A€v, f €i-|i€v Q l di\-Tt, 0'ei-Te 0'eiT]--p.€0a a-mur r\-a-Qi a-mini tt-VTat a-ntur 1J-O-0OV 0. F. Ol-\i.t]V Ol-O Ol-TO ere-r ere-ris, -re ere-tur o£-fjL€0a ere-mur ot- i-tor €-o-0€ i-mini ^-o-0wV €-crav, £,- P=o C5 b 0-1 s h S I « ^ „T C5 ^ o "*» Sk c3 gfJS »• I- g **" S^ co oo b^-O rh 5^ S c J o ~ > o — >— i -. c3 » to "5 x . J- o * £ M ° o .J * g £§£b^ b 03 _ m. 9 a --3 .5 .2 is ,o 3 « t£ „ « O ^ .^ o O j»5 CO CO g, r^2 -*3 ^Qi J^ b S 1 8 ff i b g «s S a; o b § ii G^l .^S j«S5b fcC'd 2 S co 3 ^ s u CONJUGATION. §37. 37. vii. General Paradigm of (Stem \v- ; Pass, to be loosed ; Mid. A. Definite Tenses. 1. Present, or Definite System : Base Xu- ACTIVE. passive and middle. a Present. t >. Imperfect. c. Present. d. Imperfect. I am loosing. 1 was loosing. lam loosed, &c. I was loosed, &c. solvo solvebam solvor, &c. solvebar, &c. Ind S. 1 ' 2 \vr| luarts,-re 3 3 Xirrj \\xat Xi^rjTat lua£wr P. 1 \vto\Ltv ludmus Xi>wp,€0a luaraiM" 1 2 \vr\re \\xatis Xi/Tjo-6€ luamini 3 Xtfoxri' luant AtfovTai lx\a7itur D. 2 \vr\rov Xl/T](T0OV Opt S. 1 Xt/otfu lue'rem XvoC[ir\v luerer 2 Xtfois lucres Xtfoio luereris,-re ! 3 Xtfoi luere£ Xi^oito lueretar P. 1 Xi5oi[j.€v hxeremus Xno£(i€0a \ucremur pi 2 Xi/oitc luereto Xtfour0€ lueremfrii o 9 3 Xtfoiev luere?i£ XiJoivto luere?i£wr 02 D. 2 XlfolTOV Xt/Ol lu^or P. 2 2 Xtf€T€ luifo 2 Xi;€v luwwfor D. 2 2 \i5eTov 2 X(y€(T0OV Infu 3 l. Xl>€T«V Xtfeiv luere 2 Av€, solvo, to loose. to loose for one's self, redimo, to ransom.) B. Simple Indefinite Tenses. 2, 3. Future and Aorist Systems : Base \vcr-. e. Future. 1 shall loose. solvam Ind. 2 Xv lusZrim Xtfo-fls luseris 8 Xi5i*il»- 46 CONJUGATION. GENERAL PARADIGM. §37. C. Complete Tenses. 4. Perfect System : Base XeXu/c-. 5. Perfect Passive System : ACTIVE. PASSIVE AND i. Perfect. j. Pluperfect. J have loosed. I Itad loosed. soM solveram Ind. S. 1 XeXvka pejnili 1. Perfect. m. Pluperfect. I have been Vd, §c. I had been Pd, Sfc. solutus sum, &c. solutus eram, &c. X^Xujiai 2 \i\vKaspcipulisti \i\vK€i$ [ram &iXu peipu\erim XcXuulvos c5 2 XcXi/K-gs peipuleris X«Xt Lie'vos $s XcXi/p^vos fj 3 XeXi/ujj pe^vlerit £ P. 1 XcXtficeouev XeXi'ue'voi wjxev o3 2 X6XlVKT|T€ XcXuaevoi •fjTC XcXvulvoi mm? *S 3 XcXi/K&xn* £h D. 2 XcXi/ktjtov \i\v\Uv ttr\rov 3 XcXukoCttjv Xe\r|i«'vw cWJTTJV Imv. S. 2 2 X€'Xi/K€ X^Xutro 3 XeXuKCTco XtX^o-00) P. 2 XcXtficere 2 X&uv D. 2 XcXtficerov X£Xvcr0ov 3 XeXuK^Ttov 2 X«Xi;o-0g>v Infii i. XsXuic&ai ! pepvlisse XcXtfo-Ocu ! Part .IS. XcXukws! -via! -ds! XcXvpivos !-t],-ov! G. XeXuKOTOs! -vtas XeXi/aevov ,-qs Ind. k. Future Perfect XcXvkws 2 as ^ Ind. XcXuo> S? » 3 4XU0^TT]V Sub. Xu0a> 2 3 P. 1 XvOfjs Xu0fj Xi/0a>|iev 2 2 Xl/0t]T€ ^2^1 3 XuOoxri' "8 H -P o" as S r? 3 D. 2 Xv0f]TOV Opt. XeXuoroCfiTiv Xu0€Ctjv Xv0T](roC(JLTlV £ 2{ g> Cn 2 XcX&roio XvOcCtjs Xu0^croio sj-sj 3 XeXuo-otTO Xu0€^ \vQ"f\0€fa]TOV, Xu0€lTOV Xu0^OPOl(T0OV 7 £ * 2 •■> o © a >i«^ o 4 of £ §D •§ 3 ^ g^co— _ g § -'»],-ov XuOcfe! -€iU€V T/>l/3 p. 2 Xi7T€T6 X(7T€tr8€ ir€7TOi#€T€ 2 Tpi/3T|T€ 3 Xi7T6T0)(rav, Xi7r€£j3t]tov 3 Xi7T€TttV 2 Xt7T€(r6wv imroiOiroiV r/)ijSt]Ta)V Inf. Xi7T€lv! Xi7r£ ( 3. Xi7T-, Xet7T-, v. 2 Plup. Act. x. 2 Fct. Pass. 347 h) linquo, to ?eaw, 50 ; F. €TT€7rOt0€lV Tpi/frrjt()- 39. MUTE VERBS. 49 39. viii. Classes op Verbs. A. Mute. Stem Pres. A. P.&M. Impf. A, P.&M. Put. A. Mid. 1 Aor. A. Mid. 2 Aor. A. Mid. 1 Pf. A. 1 PI. A. 2 Pf. A. 2 PI. A. a. labial : rpi/3a> rpi/3-, rpi{3- ; to rub. rpifiat tero rpi(3op.ai €T(Jl(3oV €Tpi(36fXT]V Tptya rpfyofiai €Tpi\jsa €Tpiyjrap.T]V eXdfiov took i\afiopjqv T€TpX(pa trivi £T€Tpt P. 2 T€Tpi(j)6€ 3 T€Tpi(j)6a>(rav, T€rpl(p6a>v Inf. rerpicpdai ! Par. rerpipptvos ! PL P. Ind. fTeTpipprjv 2 €T€Tpiyj/0 3 €T€TpnTTO P. 1 €T€Tpipp€0a 2 irirpKpOe 3 rerpip-pepoi rjcrav Put. Pf. Tfrpi^ojuat 1 Aor. P. €Tpl(p6r)v 1 Fut. P. rpicpOrjaopxii 2 Aor. P. fTp'ifirjv oftener 2 Fut. P. Tpi(3f]€vya fugi €7T€(p*vyeiV riraypai rera£ai TCTUKTai rcrdype&a T€Tax0e Terd^aTai T€Ta£o riTa\6e T€Tax@(d(rav, T€TO.)(6(CV T€rd)(0at ! reraypevos ! ererdyprjv €T€Ta£o treraKro ercrdypcBa €Terax0e trerdxaro rcrdi-opai cTaxfyv rax@r)cropai erayr]v rare Tayrjaopat tuktos, TaKTeos c. lingual: ireldco irid-, weed- ; persuade. 7T€ld<0 7T€ldop£Ll eiteiOov £7T€l36pr)V ir€LO~<0 7Tficropxii eTveiaa €7T€i Tteireia-Qe 7re7r€iaBa>crav, 7T€7r(lO-8(i)V TTeireZcrBai ! 7T€7t€lO-p.€V0S ! eireKtUrppp eneneio-o €7ren€io~TO e7re7T€Lap,e6a iTriiv€io~8e 7Tf7reio~pevoi rjcrav "Xfkrjo-opai €7rcio-6t]v 7reiadrjo-opat edpddrjv r. or}, [slept ITIO-TOS, 7T€L0-T€0S K€iv, 149 ; rerpi^-yucu) n|«u, ^7re7ret(^-/x7;j')o-|XT]v, 148 ; T£r/?t(/3-TCu)irrai, €T^Ta(y-To)KTO, 7ra(^-Teos)o-T€OS, £rpi(^-6T)v)^Qy\v, ra(y-6)\Qrit(/3-cr0e)<|>0€, T€T&(y-a6u))x§(tiy 158 ; rerpippivoi (-cu, -a) fyrap, rerayfiivoi (-at, -a) eial or rerdxarai, 300 b, c, 158 ; wpt-fyv, tipiKa, 277 c, 278 a, 280 a. Tenses supplied from other Verbs : ZXapov 351. 2 ; ■fjyayov, GR. TAB. 3 J? 50 VERBS. MUTE, LIQUID. §39. Mute Verbs. d. LINGUAL : 6/Hfa> 6pi5-, 6pi£- ; to bound. Pres. A. 6pi£a> finio P. & M. 6pi£opai Impf. A. &pt£ov P. & M. G>pi£6pr]v 1 Aor. A. btpXaa Mid. topto-dprjv 2 Aor. A. ddovsaw Mid. eldoprjv 1 Pf. A. &pXpia8r}v 1 Put. P. opiadrjcropMi 2 Aor. P. 2 Fut. P. [(TTfos Verbals optoros, opt- Fut. A. 6pi(ra>, opua Opt. oplo-oipi, opiolpi Inf. opicrew, opulv Par. Spiacov, opieov Fut. M. opi&opat, opiovpai Opt. opio-oiprjv, opioiprjv Inf. oplaeaOai, optdoOai Par. opiadpevos, opiovpevos 40. B. Liquid Verbs. a. oyyeXXta nuntio b. ostendo a77eA-, d77eAX-; to announce, (pav-, (pcuv-; to shoio. (paivopai ecpaivov €(paiv6pr)V e'cprjva e(pr]vdp,r)V €(3ci\ov threw efiaXoprjv 7re(payKa CTrerpdyiceiv Tretyrjva as mid. €ne(pr)veiu ire(pao-pat €7re(pdo-pT)u e 2 (pavois, -oirjs cpavolo 3 Cpavoi, -otrf P. 1 (pavolpev 2 (pavolre 3 (pavolev Inf. (pavelv Par. cpav&v (pavolro Inf. 7re(pdv0ai\ (pavoipeBa Par. ireipao-peuosl avol j ' ™ eTrei\£u 42 ; (pavoiqv 293 b ; ■7re'0a(j'-/ca)'YKa 150 ; irixprjva 312 a ; 7r^0a(^-fia:)cr|iai 150 d ; irtcpav-crcu §42. DOUBLE-CONSONANT, PURE. 51 41. C. Double-Consonant Verbs. a. 7refnr(i> mitto b. cmevdco libo c. av^co or av£dva> augeo 7re/i7r-; send. cnreitd- ; pour. c :#£-, av^av- ; increase. Pres. A. 7r€fj.7ra> "PX 03 a Trevdeo av£(o, ai£dva> P. & M. 7rep.7rop.a1 lead an evdo pat av^oLiai, av^dvopac Impf. A. enepnov VPX 0V eanevdov rjvtjov, T)v£avov P. & M. enepnoprjv eo~7rev86pr]V T)V^6fXT]V, T]v£av6fXT]V Put. A. 7rep.y\ra> ap£ Mid. nsfiyj/OLiai cnreio-oLicu al^qaofxai Aor. A. enep-yj/a rjp£a eanetaa ■qv^rjo-a rj\J/r]o~a Mid. €nefx^/a.LiT]v £o-neio-aLLT)v 7}l£;r]0-dLt,1]V 1 Pf. A. 7T€7roLi(pa rjpx a ecnreiKa late rjV^rjKa rjppr}Ka 1 PI. A. e7re7r6pqbeiv eaneiKeiv Tjl^KUV 2 Pf. A. XeXapna ulaze •nkirov&a oScoSa smell 2 PI. A. iXeXdfxneiv eireirovBeiv oScoSetz/ Perf. P. ireneppLai qpyfxai eo~neio-p.ai r)v£;r]Li.cu Plup. P. ene7rep.pr]v €o~nei(rfj.r)v T]lJJLir]U Aor. P. enepcpBrjv %px&ip iaTvei(j6rjv rjv^fjOrjv Fut. P. 7r€Ltfp6r)(TOLl#e, &C. eXfjXeyxBe. , &C. £Xr)XeyxO> at ! €Xr)Xeyp,evos ! 42. D. Pure Verbs, i. Contract. 1. In -da>: TiLidco honoro 2. In -eo>: (piXeco amo 3. In -6a>: 8ijX6a> declaro S. ri/xtt- ; to Jwnor. S. throw, p.evw remain, vtpnc distribute, 50. § 41. e. Double-Consonant Verbs: ireiropcpa 312c; Treire{p.Tc- /u.ai)}j.ptai, e\r)\eyp.cu, 148 a ; cnr(ev8-croi)d 8rj\(6a>)a 2 Ti/x(aeis)aff C/7* <^>iX(ceis , )eiS' 6eis 8rj\(6eis)o7s 3 rifi(aci)a G (jf>iX(tei)eI *} 8rjk(6ei)oii P. 1 Tlfx(do)<0-fi€V £a)/iei> -o~i i Sub. njtx(aa))cS g (£hX(c&))cS 6ea> S^X(dc«))c5 2 Tiii(ar)s)as C»s ^)i\(er)s)fjs derjs S/;X(d77y)oTs 3 Tifi(dr))a fit i&Upfy 6*g 8/;X (07)01 P. 1 Tlfx(a.U))a-fl€V ffi>/*«' ' <^tX(eco)a)-/i«' Oecafxeu 8rj\(6o))a>-fi€v 2 TifM(dt])d-Te t^e (f)i\(€t])r)-T€ 6er)T€ 8rj\(6rj)a-T€ 3 Ti/x(aoo)(3-(u' £oW (jf>tX(€-(ri l Opt. Tifi(doi)a-ni, ~(OT]V ^)iX(e'oi)ot-/ii, -oii)v 8rj\(6oi)oi-fxi, -oirjv 2 Ti/^aots^Giff, -03T)S ^)iX(eoiy)oty, -oirjs 8rj\(6oi)o7s, -oirjs 3 Tt/i.(aoi)<5, -air) ^)iX(€ot)oI, -oirj 8rj\(6oi)6i, -oirj P. 1 Tifi(doi)co-[iev,--ei' (jf)tX(60i)or-ef 8rjK(6oc)ol-ev Imv. Tip(ac)d Cr} <£i'X(ee)« fci 8r)\(oe)ov 3 ri/i.(ae)a-r&) (t)to> (j)i\(ee)el-Ta> Bc'lTbi 8rj\(oe)ov-T(0 P. 2 rt/x(ae)a-re (i)™, <£tX(ce)et-re Scire, 8r)\(6e)ov-TC 3 rift(af)d-ra)o;aj/, &C (rav, &C. 8r)\(oe)ov-TOicrav, rt/i(ad)&>-j/ra>j> <^tX(fd)ou-j/rcoi' 8t)X(o6)ov-vtq)V Inf. Ttfi(detv)dp Cv v ^iX^'ei^etJ/ 6e\v 8rfk(6eiv)ovv Par. Ti/x(aa>v)&n/ C&v cf)iX(eaiv)civ 6ia>v 8rjX(6cov)cov Tt/i(dou)c5-(ra cf)i\(eov)ov-(ra 8r)\(6ov)ov-o~a Tt/x(aoi/)aii' cf>ik(eov)ovv 8rjX(6ou)ovv b . Imperfect Active. S. 1 CTlp(aov)a>v c£cov ecf)l\((ov)ovv edeov €8rfk(oov)ovv 2 €Ti[x(a.€s)as Hi* €(f)Ck(ccs)€lS eOeis c8r)\(o€s)ovs 3 €TifJL(a.€)a e£rj e-jxev 2 eTin(de)d-T€ «C»7 T6 4 , i/)ov, 0tX(^oi)oio, 121c; ^( ae )l» 12 g ; 0&>, eels, 309 b ; tiamJctw, e V - §42. CONTRACT VERBS. 53 lMIO c. Present Passive and Middle. Ind. 2 3 p. 1 2 3 I am honored, Tifi(do)6ct-fxai rt/x(a>7)a Tifi(cL€)a-rai Tifx(ao)6)-fX€da Ti/JL(d€)a.-cr6e riyi{do)(o-vTaL loved, <£iX(fo)oO-/iai $iX (07)77, <£iX(e«)ei iX(ee)ei-Tat cf}i\(€6)ov-fi€0a 0iX(ee)eZ-CT#e ^>tX(eo)oO-ivrat Sub. 2 3 p. 1 2 3 rifi(aa>)a>-/zai Tifi(drj)a.-raL Tifi(aa>)-prat <£iX(ea))a>-/ua4 #1X^77)77 ^)tX(e?7)r}-rat <5f>iX(ea>)d>-/u.e#a 0tX(e?7)^-o-^e -i/rcH Opt. 2 3 p. 1 2 3 Tin(aol)(&-fir)v TtfJi(aoi)(p-o TiJLl(aOl) ^)tX(ee)fT-a-^e (rap, (f)i\(€e)€L-a6(ov Inf. Tin(d€)a-i\(eo)ov-fi(vos -/ze#a eTt/i(ae)a-(r#e iTi^,(do)a>-vTo €cf)ik(e6)ov-ixT]u e(f)i\(eov)ov e^)tX(ee)ei-TO e(£iX(eo)ou-/ue#a f(jf)tX(ef)ei-o'^e 6^)lX(6o)oO-»VTO manifested, &c. hx]k{do)ov-\iai dr)X(6rj)oi 8ijk(6f)ov-Tai Brj\(o6)ov-fi€0a 8rjX(6e)oi>-a0€ drj\(6o)ov-vrai $r)\(6<0)ai-ixai 8r)\(6i])ot $r)\(6ri)a>-Tai 8rfX(ou>)d>-fie0a 8rj\(6r))(0-(T0€ trjX(6a))(o-VTai dr)\(ooi)oi-fir}V St]\(6oi)(h-o drfk(6oi)oi-TO dr)\(ooi)oi-fj.e0a dr)\(6oi)ol-(T0€ dr]\(6oi)oi-PTO dr)\(6ov)ov drjX(oe)ov-a0a> 8r]\(6€)ov-l\T}ja, 8e8rj\ojK ' Tip.rjcrop.ai eTiprjcra €TlflT)(rdfXT)V T€TlflT)Ka €TeTlflT]KeCV T€TlfXT]fW.l €T€Tipr)pTjV TeTtprjcropai eTifirjdrjv Tipr)6r)cropai TlflTJTOS, TlfJLT]TeOS (piXncra) (piXrjcropai eCpiXrjcra e(f)tXr}o-dp.T]v 7T€Cf)l\T)Ka €7T€(f)lXrjKeiU TrecpiXrjpat. €7T€(plXr}HT)V necpiXrjaopai i(piXr)6r]v cpiXijdfjaopai cpiXrjTos, (j)i\r]Teos drjXdxray drjXwcropai edrjXaxra edrjXaxrdprjp dedfjXcoKa e8edr)Xo)Keiu 8e8r)Xct)fxai edfdrjXapqv dedrjXdxropat cdrjXwdrju dr)Xa>6r)aopai drjXcoTos, drjXcoTeos g. OTHER EXAMPLES. Pres. A. P. &M. Impf. A. P.&M. Fut. A. Mid. Aor. A. Mid. Perf. A. Plup. A. Perf. P. Plup. P. Fut. Pf. Aor. P. Fut. P. Verbals 8r}p(d(o)(o hunt Br)p(do)a>-paL i6r)p(aov)oav e0r)p(a6) flrjpacropm €$rjpdaa edrjpdcrdprjv TeOrjpaica eTeBrjpciKCiv redrjpdpai €Tedr)pdp.r)P 7re7rpdaofuu e6r)pd0r)V OrjpdOqcropai 6rjpdr6s, Orjpareos reX(fco)S> finish TiX(eo)ov-pai €TeX(€ov)ovv €T€X(€0)OV-p.T)V reXfVo), TeXa> TfXecropai, reXovpai eYe'Xecra eTeXecrdpiyv T€TeXeica irereXeKav rereXeapat ereTeXeaprjv K€KXrj(Topai eTeXeadrjv reXeaOrjcropai reXea-Tos, TeXecrreos 7rXeca sail €7rXeov 7rXevo-G) late nXevcropai, nXevcrov- e7rXevcra \jiat 7re7rXevKa iireirXevKtiv 7r€7rXevapai €7TC7rX(V(Tpr)V de8r)aopai inXeva6r)v late rrXevadrjcropai late 7rX(V(TTeos Att. ) eX(a (~v) Bvofiai eBvov €3v6fJiT)V Bvaoa Bvaofxai eBvaa eBvod/xijv TtBvKa erfBvKtut reOvfiai irv6r)v Tv6t]cro[j.aL Bvreos , kcl-, &c, burn. mUt, o. a. k&co Kalofiat enaiov, €fjLi (8o-, 8ibo-) do, to give; 4. dflicvvfiL (deuc-, SeiKvv-) indico to point out, show. § 44. a. Barytone Verbs 309 a : pepotXev/mcu, aeaeiafiai, 307 b, d ; 66s 8eiKiws 3 lorriarf Ttdrjcrc' 8i8ooai c BeiKviioi' P. 1 ctrraixejr ri6ep.ev 8i8ofi€v 8eiKVVfJi€V 2 to-rare rtBere 8i80T€ 8eiKWT€ 3 iaracntr rifleaoi', rtflelot 1 8i86ao-t l , dtbovot? beticvvai 1 Sub. larw Tt6a> 818& 8eiKVV0H 2 ia-Tjis rtOffs 8t8as 8etKVVT]S 3 l<7T7/ Tt£rj 8c8cp SetKVVij P. 1 io-Tcopev Tifieofiej* tiScofieu 8€lKVVOill€V 2 iOTjJre T$dr)re 8i8a>Te fklKVVT)T€ 3 itrraxr^ TtOaat' StSttCTt' 8eiKvtxoo-c l Opt. ioracijv rt6eirjv 8e8ot7}V [&c8w]ir] feuciwotfii. 2 UTTatTfS rtdeirjs 8180117s 8eiievuois 3 ivralrf TtOetrj 818017} 8etKVV0l P. 1 l(TTaiT][X€V, -alfteu Te6eirff*€V, ■ ■ei/xev 8t8oLr)fjkev, -< nfiev (teiicvvoifiev 2 iorairyre., -aire TtBeirjre, -eire 8e8oir)Te, -otre 8eiKVvoiTe 3 iaTaiiprav, -aiev Ti6(irfO , av > - (lev 8i8oirjo-av,-ole]/ dutevvotev Imv. tern; 3 lordx© rWei 8i8ov beUisv, -ve Tt$€T(0 §k86ra» 8etKVVT(j} P. 2 larare TiOere 8l8oT€ 8eiKVVT€ 3 IcTTaTOHTaVy TtBeTdorav, ► 8.i86T(&o~av y &€LKVVTCOaaPt taravroiV TldeVTOiV 8t86vTG)P 8etKVVVT(OV Inf. torawitl rvBivaiX 8i86vai. ! SciKvvvai ! Par. tords! riBeis ! 8iJ8ovs ! 8eiKvvsl -vatv to-racra I rtOelaral 8i8ovaal 8einirvo~a ! tOTOpI Ti6ev\ Sidai'l teuawvl b. Imperfect Active. Ind. LCTTTjV ctIBttv , eTtOovv £8t8a>v, €oL8ow eSetKiniv, eSeiKi/vov 2 Harris fridrfs , erifcts (8i.da>s, d8i8ovs f8eiKvvs, e8eiicvves « O IOTT7 €T10TJ, rrt&t e8i8(c s e8l8ov i8eiKin), f'SeiKvi/e' P. 1 ta-rafxev irlSefiev €bldo/J.€V tSeiievvpei' 2 to-rare fTl0€T€ (8l8oT€ c8('iKwre 3 taraaav eriOea or c&'Socrav e8eiKWorai/, -vov honor ; command, iraiw strike, 307 b ; /cXei'w skut, koXoiJw maim, 307 e, 50 ; daKptiw weep, KbrXtiu) (~v) hinder; kXoIui weep, 50. § 45. e. Verbs in -\ix 313 s : Stems, 80- 8180-, 6c- riGe-, 357. l r crra- lora- 357. 3, 8tiK- 8«kw- 351. 3 ; stem-mark lengthened 314. Affixes 35 a, 36 a, g, 32 i, 295 s ; (Sara-/*) ftrni|u, fornjv, 296 ; (to-ra-r) %, Qeijxev, 293a ; &rr(a-e)i], rld(e-e)o. t dts, 56s, arrjdi, 5G0t, 297 c ; Urr&vai, bvvai, 301 ; ifidt 8€lKUV(0[Xdl 2 t(7T t 7 TlBfj 8t8Tdi 8eiKVVT)Tdl P. 1 lo-rafifBa TiBa>fieBa 8i8a>/x€Bd 8eiKvvoifi(Ba 2 iarrjo-de TiBrjcrBe 8i8a>o-Be 8ciKiwr)aBe 3 loTWVTdl TiBaivTdi 8i8a>vrdt 8eiKVVOiVTdl Opt. ioTal/xiju TtBdfxrjv, TiBoifirjv 8l8oi/XT]P SeiKWOl/JLTJI/ 2 formo TiBelo, TiBoio 8i8o7o 8eiKvvoio 3 itrrarro TiBeiro, TlBdlTO 8i8oito 8eiKVVOlTO P. 1 laralfieda TiB(i[x(Bd, TlBolfXfBi 1 8i8oifjLeBa 8eiKUvoifxeBd 2 l(TTai(rde TiBelaBe, TiBolaBc 8i8ola-Be 8eiKvvoi TiBc 8i86a-Ba> 8cikvva'dV, 8eiKvvaB(oo-dV, ioTdaOav TtBeaBav 8i86(tBq)v 8eiKvvaB(jav Inf. wrracr&u TiBeaBdC 8i8o(rBdi 8eiKVvaBdi Par. 'KTrd/ievos TtBefievos 8l86fX€VOS 8(lKVVfl€VOS Ivrafievr) TlBffi.€VT) 8l8ofl€PT) 8eiKvvfitvr) laTa/Mevov TiBefievov 8l86(X€VOU 8eLKVt>fJ.€VOV d. Imperfect Passive and Middle. Ind. lordfiijv €TiBefirju c8i86fi7jv i8fiKVVfir]v 2 larraa-o, tarco (TtBeaOy CTlBoV e'Si'Socro, f8i8ov e8eiKW(To 3 lararo (TlBeTO e'81'Soro €8ciKWTO P. 1 iardficBa CTiBefieBa f8i86fieBa f8eiKvvfxcBa. 2 la-raarBe irlBeaBe c8l8ocrB€ i8eiKvvaBe 3 lO-TdPTO ctLBcvto e8l8ovTO i8eiKvvvro 315b ; foraaav 300 ; rideaat riBn (late, Pall. Ep. 79), 'iaraao Utw, £0(ecro)ov, 8(ovfAi gird, &\\v/ju destroy, Spj/vpu swear, v/ryvvfu fasten. See 50. 2 Aor. (see also above) 313 b, 314 c, d : 2(3r)v, foprjv, tynav, (forms par- tially given in 45 li), 28vv, Zdpav, 2 A. of fialvu go, afi&vvixi quench, yvyvtb- ckw gnosco, know, dvvw enter, sink, didpavKW rim, 50 ; iirpid/j.r)v (s. irpia-) as 2 A. of tivtoimi buy, 50 ; era. 297 d ; ordvruv, yvbvruv, 314 c ; ftfy/ca, GR. TAB. 3* 58 PURE VERBS. §45. INDEFINITE AND f. Fat A. OT^tTW #i7 Saxrco 8ei£a> . Mid. Sa yva 8voi 2 (TTfjS fifis 0?/? o\5y yvas 8vns 3 otj; fin *! S(0 yva> 8vrj P. 1 arcdfiev ' (3d>fl€V 6/iei/ yva>fi.€V 8vO)fJL€V 2 OT^Tf ^re 6r)T€ doirc yvarre 8vT)Te 3 o-Taxri' /3(So-i' eso-s fiwcri' yvatoS 8va>o-i l Opt. crTalrjv ftairjv Belrrv oW»;i> | darjv] 8vr)v Ep. 2 doTto yVG)TG> 8l>T(0 p. 2 orqre 3 aTT]TCOO 0CT4 86re yvarre 8ire •ai/, Qeroocav, SoTOXT av, 8vTa>o-av, oravTcov 6evrV Inf. arrival firjvai Belvai ( TJ3r}vai 8ovvai yvavai 8vvai Par. o-ras fids &k < Tfieis 8ovs yvovs 8vs e"0ep.ev, deivai, tSuKa, tSofiev, Sovvai, 306 b, c, 314 d ; Urjv 316 c ; 8p(drji)qs 120 li ; irpiufiai, irpiaio, 783 b. — 0. E. ZtXtjv, £ or ^Xwu) anticipate, irh-o- fxai fly, vivo, live, 50. § 45. j. Select Homeric Forms of ttrn\\Li, ti0t]|xi, tr\\i.i, 8i8a>p.i, &c. Active. Pres. Ind. s. 2 lets B. 880, 8i5o?s {tys, 8l8us, Bek.), 335 a, rU O-qffOa, 8l8oicrda (didwcrda Bek.), 297 b; 3 ridel, let B. 752, 8i8o?, 335 a ; P. 3 dtovai (diuffi Bek.) 335 a ; Sub. S. 3 iycri N. 234, § 328 b ; Imv. 'Lara. 335 a, SiSudi 335 d ; Inf. Up.ev A. 351, Itfievai N. 114, Tidrfpiemi, bidovvai, 333 c, 335 d : Impf. s. 1 lew (t> Bek.) i. 88, § 315 V; 3 UraaKe t. 574, § 332 g, Tldei (ri9 v Bek.) A. 441, § 284 a, 315 b ; P. 3 rldev a. 112, 'Lev M. 33 (v. 1. %vv-iov A. 273), ("didov, 330 b : Fut. Ind. s. 3 dv-eaei a. 265, § 310 d ; P. 1 diduvopev (s. 8180-) v. 358 ; Inf. 'qcrepLev T. 361, Tja-ep-euai it. 377, d-qcre- Hevat. M. 35, Swcre/x-emt 8. 7, § 333 d, 8i8uoei.v w. 314 : 1 Aor. arriaa 8. 582, §45. VERBS IN -MI. 59 COMPLETE TENSES. g. Perf. P. earafiai 310 d redeifiai 8e8op.ai dedeiyfxat Plup. P. eardpr)v ere Bel fir) v ede86p.r)v ededelyfirjv F.Pf.P.eoTJ7£o/iai319b 8c8ei£op.ai I. Aor. P. earaBrju ereBrjv 159 d e86Brjv e8ei\6r)v Fut. P. ara6rj(rofxai re^cro/xai 8oBr/aop.ai 8ei)(6r}aop.ai Verbals armor, arareos Beros, Bereos 8oros, boreos oVtKToy, Betureos Active. i. Second Aorist Middle. Ind. 2 3 p. 1 2 3 Sub. 2 3 p. 1 2 3 Opt. 2 3 p. 1 2 3 Imv. 3 p. 2 3 Inf. Par. ebpav ran e8pas e8pa e8pap.eu e8pare e'8pacrav opai 8pas 8pa dpwp.€V Spare dpairjv 8 pair) p dpatr] 8pair)p.ev, 8paip.ev 8pairjre, bpalre 8pairjaav, 8palep 8paBi 8pdro~au, dpdvrav e7rpiap.r)u bought eV/Jio) eirpiaro enpidfieBa eirpiaa-Qe eirpiavro 7rpi<0fxai npip npiijrai 7rpi(0p,eOa 7rplr)0~Be irpleovrai irpiaip.T)v npiaio irpLavro irpiaip.e6a TrpiaurOe ivplaivro irpiaao, 7rpia> irpidvBot irptaaBe 7rpido~6p.ai n 8p.eBa bdi/jieBa Br)o~Be bataBe Baivrai 8a>vrai Beip,rjv, Boip.i)v 8oip,T)V Belo, Boio, bolo Beiro &C. boiro BeipeBa bolp.eBa BelaBe boio-Be Beivro bolvro Bqv bod BeaBco 86o~B(* Bea-Be boaBe BeaBaxrav, boaBcoarav, BeaBcov buaBcov BeaBai 86trBai Be/xevos 86p.evos SQko. 8. 649, § 284 a, &jko P. 708, § 135 : Perf. Ind. p. 2 Uryre 33.^d ; Inf. eardfiev . 261, eard/ievai N. 56, § 333 c ; Part, ecrraoros T. 79, earedra N. 261, § 325 d : 2 Aor. Ind. s. 1 cryv A. 744, § 284a, 86vv, 330 b, taraaav M. 56, § 335 d, OUav B. 599, «W 8. 681, Uaav A. 162, § 284 a, Sub. (322 a, c, 323 c, 324 c, 328 b) s. 1 fdeiw, deiu, etu A. 567, yvibu- 2 arifas, delns or Qr^, yvwys ^. 487 ; 3 crryy, jSifa, j3e V IT. 94, 852, del-g or^y, 2y n. 590, dy or -rjy e. 471,yatv 0. 359, Siby, dipcri, Swycriv- p. 1 (xriw/xeu, areiofiev, 0'co/nev, deio/u-ev, Swofiev- 3 sim IG> earn 2 Ijjs 3 177 I 8 i sis sit ■f eas eat P. 1 itofxev 2 irp-e 3 iwcrt' S)fl€V ^re &oV S)fX€V fe &0V simus sitis sint icofiev 'lT)T€ lajoV eamus eatis eant D. 2 4777-01/ T/TOJ/ T^TOl/ ITjTOV Opt. IflTJI/ [tot/nt] &T)V eu/v essem 'lOlfJLL, toLTjV 2 letrjs 6iJis 3 Uirj elrj P. 1 UirjjKv, ieifi€V elrjfxrjv, elfiev 2 leiijre, Wire clrjre, fire 3 Uirjcrav, lelev e 1770-aj/, eUv D. 2 leiTJTGV, WlTOV €ILT)TOV, (ITOP eins €177/Xei/, (ir;re, f it? trav, 6177TOI/, esses ess'et are elrov 'lots tot totfxev LOLT€ 10 lev IOITOV ires iret 3 leiriTTjp, Uittjv elrjTqv, *Ltt\v ei7)r77i/, €?TT]V loirrjv Imv. tee es ladi es Wi [el ?]I 3 ferea ero) 60TO) [rj' ra>] esto ITO) ito P. 2 tere ere core este IT€ ite 3 Uraxrav, eroxrai', eoTcoo-ai', sunto Xrcoaav, eunto UvTCiV eVrcov earav, r. ovraxv lovroii/, "irtov D. 2 teror» eroi/ v 2 1 Aor. ^a (Ind. ^ only) 306 P ' * Perf. efwa, elicevai, 3 et/catt 310 b J). 2 Plup. etKeti/ 3 [rjs\ TJada rjv erat 77x6, 7^ ore 770-01/ erant ^roi/, t^otop rjrqV) rja"rr}v 776ii/, 77a Tbam rfeis, T)eio-6a ijeiiiev, rjixev 1 -9 77 eire, 77 re . jjeaau, fjarau IJCITOV, fjTOV ' rjeiTTjU, T\TT)V §45. *IHMI, EIMI, EIMI, KEIMAI. 61 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. n. Of lT)fJ.l. 0. i Of dpi, to be. q. ndpai, to lie. Present. 2 Aorist. '. Future. Present. Ind. 2 lepai etprjv ecropai M -V Kflpai leaai elcro ecrrj, eaei Kti&M 3 i€Tai €LTO [ecrerai] carat Kelrai p. 1 lepeOa etpeOa elade ecropeda Kcipeda 2 leade eaeade KdaOe 3 Uvrai euro eaovrai Kelvrai Sub. Iwpat copai Kccopai 2 ly Key 3 ifJTai jjTat Keqrai p. 1 IwpcQa cope da KetopeOa 2 ifjade lurii Kerjade 2 lOOVTlU hvrai Kecovrai Opt. idprjv, ioiprjv etprjp, otprjp iaoipqv Keoiprjv 2 ido, ioio, CIO, oio ecroio Keoio 3 UlTO l &c * €LTO, oho ecroiro Keoiro p. 1 idpeda dpe$a, oipcda eaoipeOa Kepipeda 2 IdcrOe elaOe, olo-Oe eaoiaOe Keoiade 3 idvro dvro, o'tVTO Za-oivro KCOLVTO Imv. ?€(ro, tov ol K.d(TO 3 leaOco ea-6a> Kda6a-, 314 a, «€-, contr. «cei-, 342. 1: fr]ju, cf. Tldrjfju- (leao-i) Uteri, Att. ldiL, Xls, 50 ; adi, tyr/ada, 297 b, d ; (^e/^at) KCi^tai, cf. rldefiai- Kew/jxu, /ce- oifxrjv, 315 c, 772 g. Hdt. has the uncontracted Keerai, ineero, Keecrdai, &c. t. Forms marked with the sign j may be enclitic. (3: I PURE VERBS. - --MI FORM. §45. Verbs in -/ u: u. (f)T]fxi fari, to say (s. ♦*> Pres. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf. Impf. S, P • 1 fywh W" 2 ^y, 077$- 3 (p-qcri^ . 1 (f)dfl€V\ 2 (f>ciTe\ 3 ao-ij' (j)G> (j>rjS (f)5>fX€P fare (frcbai' (fxilrjp (f>alr]S (j>alr), &c. (fraudi (j>d0l\ or 0a& 0arG> Part, r. in Att 0are 0as (fidrwa-ap, (f)dpTa>p €07?, e(f)T), Aor. ecprjo-a. Mid. and Pass., little used in Att. : Pres. Inf. (pda-Bai, Pt. and Aor tlbrjo-a ' Verb, larios. — See 6pda> 50. b. beboiKa or 8£8ia timeo, / am afraid (s. 8X-, 8ei-). 2 Perf. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf. 2 Plup. S. 1 8e8Xa Seoi'o) 8e8i€ir}P dedteVat! e8e8UiP 2 8e8ias 8e8ir]s 8€8ieirjs 8&$b Part. e'ofSi'ft? 3 8e8ie l deb ly, 8e8ielr) f Se8tro) deSW ! e8e8iei P. 1 oY6>ei/ &C. &C. e8e8ifxep 2 oV&re 8e8iT€ e'8e8iTe 3 Seoiao-i' 8e8iT(0(rap €'8e8i late, Aor. edeia-a. — See 6>i'8o> 50. §46. e. Preteritives 268, 317 s: ot8a, S^Souca, Jfo-rnKa, 320 b; (oid-tcu) 280 a, 161 b (having forms from both k- and 48-, or see 307 e) ; cf. Lat. sede-o, and see 141 ; (778-Tcu) f/iTTai^aTo, 147; icadQfjun., ica6oifir)u, 317 c ; riixevos 780 c; iKadrjao, Kadrjao, 282 b, 783 a, 771 c. — O. E. Tidi>r)Ka am dead, $'fir\Ka. stand, fit- iiova am eager, dvuya command, 320 e, f. §47. PRETERITIVES. FORMS OF THE STEM. 63 S. 1 2 3 p. 1 2 3 c. rjfiai and Ka6t]\i.ai sedeo, / sit (s. 1 -, «-)• Perfect Middle. Indicative. Subj. Opt. Imperative. TJfjLO.1 KaOrjiiai mdcofxai KaOolfjirju rjaai KaOrjcrai KClOrj KCldolo rjcro KaQr)(ro rjarai Kadrjrai fjpeBa Kadrjfieda rjade mOncrOe Kadfjrai KaOoiro i}(rda) KaOrjadco, Kadu>jxeda KaOoifxeda &C Ka6rja6e KaOoiade $vrai KClOoLVTO rjaOcoaav, rjaOcov Infin. rjaOai KaOrjadai Part, rjfxevos KadljfXeVOS Pluperfect Middle. S. 1 fjwv fKaBrifxrjv, Kadrjfirjv 2 r}ao enddrjao, KaOrjao 3 fjaro iKadrjTo, KadrjarOy Kadfjro Fut. Pf. Ka^o-o/xai late. — See Ifa 50 P. 1 rjfieda €Ka6r)fi.(da, KaOrjfjLeda 2 rjade eKadrjaOe, KaOr/ade 3 rjvro eKddrjvro, Kadrjvro Indicative. S. 1 eo-TTjica * €(TTTjKaS * &c. earafiev Harare earraai' 2 3 P. 1 2 3 d. eoT7)Ka sto, / stand (45 f). First and Second Perfect. Subjunctive. Opt. Imv. earalrjv e(TTr)K(0 eora> earrjKTjs * £(TTr)KT), * earairjs earairj, &c Infin. €(TTT]Kevai\ 1. i (Travail Part. earrjKwsl Harare ear an I 26 i eordrooaav, eardvrcov earaBi ecrrdrat 1 Pluperfect. S. 1 earfjKeiv, eio-rqueiv P. earrjiceifiev 2 earrjKeis, elarrjiceis earrjiceire 3 earrjKei, elorrjKei ea-rrjKeaav, &G. 2 Pluperfect. S. * P. earauev * earare earaaav 47. ix. Relation of the Tenses and Forms of the Stem. 3. Domain of the Old Stem : Second Aorist System : Second Compound System : Domain of the Middle Stem : Perfect Passive System : First Compound System : Second Perfect System : First Perfect System : First Aorist System : Future System : Domain of the New Stem : Present System : x&e- tXatiov ilvyrjv 8utc- Xt,8- \e\i\a-fjiai e\4\x8r}v 8t]K- 949nyfuu Ac/VTl WCC e\r\ 3 t- v a 3 s x ~r 3« 3 5 J"«i J 8 3 ■& 3* 8 ,£. • S £ . Shi H i7*nii**tiii!'* r* 3. 3 § 3 3-o" a * i * 4 S * E ?■ § -I - £* * S S 3- a* a ** J I f I * I *2 »>* I f s£ I R-t A" E. 328 b 2 Xt*77 d. 326 a Xvi/xev e. D. 333 d Xve'/j.epai E. 333 d Pres. Part. F. XioKTa M. 131 d Xtfwa LAC. 334 Imperfect. S. 1 Xvov o. 284 a Xiueanov IT. 332 P. 3 iXtioaap al. 330 a D. 2 Auefr^ a. 299 d 3 [f\Xterov E. 299 d iXvtrdv d. 328 a Fut. Ind. \vo~w, -eh, -ei, &c. D. 325 b 1 Aor. Ind. S. 1 Xv D. 326 a) PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. Pres. Ind. S. 2 Xtfeeu I. 323 a Xi/eo-cu HEL. 331 c P. 1 Xvbixecda P. 299 a Pres. Sub. S. 2 XiStjcu I. 331 a Xtfecu E. 326 d 3 Xterai E. 326 d P. 1 Xv6fie it. 332 2 |7]Xi5o-ao 1. 322 b eXtad D. 322 e Aor. M. Opt. P. 3 XvcaldTo I. 329 a Perf. Ind. S. 2 XiXvat e. 331 b P. 3 XeXi/arcu 1. 329 a Perf. Opt. P. 3 XeXvrro E. 317 C Pluperfect. P. 3 [i]XeXta.To I. 329 a Aor. P. Ind. P. 3 eXvdev p. 330 b Aor. P. Sub. S. 1 Xvdtu) I., -eiu) E. 323 a, c [323 c 2 Xvdelris or -7777s e. 3 Xu0et7jor-i777E.323c P. 1 Xvetw/jLev 1.' 323 a 2 Xvdelere E. 323 C 3 Xvdtwo-i. 1. 323 a Aor. P. Inf. X607}v m., -rjtiev d. 333 b Xvdi}iiev, m. (sometimes as pass.), 9j^a r., 2 a. ij-ya- yov m. 28 4 g ; •fjxa, later dy/joxa 31 2 d, 7jy,uai,ijx^v v ^ Cog. if/ to/mat, [dylviw. ] [d8e- be sated; see do.] d8« sing; do-opai, -aw r., rjaa- 770YACU, rjo-07]v : ct. fr. po. & 1. deC8w, aelaa} m., rjeicra. deipco & aeprdfa raise ; see atpoj. de'£« increase ; see atf£w. [drjfu & dco (d-, de- v) breathe, blow, P. d-q/xai (314 b ; and t\ in some other forms for the regular c) ; ao. &e take, M. choose ; alp{\, -oirju, -Qvat, -ovs) ; IdXcoica & -rjXama. atpa> (h, dep-, sync, dp-) raise, M. win; 'dpwTO., r)pa to. (dpw, 'dpatpt, dpov, &c), 2 a. r)p6pifjv ('apupat, &c.) po. ; ^pxa, -pat, -Bnvi. Po. & I. dUtpco w. [atppw M. 171 a] ; 'dpw (ct. fr. depG>) to. , f/etpa m. ; r)eppat [pip. dwpro 312 d], rjepd-qv. Cog. -dpvvpat, [atvv- pat n 9 , rjepedopat, deprdfa.] aUrBdvopai (n 4 , a'tad-), atodopatr., perceive; al, ao. a. [to. r. ; ytxdrjv.] 'dle> audio, hear, po. or 1. ; ipf/dow 279 f, rjtovl., [i-ir-froa I.] [dx- or d\- acuo, sharpen, pf. jj£. anaxp-fr os sharpened, 148 b, £. 12.] [dKax^w (z, dx-, d/cax- r 2 ) afflict, M. sorrow ; a.Ka.\i\cria 311 c, ao. r., usu. 2 a. t)ko.x ov m - 284 f.; d/cdx^ai pret. (3 p. aKrixtdarai, pip. d/cax^aro or -elaro M. 179, § 329 a, pt. aKax-q- pevos ft. 550, or aKvx^P^os, E. 364). Cog. dxopat, dxwpat, be grieved; Pt. dx^wv, dxe»W, sorrowing.] dxovu (h, &ko-) hear ; aKouVopcu, -.] dAdopaiw;a?te?er,po. + [dX6a?322c]; [ c dXr)a or -ei<£a, dX?7- Xtppat or -eip.pt.ai Th. 4. 68, r)XelL, 2 a. iiXl r. dXa-w r. (k 6 , dXe/c-, dX*-c 8 ),&dX^w ?, ward offyM. defend one's self, requite; [dX€|^w,dXe€iv(x).] dXe'co grind; dX(&rw)ai r. 305b, ^Xeaa • dX^XcKapo. r., -eapai or-epai, i)Xio-dT)v 1. Cog. dXr)6u: r. , [dX77rpe^w. ] [dXOopai become healed, E. & I.; c aX0r|(ropai, ao. 1. ; c ijXd^o-d-qv. Cog. dXdaivo) & -icr/cw or -r)f-pt- dXiTrjpevos guilty.] dXXdo- to., ao. ; c ^XXaxa, -ay pat, -dx&yv c f., usu. in Att. prose 2 a. r}XXdyrii> f. dXXopai (1, dX-) salio 141, leap ; dXovpcu, r]Xdp-T]v, comm. (exc. in Ind.) 2 a. rjX6pr)i> [2 s. d\ (0) be excited, po. + . [Cog. dXdocra}, f. -^co, dXvoBa'tvu, aXvicrtto (dXaXiJKTrjpai pret., 284a), dXv/crd^w, Hdt. 9. 70.] dXcpdvw (n 4 , dXi dispute ; see (Salvia. dvcu'vopai (h, drac-) refuse; ao. jprrprdfirpf. av-SXCo-Kto & dv-dXoto (dXo-, k 7 ) expend; dvdXwcra), to. 1., dvrfkwaa ; dvTJXcoKa, -yuat, -drjv L In the aug., a is often retained, esp. in the older Att. : dvdXcacra, dvdX'aica, Th. 7. 83, 2. 64 ; & in comp. w. /card, the aug. is rarely on the prep, dvd : Karvvd- \ (n 4 , Fa5-, ad- f) please, po. & I. ; ipf. ijvdavov, edvdavov, & irjvda- vov, 279 b, e ; dS^crw, 2 a. ^aSoi/ Hdt. 1. 151, etiabov 142, tt. 28 ; ctSnKa r., 2 p. ed5a E. Cog. tj8o) q. v. [dv£0- grow, akin to di^w • 2 pf. c ijvoBa 31 2 b : dv-T)voBev rises, p. 270 ; eir-ev-rjvode grows upon, /3. 219.] dvotya> & -otyvupa o/?e/i ; see ofyw. dvv(«) & also Att. dvvTO) t (ace. to some, Att. d-), accomplish, M. ; dvvcroi m. , ao. ; •Fjvvko, -a/mai, -adnv f. [Nude pr. &WTO.1 1. ; ipf. ijvvro e. 243,"dfu / u.es &"di>vTO Theoc.] Cog. dvia to., po. dvu-yo) command, po. & I. ; dva>£w, ao. ; 2 pf. dvto-ya pret. & unaugm. [nude 1 p. &v(ayp.ev 320, Horn. Ap. 528], imv. &v£o-K<» (k 2 , dTra-) deceive; diraT|-, 147) fasten, kindle, M. touch; &|/«TO.,ao. ; ^p.p.ai,^\dlgku q. v.] dpdopcu pray, cwrse ; dpucropai ao.; c ^pd}i.ai, c -dr)v 1. [Pr. m/. a. dpvfievai 333 e, x- 322. Cog. ? pf. ^. dpri/xivos oppressed, 2. 435.] [dpapCo-Kw (k 2 r 2 , dp-) fit; %p & Att. appoTTco (j 1 , i 2 , dppLod-) adjust, M. ; dpp.d, m.l., ao. ; rjppoKa, -apai, -adrjv f. See dpaplcrKO). dpvupai win ; see atpta. dpdeo aro, plough ; a.p6 j ia seize ; dpir dtrco and, oft- ener dpirdcropau [dpird^w], ao. ; ijp- iraKa, -c^at (-yp.ail.), -adrpii. [-x0W> Hdt. 2. 90 + ], 2a. i]pwdyr,vL 1. [Nude 2 a. jttf. m. (d/37ra-) dpirdpievos 1.] dprva), -vvo), -c'ofxai, see dpapiaKO). apvoi & dpvTo) t, araw water, M. ; dpvcrop.ai 1., ^pucra m. ; -qpidnv or -vadnv 307 e. — &pX w ^^ see 4l. ao-da> & d(pdo-cra) handle; see&irTo>. dxcwv, dxevtov, dix vv H tat ' ftX ^ - 1 Je grieved ; see aKaxifa. HxBopaibe vexed; dx9&ro|iai 311 d ; ^X^H-a-t 1., ijxOtvQwf- [&(» satiate; "axr, ao. e/3?? w., ao. r/p.- , &c, later, /3acr/cco.j [Pcofiai, fido/Mi, live; see /3i6w.] ptpd^w, [PiPcUtf, -t]|Ai, -do-6a),] see P0-.] Pidco fo've, Jf. ; & Pi<6J7»'316b) ; Pepfaica, -p.cu, -fl^ f. 1. [Cog. pto/xai (peio/iai. 134 a) or pioiuu, also as fut. 305 f, O. 194, X. 431, Horn. Ap. 528.] See #tu. pXd-irTO) (t, BKap-) hurt; pXd\|/« m., ao. a., m. 1.; pipXaa, -a.p-p.ai, 3 f. -dxpofxai, kp\dcpd7)v, & 2 a. e/3Xd- /V f. [Cog. pXdpw r., T. 82.] pXaordvio & r. pXa (n 4 , v, pXacr-) sprout, bud; fi\a boo, shout, M.; pot|l.: [e. & I. c pLbaop.ai, e/3a;cra m., ptpu/Mi, ipib' Pp€^o> 1., ao.; PePpeyp.cn, e(3pe'xdv v > l ess Att. ippdx-rjv, f. 1. [Ppoy- swallow ; e"ppo^a ; c p«'Ppoxa, c epp6x0r]v 1., G ePpbxW-~\ PpvydojAcu (u, Ppvx-) roar, 355 u ; PP' u X 1 1 " P' at very 1., ao. ; 2 pf. Pe- ppv\a pret., eppvxrfirp. Pvvc'o) n 10 , r. ptu), stop up, M. ; c p*i- o-vr\(r ao. ; "y€7»va pret. (s2*&. yey&via, imv. yi- ywve 318). ■yeXdto laugh; 7eXd 1., ao. a. ; c Y^Xao-ftai 1., iyeXda-dTju, f.l. [Cog. 7eXotdw.] [^€v- = (&, according to some, iEol. for) IX- (see aipioj), in 2 a. m. 3 s. -yc'vTO took, S. 476. See also 7^0- p.ai.] •yeuco cause to taste, M. gusto, taste; y&itroi m., ao. ; yty evfiai, eyei- n 1 b 1 ), or I. & later yho/xai, become; "ytvrj- s 320 d, Soph. Aj. 472, ^■yevrjuai, lyerifiip i. d. orl., f. r. [Pf. inf. yeydicetp d. 326 b.] Cog. [ c 7e7, -icrw, -to), iyvwpuca, make known; dp.co sculpo, carve; "y\v\|/ei> 1., ao. a., m. 1. ; y£y\vp.p.au & £y\vp.p.ai 280c, ey\va). ■yoctw (u, 70-) bewail, M., po. + (in Att. only pr. & ipf. m., & pr. p.); ■yoTJo-ouai, -au) 1., ao. 1., 2 a. Zyoov Z. 500 ; eyo^Byv 1. -ypdcjxo scribo, grave, write, M. ; ■ypdtj/ft) »t., ao. ; "ye-ypcKpa (yeypd(f>7)Ka 1. + ?), y^ypap.p.at {Zypap-p-at. 1., 280 c), 3 f . yeypd\J/ofiai, c iypd(pdyv 1., 2 a. eypdcpwv f. 8a-, teac/i, Zearyi ; see SiSda-KO). Saivvai (n 9 , 8cut-) feast, entertain, po. +, J/, fopfc Satj^ro, -tfaro, 316 c]; oaio-w, m. 1., ao. ; eSaladyv. Scuoaai (h, 8a-) divido, divide, ch. po. (pr. & f. ), P.; Sda-ouai ao. ; 8e'8ao-uai, A. 125 [SiSatpac, a. 23], eddadyv 1. Cog. SoLTeofwi po. I. [ao. inf. Sartaadat 306, Hes. Op. 765], Saivvp.i q. v., 8aifa, -ti-w, rend, po. 8aiw (h, 5aF-, 8a-) kindle, po. +, M. ; [2 a. edaop-yv, T. 316 ; 2 pf. ScSrja Wasc, pret., T. 18,] StSavpai, Sim. Am. 30. SaKVto (n 1 , 5a*c-, Stjk- g) fo'fe, 47 ; 8^£ouai, -^u ]., ao. r., 2 a. c8aKov ; SeS-qxa 1., SeSvyp-ai, idr/xOyvf., 2 a. eddicyv 1. Cog. baicvdfa po. 8aad£co (z, 5a^,-) domo, *«»?£, «w&- dwe, po. + , if. ; 8audo-« [9?/,. , Sa^tw 305 b, A. 61], ao. ; SeSdaaKa 1., -apuai 1. [8e8p,np, Sdp-vypu (M. 8dp.vap.at.). c 8ap9dv« (n 4 , Sapd-) sleep, usu. cp. w. /card • 2 a. c eSapdov, po. e8padov c 6 , T. 143 ; c 868dp9 n Ka 311, 2 a. c #171/, c e8pddyv r. or 1. SaTc'oaai divide, po. ; see Saiopxii. [diaro appeared ; see 5oa-.] [8et8a)+ & 8tw (5i-, 5et5- o h)/car, 8'iop.ai + frighten ; Seicroaai, + !, -ao ].,] e8ei s?^' •' see dpiardu}. [h£\i.. 8e\ouai receive ; Se'^oaai ao. ; 8^- Se^uai, 3 f. 5e8e%op.ai, ed^V^ t !• [Pr. 3 p. 8ix aTaL f° r 5^x[ J" rat 158, M. 147, 2 a. eSeyfxyv, 326 e. Cog. 84xwfuu, StKopai 167, Hdt. 9. 91 ;] see Se'iKvvpj.. 8€ • d€r)aei, i8tr},&c., manifest; see 42. 8tj« shall find ; see 5i5dcrK«. SiaiTaco regulate, M. ; 8iaiTTJ, diriTrjaa & idiyTTjcra, SeSiTJTrjKa, &c, 282 c_. 8idir/z., no. [eStSaV/ojo-a 311, Horn. Cer. 144]; 8e8£8axa, -yp-cu, eSiS&xOyv, f. 1. [Fr. 5a- disco, Zear;?,, teach, ba-qaop-at. 311, 2 a. e'5ao»' & 5e"- 8aov 284 e ; 8eSd V Ka, 9. 134, 2 pf. 5e ; - 5aa, p. 519, deddrjpai Horn. Merc. 483, 2 a. i8dr]v + . Cog. 8e5doficu 326 c, 7T.316 ; 577W as fut., shall find, N.260.J SiStjui bind; see 5e'o> &r/ia\ C 8i8pdo-K(o (r 1 k, 5pa-) run; c 8pd- o-opiai, ao. a. 1., 2 a. c e8pdv 45 h ; c 8€'8pdKa. Cog. Spdwerevio, bpaCKa- fa ' edpanov, see rpixu. See 5/>dw. 8k8cop.i (r 1 , 5o-j do, #ire, 8w, 8l8coKa, &c. ; see 45. [Si^p-ai seek, e. & I., 314 b ; Sijtf- o-ouai ao. Cog. 5/fw M., po.] 8£np.i chase, M. flee, po. ; see 5ft 5w. 8ioiK€co manage, -i\, SiwicnKa, -(Uat & r. 8e8iu)KT)p.ai, 282 b. 8iv|/da> ZAirsZ, -tjo-w, &c. (8i\f/(det)fn 120 g). 8£a> /car, flee ; see 5ei5a>. SuGkci) pursue, M. ; 8i«£a> and oft- ener SuG^opai, ao. a., 2 a. iSiii)Kadov 353 a; StBiwxa, -ypui 1., tSidbxQyv, f. 1. See 5ei'5u>. 1 8oa-, 8«a- 114 b, appear ; ipf. nude Searo f. 242 ; ao. m. dodaaaro JEJ. 23, «<6. 5odcr(reTai 326 d, *. 339. Cog. Sotd^a? or 5odfw, aVwfa, imagine, Ap. Rh.] 8oK€a> (v, 5o/c-) seem, think; 8 (e 1 , ySovire-y) sound heavi- ly, ch. po. ; SovTci\ 279 a, Cyr. 3. 1. 30, less Att. I8vvda07jv, vii. 6. 20. 8vw [i> Hon!.] cause to enter, enter (cf. in-duo), 8vv» n 1 , & less Att. 8u- ojiai, enter (the causative sense be- longs to the fut. & 1 ao. act, but not to the 2 ao., & very rarely to the pf. act., v. 8. 23); §v ca< ; see eV0tw. €^op.at seai OTie's seZ/*, sit ; see tfa>. leiXw p & Qika, wish; --f\tro> 311b, 7)d£\r]da E. I.] 312 d, am wont, [pr. pt. idwv I. 540.] aSopxii seem, eldov saw ; see opdu. €Ikci£ (z 2 , Fuc-, FetK- h, euc-) liken; cIkcLo-o), c m., ei'/cacra & rjicacra 278 d ; eiKCiKa 1., -(T/icu & y/cacr/xai, -^p f. Intrans., 2 pf. pret. eoiica 312b, some- times et/ca or y/ca [ol/ca r.], sec»i (nude 1 p. po. foiy/uv 148, Soph. Aj. 1239, [3 d. tiKTovS. 27, pip. kiaT-qv A. 104,] irreg. 3 p. et%dcn po. + , Ar. Av. 96, see Zadcri under bpdu), pip. ew.veti'279d, f. r. c^a> Ar. Nub. 1001, ipf. eke 2. 520 ? [Cog. taw, eto-Ku q. v.] cI'kw (FetK-) yield; rffja> [ c m.], ao., 2 a. eUadov 353 a. a. Dialectic Forms of Prea. Ind. 3 $ uffl E . r , 1 i/M/xi M. ewuri D. Pres. Opt. S. 2 etrjcrdaV., eois 3 eot E. I. [e. tt'ei'17, eftj ? E. Pres. Imv. S. 2 ecro, tcr 344. elXov took ; see aipe'co. €411 (eV-) fo, & ct|Jii (Z-, Lat. i-re) #0. The Pres. of elpu has comm. in the ind. (in Att. prose regularly), & sometimes in the other modes, the sense of the Fut. : elfit, [I am going] I shall go. For the common forms of these verbs, see 45 1, m, o, r. Their chief dialectic forms appear below, those preceded by t belonging to et/u go, and the others to elpd be : elfd to be, AND elpu to S. 2 eljE.l.,eW£p. tely, eta da E. 3 evrl D. P.l eifiivV.l. eip.hT>.,efx4w. 3 €dTl,"- ftcriF. [ovtl D. Pres. Sub. S. 1 ewE. I., efwE. Tefw P. 2 itrjcrda E. 3 rj(n,ericri,€TjE. iir).evrl santi sunti esti c. In d\d to be, the (315) : toffip B. 125, iovn Archim., ew 1. 18, eWi Hdt. 2. 39, eois I. 284, Jj^oi Hdt. 7. 6, eW B. 27, t'owa T. 159, eji M. 10, ijrp A. 808, eauov 332, H. 153, tWe Hdt. 1. 196, eWo/xcu 171, A. 267 (eVercu 45 r, A. 211), iaodfiaL 305 d, Th. 5. 77 ; (i) shortened or unaugmented : e/xev r., Call. Fr. 294, ea 329 d, t*oi> A. 762, iaav A. 267 ; (j) middle forms ; eao or eWo A. 302, Sap. 1. 28, -rjfirjv r. or 1., Cyr. 6. 1. 9 v. I. (ij/ieda Mat. 23. 30), eiaro 329 a, v. 106 t;. Z. ; (k) infinitives (333): e>e;/ A. 299, t>/*erat Sap. 2. 2, ^/io» or eZ^ej/ (v. I. 9)/xes or el^es ?) Th. 5. 77, Theoc. 14. 6, ctytcrat or tfixevai Ar. Ach. 775 ? ; (1) various forms ; tfi/xi 171 a, Sap. 2. 15, els (or eft Bek.) II. 515, Hdt. 7. 9, ely.h E. 873, et'^s, iD^es, V«, 328 a, Theoc. 15. 73, 9, 14. 29, 3 s. evri 169 c, Theoc. 1. 17, 3 p. brrl 328 a, Th. 5. 77, ebvTU 328 d r , 2 s. ^5 1., 297 b, 3 s. (far) fa Theoc. 2. 90, eoerai 45 r. m. In cI|xl to go, the root ' 1-, in the sing, of the Pres. and commonly in the Impf. throughout, was lengthened to et- (314), which augmented be- came g- (278 d): el/xi, eh, elai • (77V, cf. 273 r c, e) 97a (common in the Old and Mid. Att., PL Apol. 22 a, and followed in the Ep. by fa M. 371), rj[j.ev, fae, faav. The Impf., having thus a form resembling that of the old Plup. (291 c), fell into the analogy of this tense in its subsequent development, and has been often so named : -fjeiv, fats, &c. The shorter forms of the plur. and dual were, however, more common, except perhaps faav, which some deny to the Att, while others regard it as the true Att. form. The dialectic forms of et[u to go, are (n) regular nude forms : elsHes. Op. 206 (Att. el, as if in imitation of elfxi to be; elada 297, K. 450), {td, c ep^co, ep£cc, epxOnv. The single verb Yepyu (or eFepyu p) in Horn., seems to have become elpyu k eipyw in the Att., with a distinc- tion of sense, which, however, was not always observed. clpouai, elpcDTaco, ash; see ipwrdw.] ctpvco draw; see eptiu.\ ci'po), elpew, say ; see 4>np.L'] ctpw (f 3 h, o-ep-) sero, join, knit [ipf. orao. rjeipeK. 499] ; c elpa[ c i'pcra 152 d, Hipp.] ; c €TpKa, -itcu [e. eepp.at, 9a am umnl, pret. ; see edifa. k.KK\r\a-ioXicu 1., [pip. 3 p. iXvXddaro or -edaro 329 a, ??. 86,] -fjXddrjv, -adrju c f. 1. [Cog. iXao-rpiu E. I. +.] [fe'XSop.ai (FeX5-) & eeXdopai, desire.] k\4y\a examine, confute; cXe-y^w ao. ; £XrjXeyp.ai 41, c ifXeyp,air.,i)Xey- X0r)v f. ^Xko> & 1. IXkv'w (w, reX/c-, cf. vel- lico) pull, draw, M. ; ?X|w, less Att. cXkvo-o), m. 1., e'iXKV(ra to. , ef X$a to. 1. ; etXicuKa, -0-p.at., -ad-qv f., elXx^W f. 1. [Cog. eXuiu), -rjircx) • eXKvardfa.] 4XXt]v££o> spea& Greek, -Lena, &c. ; eXX7]vi grilfc /lope, J/. & 2 pf. pret. goXira e. 379, hope, 2 pip. ^u>X- *e» 279 d, 0. 96.] 4Xv9- come ; see tyxofiai. 4p.e'a> vomo, vomit; 4u(eVw)ci to., -rfpLecra [-qpL-qca 1] ', 4p.r|p.€Ka, -oyxcu 1., e/xe6V f. 1. 4p.iroXda> traffic; -Vj, &c; aug. •)7,u.7r- or eveir-, 282 c. evaCpw (h, erap-) &t7Z, po., 3L; [iuTjpa 1., to. E. 59,] 2 a. ijvapov, Eur. And. 1182. Cog., 4vap£'£« kill, dispoil, po., 349 a ; [4vapt£ja>, ?y?. 1.,] rjvdpL^a, TO. 1., [-iCa, xVinic. 100]; c r]vdpujpxxi, c -aByjv. eve'irw & IvveTro), & 1. 4vt (e^67r-, ej'iTr- b 2 , evLo-ir- o), /c^, s^ca/j (cf. in- quam), po., a. 1 ; [IvtxJ/w k evicrir-qo-c* 311, e. 98, ft/i^a 1.,] 2 a. evurirov [imv. hio-iresv, 313 b, 7. 101.] Cog. [e«- 7ttw + , & iviaau) i 3 , chide, 2 n..evev1irov, rjviiraTrov, 284 e ;] etTroi/, see ^^.ut. [° 4v-t]vo0a f/ro?w or ^'c o?i ; see dveO-. ] c ^vvi>p.t (n 7 , re-, e-), vestio, dothc f [M.\ f. ^ (gcro-w 171, 7T. 79) c to., ao. (^craa 5. 253, e^aaaro K. 23) ; pf. elp.a.L + t. 72, & ecr/iat, w. 250 :] comm. dp.L€cra> e. 167, Att. c dp.idfa, -do~oj ' ea6e- in pf. rjadrjfiat. IvoxXea) annoy, -ij, &c. ; aug. •^I'wx-, v. I. rjvox- or ej/w^-j 282 b. [eoXe'co press, trouble; see eiX-.] 4opTd£o> keep a feast, -d, &c. ; aug. eojp- 279 d : [oprctfw I.] 4ir-av-op9dc«) »e/ upright, - r. (v, k 2 , avp-) enjoy, M. ; 4iravp , q, --yvvpa, fe'pvco, see eipyw, e'lpyo). Hp8« & ^p8« (f, Fepy- k Fep5-, cf. 168, ipy-) WORK, do, po. k I. (Zpdw Hdt. ), J/. ; 2p£a>, ?p£a [2p£a ?] ; [2 pf. i!op-ya 312 b, pip. edpyeiv 279 d, 5. 693, 46pyea 284b, 291 c, Hdt. 1. 127.] Cog. tpyafrfMai, ptfa, q. v. epetSw prop, ch. po., M.; epciorcol., c m., ao. ; c ^p€Uca & 1. c epr)p€iKa, iprj- peicrfiai k ■fjpeiap.ai [3 p. ip-qpibarai, -a.ro, 329 a, 3 f. ipepdao/xai. ? Hipp.,] IpeiKw (h, fyiK-) re?u?, break, C M.; 1jpei£a, m. I., 2 a. ffpiKov po. ; eprjpi.- yp.ai, ypeLxOw I. Cog. pr/yvvpu. q. v., [cp e - 83 -1 €p€i7rco (h, ^pt7r-) ^ArMy cfojni, r. in Att. prose ; ep€u|/a>, ao. a. c m., 2 a. ijpivov fell, E. 47, m. 1. ; [2 pf. c 4pij- pura /iave fallen, S. 55,] iprjpipipuxt k 1. ijp€LpLp.ai, i)pdi 2 , row;, po. orl. ; [ao.^pecra.] IpcvOoo & cpv0aiva> (h, n 6 , fyt>0-, cf. rubeo & Germ, rblhen) make red, redden, po. orl., M.; [IpcvVw ? 2. 329 17. 1., ao. lb., epid-qva 1., ao. ^j. op2. c epevddrjv, Hipp. Cog. epvdpabw, epvdpidw, -dcru. iplto> (j, ^oi5-) rixor, contend, [M. + ] ; cpLcra) 1., ao. a. m.; ^puca 1., [eprjpi- po. +, c -tiau, dpirvaa. 2ppa> go away, cf. erro, ruo ; eppt]- o-ft> 311, ao. ; c 4jppnKa. [Cog. ? ao. diro-epaa swept away, Z. 348.] Ipvyydvw (n 5 , fyiT-) ructo, erugo, belch, ERUCT, [M. k lp€i5-yop.cu I. & E. + ; £p€v£op.ai i.,] ao. 1., 2 a. -fjpvyov. tpOKco hold back, ch. po. & i., [M.; cpv£o>,] ao. , [2 a. iipvuaKov 284 e. Cog. ipvKdvw k epvuavdo), a. 199, /c. 429.] €pvw & elpvo) (Fe/yu-) rfrattf, E. & I., M. r/raw to one's self, 'protect; ipvo-oi 1. (epvft) 305 f, X. 67) & c dpvTtta> (o' 2 , c/9-) inquire, ask ; tpa>- tt^o-o) & €pi'orop.ai 311, r)p&TT], & po. + foBa k '&», fi. 415, Eur. Cyc. 245 (e?5-, ead- a 1 147, eadt- w, 0a7- x) edo, eat ; f. ^8op.ai (1. m. , daridaa 279 c, m. 1. ; €i, comm. KaO-cvSto, sleep; ipf. 7?65oj/, eSSoi', enddevSov, 278 d, 282 b; €v8-r| 311, c ao. ; c ei»8T]Ka 1. cti€p7£Ttft> benefit, -^, &c. ; aug. euep- & cjJi7p- 283. 2. eipCo-Kw (k 2 , evp-) find, M.\ efcptj- 327 b) ; eu- pi]Ka, -Tj/xai, -^^^ f. 310 d. §50. €xB(0 VERBS. ] Vt}(TK(0 77 ixQa, exGaCpw, & l\QpaCv ^X- f 3 , ^X- <*> ^£ w > and AoM to rxctro 312 d, 329 a], i*X&7p I. or 1., f. 1. Cp. ajiir-txu or afiir-iax^ 159 d (ipf. to. fyjtreixbfW 282 b, PI. Phredo 87b); di'-^x w (2 a. to. aveaxopW, oftener 7iv€(txom v 282 b, po. TiwxbfJt'W 136, ft. 518). Cog. c lax^ofiai n 10 or c / /(TXaj/dw, P. 747, 572 ;] ox^ w foar. &|/a>, less Att. €\j/4u), boil, cook; tyi\ to., ao. a. ; ££r|Ka. The Att. preferred fda> in the pr. & ipf., but elsewhere /3i<5w q. v. Cog. po. or i., £u>w, Soph. El. 157, or r. fow. £€VYVtipi (n 7 , ^7-, fciry- h, cf. jug- um, jung-o) join, yoke, M.; t,iv£ 9».l.,ao.; IJoMcaL, -, see dXdo/wu.] ^p.. 491,] 2a. edevov. # 0fi'X(i), loisA, will ; see idt\ warm, ch. po., ^<4. r. & 1., J/. 0epo;j.cu • [0€po-opat 152 d, t. 507 ; 2 a. ^?. ^p W p. 23.] Cog. [dtyfjua,] Oeppxtivw. Qi & c - 0T]pdco /««i?!, -d, 2 a. ediyov, m. 1. ; 3 f. T€0L%op.ai ?, idixdrjv 1. 0Xi!3cog, press; 0X£\J/a 1., -ip.p.ai, edXlcpdr^v, later 2 a. 6rm/£ ; Bpaikra) ao. ; Ttdpav- crfxai [reOpavfxai ?), eOpaucrdrjv, f. 1. 6piiTrTG> (t, 6pv 1., m., c ao. a.; riOpvp.- pua.i, edp6 (v) sacrifice, M. ; 0C m., ao. ; W0vKa, -v/acii, irvdrjv, f. 1., 159; 44. I. IdXXto (1, taX-) se?io?, po. (or idXXw d 2 ) ; c laXw, [ c !r]\a. ] Cog. aXXo/*aiq. v. [id\(o shout, + ; pf. c L'ax a P^et. B. 316.] Po. cog. tax^w, laicxtv. t8eiv, I8e' ao. ; I'SpwKctl., -p.ai 1. Cog., Tiro, Ar. Pax 85, [L i. Wptiw.] I8pfju> (i7 e. ) sm£, set up, 31. ; ISptJcrto m., ao.; I'Spvxa, -vpiai, -ijdrjv k -\jv6tjv n 1 , T. 78, F. 1. Cog. fgfc q. v. i'cpcu or t'epai hasten ; see 45 p. l'fr> (j, aed-, -f 3 , t§-b 2 , cf. sedeo, sido) seat, set, sit, ch. po. ordial., 31. l'£opai & c^opcu sit ; c i£i]o-g> 1., ao. 1., 311 a ; f. m. eVopai 151 (e, -wo 305 a, ii. 1. 4, m. 1., f. m. Ka0i£i}o-opai & KG.0eSovuai 305 a [/cafleSTjtr o/xcu 1.), ao. eK&dcaa k Kadiaa 282 b, m., iKadify- era 1., [icadeio-a m. + ;] K€KcL0iKa 1., Ka0T|[A(u 46 c (comic or 1. imv. k&6ov Ja. 2. 3), 3 f. Kad-f)ffop.aL, iKadecrdrjvl., f. ? Cog. l£dvw, idpvio q. v. I'tjui (e-, '"e- r 8 ) smd [eh. in comp. & many forms only so found), if. hasten, desire ; pr. a. ind. 2 s. dc&-eis Rev. 2. 20, 3 p. -. £iV-£e, ?'??/. avv-ielv, Theog. 1240, 565 ;] ipf. 1 s. Heiv or c i> 315 b, 3 s. #-te 282 b, Mk. 1. 34, 3 p. dcp-Leaav iv. 5. 30, 7jrcu D. ? Lk. 5. 23, dv-ioovTai or -eovrai Hdt. 2. 165 v. £., ^. pLe-p.eT-ip.ivos 282 b, 167 a, Hdt. 6. 1], c €i'^, Eur. Ph. 1376, °f. Ven. 7. 11. See also 45 k, n, r, j, 315. Some forms are made as from shorter themes, t'w, fw. iKveo(xai. (n 10 , i/c-), po. 'iKdvco n 6 , [w., & 'iku),] come, in prose usu. d0- inveop.a.1 • i'|op.ai [t^a) E., Ar. Ach. 742], ao. a. 1. [tfyv 327 a], 2 a. m. lKop.t]v ; tYp.au Cog. ^/cw 114 d, ixe- re^a; supplicate'. iXd.a-KOfj.ai (k, ''fXa-) propitiate [e. i\dop.aik tXapat] ; IXdcropai ao. ; iXd- crc?^, f. 1. Cog. i\€op.at po., iXeoopai, [& as fr. l'X77/xt 6c propitious, pr. mv. i'\ac?i 297 d, tX?jc?t 335 d r , pret. sub. k opt. IXtjkw, Vk-qKOipn, (p. 365.] OX« roZZ, [^7r-t\X^w,] see el\-. [ipdcrcrtoi' 2 , lash; ao. tp.aaa, e. 380.] tiriroTpocjS^ft) A;cej9 horses ; -i^o-w ao. ; iiriroTpdTp m., ao., 2 a. , f. 1., 2 a. 1. ilea- ddprjv ? §50. KaOt^ofxai VERBS. kKivc 79 KaGe'^oaai, Ka9r[p,ai, Ka9i£a>, see t'faj. Ka0-6v8w sleep ; see evdu & 282 b. Kaivvjiai (n 9 , ko.5-, icaid- h) arceZ, po. ; Kexao-pai, Eur. El. 616 [jp^. «e- Kadfxiuos D., 148 b, Pind. 0. 1. 42.] Katvw (h, Kay-) &t#, in prose usu. cp. w. Kara, i. 6. 2 ; Kavw, 2 a. ena- vov ; 2 pf. r. Kexova or /ceVam, 114. Cog. KTeivo). KQ.iu> {h, AraF-, Kav- f 2 , yea- f *, *re- b) burn, also Att. ku» g, 44, 309 b [k??w H. 408 r. Z.J, M. ; Kaixru, in. r., enavaa [ c m. Hdt. 8. 19, e/c^a m. or e/ceta A. 40, (h, icap-, Kep- b) shear, M.\ K€pd> vi., eiceipa m. [tKepcra in. 152 d, N. 546]; c K€Kapica 1., -puti, [1 a. pt. Kepdels, Pind. P. 4. 146,] 2 a. endpriv 1. or 1. KCKaSijo-w, K€Ka8cav, see x^fa- KeKaSrjo-opai, see ktjSw vex. «e Aopai command, po. + , ch. e. ; KeXrjcropai ao. 311 b, 2 a. k€kX6/xt]u or eK6K\6firjv 284 e. Cog. [xeicXofiat 1.,] KeXevu, -edaca, 307 b. K€VT6W (v, KCVT-) prick ; K€VT^JO-<0 ao. [m/- 5^o-ai 156 b, *. 337] ; &c. K€pdvvvp.i (n 8 , Kepa-) mix; Kcpdarw 1., in. 1., ao., [tV-p^tra E. 1., 77. 164]; KCKepaKa 1., KeKpdfiai c 4 & 1. Kentpa- Cjxai, eKpddrjvf., Th. 6. 5, & eKepdadr)^ v. 4. 29 : [/cepdw E. +, ntpaie 322 c,] po., I., or 1. Kipviu & Kipvr)p.L n 3 , b. KspSatvw (n 6 , Kep8-) gam; KepSa- va>, eKepMva 152 c, [1. or 1. nepd-qcru) m., ao. a., 311 ;] KCKcpSqica (1. -aica or -ay kol), -7jp.ai 1., taepSdvOyv 1. K€v6a> (h, ct0-) ZuVfc, po. ; kcvo-o) [ c ao., 2 a. eA 7. 16, § 284 e;] 2 pf. pret. K£K€v0a, \_n£Kevdp.cu r. Cog. Kev6d»u>, V. 453.] [id]8a> (g, /ca§-) vcr; ktiS^cto) c ao. 311 c ; 2 pf. pret. KEKTjSa sorrow.] M. KTJSopai sorrow, care ; iKvde ao., 2 a. eicXayov; 2 pf. pret. KCKXa^- 70, Ven. 3. 9 JW/cA^a, B. 222, pt. K€K\riyovTes 326 b, ^. 30, but -tDres Bek.], 3 f. K€K\dy£o/xcu 319 b. Po. cog. KXayydvo} + , KXayyaLvu, nXayyeu. Kkala [2 pf. pL K£KOTrJ>S IS. 60], AC^ACOyUyUCU, 3 f. C K€KO- \fo,u.at, i. 5. 16, 2 a. eKotn\v f. Kopevvuju (n 8 , /cope-) satiate, ch. po., Jf.; [Kope'^w Hdt. 1. 212, m. 1., iro/>e'w, 305 b, 323 c, IN". 831,] ixbpeaa [m. ; 2 pf. pt. intrans. KCKoprjibs 325 d, c. 372,] KeKopecr/uuii [-yiuti E. I.], 3 f. K€Koprj. 456.] Cog. nora'tva po., iEsch. Th. 485. Kpd£co (j a , /c/acry-) cry om£, pr. r. ; Kpdijo 1., m. 1., ao. a. 1., 2 a. c expa- yov v. 1. 14 j 2 pf. pret. Kctcpa-ya vii. 8. 15 (imv. KtKpaxdi 320 f), 3 f. Ace- Kp6.£op.ai 319 b. Cog. KeKpdyw 1. 326 c, /tXdfa? q. v., Acpwfar CROAK, /cXe&£"a>. Kpcuvw (h, ac/jccp-) fulfil, po. & I. [ac/>cucuW 135]; Kpav, Att. Kpep-co [/cpe/i6w 322 c], €Kpep:af j^ti*'], 304 a. Cp. diro-KpivojMU answer, -Kptvovptai, -Kcicpip.ai, ao. dv- €Kplvdp.-qv & later -eKpidrjv. Kpovw beat, M. ; Kpowro) ra. , ao.m. ; KeKpovKa, c -/acu & c -ap.ai, k:-) COHCCal, hide, M.; [iter. KpiirravKov 332 e ;] Kpwjreo m., ao., 2 a. c 2Kpv(3ov m. 1.; K£Kpv(j>a, -/i/viai, [3 f. K€Kp{n}/o/xai Hipp.,] eicpij(p07)v, f. 1., later 2 a. eKpixptjvT. or €Kpv^T}u f. : 1. e /cptf/3ca & Kp6(pio. KToojiai acquire ; KT^o-opai ao. ; K€KTT]H(H & leSS Att. eKTT)[MU 280 b, /kwe acquired, jrret. possess (kcktCo/jlcu, -r/fxrjv or -yu.77»', 317 c), 3 f . KeKryaopxic (r. &ct-), £ktt]07]v as pass., f. 1. KTeCvti) (ll, KTCt-, KTOLV- TV, KT6V- b) kill (usu. ep. with diro, or /rard po. ); ktcvw [/crai/e'a; m., 2. 309], enTtiva, 2 a. po.+ eKTCLvov, po. eKravm. 314 d; 2 pf. c &j. kt^cd (z, Acri-) build,- kt^ctcj, ao. a., ?/T. po. r.,, [2 a. jt;<. ev-KTip.ej'os, B. 501 ;] K6KTIKO, or eKTtica 1. 280 c, tAC- TiapLCu, -a0T)v, f. 1. KTvirc'oi r, sound, crash, ch. po., Jf. ; €K-nhrrjaa, [2 a. €ktvttov +, 0. 75.] kvXCvSo) o 1 , KvXivScw v, & r. or 1. ac uXlw, ro?Z, M. ; icuXivS-qoxi) 1. , c kv\[- aopMil., €KuXT.5eh) m. ; dXLvdw or -^w, m. L, € 7^\i- cra, c 7^X7Aca. icuyeo) (n 10 , aci/-) Hss, po. + ; kvcto* 1., ao., (Kvin)(Top.at r., ao. a. 1.) Cp. irpocr-Kwco) icorship, -rpto, &c. Cog. Kveu (-Tja-w), aci/w (tAcucra), kvictku), con- ceive. KiJp» J». & KVpCtt (g, V, ACUyO-) Weef, chance, po., I., or 1.; Kt>p ao. 152 d, & Kvprjcrw ao.; K€icvpT]Ka, -/tat. A. XaTXava) (n 5 , Xa%-, X77X- g, Xe7x- n 3 b) obtain by lot; X-qfjopcu [Xd^ofiai, Hdt. 7. 144], 2 a. eXa^ [redupl. & causative, 284 e] ; ctXiix a 281, Xc- Xoyxa po., I., or 1. [\eX67xa0-t 328 c% 134 a], €iXrjyp.ai., kX-ffx^tiv. §50. Xa/i/3dVa> VERBS. jxao/jLat 81 Xap-pavw (n 5 , Xa/3-, X?7/3- g) take, M. lay Iwld of; X.TJx|/ojiat, -\J/u) 1., 2 a. tXafiov m. fredupl. 284 e] ; f&q- <}>a 281, e'CX-qfiixat & po. XeXri/A/Juai, 3 f. c XeXri-Jdrjv f. ( c dXr}(j>dr}v 281b): [Ion. f. Xdfi^ofmi n 8 , ao. c a. W. r., XeXaf}r)Ka v, c XeXa/m/xai, iXdfi- shine, M.; Xdp[/ [ c m. I.], ao. a.; 2 pf. pret. XeXajxira, c iXdfM- ,) M.\ \£i,, see Xavddvuy. \r\Llop.ai plunder, A. v.; \\r\L(ro- ficuj ao. ; XeX/gurfACU, [iXr/fodriv.] In Att., some would contract the ij'i into T] throughout. Cog. XrjcrTevu}. Xiyy-; ao. Xt-y^ twanged (both, onomatopes), 337 a, A. 125. [XiXa£o|xai, XcXirmcu ; see Xdco.] \HLirava-X) aXki?e 332c, 136 ; 2 a. m. eXvuw 313 b, *. 80, 114 ; pf. opt. XeXvvro or -vto -) madden, oftener )j.aCvo|xai 6e mud, rave; [|xavo3|j.ai. r., Hdt. 1. 109,] efirjva [m. +] ; fie- li.dvr\Ka. 1., -fiat 1., 2 pf. pret. (jL€|j.T]va am mad, 2 a. efidvrji>, f. 1. Cog. , fjicuop.cH seeA:, po. + ; see /xdofxai. fiavOdvu (n 5 , fiad-) learn: \iaQr\- croficu [fiadedfiai D. 305 a], 2 a. 2/xa- dov ; fJL€fj(.d0T]Ka, -fiat 1. pdofxai & [xatofiai h, a*c5tVc eagerly, feel after, po. + ; [pdo-opai c ao., X. 591] ; 2 pf pret. p.e|xova n b, am, eager, iEsch. Th. 686, [pi. fiefm/xev, -are, -ddai, H. 260, imv. /nefidria A. 304, pt. fie/uidos A. 40, pip. 3 p. fi.t- fiavav B. 863, § 320 e, 325 d. The Dor. has forms as fr. /jlw-, ch. nude or ct., as 3 s. fiwrai, imv. /xGxro or [ubeo (Mem. 2. 1. 20), inf. fiQxjdat. GR. TAB. 82 fxaofxat TABLES. 50. (PL Crat. 406 a).] Cog. m^aw po., fj.vdoju.ai woo, p.alvop.at. rage, &c. fidfvap.au fight, po.; sub. ,Il. 300, Eur. Ph. 1142. adpirra) ( t, p,apir- ) seize, po. ; pdpv}/w ao., Ar. Eq. 197, [2 a. Zp-apirov or Zjxcl-kov e 1 (redupl. 284e); pe'papira.] p.d c m. , ao. ; pepaya, -yp.ai, ep.dx®nv po., 2 a. G ep.dyrfv. pdyopau fight [pxtx^opm, A. 272, 2>t. -eioptvos or -eoij/xevos 134 a, p. 471, X. 403] ; p.ax&rop.at ao., [-eo/xai, B. 366] Att. p.a\ovp.ai, E. & 1. p.axv protect, rule, po. + ; ^/. p-eSouai care for, devise; [pcS^a-opxuu 311, I. 650.] Cog. pt|8opai q. v. Cf. moderor, medeor, meditor. pcGtio-Kw (k 1 , ixedv-) intoxicate, 379b, M. ; p,€0iio-a> L, ao.; fxefiedv- cp.ai 1., i/j.e6vo-0r)v, f . 1. : ueOvw intrans., be intoxicated. peuSidw (p.eida-, p.ei8ia-) smile ; ifxeididaa [ep.eL8rjo-a O. 47]. [peipopau (h, p.ap-, p.ep- b) obtain, 1. 616; 2 pf. i!up,opa 284 d, 1. ^o/w as 2 a. 326 b,] ctuopuai 281 (as if for ae-ap.ap-p.ai, eeptappuxi 141, 142), PL, [1. p.ep.6pr]Ka, -fiai & fiep.opfj.ai.] pteXXw fo a&ow£ to, intend, delay; p-eXXtjo-w 311, m. L, ep.i\\r)aa & ^/i^X- X^ [m. A. 523] ao. a. ; [2 pf. pLtfirfKa ch. pret., B. 25,] p.epA.T)Ka, -fiai [3 s. sync. p.e"fj.(3\eTai, -to, 146 b, 311 d, T. 343, . 516], £p.e\r)d7)v c f. Cp. e'lrip.tXopAii & -/ite- \toiMLi v, care for, -p.e\r)aofiai, ao. L, -fiep.4Xrjp.ai, eirep.e\T)dTjv f. Der. /*e- Xerdw study, practice. pipova « eaasr ; see fidopuu. p.€vw nianeo, reMAiN, w?a# ; pevw, ep-eiva • pepe vrjKa 31 1 b ( 2 pf . p.£p.ova ? Eur. Iph. A. 1495). Po. cog. /tt^w r 1 c 2 , yEsch. Ag. 74, Lui/wdfw.] pr)Souai devise, po., <£. 413 ; p.^j- o-op.au, ao. ^Esch. Pr. 477 ; see p.e'dw. p/qKoopxu ? (g u, pxtK-) bleat ; [2 a. pt. fj.aK(hv a. 98 ; 2 pf. pret. pt. pjefirf- kws, fx.tpxx.KvXa 325 e, 2 pip. ep.4p.rjKou 326 b.] Like onomatopes, fj.vKdop.at, (3\r)xdop.at, (3pi>xdop.ai. piatvw (h, puav-) stain, c M. ; uta- vco, ep.ldva & less Att. -rjva 152 c; pspaa\«a L, -aap.ai & 1. -afipai 304 b, ifuavOriv f. [3 p. AudftfTp 330 b, 134, A. 146.J pl-yvupa (n 7 , fity-) & p-itryw 350, misceo, Germ, mischen, mix, M.; p.££to [m.,] ao. a., m. 1., [nude 2 a. fyuiy- fxrjv 326 e;] pcpiyal., -ypai, 3 f. p.e- p.l^opxtL, ep-ixOw f., 2 a. epiyrjv f. 274 b r . [Cog. p.iydi;op.ai, 6. 271.] pcp.vr|o-Kw (r 1 k 6 , M"«-) remind (cf. moneo), J/, re-miniscor, re-MEMBEB, mention ; p,Wjcr«m., ao. ft., m.po. + ; pqxvrjpcu memini, remember, pret. 268 [2 s. fiefiurjai, -vrj, 331b], sub. &c. fiep.vG)fmi, -TTjp.r]v or -4f*V, -^fo [/x^eo 140, 134, Hdt. 5. 105]; &c, 317 s, 3 f. p.€piv^, -^(ra), &c, say, po. + ; [p.v- Oelai, p.vd£ai, 323 e.] ptvKdop.au (g u, p.vK-) mugio, low, bellow, A. L; p,vK^o-op.au ao., [2 a. Zp-vKov, E. 749 ; 2 pf. pret. p.€p.vKa + , S. 580.] See p.r}Kdop.ai, & pf. of p.v« shut eyes or lips ; p.vV« L, ao. ; p.e'p.vKa, 310 d. Late Kap.p.vu for Kara-fxiKo 136, Mat. 13. 15. N. vale* (h, va-) dwell, settle, po. ; [vdo-o-op.au, ao. a.] in.; veva, -ei'o) 323 c, chide ; veiKeVw, ao. T. 59.] V€|xw distribute, pasture, M. possess, feed; vep.» m. (1. vepL-qaw m., ao., 311b), tveifxa m. ; c V€Wp.T]Ka, -/Aat, vii. 3. 21, he^driv {-idriv v. I.), f. 1. Cog. vojfidu} n ' 2 , voixetiu, \vep.£du.] vt'ofiai [ct. veujj.a.L 2. 136] (jro, co?;i€co v, nubilo, gather clouds (cp. w. cw) ; c v€«j)i] Hdt., heap up; vf\l., 307 e. [Cog. ^w, c j'^w.i [v€«, Hes. Op. 775] & WjGw q 3 , neo, jpm; v^trco, evtjaa [m. v. 198] ; p4- i>7} (j 4 j ^0- or w/3-), & ch. 1. vi- irra t, wasA hands or feet, M. ; vh|/a> m., ao. ; vivip.pi.aL, [° tv'upQnv Hipp.,] 2 f. vKprjo-ofiai 1. Lxx. Cog. ? j/t0a>, -^w, &c, ningo, s^ow; (cf. nix, rw'vis). votco, -^o-w, &c, think ; [i. a> for otj 131 f.] & ^€ (k 5 , San-, dda/c-p, cf. ddicvio), -ia>, -d« 1., feel a bite, bite, M.; [65a- %-fiaop.ai 311, Hipp.], d)5a£dp,r)v 1. ; &5ay pai. oSoLTTope'co travel, 6SoiroU8oir€iroiT]Ka, -p.ai & u>5o- Troirj/xai • 283 a. [68v- oe angry, cf. odi ; ib5vadp.r)v + , a. 62 ; 68_o8vcr|j.ai pret., e. 423.] 68fJpop,aip, &trag. Sopopcu lament ; 68vpo{ip.ai, d)dvp&!J.7)i> ; (bSvpdrjv 1. o£ w (j l i od-) odoro, oleo, emit ODOR ; 6^0-0 l [^ & oi'-yvvpi Ti 7 , open, very r. in prose exc. in comp., ch. with dvd & 5td • ol'fjo), y^a [&i'£a 132, a. 436] ; $x.~ drjv. Cp. dv-oi-yw & dv-oiYvup.i, J/. 1. ; dvo^w, d^y^a, Th. 2. 2, & r.^ot£a [d^yja po.], 279 b, 282 b, m. r. 1.; dv€ft>X a > 2 pf. dvitpya ch. 1., dv£ipyp.ai, Th. 2. 4, i)voiyp.ai 1. [d^a/y^ou po. |, 3 f. dve£;op,ai Hel. 5. 1. 14, ave^x^W {sub. dvoix^co, &c. ), ijvoixQw f. 1., 2 a. rjvoiyrjv f. 1. Even a triple aug- ment occurs late : fytyZa, 7jve^x^V l '> Lxx. ot8a know, d'o-o^ai ■ see 46 & bpdw. ol8-€«, -&v», l.-dci) & -a£va>, swell, M. r. ; olS^o-w Hi}>p., ao. ; uStixa. olKT€lpCi> h, j»t^/ * OlKTCpCi), $XT€tpa ' late oLKTecp-^aoj Horn. 9. 15, ao. a. £>. olvoxoew, -^ (n 4 , n 6 , oXttr^-), »^p, slide; 6\«r8i]cra>l., ao. ch. 1., 2 ao. &\l\( m., wXecra, m. 1., 2 a. m. t undone, 6\u)\ea/j.cu ]., tiKtadnv, f. 1. [Cog. 6X<*/c« ?;i. + , A. 10,^ 6X^T. 135 t'. ;.] 6|i(xpT€'a> accompany, meet, po. + ; [ipf. du. bp.apT7jrriv 323 f. ;] ofxaprtjo-o) ao., v. 87, [2 a. op.aprov 1.] op.vup.1 (n 7 , o/A-, 6/xo- w) swear, G M. ; 6p.ovp.ai 152 (1. opLoaiom.), &p.ocra c m.; 6pwp.oKa, -p.ai & -07/.CU 307 e (&plu- ap.ai 1.), m., ao. a.,m. 1., 2a.inf.6urjpac% in. (hvijixriv 314 b & -dfivv, opt. ovaifxrv, [imv. cvqao r. 68], inf. fivaadai [-vcOai I., pt. -7jjJLei>os j3. 33 ;] tivrjixai 1., -drjp. [6vo[«xt {6vo-) scorn, e. & I. ; pr. & ipf. nude, cf. 8L8op.ai 45 ; 6v6o-o|iai ao. ; c d)voa6r}v. Fr. 6v-, pr. otiveade (134 a) a 241, & 1 a. ibvaro P. 25, if these forms are genuine.] ottuio) or oir-Do) marry ; 6iriJo-o> • Gnrvafxai : according to some, -vi- be- fore a vowel, -v- before a consonant. opoUtf (6pa-) see, If., ipf. e [w. double aug. 2 s. yeLSys X. 280, 3 s. rjeidrj 1. 206, or -Set, or l.-5e ?, 3 p. rjeiSeLP or rjdeiu 330 b, also (l5-) Zo-av v. 170], f. c%(ro|Mu: (3) 018- 312 b; olSa, olSas or olaOa (oZSas very r. in Att., Eur. Ale. 780 ; the comic poets sometimes blend the two forms into dtadas, also Eur. Ion 999 ?): (4) clSe- v ; (elSe-u) eloG) [I8eu g. 235], dMt)v, 320 c ; f. eidrjau}, A. 546, Isoc. 11 d [id770-tD Theoc. 3. 37], ao. 1. or 1. In the ind. plur., the shorter forms were more comm. in the pf., & the longer in the pip. (also 1. rjdeicrap Mk. 14. 40). The defects of olda are ch. supplied by yiyvdxTKU. [Cog. tad fit D. (per- haps suggested by 3 p. fodai) Pind. P. 4. 441, tads, tadri 328 a, Theoc. 15. 146, &c] With the ind. of ol8a f cf. the corresponding Sanskrit 1 s. vid-a, 2 vettha, 3 veda ; 1 p. vid-ma, 2 vida, 3 vidus. ope'-yw [r. dpeypv/min' 7 , X. 37] stretch out, beach (cf. rego, Germ, recken, reichen), If. reach for, desire, {A. ch. po. or 1. ;) opt'lu m., ao. ; [w/3€7- Atat Hipp., dpwpeypuai, II. 834,] cipex- At?? as mid. See 430 b. Cog. optyva- o/.icu, 6pex6£c*> po. cpi£o> j 1 [ou/u'fw i.] bound; see 39. cpvijp.i (n 7 , op-) ?wse, po., If. arise ; 3p ao. 152 d, [f. m. cpovpai, 2 ao. &popov 284 e,] 2 ao. m. upop-nv i&pro, imv. 6pao, -eo, -ev, inf. dpOai, &c. 326 e, 327); 2 pf. 6'pcopa as mid., % 78, 2 pip. wpwpeiv 281 d, iEsch. Ag. 653: [fr. ope- v, ipf. optovro B. 398, pf. dpibpep.ai, sub. opdipyrai N. 271.] Cog., ch. po., 6pu, opivu, 6po- 6vpu), opouu) ' Lat. orior. cpv 2 a. 1. ibpvxw or -7771', f. co-(|)patvo|xat & 1. 6apT t paPTo ? 327 b, Hdt.]; €t\a> (h, i m. E. 171 a, 0. 462 ;] c^iX^crto ao. 311b, 2 a. &<|>€iXT]Ka, -Qiyv. Cog. [6e'X- Xw+ increase, ao. ojo<. 3 s. 6Xio-Kdva> (k 2 n 4 , 60X-) owe, m- cwr; o^Xtjo-w 311, ao. r., 2 a. & k T l Ka > -fiat: 1. pr. c'^Xw. n. iratl 1. ird- acquire ; ird, 7ra- pev&pt-rjaa 282 c, & Trapyivoptr^aa 279 a (as if cp. of 7rapd & dro^w); irapa- vevop/T]Ka (1. Trapr)v5/u.T]Ka) , -fiat, &e. Trapoive'oj ac£ £Ae drunkard ; eirapip- yrjaa 282 c ; ir€irap(pvT]Ka, -piai 1., &c. irdo-o-ft) i 2 , sprinkle; iracna, c ao. «., m. 1. ; irtira (k 3 350, 7ra0-, 7re^- n 3 b) patior, suffer; Trcto-op-ai 156, (ao. j?£. po. 7r>jcras ?, ) 2 a. ewadov ; 2 pf. ire- irovOa, Th. 6. 11, [7r^7ro, TreXtitdu q, & (TrXeatf- c 51 ) TrXrftfa;, bring or come wear, J/, po. ; ircXdcrw, ireXw 305 b, eirtXaaa iv. 2. 3, [2 a. wi. £jr\ifip.rjv 314 b, 9. 63;] TriirX-qpai po., po. iTreXdadrju & eirXddrjv. Cog. ttAtj- o-idfa, [iri\i>da n 3 b, viXvapiai, T. 94.] ire'Xtt 6e, po. + , J/. ; [ipf. 3 s. eirXe c 4 , M. 11, m. 2 s. ZirXeo, -eu, 3 s. eVXero, X. 281, 116, pt. irXopievos.] ircjAirco 5enf/, 41 ; M. cp. in classic prose, i. 1. 2 ; irep-ij/ft), ir€irop.<}>a, &c. ireirapeiv, ireirpwTai ; see iropifa. TrrtpSofJicu (b, wapd-) pedo, A. r. ; c irap8T]0-0|xai 311, 2 a. c eTrapdov; ire'iropSa ; Ar. irep9ci> (b, irapd-) destroy, ravage, po. +, [nude pr. inf. p. (irepO-adat, irep-adat, 151, 158) irepdai II. 708 ;] ir4p t, coquo, cooA;, digest, M. ; it€\|k«>, ao. a., M. ?; ireirep.pa.1, eir^cpdrjv f. irerdvvvpA (n 8 ,7rera-) pando,5p7ro:oT, expand, (in Att. ch. cp., esp. w. dvd-) ircTaircD, c tt£T(S 305 b, eiriraaa, m. 1. ; c ir6Tr6TaKal., -a fiat, usu. irtTTTap.a.1 c 4 , Ar. Nub. 343, ktrerdcrQ^v. Cog. [7r£- rv?7/it n 8 b, A. 392, ttituu),] 1. c 7rerda/. ir€Top.ai (i. 5. 3) & po. or 1. irira.- yCiCU U, & tTTTa.IJ.CU r 3 c 2 , ,/Z?/ ; Tr€Ttj w., ao., [2 a. m. 3 s. KaT-^ir^KTo 326 e, A. 378 ;] c ir€irt)xa 1., 2 pf. ■jr^Trrrya pret. am fixed, T. 135, -7/iat 1., eirrjxOriv, usu. 2 a. eirdyrjv f . : 1. 7r?7,j J/.; irXip ^. c irXryx.y)v Ar. Ach. 236, ?'mv. c 7r\?}(ro, &c. ); c ireTX'qKa PI. Apol. 23 e, -a-fjtat or -/xai 307 e, 3 f. ttcttX^- (roptat 1., €7rXrj). TrijjnrpT]|xt (r 1 e, 7173a-, see Tri/xirXTj/xi) burn, esp. cp. w. ep ; irptjo-tt c m., ao. a., c m. 1., [tirpeae 134, 130b, Hes. Th. 856 ;] c ir€Trpi]ica, -p.ai & -(r/xai 307 e, [3 f. c ireirpr)7?0w, I. 589.] TrivvcrKti), irtirvvpuai, see 7n^w. irtvw (n 2 , 7TO-, 7rt- b 2 ) poto, bibo, drink; mopcu (usu. 7 ; Hellen. 7ri'e- cai 331), later -movpai, 305 f, a, 2 a. tir-tcw (imc. irie & po. 7ri0i Ar. Vesp. 1489, [r. inf. inhai Hipp.,] 313 c r ) ; ireirwKa, ireirop.aL 310 d, eTrodrjv c f. Causal, iroTifa & iriirio-KOD r 1 k 1 , grt've to drink, po. or 1. ; m, [ao. a. Hipp., ft». 1. ; iiri- (rdrjv 1.] mirpdo-Kft) 1. (r 1 k, -rrepa-, vpa- c 2 ), & ire'pvrjp.i n 3 po., sell ; [ircpaoro), -dw 321s, a - 2. Usu. irXavdu. irXdo-crci) shape, M. ; c irXdo-to, m. 1., ao. ii. 6. 26 ; ircirXaKa 1. , -(rp.ai, i-n-Xdadw, PI. Rep. 377 b, c f. 1. irXeKo) (b 1 , 7r\a/c-) plecto, plico, plait, twine, M. po. or 1. ; irXif a> m. 1., ao.; [ c ir€irXoxa or c -€\a 312c, Hipp.] iriirXey pxu, iirXe'xO 7 ) 1 ' f., 2 a. eirX6.Ki)v (v. I. -€Ki)v), f. 1. irXc'w (f 1 , TrXeF-, 7rXeu- f 2 ) sail, 42 g, 309 b ; irXevo-opcu & irXevcov- Mcu305d,v. 7. 8, 1. 10, -»/ 313b, c y. 15, pt. eiri-irXibs Z. 291.] Der. irXmfa, Th. 1. 13, irXo'ifopai 1. irXTjco-ft) (i 1 , irXay-, irXrfy- g) strike (pr. ch. cp. w. Ik or e7ri), M. ; irXr^w, m. 1., ao., [2 a. iriirXtryov m., ewe"- irXrjyov, 284 e] ; 2pf. irfirXijYci, vi. 1. 5, -ypui, 3 f. ireTrX^opxtL, Ar. Eq. 272, tirXrixd-nv v., 2 a. eirXyfy-qv (e£- €TrXdyT]v, KaT-eirXdy-qv) f. Cog. c«- TrX-fiyvv/xai, Th. 4. 125. See ttjittu. •irXova) (g, ttXuj'-) was/?, clothes (cf. Xotfw, wfiw); irXiivca m., twXvva m.\ tre'irXvp.ai, eirXvOyv (\.-vv0t]v)L, 304a. Trve'io (f 1 , irveY-, irvev- f 2 , ttw-, 142 r ) breathe, blow, 309 b; irvcv- ix&V v ^-> 2 a. eirviyr.v f. iroOe'w desidero, desire, miss, M. r. ; iro0Tior&) m., eTTodrjcra k -€T]T€v, -cvcrw, prophesy ; aug. iirpocp- or irpoe.] Cog. iTTcbcrcru), A. 371, [7rTW, A. 372.] irrftrcrco i 2 , pinso, pound ; ^irriaa, Hdt. 2. 92 ; eVrccr/wu, - c ?;i., ao.; HirTvyp-ac, Hier. 2. 4, (or TreVr- 280 c,) e7TTjJ- X^j/, [2 a. c £irTiL>y7}v Hipp.] irruo) (u) spuo, QP&; irrtfcrco m., ao. a., Soph. Ant. 653 ; iirrvKO. 1., -o-fl^, f. 1., [2 a. iirTOrjv Hipp.] 7ruv0dvop.ai (n 5 , irvd-, irevd- h), po. TevOop-ai, inquire, hear; irevcro- aai (r. -ovjxaL 305 d), 2 a. £wv0op.r]i> [■n-eirvd- 284 e, Z. 50] ; ir£mKrp.ai. P, § 146, 93 d. palva (h, pav-, pad-) sprinkle, po. & I. + ; pavoi, eppdua [imv. pdtrvare v. 150], °m. 1.; c dppayKQ. Lxx., -ao-fiai [3 p. eppddarai, -to, 329 a], -dudrjv. paTTO) (t, /3-) stitch; c pd\|/co, tppa\pa m.; tppafifiac, Dem. 1268. 2, 2 a. ippdf-qv, Eur. Bac. 243, c f. 1. p€£a> (j 2 , pe7- c 5 , see epSw) cfo, po. +; pego), eppe^a PL Leg. 642 c, po. epefa 171, Eur. And. 838 ; [ippt- X0i)v, I. 250.] pew (f 1, peF-, pet/- f 2 , /Su- 142 r , cf. Lat. ruo) flow; pevcropai, -era/ 1., eppevaa, but more Att. p-u^j 2 a. ep- pd77?i' f. : po. & 1. p-fjo-o-w beat. Cog. pacrcru) & dpdcrau}, -£o>, smite ; frango. pi/yew v, shudder, po. + ; |&Cyirjo-« ao. ; 2 pf. pret. epplya P. 175. Cog. pfyoto, -c6cru>, shiver (inf. pvydv or piyodv 324 b); (ppta-aw q. v.; frigeo. piirrw & piirreeo (t 12 , pi(f>-) throw; [iter. pliTTao-Kov 332 e;] pu{/w ao., [2 a. eppicpov 1. ;] ^pplcpa, -ippuzi [inf. pepicpOat 159 e r ], 3 f. eppl-J/opuxi 1., -l, WcreiKa, &c, shake, 44. dt)v\., 2 a. eo-Kdcp-qv, c f. 1- o*Ke8dvvvp.k (n 8 , o*/ce5a-) scalier (as 88 o-Kebdvpvfii TABLES. Tapaacra) 50. sub., SiaaKeddppvai, -vrai, 316 c) ; o-KcSdo-w, -w, 305 b, iaicedaaa c m.; eaKedaa/xai, -a0r,p, f. 1. Cog., ch. po. or L, (XKi5v7},u.i n 3 b, [ipvpu e 1 , Kidvy)!Ai + , aKeddu), tceddw, /ce5cuo/tcu.] o-kcXXo) (b 1 1, Theoc. 8. 90, 2 a. c eap.iyt]p d 2 . draw, - ^o«r a libation, M. make a treaty ; f(nr€iKci L, (iaT€vd-p,ai, eairepap-aL 148, 156) c"Wettr/tat, Th. 4. 16, -tr^l. crirevSo) k , hasten, 114b. o-rd^to (j 2 , £rcae£ ; 1. , c ao., Soph. ; eo-r i/lfy/tai 311, Id. Aj. 874. frrd\, w. 1., ao. a.; [2 pf. go-rop-ya^ Hdt. 7. 104, c- yficu Emped.,] earipxOrjp 1. O-Tcp€C0 & CTT6plvp.ai); oropeo-w, Att. c (TTopw, earopeaa to,, £. 50 ; iarope- cr/tat 1., -adrjp. Also Ka L, -/tat, Th. 2. 34, «#l, f. 1. o-Tp€«j><«) ( b l , arpa(p- ) fcettsl, Item, If. ; al., tar pap.- /tat, iv. 7. 15, taTpeyfj) ao. 1., 349 a. L, tavpa, c iEsch. Pr. 1065, to, 1.; c a-£d£a) & dTTO) (349 i, j, d|a>, ao. a., c to. r. i. 8. 29; tdy V p f., Eur. Ph. 933 : 1. pip. iacpdneip Dio C. See (pa-. dXXtt (1, a\<3 m., eaipT]\a, 2 a. ea(pa- \op m. 1. or ? ; ^aX.Ka L, -Xp.ac, -Xdyp 1. r., 2 a. ea(pdXriP l, Th. 6. 80. (z, crao-, aw- c 1 ) J/. (rwaa-, ct. -rpv-), H. 346], TerdpaypLCu, irapdxOw f-: 0pdo-, T€rd?oA«it, Th. 3. 13, 5. 6, 71, c Tayif- aofxxtL r. 1. T€%ira (d 1 , da-, 312a) oe amazed, 2 pf. pret., po., i., or 1., £ 168; 2 a. traipov d 1 , tt. 12. Cf. 0d7rrw. Tcivo) (h, Ttt-, rev- b 1 n) ten do, sfrefeA, 31.; Tev» c m., Ireawm.; t^- TaKa 304 a, -fj.at, X. 19, ^rd^j/ f. [Cog. ravv 1. 152 d, ao. a. m. 1., iripayva n. 529 ; 2 &. p. iripo-rjv £ 98.] [T6Tp.ov & 2t€T|iov, 2 a. as tt. rep.- find, 284 e, a. 218, Hes. Th. 610.] c T€Tpaiva> (r 1 n' 2 , rpa-), 1. Tirpdio & c TLTpr}p.t., terebro, &orc ; Tp^j 1., ao. a., P«. L, [ c rerpa^aj Hdt. 3. 12, eWrp^a, e. 247,] °m. Ar. Th. 18, er^rpdua 1., 152 c; rirp-qpLai, krpi]dr\v & -dvQt\v 1. : TLTpalvw & Terprjvu 1. or ?. Cog. TOpt(j), TlTpd) m., ao., [2 a. t£tvkov m. 284 e ; T6T€v\a, as p. p.. 423, -yp,ai + , j3. 63, 3 f. rere^o/iat, M. 345, iretixOyv I. +»] Ttrvypai, £. Tp«7T<0 89 9, Eur. El. 457, Mx^W- c °g- TlTl5 - (Tko; r 1 k 3 po., Tiryxd^w, Wktw ■ [pf. m/. Terevxycrdcu to be armed, x- 104.] t-^ko) (g, ra/c-) melt, thaw ; ttj|o> [?n,. Hipp.], eryfia [m. 1.]; 2 pf. intrans. rirr\Ka, iv. 5. 15 ; rirvyp-at 1., £tt}x&W r -» 2 a. irdKrjv, f. 1. [ri€- grieve ; 2 pf. p£. reTirj&s 325 d, I. 13, pf. ^?. 2 d. Terirjcrdop, pt. ren- Tjfxiuos, O. 447, 437.] t£9t](jli (r 1 , de-) y put, Gfyrw, rtQtiKa, Mem. 4. 4. 19, &c., 45 : late TiGe'to, Tid-/), ao. r.; for T€K€?a0at see 305 a), 2 a. ere/cov, m. po. A. 59 ; r^TOKa Ven. 5. 13, TtreypLOLi (or -oypjxi ?) 1., €T^x^V v > f- U Tip.d(o, -•fjo-a), &c., honor, 42 : rert- p.7j(rofmL Lys. 189. 11 ; for f. j?., usu. Tip.r}(rop.ai. Cog. ria>, tijacj, rt/xw^w. tIvco (?e.; n 1 , Tt-) jja?/, expiate, M., ch. po. or I., take payment, pun- ish ; Ti w., ao.; T^Tixa, c -«?/ Ao?ior to, m.r. ; [tio-ci), ao. + ; pt. TiripAvos v. 28.] titp r., ao., 2 a. eTopov, A. 236 ; reTdpr/pcu 1.;] redupl. f. TtTopiqcrio 284 g. Cog. to- pevco, TiTpuxTKia, TeTpaivw. Tpeirco (b 1 , rpatr-) turn [i. rpdirui], M.\ Tp4x|/wm., ao., 2 a. [eTpa-rrov, E. 187] »».; TtTpojpa, Ar. Nub. 858, later Tirpa. Po. cog. Tpuirdw, rpo- Treu), 355 a, Tpairtw. Tpeci> (d 1 , dpacp-, Opecp- b) nour- ish [d. r/)d0o;], M.\ (rptyoiv 296b;) 6pe\j/o> m., ao., [2 a. erpaa \j/. 237, 1. rtrpaipa Polyb. (cf. rptvu)), redpaju,- /j.ai (redpdcpdai, PI. Gorg. 525 a, v. I. rerp-), idpt & 0pe£a po. r., 2 a. tdpap.ov ; c ScSpap/rpca 311, 2 pf. po. c 8t5po/u.a, e. 412, c 8e5pdpi.rjp.ac. Cog. r/)oxdl*w, vii. 3. 46, [rpwxaw, ctyo/mw.] Tp€a> /ear, yfce ; irpeaa, i. 9. 6. Cog. terreo ; rpeiua [rpofitto v 2 +] tre- mo, TREMBLE. Tptp» g,rub, Tp£\j/a>, c T£rpu}>a Ar. Lys. 952, rtTpiixp.ai [3 p. rerpi^aTai 300 c, Hdt. 2. 93], &c, 38, 39. Cog. reipu) tero ; t/ji/w, rpvx^o ' tribulo. rpC^o) (j 2 , 773*7-) twitter, gibber, po., 1., or 1., w. 5 ; &y>t£a 1.; 2 pf. pret. Terpi-ya, B. 314. An onoma- tope, like rpv^w murmur. rpiayw (b 3 h, rpay-) gnaw, eat raw food ; Tpw£op., in the perf. pass. & compound systems ; while 7rcu'w has a freer range of the tenses : IIard£cu r) ir\r)yrjvcu, to strike or be struck, Aristl. Rh. 1. 15. Ttirrei . ., Kal . . wardfrs Lys. 136. 22. TtJtfxo (d J g, 6v(p-) fumigate, smoke; Tt'efcpa r., rtdvixtxai., 2 a. c eT$iai 307 d, Ven. 9. 5, &T0r/»', Hdt. 3. 10. [a-, <{>6v- b 1 n, kill, + ; ZaYov, see eadiu) eat. cpafvw h, fero, bear, bring, M., [imv. 2 p. (pipre 326 e :] fr. 01- x, f. oi'crw m., ao. a. r., m.?, [m?/. di'a-orcrai, ct. dpcpo-cu Hdt. 1. 157, imv. olcre 327 a ;] f. p. oladr/aofxai. : fr. «v€K-x, cveyK- n 3 , 1 a. yveyica m., 306 a, 2 a. rjveynov (preferred in inf. k pt.; but scarcely used in ind. exc. 1 s. po., or in imv. exc. 2 s., where 1 a. is r. : 'E7W tfvey- kov. "Hj^/ois i y - 7. 12 : [fr. 4v€iK-, E. & I. 1 a. rjjteiKd m., 2 a. tjvukov r. VERBS. cppvyc 91 -770-w (1. -icrw), kc. [pr. inf. (poprjuai 335 b, (pop-q/xevai 333 e, 0. 310] ; pivyp.ei'os 0. 18, J £(peux9w 1- U^g. (pvyydfw jEsch. Pr. 513 ; [as fr. 0i;fda>, 2 pf. _p£. Trecpv^jTes 4>. 6, TreT||xC (0a-), 45 u, 27l r s, & ; if. pr. [2 p. duevos, Hel. 1. 6. 3, ipf. tyafi-qv eh. po. or ]., A. 43 ; ,kc, Hdt. 3. 9, f. pnO-qaop-ai : (c) fr. (Fe7r-, Fei7r-h) clir-, 1 a. elira 306 a (mrt*. 2 s., & imv. exc. 2 s., esp. used ; opt, inf., k pt. r. in Att.), °»t. 1. or 1., oftener (exc. as above) 2 a. elirov (etwu), -oifu, -^, -etv, -&v), G m. ? 1., [w. syllabic aug., tFenrov, Zenrov K. 445, teiwa Pind. N. 9. 78.] (d) Cog. (pari^u k (pvfilfa ch. po. ; omitted (45 u), TjfJiC [3 s. ?jjl Sap. 48], rjv, ^, are used for greater vivacity or the metre- Some refer them to a distinct root, akin to the Lat. aio. The subject follows, if expressed : fju 5' eyd, quoth 1, Ar. Eq. 634 ; f, 5' 6s § 518 f; % he spake, A. 219 ; irou, -fjpu, iral, wat, boy! I say, boy! boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. (f) The pr. 2 s. is usu. written 0r?s, as if ct. fr. 0ae*s, 120 g, [0V0a 297 b, £. 149 ; 3 s. 7j fr. 0aei or -q8dora>, Cyr. 5. 4. 38, oftener <|>0rf|os E. 119 ;] &p0aKa, €(p6dadt]v 1. cj>0€tpw (h, (pdap-, 6ep- b) corrupt, destroy, esp. cp. w. 5td, J/. ; <(>0ep0apKa, c Eur. Med. 226, 2 pf. ty0opa c lb. 349, €8apfjLcu, 2 a. e^ddpvv f. Cog., <{>0ivtt n 1 [7 E., & r. 00£a>, /3. 368], decay, consume (usu. intrans. exc. in fut. & ao.), ch. po., M.; 0io-co [t E., 7)1-., \ ao. a. [m. 1., 2 a. c £(j>didovU\\ e. 110 v. ^.,] 2 a. ?». i0tKa 1., -fiat, v. 340, -Qr\v. Cog. (pdtvvdw po., (pdiveu 1., 00^w ? (piXeo) (v, at 333 e, X. 265 ; 1 a. m. e\a8-, 2 a. HcfSKab'oy burst, iEsch. (pXe-yw flagro, bum ; X^w, c m. 1., ao. a. iEsch. Pr. 582 ; irtyXeypxit. 1., tyXtyOw, 2 a. c i, 7re(p6(3T]Ka, &c, ferrz/7/, J/. [& 0e^o«ai E. 532] /car. pdi;w (j 1 , 4>pa5-) tell, M.; pdpab^vos 148 b, Hes. Op. 653], i & r. pa7vvp.i (i, n 7 , 0P a 7-] /^wc«, if. (ppdyvvtxai ; JH, c (j>pd|op.at 1., p££pO-ya> g, frigo, roas< ; [eppv^co] ao. ; 92 (ppvya TABLES. Xpaa §50. irtypvyfiai, Th. 6. 22, icpptxQw 1., ecppvyyv I. or 1. : 1. (ppfoaw. Cog. w7vv|ii n 7 , 1. [(fxhyw d., 0c£fw i. ; Z(pu£a & -onto. Hipp. ;J &c. (v) produce, M. grow ; §ij 7)1., ao. a., 2 ao. t 326 b, 2 pf. 3 p. irecptaai A. 484, sub. c we(f>uoi), pt. ~re$, e. 477,] c itdr]i> 1. r., 2 a. icpfyv, f. 1. Cog. (piirevb), -etata, & 07tvw, -daw, plant; Lat. fui. c&-yvvfu [-«y«, -£a>, J : see 284 f, xdcro^at, c ex a " oa, Pind. N. 10. 129, m. +, A. 535, 2 a. K^Kadov, m. A. 497.] Xaivw gwpe, 1. A nth. ; see %ct(TKa>. Xafpto (h, x a P~) rejoice, M.\ \ox- pi\crret. K^xavSa, 5. 96.] Cog.?, Xao-Kw (k 3 , x a,/ -)» l.X at ' J/a, h, hisco, gripe; c xavovfi.ai [xv^opMi ?], 2 a. exavov, A. 182 ; 2 pf. pret. Kex^va Ar. Av. 264. Der. x«<™dfr> 379 b. X^t w (j' X e ^") caco, comic + ; \e- oro€|xai 305 d, c x^op.aL r., ex ecra m -> 2 a. exevov r. 327 a ; 2 pf. c KcxoSa, K^X e* 142 ') ^owr, ch. cp. w. €k, iv, civ, &c, M., 309 b; f. C X€« or x*w 305 f, b, m., [xei^w^. 222,] 1 a. £x ta »*. 306, [ exeva m., H. 86, 63, 2 a. ra. exvp-w 313b, A. 526 ;] c Kc'xvKa 1., -ficu, ex^dyv f. (1. -iQt]v f.) : also x^> 1- {x*™, &c), X^w 1., Acts 9. 22, x e ^ w (l )r -) P°-> ch. 1., (exevaa). Cog. x ow ( 1- v - XXXBdwu, luxuriate, po. orl.; 2]if. c K€xXl8a. [Cog. K^x-^apret-j Pind.] XoXdto, -wo-K 543. X<5« & later x^ vv ^P l ll8 » ^/ X«crci), ao. a. [m. ].] ; c Ktx wKa j Dem. 1279. 20, -tr/iat, e X 6 q- v. [Xpai v, avert, help, pr. 1. r. ; Xpaurp^|o-ft>, T. 296, ao. 2. 62, 2 a. expo.arp.ov, S. 66; not in Od.] Cog., 'Xpd« (xp^o-o), &c, 310 a, 307 e ; Xpdeis XPV* 120g, I. or 1. xpfc Hdt. 4. 155, &c. ) to supply need, — a.) The need of another, by lend- ing ; M., one's own need, by borrow- ing : KixpT]p.i r 1 , m. Kixpo.p.0.1 • [\pi\- o-a>, Hdt. 3. 58,] ao. a. m.; Kt\pr\Ka. 1., c -/wtt, Dem. 817. 2 : 1. klxp^w. b. ) The need of one who consults an oracle, by answering ; M. one's own need, by consulting an oracle : Xpaw, »». xP&°P- ai ' XP^ ao - a. ; K€XpT)KaL, -ap.ai or -/xat, Hdt. 7. 141, expTjo-Qriv. Po. cog. x/ 07 ?^' Eur. c. ) One's own need, by using what is required : M. xpdop.ai • xp^t^op.ai ao. ; Ki\pr\p.ax, Hdt. 1. 42, ixprjardyv. d. Impers. xp^i (f° r XP& eL or nude XP'n°~h c ^ 0^/** 0» ^ supplies need, i. e. it is useful or necessary, it must or OM»7i< to be; sub. xPV-> Pt> (XP € - b 1 ) XP € ' L7 1 ^sch. Pr. 213, mi/. Xi 07 ?*' 04 nude, & po. XPW Eur - Hec. 260, |h5. neut. & indecl. \xP& 0V -> ct - 120 i) xpe- ^ Th. 6. 18 ; ipf. 3 s. ixpw 163 b, oftener XPW 284 c ; XP^ 61 Hdt. 7. 8. (e) Cp. dir<5-XpT] [i. dwoxpa Hdt. 9. 79], it fully supplies need, it suffices or contents ; inf. airo-xpyv Hem. 52. 13, ipf. air-e'xPV ', diro-xp^o-ci, aT- e'XPV ~ € - [So I. a.T-exp^To, Kara-xp^, -Xp-h^ei, eK-xpv^h Hdt. 8. 14, 1. 164, 3. 137.] (f) These or corresponding forms are also used personally : [Meg. § 51. xP™ yprjcrOa you must, 297 b ;] &tt6-xpv, -xpfaovai, Ar. Av. 1603, PL 484, [i^XPV^ Hdt. 8. 70 ;] arro-xpao/xai content one's self, Hdt. 1. 37. g. Forms fr. xP°-« sometimes agree in sense w. its cog. XPT)£ W [ E - *« XPV- tfa, -tow, 132, p. 121, I. xpyfoKopc-h Hdt. 3. 117] need, wish, 414 c : as, Xprj Soph. Ant. 887 ; po. pret. KexPV fia\ ne:d, wish, Eur. Iph. A. 382, a. 13, 3 f . Kexpv™/J.ai, Theoc. 16. 73. Xfiio anoint, M.\ Xfi°" w w -> ao -> K€\pt Xpurifa, XP a ' L - vco • (xP aF ~) X^ ^ or X/ 5a ^ w 9^ az ^- [x«op,ai, 6e angry ; see x°^oop:ai. ] V. \j/dco, c \Jnfjcra>, &c, r?<&, 120 g. Cog. xprix 00 ru0 > favu touch, \f/d\\o} twitch, \}/ri\a. ao. ; ire - \|nix,a 1. 280 c, eipvy/xat, -xdw f-> Ven. 5. 3, 2 a. £\j/uxw or -T 7 ?" d 2 , Ar. Nub. 151, f. 1. Mat. 24. 12. n. a>8iv« g, fo in travail, A. 269 ; late w&ivco ao., & (hdw-qao) 311, Lxx., ao. a. m. ^?. a>0€« (v, ci0-) pztsA, Jf. ; ipf. idi- deov m. 279 b (cod- e., i., L, & r. in Att.) ; aia-ft) c m., & po. (bO-qau), m. 1., tWa |». [Sera m. E. I., E. 19], tidrjaa c m. L; c &oica L, -cyicu, Cyr. 7. 1. 36, -vfj«rop.ax vii. 2. 38, i(ai>r}crdjj.r}p or d/vrjadpL-qv ch. 1. ; Iwvnp-ai as mic?. & jras.% Lys. 108. 26, 211. 1, -6-rjvdspass. : 2 a. fr. irpia- x, eTrpid,u7)u 45 i, a. 430 ; 2 s. irrpiu}, vpiacro, irpiu), Ar. Vesp. 1440, Ach. 870, 34. Cog. iriwpd, duo, two. Tpcis, Tpia, tres, three. TcVo-apes, -a, quatuor, four. •7T€vt€, quinque, five. $j, sex, s£c. €7TTd, septem, seven. oktw, octo, ei#/^. Ivvia, novem, nine. 8«Ka, decern, ten. 'eVSexa, undecim, eleven. SuSeica, duodecim, twelve. Tpio-KaiScKa, Sexarpeis, tre- decim, thirteen. [decim. T£' 2. Ordinal. 7r6}8l omnino atfrws toLws sic Toiu>, t6gu$ tot modis irdvv dXXolios rbre turn €Kdpa ad, aWis TOGOLKIS roaavrdKis toties eKaardKis ladKis toties rovrdicis eKarepdKis dp:0T€pdKis Derivative Verbs, bftoibw assimulo, labw aequo, dXXoibw, iror), Avq) : i8ovs(f. -ibrj). 3. Female Appellatives, in -is, -aiva, -€id, -o-o-a (-rra), -a, -tj. 4. Diminutives, in -iov (-i5io>/, -dpLov, -i/XXtov, -tidptov, -ixpiov, &C.), -io-KOS (F. -Lv, -avid, -a£. 6. Place, Instrument, &c, in -aiov, -6wv, 375 r N. B. Adjectives (373 s). I. From Verbs : in -ikos, -rijpios, -|j.u>v, active; -tos, -tcos, -vds, passive; -tpos, implying /i- ?iess; -pds, -as, -os. II. From Nouns : in -10s (-aios, -etos, -010s, -yos, -uios), joer- taining to ; -ikos, -kos, -aicds, -d'iKos, relating to ; -«os, -tvos, -en, material; -tvds, time or prevalence ; -tvos, -tjvos, -avds, patrial ; -pds, -epos, -ipos, -aXtos, -T]Xds, -wXds, -€ts, -toons, fulness or quality. III. From Adjectives and Ad- verbs : 1. As from Nouns. 2. Strengthened Forms : Com- parative, Superlative. C. Pronouns (53, 244 s, 377). D. Verbs (378 s). I. From Nouns and Adjectives : in -4, to be or do ; -d«, -aiv&), -l5vtt, to make; -CXfit, -d£«, imitative, active, &c. ; -idw, -aw, desiderative; -« with penult strengthened, active, &c. II. From Other Verbs : in -o-cCu, desiderative; -£«, -ctkco, -XXa>, frequentative, intensive, inceptive, causative, diminutive, &c; redu- plicated. E. Adverbs (380 s). I. Oblique Cases of Nouns and Adjectives : 1. Accusatives : of Nouns ; Neut. Sing, and Plur. of Adjectives (esp. Comparatives and Super- latives). 2. Genitives, in -0cv, place whence; -ov, place where ; -rjs, &c 3. Datives, in -01, -o0i, -■nou, -do-i, place wh-cre ; -j\ (-tj), -a (-a), -ai, -t, way, manner, place where, time when; &c. II. Derivatives signifying, 1. Manner, in -»s, -tjoov, -Sdv, -8-nv, -dBtjv, -8a, -81s, -( (t), -eC, -$• 2. Time «?7«mi, in -tc, -tea. 3. Place whither, in -o-c, -81s. 4. Number, in -dias. III. Prepositional Forms and Phrases : 1. Prepositions with their Cases. 2. Prepositions without Cases. 3. Derivatives from Prepositions, in -cd, -8ev, -wflcv, -tos, -8ov, &c. §55. ETYMOLOGY. 99 55. G. SIGNIFICANT ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. Note. The term " things " is here used in its large sense, as including every ohject of sense, discourse, or thought; whether persons, material things, or mere abstractions- The term " actions " is used for both actions and states. Grand Divisions. A. Essential Elements. The Signs of Things, . Actions, Classes. Substantives, II. Verbs, Orders. Subdivisions. B. Descriptive Elements. r Properties ) of \ Things, J III. Adjectives, C. Connective Elements. D. Instinctive Elements. Properties ' of Actions or of other Properties, t Relations of Things, IV. Adverbs, V. ' Nouns, ( Proper. Common, Appellative. Collective. Substantial. Abstract. Substantive Pronouns, ( Personal, < Reflexive, ( Connective, &c. , Infinitives (Gerunds, Supines). Transitive, Intransitive, ' Articles, Numerals, Adjective Pronoun* Participles. Adjectives, Of Manner, Of Place, Of Time, Of Degree, Of Number, &c. {Finite Verbs. Infinitives. Participles. | Definite. } Indefinite. {Cardinal. Ordinal. Multiple, &c. Possessive. Demonstrative. Connective. Interrogative. Indefinite. Distributive. Negative, &c. Of Quality. Of Circumstance. Demonstrative. Connective. Interrogative. Indefinite. Negative. b Emphatic, &c. Prepositions, Of Place, Time, Action, Cause, &c. Relations ) VT Sentences, {Conjunctions, Emotions, VII. Interjections, {Copulative. Adversative. Alternative. ' Complementary. Conditional. Subordinate, ■ Concessive. Causal. Final, &c. Of Pleasure, Pain, Address, &c. Without its essential elements, language could have no existence as rational discourse ; •without its descriptive elements, it would be vague and meagre ; without its connective elements, it would be disjointed ; and without its instinctive elements, it would want sensibility and passion. 100 TABLES. SYNTAX. §56. III. SYNTAX. A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 56. A thought expressed in words forms a sentence (sen- tentia, thought). Syntax is the doctrine of sentences, as Ety- mology, of words, Orthoepy, of vocal sounds, and Orthog- raphy, of written characters. a. To analyze a sentence is to divide it into its parts, observing their offices and relations. These parts, in Syntax, are of three kinds : in- cluded sentences, commonly called clauses ; phrases, expressive combina- tions of words, yet not sentences ; and single words, or those which in Etymology are so regarded : ' He came when it was time ' ; ' He came in good time ' ; ' He came ~ i. Sentential Analysis. 57. 1. Every complete sentence has two chief or primary elements, the Subject and Predicate ; and may have a third, the Compellative. a. The subject and compellative are those substantives in the sentence which denote most directly the persons or things spoken of (subject) or addressed (compellative) : 'Brethren, virtue ennobles.' b. The term substantives is here employed, as commonly in Syntax, to include not only nouns, substantive pronouns, and infinitives (55), but whatever is used substantively ; as, an adjective or adverb denoting some person or thing, a phrase or clause forming an object of thought or re- mark, or any word spoken of as a word: 'Now *s the day' ; 'Above twenty came'; ' Go is a verb.' See 68 a, 70 a, 491. c. The predicate is always a verb ; and, of more than one, that which is most closely related to the subject in the expression of the thought, (d) As the essence of a sentence is predication, the predicate is often taken as a representative of the sentence. Thus a word which connects or modifies a sentence, is familiarly spoken of as connecting or modifying the verb of the sentence : ' But perhaps he will go.' 2. Sentences have also various minor elements : e.) Exponents, words which mark the offices or relations of sentences or their parts : * He said that he went to Paris and Rome.' See 65 s. f . ) Elements that are grammatically independent ; as, a participial phrase absolute, interjections, &c. : ' This said, he fell, alas ! ' g.) Subordinate elements, or modifiers, which are joined with other elements to modify or limit them, i. e. to affect in various ways their force or application : ' Dear brethren, true virtue always ennobles.' h. A word which is modified by another, is termed its principal ; and this distinction of principals and modifiers applies not only to single words, but also to phrases and sentences. 58. Modifiers are of three kinds: (1) Words of Prop- erty, i. e. Adjectives and Adverbs (55), including all words so considered ; (2) Modifying Substantives, including Apposi- lives and Adjuncts ; and (3) Dependent Sentences. a. Modifying Substantives. When, with one name of a person §59. SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. » 101 or thing, another is connected for the sake of explanation, specification, description, or emphasis, the latter is said to be in apposition with the former, and is termed an Appositive : 'Paul the apostle.' All other modifying substantives are termed Adjuncts : 'Saul of Tarsus.' b. When two names for the same person or thing are connected as above, that should be regarded as the appositive which is added for the sake of modifying the other, whatever may be its position : ' George the King,' or 'King George.' It is not, however, always easy to determine this ; and two or more names are often so joined that they may be re- garded as forming one complex noun : * Charles James Fox.' c. An adjunct, in respect to form, is either prepositional or nude ; that is, it is either joined to its principal by a preposition, which serves as an exponent of its relation ; or it is joined immediately, without a prep- osition. — In the first case, it is also termed exponential ; and in the sec- ond, immediate. In the sentence, 'Give me the book,' the adjuncts me and book are both nude, or immediate ; while in ' Give the book to me,' the adjunct me (or, prefixing the exponent, to me) is prepositional. d. As to its use, an adjunct is regarded either as completing the idea of its principal, or as denoting some circumstance respecting it ; and is hence distinguished as complementary or circumstantial (more briefly, as a com- plement or a circumstance). In ' The son of Jesse slew Goliath with a sling,' 'of Jesse' and 'Goliath' are complements of 'son' and 'slew/ which would seem incomplete without them ; while the less essential 'with a sling' expresses a circumstance of 'slew,' viz. the instrument. e. A complement is distinguished as direct or indirect, according to the closeness of its relation. This distinction appears especially in the ob- jects of verbs, which form the most prominent class of complements. f. Among the most prominent circumstances, are those of place, time, cause, origin, material, motive, price, manner, means, degree, agency, &c. g. There is no line of division between complements and circumstances, or between direct and indirect complements ; and many adjuncts may be differently classed, according to the view which the mind takes of them. h. A modifying clause performs the office of an adjective, adverb, or substantive (appositive or adjunct) in the sentence to which it belongs. See 62 b, h. (i) Hence, all modifiers are adjective, adverbial, or substan- tive, in their force ; and, as substantive modifiers, when they modify other substantives, are akin to the adjective, but when they modify verbs, ad- jectives, or adverbs, to the adverbial, adjectives and adverbs may be taken as the types of all modifiers. 59. Some words have a double relation, which may be termed complex modification. Thus, a. A word modifying a verb, and thus partaking of an adverbial force (58 i), may also belong as an adjective, appositive, or adjunct, to the sub- ject or a complement of the verb : 'He is esteemed wise.' 'He stood erect.' 'They made him king.' An adjective, &c, thus predicated of its subject, is termed a predicate adjective, &c. ; while others, joined with- out predication, are termed direct or assumed (393 a, b). An assumed ad- jective is also called an epithet. A verb which can thus connect an ap- positive to its subject, is termed an oppositional verb. b. A clause modifying the predicate is often incorporated in a parti- cipial form, and assumed of the subject : ' Fearing this [as he feared this], he fled.' See 62 a, d. c. When two adjectives belong to the same substantive, one sometimes 102 TABLES. SENTENCES. § 59. exerts an adverbial force upon the other, or modifies the substantive taken with the other as a complex whole : ' Red hot iron ' ; ' All good men.' d. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase, often gives a special em- pliasis, or bears a special relation to a particular word in the sentence or phrase : ' Bless me, even me also,' Gen. 27. 34. ' He, he surely, will go.' 60. a. Any element, with all the words which arc subordinate to it and aid in expressing its idea, forms a logical part bearing the name of its element, but distinguished by the addition of 'part' ; while the element itself is distinguished, if need be, by the addition of 'word.' The for- mer is also distinguished as 'logical,' and the latter as 'grammatical' (sometimes called the "basis" of the logical part). In 'Good men are wise,' the subject-part, or logical subject (the subject as thought of), is 1 Good men,' containing the subject-w T ord, or grammatical subject, ' men ' ; and the predicate-part is 'are wise,' containing the predicate-word, or grammatical predicate (the word that expresses predication, and has the appropriate grammatical form and office) 'are.' b. The predicate-part may be resolved into the attribute and the copula. The attribute (attribiitus, ascribed) expresses the action, state, property, &c, ascribed to the subject; as 'wise,' above. The copula (Lat. tie, bond) is a substantive verb (a verb which simply expresses being), uniting the attribute with the subject ; as 'are,' above : 'The sun shines [is shining].' ' He fears [is afraid].' ii. Offices and Relations of Sentences. 61. A sentence is intellective (intellectus, understanding) or volitive (volo, to will), according as it primarily expresses an act of the understanding, or an act of the will. a. An intellective sentence is declarative or interrogative, accord- ing as it makes a statement, or asks a question: 'He Avill go.' 'Will he go ? ' (b) Interrogation is sometimes used rhetorically for strong statement, (c) A volitive sentence (also termed imperative, from its mode) may express command, entreaty, exhortation, permission, or even supposition : 'Go.' (d) A sentence of any one of these forms is termed exclamatory, when used for exclamation : ' How fast he goes ! ' (e) Sentences of all these classes may be either positive or negative ; i. e. they may affirm or deny, require or prohibit, &c. : ' I will go.' ' Do not go.' f. A declarative or interrogative sentence is actual, when it has re- spect to fact (what is, or is not, &c.) ; but contingent, when it has re- spect to contingency (what may be, or may not be, kc). See 613 s. These sentences may be also named from their modes and time {indicative, &c.) 62. Sentences are connected with each other in four ways : a.) By incorporation, in which the verb of one sentence is incorpo- rated in another sentence as an infinitive or participle (i. e. as a substan- tive or adjective). — Such a sentence, as well as its verb, is termed incor- porated, while sentences in which the predicate has a distinct form as a finite verb are termed distinct or finite. See G57 s. b.) By subordination, in which one of the sentences, without losing its distinct form, belongs to the other as a part or circumstance (subject, object, condition, reason, result, time, &c.) ; and is therefore termed subor- dinate, dependent, or included, while the other is distinguished as the chief, principal, or leading sentence or clause. — The two together form a complex sentence : ' Go, if you wish' ; ' That he went, is strange.' § 63. METHODS OP INDICATION. 103 c.) By coordination, in which the sentences are joined by a connec- tive, but neither is subordinate to the other. Sentences so connected are termed coordinate, and together form a compound sentence. See d, e. d.) By simple succession, in which one sentence directly follows an- other, without a connective (often referred to ellipsis, 68 d) : ' Luther said this. He sat down.' — This form may be changed to coordination, by supplying a connective (' L. said this, and he sat down ') ; often even to subordination (* When L. had said this, he sat down'), or the yet closer form of incorporation ('Having said this, L. sat down '). See 657 s, 693. e. A sentence is termed simple, if it is neither complex nor com- pound ; and independent, if it is neither incorporated nor subordinate, (f) A sentence which according to its main division is compound, may have complex members, and the converse, (g) Parts of a sentence are also compound, complex, or simple, according as they consist of portions joined by coordinate conjunctions expressed or understood, of portions joined by subordinate conjunctions, or of neither : * Asa and Eli gave more tluin ten dollars to John.' A sentence containing a compound or complex part may usually be resolved into two or more clauses, by supplying words. h. A subordinate clause is usually declarative in form. It is termed adjective (or relative), adverbial (final, conditional, concessive, causal, &c), or substantive (apposilive, adjunct, &c), according to its office or connective. See 58 h, 66. (i) An incorporated clause, though always substantive or adjective in form, is often adverbial in force (665, 674). j. An independent sentence, whether simple or compound, with all its dependent clauses, forms a period, which may be further named accord- ing to its special character. If a dependent clause expresses a condition of the principal, the combination is called a hypothetical period (virddecris, supposition) ; the dependent clause being called the premise, con- dition, or protasis (irpordvo), to stretch forth) ; and the principal clause, the conclusion, or apodosis (airodidwfii, to give back). — Some of these terms are also applied to parts of other complex sentences. k. Quotations, which form so important a class of substantive sen- tences, have two forms. In the first and more dramatic form, we simply repeat the words of another, without change or incorporation into our own discourse: He said, "I will go." This is termed Oratio Recta, Direct Discourse or Quotation. In the second and more narrative form, we make such changes and insert such connectives as will render the quo- tation an integral part of our own discourse : He said, that he vjouM go. This is termed Oratio Obliqua, Indirect Discourse or Quotation (643 s). This distinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of another. 1. An incorporated clause does not usually require a separate analysis, except where, as in Latin and Greek, an Infinitive takes the place of an- other mode in Indirect Discourse. in. Methods of Indication. 63. The offices and relations of sentences and their parts are indicated in three ways : (a) by the form of the words ; (b) by the arrangement ; and (c) by separate words, which act as signs or exponents of these offices or relations. A. Indication by Form. This has four chief objects : a.) To mark the connection of appositives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, with their subjects (i. e. the substantives to which they refer), by a correspondence of form, termed agreement or concord. See 76, 492 s. 104 TABLES. — SYNTAX. § 63. b.) To mark, by appropriate forms, the offices and relations of substan- tives. This is done, in most languages, through the distinction of case. "When the form of a substantive is determined by its dependence upon another word, it is said to be governed by that word ; and the influence exerted upon it is termed government or regimen. See 76. c.) To mark, by the form of an adjective or adverb, the degree in which its property is possessed (comparison, 29, 256 s). d.) To mark the offices and relations of sentences, through the form of the verb, the predicating word. See 57 c, 30, 265 s. e. In agreement, the words which are connected are regarded, by a species of personification, as allies ; in government, as ruler and ruled. (t) Of nude adjuncts, those only which are complementary (58 c, d), are usually spoken of as governed. Prepositional adjuncts are commonly said to be governed by the prepositions ; and are called their complements, ob- jects, or, by a happier term, sequents. g. In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more specifically what has been generally expressed by some older form. This older form thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate sphere, and itself more specific in its expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere, is peculiarly the arbiter of language ; — "Usus, Quern penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi "; — and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to employ the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The same is true of words and methods of construction. See 70 v. 64i B. Arrangement, a. Words are arranged for effect upon the understanding, the emotions, or the ear : in other words, the arrangement of a sentence may have for its object, (1) To exhibit the offices and rela- tions of the words ; (2) To present the thought in an impressive manner ; (3) To produce an agreeable effect upon the ear. — That order which most effectually secures the first object is termed the logical order; the second, the rhetorical order; the third, the rhythmical order. b. In the logical order, the verb is usually placed after the subject, and before the attribute, if this is distinct from the verb (60 b) ; and (c) a word which is governed by another is usually placed after it. (d) Words are often spoken of in Syntax, as following or preceding others, with refer- ence to the logical or usual order, without regard to their actual position. 65. C. Use of Exponents. These mark the offices or relations (1) of words (including pJirases), or (2) of sentences. 1. Word-Exponents are (a) those which mark the relations of ad- juncts (58 c), i. e. prepositions ("case-links") ; (b) conjunctions used as in 62 g; (c) interjections marking address or exclamation (O, ah, 484, 73 e) ; (d) modal signs (modus, manner), i. e. connective adverbs of manner used elliptically to limit the application of modifiers (' I took him as a friend,' 393 c, 711). The last may be parsed as connective ad- verbs by supplying ellipses, but most conveniently as mere signs uniting modifiers with their principals. 66. 2. Sentential Exponents are either connective (denoting the connection of sentences), or characteristic (marking their charac- ter, without connecting them). a. The connectives may simply denote the relations of the sentences (conjunctions, "clause-links," 700 s); or (b) they may also enter into their structure as pronouns or adverbs (connective pronouns or ad- verbs). A connective pronoun or adverb is either (c) relative (referring § 68. FIGURES. ELLIPSIS. 105 to an antecedent, 549 s), or (d) complementary (introducing a sentence nsed substantively, 563 s). Thus, (a) tlud, if, until, though, (c) wlw (73 e) ; (d) what (73 d). Connectives are either (e) primary (directly uniting the sentences), or (f) secondary (corresponding to the primary, "as the eye to the hook") : 'He (f) both reads (e) and writes ;' '(e) Though he feared, (f) yet lie went.* g. The characteristic exponents (marking sentences as negative, interrogative, contingent, &c.) maybe adverbs or pronouns: * Who was it?' ' It was not I.' 'I see no man.' B. FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 67. Those special forms of expression which are termed Figures of Syntax, may be referred to four great heads, Ellipsis, Pleonasm, Enallage, and Hyperbaton. a. Figures of Syntax are associated and blended with those of Rhetoric ; and some of the latter will be mentioned below. Both classes are more common in poetry than in prose ; in colloquial, than in formal discourse ; and in the language of passion, than in that of narra- tive or argument. b. The use of unauthorized constructions is termed solecism (from 26Xoi/cot, dwellers in Soli, of Cilicia, famed for their bad Greek) ; of un- authorized words, barbarism (fidpfiapos, barbarian) ; of antique words or constructions, ARCHAfsM (dpxaios, ancient). A form of construction specially belonging to a particular language is called an idiotism or Idiom (tdios, peculiar) ; or, from the name of the language, a Hebraism, Hellenism or Grecism, Latinism, Anglicism, &c. 68. i. Ellipsis (eWeiyjns, defect) is the omission of words which are required for the most complete and regular expres- sion of the sense. 1. These words are said to be understood. The omission may take place without any other change in the form of the expression ; or it may be attended with other changes, respecting either the words which are employed, or the forms of those words : • Will you go ? ' ' [I will go] Certainly'; or 'Fes' [=1 will go]; or, ' No' [= not]. See 69a. (2) There is a rhetorical figure called Omission, in which there is a pre- tence of omitting something, which is thus mentioned and often made more prominent : ' His crime and. folly I forbear to mention.' 3. Ellipsis exhibits a striking paradox. It is generally true, that, the more essential a word is to the grammatical construction of the discourse, the more apt it is to be omitted ; for this reason, that it is the more readily supplied from the very necessity of the case. Hence the frequent omission of the word to which another refers as its subject or by which another is governed, of the substantive verb, of the direct object of a transitive verb, &c. ; in general, of words modified rather than modifiers, and of leading rather than subordinate clauses. See 506, 571 s, 476, 626. 4. To ellipsis are usually referred, by grammarians, all abbreviated and compendious forms of construction, however familiar (though the term Brachylogy [brief expression] would often apply more properly) : as, a.) Adjectives used substantively, and adverbs used substantively or ad- jectively (506 s, 526 s) : (b) Many forms of inscription, salutation, excla- mation, &c. (401, 670) : (c) The construction of responsives (words in the answer, corresponding to interrogatives in the question), and other 10G TABLES. PLEONASM. § G8. forms of reply; as, '"Who saw it?' 'I' [saw it]: (d) Asyndeton (dolfofcroff, tio£ bound together), the omission of a conjunction or other con- nective ; often greatly promoting energy and vivacity, as in Caesar's cele- brated despatch, Veni, vidi, vici, 1 came — saw — conquered. See 707. (e) Aposiopkms (airoai&Trnais, tfic becoming silent), the failure to finish a sentence, whether from design, diversion of thought, overpowering emo- tion, or any other cause ; as, ' If you ever do this again ' So not unfrequently after a conditional clause (636 s). f.) Most cases of compound construction (60). A word referring to a compound subject has either the form which is required by all the sub- stantives in the subject, taken together, or that which is required by ons of them, taken singly. In the former construction, named Syllepsis (a6\- \r}ij/is, taking together), the word is said to agree with all the substantives ; in the latter, named Zeugma (^eOy/xa, yoking), it is said to agree with one of the substantives, and to be understood with the rest. For ' My heart and my flesh rejoice,' Ps. 84. 2, an older version has, ' My heart and my flesh crieth out. 1 See 495 s. (g) The term zeugma is used, in general, to denote the connection of a word with a number of words, to a part of which only it is appropriate in meaning, or in form (while, in syllepsis, it would suit the whole) : ' You are blind of ear, mind, and eye ' (Soph. 0. T. 371). Cf. § 572 b. 69. ii. Pleonasm (irXcovao-pos, redundance) is the use of more words than the sense requires. a. Pleonasm may consist in the simple repetition or insertion of words, or it may be attended with more important changes in the form of the ex- pression (cf. 68. 1 ; the limits of both Ellipsis and Pleonasm are very in- definite), (b) One of its common forms is empliatic repetition, in the same or in similar words (the latter specially named Synonymia) : ' Never, never, never ! ' ' Oh, spare me ! pardon and forgive ! ' c. Useless repetition is termed Tautology (rauroXoyia, saying the same thing) : (d) a circuitous manner of expression, Periphrasis or Circumlocu- tion (irepL facio, to make) ; (g) when a speaker turns aside in his discourse so to address them (or to address absent per- sons as if present), it is termed Apostrophe (airoo-Tpttpw, to turn from) : ' Sing, heavens ; and be joyful, earth ! ' Is. 49! 13. h. Metonymy (ixerwvvpda, change of name) gives to one object the name of another which is related to it : as, crown, throne, and sceptre, for sovereignty, (i) An abstract noun is often used for a concrete, for greater strength of expression, especially in apposition : ' He is my defence.' j. Synecdoche (o-vv€k8ox^, comprehension) puts apart for the whole, or the whole for a part : keel, for ship ; steel, for sivord. k. Irony (dpuveia, dissimulation) is the use of a word for its opposite : hero, for coward. (1) A seeming contradiction, termed Oxymoron (<5£i/- fiwpos, keenly foolish), is sometimes made by uniting words of opposite signification : learned ignorance. m. A form of expression beyond the truth is termed Hyperbole (virep- /3oXt7, throwing beyond) ; designedly short of it, Litotes (Xirorrj?, sim- plicity) ; more agreeable, .Euphemism (€v7)tu \Interrogative,\Contingent [Subjunctive, &cj; kol- Umperative, expressing command, entreaty, exclamatory, &c. ;J lowing — by simple succession, or connected by •— to — as a Coordinate Sentence, or as a Subordinate Clause, performing the office of a Substan- tive, Adjective, or Adverb. Remarks. 2. Analyze the Sentence into its Grammatical or its Logical Parts, or both : s^ect i iter 1 The Predicate \\% — , modified by the ~ uyerD . \ which [is intro- Costive/ «™J duced by — , and] is itself modified by — , and this by — , &c. ; or by the Dependent Clause — , which performs the office of — , and consists of — . [Minor parts independent are the Interjection — , &c] Remarks. KIte, & c}-' "»*** "y «„ U3S55&,) -, consisting - the Adjunct &c.}~ [ mtro v irapa /ScurcXet 6mu)v. " Clearchus and Proxenus, and the other Greeks present, you know not what you are doing. For, if you engage in any battle with each other, consider that this day both I shall be cut down, and you not long after me ; for, our affairs going ill, all these bar- barians, whom you see, will be worse enemies to us than those with the king." Xen. An. i. 5. 16. A 1 ; a 2 a 2 a a', b z b. *Y v » o CONN. A l v (on) 2f Y*P a v . yi a' .KCU a' El it -yap (ovs) SUB J. PRED. IKD. T/A€tS frlTC fKXiwpye Kal np6£«v€ w*e \Kal"EXXi]v€s (l v , 2') ol aXXot° Tfieis TTOICIT6 8ti v oi irapovTCS 'T(X€?5 (J) & KaTaK€Koi|/£O-0at 4v ttj T|u^pa v vp.ds (KaTaKCK<5J;€ Personal ^ 1^ {Decline.) r^. t is a Reflexive [• Pronoun, [of the 2 >Pers.],from ; L, er ' 'K Relative, &cj 3J '[Comp.-,] Nom.^i Sing.^ Masc.^ the subject of — ^ Stem — , Affix — ; the Gen. j-Plur. [-Fern. > ; agreeing with — I, Rule. &c. J Dual J Neut. J gov'd by — , &c.J [It refers to — as its a ntecedent J ' ^ u * e ' an( ^ connects — to — Remarks. . De^onfnT^'l, ^^^> [Der'd from-,] /Stem - \ 1S a Contract " \ lTOm ; [Comp'd of—, ] \Stems f* Verb in /u, &c, J Pres. ^ Ind. ^ Act. "j [Prefix — ,] Affix — ; the Impf. > Subj. >• Mid. V {vary and inflect) ; Fut, &c.J Opt, &cJ Pass. J '{if finite) the 1 Pers. Sing., &c, agreeing with — , (if Inf.) having for its subject -, and {J^ « ^ Nom.^ SingO Masc.^ . .,, {if Part.) the Gen. Ipiu?. I Fern. I; agreeing with - &c. J DualJ NeutJ used substantively, &c Rule. Remarks. Interrogative ^ Manner ^ Pos. "^ ve u is an Demonstrative V Adverb of Place V, [in the Comp. [-Degree, Indefinite, &c.J Time,&cJ Sup. J from — {compare) ; Der. from — , or Comp. of — ] ; modifying — , Rule. [It refers to — as its antecedent, and connects — to — .] Remarks. is a Preposition [Der. or Comp. — ], governing — , and marking its relation to — (a relation of place, time, agency, cause, &c), Rule. Remarks. ^ a Fi^lT} Conjunction. [compA] co ^^8 ~ to - (and 75. PARSING OF WORDS. 113 denoting addition, opposition, comparison, &c, or introducing its clause as an end, condition, <&c., or as used substantively), Rule. Remarks. is an Interjection [Der. or Comp. — ], (expressing emotion, &c.,) and independent of grammatical construction (684). Remarks. 75. Notes, a. When declension in full is not desired, give the Nom. and Gen. in Substantives and in Adjectives of 1 Term., and the different forms of the Nom. in Adjectives of 2 or 3 Term, (b) In conjugating, give the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and Perf. if in use (to which it is also well to add the 2 Aor. if used) ; but sometimes, more fully, the leading tense of each system in use. The term "vary " is used above in a specific sense, to denote giving the different modes of a tense, or, as it is sometimes called, giving the synopsis of the tense; and the term "inflect" to denote giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of course, takes the place of this), (c) After completing the formula above (which will be done with least danger of omission or delay, if a uniform order is observed), add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form, signification, and use of the word ; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic changes of consonants, literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the number, case, degree, voice, mode, tense, &c. ; citing, from the Grammar, the appropriate rule or remark, (d) Some particulars in the forms above, which do not apply to all words, are inclosed in brackets \ and some di- rections or suggestions, in parentheses. e. It is a very useful exercise to write minute analyses of words ; some- times even marking the offices of the different parts of a flexible ending (12, 33). E. g., the following verbs (mostly in compound forms), and the following compound nouns and adjectives may be written as below : k\ii- (TdTO, ~\eXvKCUTLV (37), &p«TOM (39 d), 7}d£\-qiav (Ace.) philosophy, fipoxXos (385 a), ipyoXdfiov (387 a), ayvures (386. 4), irvpiyeviaiv (383 a), XtfofidXcp (386. 1), vofiodiras (386. 3), 6€ a "•3 d o 1 Cm | 3 < 1 A 3 1 1 1 o o | 1 ,2 | a k I to .5 1 s § 1 1 ! k G | ! # € M a a TO n \e \<> 1 K a vt\ e ! « a y Av oirX $ 4pY Xdp !o d ■yvo yvw T i cs irvp M e PaX /36X 4 !o I j' V€|X 06 T a Vd T ts 114: TABLES. § 76. 76. D. CHIEF RULES OF GREEK SYNTAX. I. An Appositive agrees in case with its subject. § 393. II. The Subject of a finite verb is put in the Nominative. 400. III. Substantives independent of grammatical construction are put in the Nominative. 401. A. General Rule for the Genitive. The Point of Departure and the Cause are put in the Genitive ; or, The Genitive is used to ex- press that of or from which something is or is done. 403. IV. Words of separation and distinction govern the Genitive. 404. V. The Comparative Degree governs the Genitive. 408. VI. The origin, source, and material are put in the Genitive. 412. VII. The theme of discourse or of thought is put in the Gen. 413. VIII. Words of plenty and want govern the Genitive. 414. IX. The whole of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive. 415. X. Words of sharing, beginning, and touch govern the Genitive. 424. XL The motive, reason, and end in view are put in the Gen. 429. XII. Price, value, merit, and crime are put in the Genitive. 431. XIII. Words of sensation and of mental state or action govern the Genitive. 432. XIV. The time and place in which are put in the Genitive. 433. XV. The author, agent, and giver are put in the Genitive. 434. XVI. An adjunct defining A thing or property is put in the Gen- itive ; or, A substantive, adjective, or adverb, as such, governs the Genitive. 435. B. A word may govern the Genitive, by virtue of an included substantive, adjective, or adverb. 436. C. The Compounds of Alpha Privative govern the Genitive. 436. D. General Rule for the Dative Objective. The Object of Approach or of Influence is put in the Dative ; or, An Indirect Object is put in the Dative ; or, The Dative is used to express that to or for which something is or is done. 448. XVII. Words of nearness and likeness govern the Dative. 449. XVIII. The object of influence is put in the Dative. 452. E. Substantive verbs take a Dative of the possessor. 459. F. General Rule for the Dative Residual. An Attendant Thing or Circumstance, simply viewed as such, is put in the Dative. 465. XIX. The means and mode are put in the Dative. 466. XX. The time and place at which are put in the Dative. 469. XXI. The direct object and the effect of an action are put in the Accusative. 472. G. An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb is put in the Accusative. 472. Causatives govern the Accusative together with the case of the included verb. 473. H. Adverbs of swearing are followed by the Accusative. 476. XXII. The Accusative is used in specifying to what part, property, &c. a word or expression applies 481. XXIII. Extent of time or space is put in the Accusative. 482. XXIV. The Accusative is often used adverbially, to express degree, manner, order, &c. 483. XXV. The Compellative of a sentence is put in the Vocative. 484. J. Agreement is commonly according to form, but often rather according to sense. 493. XXVI. An Adjective agrees with its subject in gender, number, and case. 504. XXVII. A Pronoun agrees with its subject in gender t number, and per- son. 505. §76. RULES OF SYNTAX. 115 The relative commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the relative clause limits or defines an antecedent in the Genitive or Dative, and the relative would properly be an Accusative depending upon a verb. 554. K. The repetition of the relative is commonly avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of & personal pronoun or of a demonstrative. 562. XXVIII. The Article is prefixed to substantives, to mark them as definite. 520. XXIX. A Verb agrees with its subject in member and person. 568. L. The Neuter Plural has regularly its verb in the singular. 569. M. The uses of the Voices are sometimes interchanged. 575. The Passive Voice has for its subject a complement of the Active, commonly a direct, but sometimes an indirect complement. Any other word governed by the Act. , and not in apposition with this, may remain unchanged with the Pass. The subject of the Active is commonly expressed, with the Pass., by the Gen. with a preposition. 586. XXX. The Definite Tenses express the action as doing at the time ; the Indefinite, simply as performed in the time ; and the Complete, as complete at the time. In the Indicative, this time is marked as present or future by the primary tenses, and as past by the sec- ondary ; in the other modes, it is not marked. 590. N. The uses of the Tenses are often interchanged. 602. XXXI. The Indicative expresses fact; the Subjunctive, present con- tingency ; and the Optative, past contingency. 613. 0. The Subjunctive regularly follows a tense referring to present or future time ; and the Optative, a tense referring to past time. 617. P. After a final conjunction, (a) an object of present forethought is expressed by the Sub)., or (b) in the Future, by the Ind. ; but (c) an object of past forethought, by the Opt., or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Ind. 624. Q. In prohibitions with /u>?, the Present is put in the Imperative, and the Aorist in the Subjunctive. 628. R. In the hypothetical period, (a, b) if the premise is presented as already decided in point of fact, it takes the Indicative ; (c) if it is presented as undecided, but ivith pres- ent expectation of decision, it takes the Subjunctive; (d) otherwise, it takes the Opta- tive. In the first case, the conclusion is commonly in the Ind. or Imv. ; in the sec- ond, in the Fut. Ind. or an equivalent ; and in the third, in theGV. with av. 631. S. A relative clause commonly uses the modes like other sentences to which it is most nearly akin . 640. T. The Optative is the finite mode appropriate to Indirect Discourse in past time. 643. U. The uses of the Finite Modes are often interchanged. 649. XXXII. The Imperative is the most direct expression of an act of the will. 655. XXXIII. The Infinitive is construed as a neuter noun. 663. XXXIV. The Subject of the Infinitive is put in the Accusative. 666. V. The Infinitive often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, ex- clamation, or question. 670. W. Some connectives are followed by the Infinitive ; especially «s, wore, olos, and 00-05. 671. XXXV. A participle and substantive are put absolute in the Gen- itive ; an impersonal participle, in the Accusative. 675. X. A Participle is often preceded by cos or wo-nep, chiefly to mark it as subjective. 680. Y. Impersonal verbals in -reov, or -re'a, (a) govern the same cases as the verbs from which thev are derived ; and (b) have sometimes the agent in the Accusative, instead of the Dative. 682. XXXVI. Adverbs modify sentences, phrases, and words; chiefly verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. 685. Negation, as desired, feared, or assumed, uses /liij ; but otherwise, ov. 686. XXXVII. Prepositions govern adjuncts, and mark their relations. 688. Z. A Preposition in composition often governs the same case, as when it stands by itself. 699. XXXVIII. Conjunctions connect sentences and like parts of a sen- tence. 700. The uses of the particles are often interchanged. 703. The Interjection is independent of grammatical construction 684 b. 116 TABLES. PROSODY. §77. IV. PROSODY AND PRONUNCIATION. 77. A. Table of Feet. The Numeral prefixed to each Class marks the number of Breves 3 n its measure. 1. [2u\Xa/3r? Bpax«a, Short Syllable, w f*6\l 2. [2i/\\a/3?7 Mcucpd, Long Syllable, fify.] Hvpptxtos, Pyrrhic, ( : p.be. 3. "la/x^os, Iambus, Iamb, SB , pAvu. Tpoxcuos, Xo/3€toj, Trochee, Choree, ^ fJLTJKOS. TpLppaxvs, Tribrach, ^,_^ pdvopuev. 4. A&KTv\o$, Dactyl, — s*.w Suxrere. ' Apo.it aiLftpaxvs, Amphibrach, w ^ %8os. Jlalwv p', Paeon II., w — _^. iydpopev. llaiwp y, Pajon III., w_ — w €dt\ V Te. Haliav 5', Paeon IV., — .««< deo5eios, Dispondee, fiovXefouvTcu. 78. B. Metrical Description and Analysis. I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is written. II. Describe the particular Verse. Monomcter ) Acatalectic ) consist- ) 1 Dimeter, &c. \ Catalectic, &c. ) ' ing of ) 2,&c. TMaso 1 Peiltliemim > ) which are — . The Caesura is the \ v V Hephthemim, > after — . T4. : fl Dactylic 11 1S Iambic, &c Feet, [Fern.] Pastoral, &c, III. Analyze by [Dipodies and] Feet. -«& | HL *<, | W* i by j ***£, | Eule. § 79. PRONUNCIATION. 117 79. C. Methods op Pronunciation. [a. The directions here given do not apply to 7 before k, y, \, or g, where it is regarded as a nasal, having the sound of ng in king : dyyeXos, \fry£. Those for d, rj, and « apply also to a, fl, and a>. See 137 c, 109. b. Where consonants or the rough breathing are not specially noticed, it will be understood that they have the prevalent sounds of the corre- sponding letters in English : thus, p, 8, £, X, p., v, ir, p, t, , i|r, \ pro- nounced like b, d, z, I, m, n, p, r, t, ph, ps, h, in bud, zeal, p/uintom, rap, hops; y, k, hard, like g, k, in keg ; 0, £, however, resembling the German guttu- ral ch more than the English k, and doubled or combined consonants being both sounded. — For probabilities respecting the details of the An- cient Method, see "History of the Greek Alphabet and Pronunciation," by Professor Sophocles ; from whose Romaic Grammars, the following statement of Method 2 has been chiefly condensed. It shows how greatly the Greek, like the English, has been affected by the precession of vowels. 2. Modern Greek Method, g. Vowels: a like a in father ; but after the sound of t, more like a in peculiarity : c or at a little longer than e in men : 1, tj, -j|, «i, 01, v, or vi, like i in machine : o or <■> nearly as in obey : ov like 00 in moon. In av, €v, i)v, a>v, the v has the sound of P be- fore p, -y, 8, I, X, a, v, p, or a vowel ; but otherwise, that of <|> : (pevyw, avros, pronounced (frtpyw, &r6s. h. Consonants : p nearly as v (a little softer) : -y before the sound of 6 or 1, a little stronger than y in yes ; otherwise guttural, very nearly like the German g in Tag : 8 like th in the : k like k (somewhat softened be- fore the sound of € or 1) ; but after the sound of ng, like g in go : X and v like I and n ; but before the sound of 1, like li in filial, and ni in onion ; while final v in av, lav, Iv, trvv, or the article, sounds like ng before k or I, and like m before ir or \|f (rbv Kaipov, abv irdXei pron. tong-gerdn, (sim- bdli) : x, ik like p, ps ; but after the sound of m, like b, bs : i/s /3a nearly as / (a little softer) : \ like the German ch. See a, b. As in English, a consonant doubled is sounded but once. i. The rough breathing is silent ; and the quantity of a vowel is not considered. The ictus is placed according to the written accent. A pro- clitic is pronounced as if a part of the word which it precedes ; and an enclitic, as if a part of the word which it follows. The accent of an en- clitic is only regarded when the preceding word is accented on the ante- penult : thus \7\eKral /xoi has a secondary ictus on Krai. 3. English Method, j. Modern scholars have pronounced the Greek variously ; commonly according to the analogy of their respective lan- guages. Hence the following method, though not closely approaching the ancient, has been extensively used in England and this country : k. Simple Voivels : tj, v, «, like e in mete, u in tube, o in note (tvtttt)- cwv) : €, o, like e in let, o in dot ; but before another vowel, or at the end of a word, like e in real and o in go (iv, \eovre, to) : a and i, in general, like a and i in English; when protracted, like a in hate, i in pine; when abrupt, like a in hat, i in pin. At the end of a word, i is always pro- tracted ; but a, except in monosyllables, takes the sound of a in era : avrl, fxia, rd. If a or i receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and is followed by a single consonant or £, it is protracted in the penult, but abrupt in any preceding syllable (except that a is here protracted, if the next vowel is 6 or i before another voweb : i'fw • irarepa, KaratpiX^u • rafmnt See c. — P affects an abrupt vowel preceding, in the same way as r in English : ap/xa, 'Ep/xrjs, 8pvis. 1. Diphthongs: at like the affirmative ay ; ci, ci in height; ot, oim oil ; vt, ui in quiet ; av, au in liaul ; cv and T)v, eu in feud, Europe ; ov and »v, ou in thou : eldviai, e&yoi, vicp. See a. r. Consonants : £ like z (by some, like a soft dz) : \, by some, like ch in clxaos ; by others, like the German guttural ch: x^ip-i.^. Every con- sonant should be pronounced, and with a uniform sound except v (a) ; the doubling of a consonant should be, at least, slightly marked ; and p should be rougher than p : pva., trT-qaaw, fiMWiov, ippw. See b. t. The ictus is placed according to the written accent. § 80. . GREEK APPENDIX. 119 80. IIAPAPTHMA 'EAAHNIKON. [o. *OP0OrPA$IA. STOix«ia elements, "ypappaTa letters; iiriva semivowels, vypd liquids, va mutes, i/>7Ad smooth, /*eVa mid- dle, Saata rough. SvXXapT) syllable ; XP 0V0S quantity. p\ IIvevfiaTa breathings: 5a8uxi (rbvoi) accents : d£eia acute, fiapeia grave, irepi waavTus 6 dpiOpbs, dvXaSr] cvikos, Svucbs, itXti- 0vvtikos (178). Tov riri0€TOv ol (3a0p.ol XtyovTat. 0€tikos, o-vyKpiTiKbs, tnrcpOeriKos (256). €. T/)e?5 £x ei 8ia0co-6is to pt]pa, 4v€p7T]TiK'f|v, |iio-T]v, ira0T]TiK^v (266) • /cal iv endo-Tv 5ta06ret irhre SiaKpiuovrai l-yicXio-cis, &v rivo-apes p.kv irapep.- 4>a-ri.Kai, 6pumicf|, viroTaKTtK-fi, cvktiic?|, irpo T0 KaT0 ^ T °v faroKeifxe'vov Xey6p.evov (56 b). Aid p.bvov tov pt|paTos KaTrryopetTai ti. — Meraf3aTiica kclXovvtcli to. p^txara t& Toidvdt ivtpyeiav drjXovvra, ijris e£ dvdyKrjs cis irpdcruirov rj irpdy/xa 8idov, /iera- /3aiWi (58 c). T]. Ilapep^paTiKOv pharos t6 viroKeip.evov Tiderat /car' dvouacrriK'fjv (400) • Kal Ta6rrj o~up.6>V€i r6 prjfia /car dpiOpov re /cat irpdo-wirov (568). — IIXci- ovcuv 6vtuv tQ>v tov pruxaTos viroKeip-huiv Kal erepoirpocrc&irwv, riderac t6 prjp.a /card to liriKpaTc'orcpov ■ viKq. 5' del t6 irp»TOV to ScvTcpov irpdawTrov, Kal TovTo-rb Tpfrrov (496 d). 0. 2xfjp.a 'Attikov. Wnvdaai p.hroi ol 'AttikoI irXT]0wriicf|v ovoaa- (ttik^V ov>8€T€pav prjp.aTi Ivikw irapaTidivai (569). 1, T/75 dira-pcp-cpaTOv t6 viroKeifieuov TideraL Kar ttlnaTtK^v (670). K. T6 4iru0€TOV Kal i] ueroX"?! crvfiipoivovai rols ets d dva c ^ re bp.OY€V(5v cfre 120 . TABLES. — GREEK RULES. • §80. erepo-yevwv (223 a), Kar ovSt'repov yivos ' eVi 8e k^^6\€i8o€s (405 b) 0-Tjp.a.PTucd, Kal rd rovrois kvavrla ' irpbs 8e £k rdv iiridirup, rd els -iKos \-ffyovra (444), rd £k tov a- OTepijTiicoO aivdera (436 b), Kal rd irapa- Oeriicd (406 s), rd crvyKpiTiKa dyXadr) Kal virepOenicd, Kal rovrois avd\oya • iK be t&v prjpidTU)!', rd applied, (407) Kal virapKTiKa (437), rd evdpgecas f) X'/j- £e«S o-r]iiai>TiKd (425, 405), Kal rd ts, evavTionjTos, Sit] -y^j crews, Sdcreus o-rfpuvriKa, rd re cJ>i\ikt)v 7) tyGpiK-^v 7rp6s rim SidGecrtv b-r\kovvra (450 s). o. AtTiaTiKfj (rwrdtrcoj^rot rd /5/ws ?) d/ieVws peTo-Paritcd ^/xara (472). AiitXtJ alriariKrj o~vvrao~o~Qvrai rd iKereuriKa, rd iraiSeuriicd, rd evSucrcws 7) ckSvctcws 0-rjp.avTLKa, rd r^v twoiav e"x ovTa T °v € $ % ko,k«s Xe-yeiv 7) iroitiv (480 c). it. 'O xpovos oirdrc ij Iv <5 yiveral n, eV^epercu SotiktJ ifj "yeviKfj, etre dirpo06T aiTiaTiKT)s (472 g), ' , see 109. 93. II. The Breathings are the Smooth or Soft (spiritus lenis : ' ), and the Rough (spiritus asper : * ), also called the Aspirate (asplro, to breathe). The first denotes a gentle emis- sion of the breath, such as is needed before the utterance of any initial vowel, but in most languages is not marked ; the second, a strong emission, such as in English is represented by h. a. The rough breathing becomes, in Latin and English, h, while the smooth is not written : as, "E/crup Hector, "Epv% Eryx, 'P6x Rhea. b. One of the breathings is placed over every initial vowel. For its place over a diphthong, see 110. c. An initial v has always the rough breathing to assist in its utterance (as in English an initial long u is always preceded by the sound of y ; thus, 5s, i^ets, as, in English, use, pronounced yuse, union) ; except in the JEolic dialect, and in the Epic forms tffi/xes, ti/Afju, {Jfi/xe. d. An initial p requires, for its proper vibration or rolling, a strong aspiration, and is therefore always marked with the rough breathing : as, ptu. ' When p is doubled, the first p has the smooth breathing, and the second the rough (in Latin rrh) : as, Ilvppos Pyrrhus. Some excellent editors, however, notwithstanding old usage and Latin analogy, now write pp without the breathings : thus, II%>os. 94. III. The Accents are the Acute ( ' ), the Grave ( ), and the Circumflex ( " or " ). For their use, see Prosody. See also 5. 95. IV. The Marks of Punctuation are the Comma (, ); the Colon ( • ), taking the place of our colon and semicolon ; the Period ( . ) ; and the Note of Interrogation ( ; ), which has the form of ours ( / ) inverted. To these some editors have judiciously added the Note of Exclama- tion ( !). 96. V. Other- Characters, a. Coronis and Apostrophe. The mark ( ' ), which at the beginning of a word is the smooth breathing, over the middle is the Coronis (Kopavls, crooked mark), or mark of crasis, and at the end, the Apostrophe (124 b, 127) : as, ravrd for ra avrd, aXX' eyco for a\\a eyd>. b. The Hyphen, Diaeresis, Dash, and Marks of Parenthesis and Quotation are used in printing Greek as in English. c. Among the other signs used by critics and editors are Brackets [], to enclose words of doubtful authenticity; the Obelisk (t or — ), to mark verses or words as faulty ; the Asterisk ( * ), to denote that some- 126 HISTORY OP ORTHOGRAPHY. § 96. thing is wanting in the text ; and Marks of Quantity, viz. (-), to mark a vowel or syllable as long ; ( w ), as short ; ( s or "" ), as either long or short. HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. 97. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the Phoe- nician is abundantly established both by historical and by internal evidence. a. According to common tradition, letters were first "brought into Greece by Cadmus, a Phoenician, who founded Thebes long before the Trojan war. In illustration, we present in § 2 the common Hebrew alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Phoenician, placing by the side the corresponding Greek letters, and also the Latin. 98. This borrowed alphabet received in the course of time important modifications. a. The original Phoenician alphabet had no proper vowels. The Greeks, therefore, employed as such those letters which, as representing various breathings or aspirate sounds, were nearest akin to vowels ; viz. A, E, F, H, 1, andO. b. The aspirate use of E and F still continued for a period, and hence these letters when employed as vowels were distinguished by the term \f.l\6v, smooth; thus, "E \fi\ov, T T \fi\bv. It will be observed that the last of these letters, when used as a vowel, was somewhat changed in form, and was put at the end of the old alphabet. c. To the Phoenician alphabet the Greeks added the aspirates and X, the double consonant M>, and the sign for long o, Q, naturally placing them at the end. In distinction, the short o was now termed "0 /xiKpuv, small ; and the long o, "Q /«7a, great 0. d. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also 9 and <7%, which were only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 i n their proper places in the alphabet, but <7ft -at the end. The Latin alphabet, which ours here follows, dropped <%), but retained the other two, F and Q, in their proper places. e. F (also named from its form the Digamma, i. e. the double Gamma) is still found upon some inscriptions and coins, and performs an important office in the explanation of the forms of the language. Its restoration by Bentley to the Homeric poems has removed so many apparent hiatuses and irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence, in the time of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. CHAPTEE II. FIGURES AFFECTING LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 99. The letters and sounds in words are subject to many changes, called figures, as affecting the form of the word, a. These changes may be either euphonic, poetic, or dialectic. § 105. FIGURES. 127 b. Euphonic changes are chiefly to avoid hiatus (the succession of dis- tinct vowels wi Jiout an intervening consonant) ; to reduce the openness of vowels (107, 114-116) ; to secure a proper rhythm ; and to prevent excessive or undesirable combinations of consonants, and difficult or less agreeable modes of beginning and ending words. 100. Iii the earliest Greek of which we have traces, the prevalent method of preventing hiatus was by the insertion of consonants ; particularly F and 2 (as in Latin v, b, and r), but also A, $, &c. In the progress of the language, these inserted consonants extensively dropped out, and the more rapid method by contraction prevailed. 101. To give to the discourse a proper flow and rhythm, especially in poetry, syllables are lengthened or shortened, united or resolved. 102. To prevent undesirable combinations of consonants, or modes of beginning and ending words, letters are dropped, added, changed, and transposed. a. The names below ending in -thesis and -ccrcsis are derived from com- pounds of Tid-rj/ju, to put, and alptio, to take. 103. Figures (see § 6). Addition and Subtraction, a. Pro- thesis (7rpo, before ; less properly Prosthesis) adds one or more let- ters at the beginning of a word ; Epenthesis (eVt, to, ev, in), in the middle ; and Paragoge (nap ay coy rj, a bringing beside), at the end : as, X&s ey# the long vowels, because they always represent long sounds, and a, t, and v the doubtful vow- els, because their form leaves it doubtful whether the sound is long or short. 107. There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels were pronounced nearly as follows : a like a in far, fast (not as in fate) ; n, e, like e in they, then (not as in mete) ; * like i in machine, pin (not as in pine) ; a>, o, like o in note, obey ; v like u in rule, full (afterwards becoming closer, more like u in tube, or the still closer Trench u or German u). They may hence be thus placed upon a scale of precession or attenuation. Entire Openness. Scale of attenuate Scale o 01 att enuation w t&e tongue. Leagt Opening. Least h y the lips. V °P enhl g- a. In general, 1 and v are termed the c/osg, and the others the open vow- els ; but a is more open than € and o, and 1 is somewhat closer than v. b. There is a strong tendency, in the progress of language, towards the attenuation, or closer pronunciation, of the open, especially the long open vowels (99). This change would be represented on the scale above by a moving forward of the vowel from the left to the right ; and hence has been called precession (pra3ce§sio, going forward). Thus the open a of the old Greek became r\ in the relined Ionic ; and this again in the Modern Greek has passed (as also v, €i, tj, 01, and m) into the closer sound of t. §111. DIFHTHONGS. SYLLABICATION. 129 108. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or last vowel, is always i or v. a. A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunc- tive vowel, and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combin- ing two sounds ; but a long prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the sound of the subjunctive, and the diphthong was then termed improper, as though diphthongal only in appearance. 109. After a long, rj, and a>, the subjunctive 1 so lost its sound, that it was at last merely written beneath the pre- positive, if this was a small letter, and was then termed Iota subscript (subscriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still remains in the line, but is not sounded. It is not represented in Latin, except that, in a few compounds of &>§»/, g> becomes oe. Thus, "~Ai8t]s or qdrjs Hades, epfja-aa Thressa, v Ui or J, where, 'Qidrj or adr) ode, song ; but rpaytobia tragoedia, tragedy. a. Editors vary in the use of the 1 subscript, from different views of ety- mology, &c. : as, contract infinitive ri/xav or rifx.au, adverbial datives Siry or 6irv, 'Adi)vr}r)va, irtyrjva (40, as if made directly from aLvia, instead of the root ifr](?7at)Tj (37) ; (c) TL,ui{do)(opLev, rt / ci(dw)w, n/^(dot)w, TL,u{dov)(a (42), 7)x{oa)&, %(«a)w (19), (oua)a>r6s (17 ; while, in the Nom. sing., oDas becomes oOs by an absorption of the a, or by precession from the Dor. &s) ; (d) 87j\(6r)) throughout : as, xP V(T ^ a )^[ an( l 8nr\{6v)r\, -v\% -fj, -fjv, -at, &c. (23 ; cf. y5^, 15) ; 6 x/°(de)T|0"#c». Add nvdu to scratch, a/xdw to smear, and ^dw to rub. h. In the liquid Aorist, and in the Subjunctive and Imperative of verbs in -ui, ae and av commonly become tj, unless 1 or p precedes : as, icprjva, eiridva (152) ; l(TT{drj)r\, 8p{drj)q, 'i, 0iX(eot)ot, (pi\(^ov)ov, 8t)\(6u))(o, 5?7X(6oi)oi, cfyX^oi^ov (42), co - r(ey)a), */(oy)<3 (16) ; (d) 0iX(«fy)fjre, 0fX(e)v (19), (eau)avroD (27). e. In the dual of Dec. 3, ee becomes tj : as, YeV(ee)f] (19). So, in the older Attic writers, in the Nom. plur. of nouns in -evs : as, hriries lirirrjs (by some incorrectly written -fjs, 109 a) Th. 6. 68, instead of the common i7T7rers. Cf. Lat. ree re, mon(ee)ere. For (oe) vi, see 233 c. 122. Special Rules. 1. a, taking the place of v before (not -w/xt), oei and orj become oi : as, o^Xoet S7X01, 89X07 drjXol (42). (b) In the 2d pers. sing., the affix -fat becomes not only -# (120 b), but, as a special Attic form, -ei : as, Xvcai \vy and \v€t (37). (c) In a very few roots, aei becomes , Kdv ' Kal Zrepos, x#repos ■ Kal elra, Kq.ra ' Kal 6, x<*> ' Kal ol, xy. (2) Kal el, net • Kal ov, kov. (2, 3) Kal i] dyxowa, xtfyx ovaa ' y.) The preposition irpo (chiefly in composition before e and o unaspirated) ; the interjection a> (especially before a) ; and a few other particles : as, ■jrpoe'diaKa irpottbuKa, wpooTrros irpoftirros (£-, 6ir-) ' irpb fpyov, Trpo&pyov • cD dyadi, Si 'yaOe" ' & dvdpuire, &vdpwire • tfroi &pa, -qrdpa • fiivroi &v, p.evrdv • oiiroi dpa, ovrdpa • el p.rj e^otyut, el fxr] 'xoifii • fir] evpio, fir] 'iipu. 5.) Some forms of the pronouns : as, iyui ol8a, iy$5a ' iyCo olp.ai, iy^ai ' fiol £86Kei, fiovdbKei • aol iartv, aoforiv • 6 £(p6pei, ov6pei ' oD eVe/ca, otiveKa • 6rov eVe/co, bdotiveKa • d&v,dv 3. £p.£, dpi. C. Apostrophe, or Elision. 127. Apostrophe affects the short vowels «, e, X, and o (in monosyllables only e) ; and sometimes, in poetry, at in verbal affixes (chiefly passive) where it is treated as short in accentuation : as, T65' Her tkciv aivtyp: 6 irpoo-iroKov kXijoj Eur. Hel. 788. KXa&reT' dpa (KXavaerai dpa) Ar. Th. 916. "Ep X ed' £s (fyxrnu, 161) lb. 1178. KoXda ifcffft (Ko\d, ap ovv, y ovdev, fxd\' av, off 6 (ore 6), rdx av. So, in composition (where the sign ' is omitted), dvepxop.ai, 8u\avvco, 7rdpeipi, orav. b. In a few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc- currence : as, toCt* aAAo, tout fjbrj ' yevoir av, taff" onov (eon), \eyoip av, otS' on, Cprjp eyoa. 129. a. Elision is less frequent in t, than in the other short vowels above mentioned. Particularly, it is not elided by the Attics in irepl, &XPh fi^xpt (§ 164), or &Vt (which might then be confounded with #re) ; or, except rarely in poetry, in the Dat. sing., which might then be con- founded with the Ace. The forms which take v paragogic (163) are not elided in prose, except ecri • and in the Dat. pi. , not even in Attic poetry. b. Elision is least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found chiefly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus is more carefully avoided and the metre so governs, its use is far more ex- tended ; and here an especial freedom belongs to Comic and Epic verse. c. On some points in crasis and elision, critics differ. Thus, some regard the enclitics fioi, aoi, and rot, and the possessive pronoun ad, as affected by elision in Attic poetry ; but others, only by crasis. d. Both elision and the absorption of a vowel by crasis may occur at those minor punctuation-marks which the voice disregards ; and in poe- try, are sometimes permitted at the more important marks, even where the speaker is changed : as, vq AC, £) by the Att., where it becomes e in the Ion. Thus, Dor. rpacpu, 5<3\os • Gen. of Dec. 2, rw ihpavG) • Inf. evp'qv, birvwv • for x c 'P> SovXos, rod ovpavov, evpelv, virvovv. Ion. ^e?uos, p,ovvos, Troirj, for %evos, p.bvos, ir6a. d. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels (114) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general laAv of the dialects, the Ion. has a more open sound than the Att., or the Att. than the Dor. or iEol. : Att. 'del, 'derbs, earid, danos, Ion. alel, aleros, iarrir}, OGjkos • Old Att. /caw, /cXaw, Ion. and Com. mla, kXcUw • Ion. rpd- 7rw, fiiyaOos, p.eaau(3pir}, appoide'o}, Att. Tpiiroj, -fieyedos, p.eo-qp.^pla, oppwde'u} • Dor. and Ep. al, Att. ei • Dor. dvdaKu, Ion. and Att. Bv^ckw, BLq\. dval- CK(o • Att. arparos, epirerbv, arbp-a, JEol. arporbs, 6pireTOv, arijptu. 131. II. Union or Resolution. A. The Contraction of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least in the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are also dialectic differences in the mode of contraction, which, for the most part, may be explained by precession. E. g. a. In contracting a with an sound, the Dor. often prefers a to the closer co ; in Dec. 1, regularly. Thus, Dor. 'Arpeldd, rciv Bvpdv (20 a), IIoTei5c6', ireivavTi, Trparos, Meve'Xds, for 'Arpetdov (uncontracted -do), tu>v 6vpQv (-dwv), UocreidQv (-dojv), ireipQvri (-dovri), tt/nDtos, Me^Xews (-dos). b. For the contraction of €6, and oo or oe, see 130 c. "With the Ionics and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of to and tov is into cv, instead of ov. This use of cv for ov sometimes extends to cases where this diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, f° r A^Xcts, rOxf/ds, ^x ov and <» : as, to dXr)8es, T(oXrj6es • of alnokoi, conoXoi. a. A few erases in Horn, and fldt. are written by most editors with the coronis or the smooth breathing in place of the rough : as, 6 d/aioTos, &pi- cttos A. 288 ; 6 avros, cjvtos E. 396 ; ol aXXot, &XX01 • 6 dvOpojiros, &vdpwnos. b. The concurrence of vowels in Horn, is often only apparent, as they were once separated by a Digamma ; which, of course, forbade either con- traction, crasis, or elision. 134. III. Quantity. For a short vowel in the Attic, the other dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the converse : as, Ion. bnrXr](Tios for diirXaatos ' Ion. cvperj, anodcf-is, lieCoav, eaaedv, for evpela, a7rooVi£t?, /zft£coi>, rjao-Qiv • Dor. and Ep. erapos for eraipos * /Eol. 'AX*ao?, dpx&os, for 'AA/caioy, apyaios. a. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel according to the metre. A short vowel, when lengthened in Epic verse, usually passes into a cognate diphthong : as, dX-r}Xov6as A. 202, irapcd B. 711, irvoir} E. 697, eiv a. 162, for eXriXvdas, irapd, Trvo-q, ev. 135. IV. Addition or Omission. Vowels are often em- ployed in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here, as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial- ly the Epic. These often add or drop a vowel, and often double a vowel or insert the half of it (the short for the long\ for the sake of the metre, particularly in contract verbs : as, M and elvi for ev • ij\i 0. 128, for -fiXee" p. 243 ; Kp-fytpov itXdwp, for Kprjvov e'Xdup, A. 41, (pdavdev, yifiwuaa, opoai, opdas, yeXwovres, (pdus, e£, ieiKocn, rjd, for daei, for ndKurave, dp.pLV<£ (in Lat. as p, / or b ; sometimes also in Eng. as to) : as, rou a>6v ovum, egg, ftovas (Boas boves, yeveo-os yeveos generis, Xvecrai Xvcat. lueris or luere, iXao-(o iXdco, p.ei£ova pei£oa, 7rXel(ou irXeaiv more. a. So t in a few, and 8 in many words, of Dec. 3. See 207, 217. b. The two vowels were then often contracted : as, pods, yevovs (19), Ur, or Xtfei (37), iXQ (42), [xeifa (22). 141. 3.) They were changed into common breathings. So, be- fore an initial vowel, F regularly, and 2 in some words : as, Feanepa cWe'/aa vespera, evening, Fideiv Xdeiv video, to see, toivos olvos vinum, wine, Feap cap ver, Spring; crvs and vs sus, swine, atarnpi to-Tnpi sisto, to stand, e£ sex, six, eVra septern, seven, aXs sal, salt, virep super, over. Also F before initial p : as, Fpnywpi pr\yvv\xi frango, to break. 142. 4.) They were changed into their corresponding vowels. So F regularly, except as above ; and the others in many forma- tions : as, vavs vavs navis, ship, /3of fiov (19); yvnv yvna (1G0 e) ; (pavo~<0 (paveco cpavco (152) ; rjdlcov fjdimv, TrXelcov nXetoiU (260 s). a. Here contraction often takes place, as in most of the examples above ; and, after a liquid, 6 and i are sometimes transposed and con- tracted with the preceding vowel : as, iryyeXa-a -^yyeiXa (152 b), prp-ops pi'lTwp (153) ; x e P^- iav X eL P wv ) tywlw &(j.eLvwv (261), fieXavIa fitXaiva (233). 140 CONSONANTS. LIQUIDS. §143. 143. The palatal spirant, or consonant I, with a con- sonant preceding, received yet other changes : thus, a.) With X, it was assimilated : as, pdklov pdXkov more. Cf. Lat. melius ; and also aWos alius, other, aWopai salio, to leap. b.) It united with r to form tr or at : as, iravrla navaa rtdaa (233). ttAovtIos ifkovaios rich, adavaaia (from dddvaros) immortality. Hence, we often find v fjaaoov or fjTToov, Tayla>' rdaao), Kopvdlco Kopvaaw, n(7rI(o necrara), dyxlov acraov oKiyloov 6\i£oov, i\7ri8la> eK$ri§»> See 233, 26 L b, 349. 144. Liquids, from their flowing, semivowel character, often affect or are affected by adjoining vowels : 1. Syncope. In some stems, the adjoining vowel is syncopated : as, prjrepos prjrpos (210), pipevco pipvco to remain, rfkvOov rjKBov I came, KCKaXrjKa KeicknKa. I have called. See also 140 for the syncope of the liquid. 145. 2. Metathesis. In some cases, a liquid is transposed with a vowel, which is then often contracted with another vowel, or otherwise changed. In some of these, the liquid is evidently fleeing from combination with a following consonant. Thus, ddpaos Bpdcros boldness, fitfiXnica (stem /3aX- /3Xa-) I have thrown See also 142 a. a. In the Dat. pi. of syncopated liquids of Dec. 3, and of daT^p star, € is transposed with p or v, and changed to a: as, irarepcn warpdai (18). 146. 3. Epenthesis, Sfc. a. When a simple vowel is brought by inflection or composition before an initial p, a smooth p is inserted : as, eppaxra, appuxiTos, c7rippd>vvvpi, from pd>vvvpi to strengthen (e-, d-, and mi prefixed) ; but evpcooros (the diphthong ev prefixed). b. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought before X or p, the cognate middle mute is inserted or substituted : as, dvepos (dvpos) dvdpos (18), pearjpepia peanpfipia midday ; /SXghtko) (s. fioX- pko- /3Xo-) to go, fiporos (s. popr- ppor- fipor-) mortalis, mortal. 147. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are observed in the formation and connection of words. A. In the Formation of Words. I. Before a lingual mute, a labial or palatal mute becomes co-ordinate (137b); and a lingual mute, a : as, rer/)t((3r)'7rTat, rira^^KTai, 7riirei(6T)a-Tai, Kopi(dT)(xt)ktos made, xf/ei(5T)crrrjs liar ; e(Tr5)$Sopos seventh, 6(/c8)-ySoos eighth, ypd{(p8)fi§7)v, (3pv(x§)y$V v ' £rpt(/30)0??j', €Ta(yd)y > pT]i>, eirel{dd) (39) ; £8ef(K0)x, ibvopd- (t6)(tQt)v. Cf. Lat. scri(bt)jp£us, re(gt)c£us, tra(ht)c£us, clau(dt)sfrum. § 152. EUPHONIC CHANGES. 141 a. Two lingual mutes may remain together, if both, belong to the stem : as, t&ttw to arrange, 'Ardis Attic. 148. II. Before fi, a labial mute becomes //. ; a palatal mute, y ; and a lingual mute, a : as, T€Tpi(j3fx)\i\iat, Tr^Tr€i(dfjL)(rii.ai, K€K6fxi(5/M)(r^ai (39) ; 848ei(ia, T4Ta(yKa)\a, Tr^7rei(d Ka) Ka, tca<6/j.i(dKa)Ka, (39) ; 5^5et- (KKa)\a (45), /^/co(7r/ca)<|>a, yeypa(pi.a(T, 4u), 5ep(s, eev)i\v, daifx(o^s, oei>)s)pis (18) : Verbs in 3d Pers. PL for (avert, aa, ir(€v6cr, eaxfiwrofuu. a. The forms rtOidcrt, 8t86d, as Tri(pave)TT€$l\r}Ka (42) ; (x«xWx/»»*«« ' (OeO)TiQvKa (44) ; (ei6)rl9rifii (45) ; (b) (0/3ix)Tpi\6s (17) ; (dax)ra\vs swift, (fyex) T p€X w to run, (0pe) to nourish; (c) \6(drjdi)Qr\Ti (37). d. So a/xirixu (d.fJ. eridrjv (45), irv- dyv (44) ; but here in most words the aspiration remains, as even edp^O-rju. e. Upon the same principle, Sappho, Bd/cxos Bacchus, 'At0i's (147 a) ; and, upon the same principle, llvppos (93 d). See also the Epic ko.it XO(e0)e (37) ; rW(^/i)tj|tt, tTld(r)p)r\v, e3i5(wr)a>, o5 • v\jktcl o\r)i>, v6x^ o\t]v • and in composi- tion, ai, and the Epic particles k4, vti, and vbcrcpi. • as, t\ WXaTaidcnv i)yep.oi>la • eluociv frr). h. So, also, in a few instances, chiefly poetic, the Plup. and Impf. 3d Pers. in -ei (contracted from -ee) : as, rjdetv tv Eur. Ion 1187, Ve7roi- 6uv, ovk Ar. Nub. 1347, ^€J3X-rjK€Li/ virip £. 412 ; irpoa^iv ; Ovbiira) Ar. PI. 696, tfo-Keiv elpia V. 388. The form with v became the common form in the Impf. 3d Pers. ijv, was, and ixpfy or XPV V > ought, even before a consonant : as, fy 8e i. 2. 3, expw rotOra Cyr. 5. 5. 9. c. The v thus assumed is often called v paragogic (in Greek, v i until, often assume it before a VOWel : as ovtco (prjaiv • fiexpis ov. a. Some other words have poetic or dialectic forms, in which a final v or s is dropped or assumed : as, local adverbs in -Ocv (poet., chiefly Ep., -0«), numeral adverbs in -Kig (Ion. -ki), dfupls, tivTiKpvs, drptfias, addis, fyi7ras, TrdXiv, &b)(s, iye£ in Hdt. : as, vtt£k kcikov N. 89 ; but irdpe^ M Hdt. 1. 14. c. The adverb ov, not, before a vowel, has the form ovk, which becomes ot'x before the rough breathing : as, ov (prjo-iv, ovk eveo-Ttv, ov% va, oCfce'rt (imitated by pf\, not, in prjKen). d. In these words, e/c and ovk may perhaps be regarded as the original forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to their close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following word, and therefore forms no real exception to the rule in 160. When orthotone, they conform to the rule, the one by assuming s, and the other by dropping k, except as it also takes the form ovxl- 166. In composition, the preposition eV, in, regularly re- tains its v before p and an d ango, to choice, kOkvos and cygnus, swan, p,layco and misceo, to mix. a. The iEol. and Ion. were both far less inclined than the Att. to aspi- ration (cf. 93 c). In the new Ion. the smooth mute remains before the rough breathing (161, 165 c) : as, dir o5, 8eKr)/nepo$, ovk vei. In some compounds, this passed into the Att. : as, d-mjXicoTrjS (dirb, rjXios). b. Aspiration is sometimes transposed : as, Ion. Ktdcbu, ivdavra, evdev- rev, KaAxTjSwj', for x VT< * }V ) evravda, ivrevdev, XaX/aySwj'. c. The dialects also varied in the use of the breathings. In place of the rough, the iEolic seems commonly, and the Epic often, to have used the smooth breathing or the digamma. In Homer we find the smooth for the rough particularly in words which are strengthened in some other way : as, eijKTjXos, odXos, rj^Xios, fyi/ues, for €ktj\os, 8Xos,tjXlos, vp.e'is. 168. 2.) Co-ordinate Mutes (137 b) : as, Ion. k for ir in inter- rogative and indefinite pronouns and adverbs : thus, kolos, kov, kot£, for iroios, irov, ttot£ • Dor., k for t in 7t6k8os for ZvSov intus, within, btt for icrri est, is ; and in the verb-ending of 1st pers. pi. -fj.es for -|i€V (Lat. -onus), as X£yop.es for Xeyopev (Lat. legimus). d. The Laconic often changes to w • TEol. cuevos, erdepos, for £&os, £i0os • Dor. \p£, yj/iv, for erepi, ereplv • Ion. 8i£os, rpt£6s, for Surer 6s, t purer 6s. a. For £, we find, in the iEol. and Dor., cr8, 88, and 8 : as, tieroos, /xe- XiaSb) (137 d), ira/SSw, pLcLSSa, Aetfs, for 6£os, /*e\ifa>, iraifa, pt-afa, Zetfs. b. Interchanges of consonants are sometimes poetic rather than dia- lectic, or simply took place in the progress of the language. 171. B. Consonants are often doubled, inserted, omitted, and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake of the metre : as, ^XXafiov, eppd vcbvvLios, dvdXa/jLos ' Zpefrv, 'Ooveretis, 'Ax^evs, epdpvyos, for Zppefrv, 'Odvcraetjs, 'AxiXXetfs, epdpvyyos • KpaSLn, ndpTierros, (idp8i€fj.os wind, 6 Boppas Boreas, 6 irora/jiSs river, 6 Net Xos the Nile, 6 p,r)v month, 6 'E«:aT0yti/3cuwj> June -July; 17 aval) fig-tree, 77 fir/Xta apple-tree, 77 &iatt€\os vine, 77 fivpXos papyrus, 77 x^pa country, ij Aiyvirros Egypt, 77 v?,s • 77 vrjaos, 17 ecos dawn ; 6, r) 6(6s god, 6, fj apKTos bear ; to d\6v, to duaycav chamber. a. Except when the diminutive form in -ov is given to feminine proper names : as, 77 Aebvriov, 77 FXvK^piop. 177. III. In the THIRD declension (17 s), a.) All words in -evs are masculine; all in -a> and -avs, femi- nine ; and all in -a, -1, -u, -os, and -op, neuter : as, 6 Imrs vs, 6 dp.- (popevs amphora ; fj ^«, 7 j/ctOs • r6 o-, -tvos • b Xtiov, -ovros, b 68ovs, b yiyas, 6 ip,ds, -&i>Tos, thong. Except to ofo, (brbs, ear, rb dpwiros signifies man, the plural dvOpuiroi, men (whether two or more), and the dual avdp&iro}, two men. a. The dual is most used in the Attic and Homeric Greek. The iEolic dialect (as the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek dialects) and the Hellenistic Greek show scarce a trace of the dual (the New Testament, like the Modern Greek, none), except in Svo, two, and &;j. Me^XcTe A. 189. 'HAi65 re T. 277. To avoid the double c, 6e6s, god (like deus in Latin), has, in classic writers, no distinct Voc. ; yet Oe, and in the dual by an i diphthong. e.) In Dec. 1 and 2, the affixes are all open (172 c) and constitute a dis- tinct syllable. In Dec. 3, three of the affixes, , a natural successor of the digamma. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and Dat., and in Dec. 2 even as plural, is evidently of great antiquity. It does not occur in names of persons, and is chiefly used where local rela- tions are spoken of. E. g. Dec. 1. £!• evj>r}(pi, from the bed, y. 405 ; dirb vevprjcpiv (163 a) 9. 300 ; JjL piycpL TriOrjo-as, trusting to his strength, X. 107 ; KecpaXriQiv iird Xdpev II. 762 ; ws (pprjTpw iv dprp/n B. 363 ; x e P . 501 ; er£pi). 295 ; £k irouTO(f)Lv a>. 83 ; dirb irXartos irrvocpiv &. 588 ; iirl defrfanv N. 308 ; da.Kpv6 dareocpiv p.. 45 ; deocpiv p.i\ is likewise inserted in the Dative plural of a few words of Dec. 3, chiefly neuters, in -o$ ; and here serves to lengthen the preceding syllable. These forms were also used as both Gen. and Dat., and some- times with the force of the singular : as, kclt dpe LV E. 107; cbv 6xei II. 811 ; dpecrcpt A. 474 (cf. A. 479) ; wrb Kpdrea^i, under the head, K. 156 ; 'Epi^eacpiv (probably the correct form for "Epe- §ev. 335, Atodep O. 489 ; and the pronominal forms £p.edei>, a£0ev, Wev (27), which even occur in Attic poets. comp. gr. 7* 154 FIRST DECLENSION. § 193. CHAPTEE II. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 193. The declension of adjectives is also here treated, so far as it corresponds with the declension of nouns. See 229. I. THE FIEST DECLENSION. (For the affixes and paradigms, see 11 - 15, 20; for the gender, 176.) 194. The original affixes of Dec. 1 all had a as a connect- ing vowel (187, 189). In most of these, the a, if not contract- ed with a vowel following (183 a), was itself made long. Short a, however, remained in the singular, 1.) In the direct cases of feminines whose stem ended in a-, a double consonant, XX, or aiv : as, povaa, povcrav, Tpcmc£a (15), yXaaaa (or -yXdJrra, 1 69 a) tongue, apiWa contest, \eaiva lioness. a. Add a few others in -\a and -vet ; as, iraDXa rest, e^ 4 ^" viper, pe- pifiva care, decnroipu mistress : and a very few in which |x or a mute pre- cedes a ; as, ro\pa courage, &Kav6a thorn, Blaira mock of life. b. Add many feminines in -a pure and -pa, mostly having a diph- thong in the penult, and easily recognized by the accent. The principal classes are, (a) Polysyllables in -eta and -oia, except abstracts in -€ia from verbs in -euw ; as, aXirjdeia truth, efivoiu good-ivill, /3aertXeta queen, but jSoo-iXeta reign, from (3aLX-q Y. 130 ; *£l AUd, Sapph. c. The old Gen. affixes, -do and dwv, which often occur in the Epic writers, were contracted as follows : (1) In the Ion. , they were regularly contracted into -« and -wv, with the insertion of € after a consonant, but commonly in the poets with synizesis (120 i, 117 b) : as, 'Arp€L5(do, w)w, 'Arp€i8(duv, wv)()v)s full, dt-ioxpeoas competent. 200. Contracts. If the stem-mark' (172 d) is a, e, or o, it may be contracted with the affix. See dyrjpaos (22), ocrrtou, voos (16) ; and also 120 c, e, i, 121. The contract declension in -cos and -av, from -aos and -aov, is termed by grammarians the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic writers, although it is far from being peculiar to them (87 b). a. If the stem-mark is long a, € is inserted after the contraction (120 i) : as, mis (i'ws) vedbs (16), vaov (voj) veiv, vaip (vw) vej, vabv (vwv) veuv. b. The number of words belonging to the Attic declension is small. In some of them, the uncontracted form does not occur, or occurs only with some change. Thus eifyews, fertile, is the contract form of evyaos (fir. (yaa)yrj, poet, ycua, earth), in place of which we find the protracted etiyaios and evyeios. Dialectic Forms. 201. a. The affix of the Gen. sing. -0-0 (13), which was commonly contracted to -ov, or, in the iEol. and stricter Dor., to -w (130 c), Avas often prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the Tragic in lyric portions), to -010 (called the Thessalian form, and not receiving elision) : thus, ttovtov 'iKapioio B. 145 ; 86/j.ov vxprikoio a. 126 ; olo 56/j.oio a. 330 ; TroTa/ioio . . . 'Avdtiru Theoc. 1. 68 ; /xaXaKQ x^P 7010 hi. 4. 18. b. A single contraction, with the insertion of c (120 i), gives the Epic genitives IleT{aoo)t 9 becomes t, exeept where \ is changed (159 b). In i] a\ibirr)£, -eicos, fox, the e of the stem is lengthened in the theme. 204. Linguals. In these, the characteristic lingual can- not remain in any case which has either a close affix or no affix (202 a) ; and if another consonant is thus brought before o- or to the end of a word, further change may be required : as, e\irl(8s)s, Kopv(6s)s, irai(8cri)(rC, K\e?(8v)v, (Tra^ircu, o-tD/i(ar)a , \e , o(vr)v (17) ; 'e\fXL{vds)vs (156 b) ; <£w(t)s, ^7ra(r)p (17) : &vcl(kts, ks)%, &>(a/cr)a, 8dp.a(pTs)p, \<:{ovts, ovs, oev)uv, \£(pvTv, 6(evTs)eis, \varas, 6vs (26). a. Except 65ovs (17), and participles from verbs in -copi : as, dldovs, dote, fr. dldwfu (45). Yet Ion. 6Uv Hdt. 6. 107. 206. Neuter Linguals. In these the stem-mark is always r, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after pa, but otherwise gives place to s or p (160) : as, a(op(ar)a, (a>r)s (17) ; rb ripas, prodigy, P. N. re- para re"pd, G. reparuu repQv ' 6 XP&h shin, S. D. xP( b}T h wt)w (in the phrase tv XP$)- So, in Horn., from 6 lopus sudor, sweat, 6 7Aws laughter, 6 fpws love, S. D. idp(CoTi)iu, yiXto, tpTa, wa)s, ias)is (18), b$6pK(v vs)vs Phorcys ; (c) 7ra£(ews)ttv (18), fi£\(aps)5* (23). d. Except 6 fcreis, KTtvbs, comb ; ds, hbs, one (25) ; the Ion. b pels (as fr. s. pev-, yet G. prjvbs) for p-fjv month, Hdt. 2. 82 ; and b pbaavv, -vuos, wooden tower. In the pronoun ris (28), v is simply omitted in the theme. e. Most words in -is and -vs have a second, but less classic form, in -iv and -vv : as, pis and plv, Qbpicvs and QbpKvv, b 5eX0:'s and de\5p-, 146b) man; kvwv (s. kvov, sync, kvv-) canis, dog, also syncopated in Dat. pi. ; dpvos (s. dpev-, sync, dpv-) lamb's, of which the Nom. sing, is not used, but in its place, dfxvos agnus, of Dec. 2. See 18. b. These five are syncopated in tlie Gen. and Dat. sing. : iruWjp (18 ; s. irarep-, irarp-) FATHER ; (J^njp MOTHER, G. (irjrtpos fnrrpos, 1). p.r]T^pL p.T)rpi ; Ov-yarrjp DAUGHTER, 0vya(ripos)rp6s, 6vya(T^pi)rpi ■ ij ya, p.dfoves fielf(oes)ov$, pidfrvas /xeifrvs (22). Both forms are freely used, and even together : as, dp.eivovas ical KpeLrrovs i. 7. 3. a. A like contraction occurs in a few other words, particularly in the Ace. of 'AttoXXwv and Jloaeidtiv (itself contr. fr. TLoaaMwv, 131 a) : 'AirdX- Xwva 'Atr6W((oa)(a (iii. 1. 6), TLoaeibuva IIoaeidQ. See for both forms, of which the shorter is especially used with the article, PI. Crat. 402 d, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, 6 Kv/cevv mixed drink, Ace. KVKeQm, and poet. KVKew (k. 316, Kvxeiu A. 624) ; ij yXrrxw pennyroyal, A. yXrjxwva, yXr/xu- C. Pures (19). 212. The euphonic changes in the declension of pures may- be mostly referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declension, and (II.) to contraction. I. Special Law of Greek Declension. The short votvels, e and o, can never remain in the stem, either before the affixes -9 and -v, or at the end of a tvord. Hence, 160 THIRD DECLENSION. PURES. §213. 213. A.) Before the affixes -? and -v, e be- comes rj, c, v, or ev ; and o becomes co or ov : thus, 1.)' a. In masculine nouns, e becomes ev in simple, and rj in compound words : as, Simple, 6 iTwefc, -ews (19 ; stem linre-), paaiXevs king, Qrjtrefc Tlieseus ; compound, IhiKparvs, -eos (19 ; fr. cws entire, and kp&tos strength), 'Api- aroTiXns, An/Aoadfrvs (observe the difference in accentuation). Except the simples "Aprs, -eos, Mars, 6 a-qs, aeos, moth • and the fol- lowing, in which e becomes v or t, 6 irrjxvs, -ews, A. tttjxvv (19), 6 witeKvt axe, 6 -rrptafivs elder (properly an adj.) ; 6 e^ts, -ews, viper, 6 8xts. b. In feminine and common nouns, e becomes t : as, j? 7r6\is, -ea)?, A. noXiv (19), r) bvvajxis power ; 6, r) fiauTts prophet. c. In adjectives, e becomes' v in simple, and tj in compound words : as, Simple, rjdijs, -eos, A. i)8vi> (23), y\vK6s sweet, 6%vs sluirp ; compound, atcparris, tos (d not, Kpdros strength), weak, rpcrjpvs liaving three banks of oars, or, as a substantive (raOs, vessel, being understood), trireme. Except a few simple adjectives, in which e becomes i] : as, aacpqs, -eos (22), irXr)p7]S full, byi-qs healthy, \pevbr)s false. d. If the last element of a compound ends in -€vs, -is, or -vs, its form is commonly retained : as in apx-iepe6s high-priest, : as, @ovs, fioos, A. fiovv (19) ; but i) albas, -60s, shame. a. This rule applies also to Unguals in which o precedes the stem- mark : as, iro6s, irodos (17), and its compounds ; but eidus, -6ros (26). b. In feminine nouns of more than one syllable, in which the stem ends in o, the affix s is absorbed, as if € (142 a). Thus from the stem ifoo- is formed the theme i7%(os, oe)w (19). So i) ireidd), -60s, persuasion, ij A-qrib, -6os,Latona, &c. Except, as above, aidibs, and the Ionic 77 r)(Jos dawn. In these words in -c& and -«s, the plural and dual are very rare, and only formed according to Dec. 2 : as, Xe^ti, N. pi. Xexoi ; dicotis, (224 a). 215. B.) In cases which have no affix, e char- acteristic becomes i, v, or ev, or else assumes a eu- phonic 9 ; and o characteristic becomes oc or ov : thus, a.) If the theme ends in -tjs, e becomes es ; but, otherwise, is changed as in the theme : thus, Nom. neut. and Voc. oralis (22), r)8v (23) ; Voc. Saxpares, iroki, tttjxv, Imrev (19). b.) In the theme of neuter nouns, e assumes s, becoming itself o (114 b) : as, to yevos, -eos (19), to rei^os, -eos, wall. Except r6 &aDs (s. va) ship, r\ ypavs, ypaos, old woman; and assumes s in the theme of neuters: as, to yepas, -aos (19). For the declension of pads, see 19, 21, 222 f. That of ypavs agrees with the Dor. forms of vavs, as lirst given, contracting ypdas into ypavs (122 a). b. In the Accusative singular of pures, the inflective v be- comes a (202b), except when the theme ends in -as, -«, -vs, -at/?, or -ovs : as, tjpota, r)x° a i " r7re ' a (19) ', o-acpea (22) ; but from 6 Xap, sfowe, kis, ols (contracted from 6'is), rroXis, l\Bvs, 7"7xus, vais, /3ovy, Ace. AaV ; KiV, oti/, ttoXiv, lx$vv, 7tr}X vv i va » v i P ovv (19). c. Proper names in -t)s, -cos, for the most part, admit both forms of the Ace. : as, ^^Kpar-qs (19), A. Zuxparri (Plat.), Sw/cpdrT/y (Xen.) ; 6"A/D7?s, Mars, A. "Ap-q and'Aprp. So %>ws, A. ■ijpuiv Hdt. 1. 167 (%wa 2. 143). d. When the stem-mark is changed to a diphthong before -s in the theme, the same change is made before -on in the Dative plural : as, Imrevai, fioval, vavcrl (19). 217. These changes in pures indicate the use of certain consonants, as F, 2, A, in their early inflection, to prevent hiatus (100). Of these, F and S were afterwards (a) simply dropped between two vowels (140 ; hence, except as above, 210 d, in the Dat. pi., originally ending in -eFos)vos, 'nnr(eFes)i€<$ ' 7^(eSos)eos (fr. yivos ; cf. Lat. gfritis, generis, 139), 7^>(a2os)aos (19) ; AiFos Atos (21 ; cf. Lat. dlvus and dius, and bourn for bovnm), rj5(eFos)&>s (23) ; (ra0(eSos)€OS (22). (b) /3oFs j3ovs, fioYv fiovv, /3oF (3ov, i7r7r(eFs)€vs, t7nr(eF)e-0, iwTrevai, raFs vavs navis, vavai (19). In adjectives, and in a few masculine and ( neuter nouns, short v takes the place of €v : as, ijdeFs rjdvs, tj5(cf)v (23) ; TT7Jx(eYs)vs, Ttrjxvv, tt^X^j d hut Dat.pl. IxOvai ; klFs (or /als, Kiihn.) /cts (19). (d) Nom. neut. oe ) ot ( cf - 214 b). (e) aacpells G. iyx^euf • rd irtirepi (215 b), G. -eus and -tos. 219. II. Contraction. Most pures in -a?, -779, -09, and -co are contracted in all the cases that hare open affixes ; but others, for the most part, only in the Norn, and Ace. pi and Bat. sing. ; and some, if at all, only in the Ace. pi. a. See 19, and also a/cXes, used in exclamations, cf. 208 f. d. For the contraction of the Nom. pi. of nouns in -cvs into i]s, see 121. e. It is not as often that we wish to pass rapidly over a noun which is the subject of a sentence, as over one which is a mere object. Hence, as we observe from the tables, the Nominative plural is less frequently con- tracted than the Accusative. f. Compare the contracts in -vs, -vos, with the Lat. Dec. 4 : §221. CONTRACTION. DIALECTIC FORMS. 163 &pnvs, vet, -vos, -v'C, -vi> • PI. -(i/es)us, -vwv, -vai, -(vas)vs. arcus, bow, -(uis)ws, -ui, -Um ; PI. -(ues)us, -uum, -ubus, -(ues)us. 220. In the Attic and Common Greek, the endings -cos, -ca, and -eas, instead of the common contraction, receive in cer- tain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last vowel. This change 'takes place, a.) In the Gen. sing, of nouns in -ts, -vs and -cvs, and some- times of nouns in -i and -v : as, nobis, G. noXeos noXccos, n^x v ^ -ecos, Innevs, -ecu?, aarv, -eos and -cojs (19) ', rreVf/Jt, -cs, it is evi- dent that the € (as in MevtXews, 120 i) has not the full force of a distinct syllable. We may infer that it commonly united as a species of semivowel (cf. 117 b) with the vowel following, and thus lengthened it. d^The poets sometimes complete the contraction by synizesis : as, /3a- cnXews Eur. Ale. 240, 'AxtXXfo Id. Iph. A. 1341. Instances also occur, in the Attic poets, of the unchanged Gen. in -cos, of the Ace. in -cu and -c&3, and of the Ace. sing, regularly contracted into f\ : as, Nrjptos Eur. Ion 1082, TroXeos Id. Hec. 866 ; ^ s ? P&*i &X^ S > f° r °^ J > /3oDs, fjfcioil ; for /cXds key, Dor. (kXolfls clavis) k\o6s, D. XP '^ A. x/aoa. f.) Variously Double : 8opvfj(6os)ovs and -£os Ar. Pax 447, -ov, spear- maker : Zcvs (s. ZeF-, Atr-, Zov-) ; see 21, and cf. Lat. Jupiter (Zed ird- Tep T. 276), Jovis, divas: 6 Ocpdirwv, -ovtos, attendant; poet. A. dipaira, N. pi. depaires Eur. Ion 94 : rd <}>dos, -eos -ovs Cyr. 4. 2. 26, light, poet. ; contr. ws, $ojt6s : 6, ij <{>dpv-y£, -vyyos, poet, -ifyos i. 373, throat : 6 <£>opicvs, -vo$ and -vvos, Phorcys : ij \eip, hand, G. x ei P 0S an( i X € P 0S > & c - (for the common forms, see 18 ; for the rest, the poets and Ion. prose). 166 IRREGULAR NOUNS, —r HETEROCLITE. §224. g. r) ©ejus, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. QefiiSos, Ep. GtfiicrTos §. 68, Ion. Gefctos Hdt. 2. 50, Dor. 04/iitos Find. O. 13. 11, also PL Rep. 380 a. In the Attic, 64/xis occurs mostly in certain forms of ex- pression, where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter noun : thus, dipas tart, it is lawful ; acrl . . . 64 pus eivcu, they say that it is lawful, PI. Gorg. 505 d ; to p.7) dt/jus, that which is not lawful, J&ch. h. t) irvvg (s. irvKv-, as in adj. Trvicvbs, crowded ; by met., from the dif- ficulty of appending s in the theme, ttvvk-), G. ttvkvos and later ttvvkos. i. Poetic, mostly Epic, forms (with the themes to which they are referred or allied, in parentheses) : A. pi. AlBio-Trfjas A. 423 (6 Aldiorp, -ottos, Ethiopian) ; i) Sws Hes. Op. 354 (8b/)6s (14), fire; Dec. 2, PL N. nrvpd, watch-fires, D. Tru/jots vii. 2. 18. g. Some contracts in -ovs of Dec. 2 have also forms, mostly late, like those of @ovs (19) : as, 6 poOs mind, 6 irXovs voyage, G. vobs, 1 Cor. 14. 19, irXobs Acts 27. 9, D. vot Rom. 7. 25 ; 7) irpbxovs ewer, D. pi. irpbxowi Ar. h. Some verbals have double forms in -os, -ov, and -evs, -&>s, or -ttjp, -Ttjpos : as, 6 irofxirbs and 7ro/i7retfs, guide, 6 larpos and poet. t'dr^/D, Jiealer. i. Add the poetic D. pi. dv8pair68co-o-i H. 475 (to dvSpdiroSov slave) ; 6 2pos U. 315, A. fyoj/ I. 92 (fyws, -wtos, fore) ; A. otica, only in ofrca&r, homeward, Horn., and even in Att. prose, vii. 7. 57 (6 oXkos house). j. Of the Attic Second and Third Declensions : 7) a\»s threshing- floor, G. &Xu, aXuuos, and poet. aXwos • also Ep. 7) dXu)7) • 7) ^«s ofoww (s. "d"-), G. ^w, D. Zy, A. ^w (199) ; Dor. 'dibs (s. ao-), G. d(6os)ovs ■ Ion. ijibs, G. t)ovs, D. ^ot, A. t)w and ^oOv (221 a) ; 6 Mivws, -w and -coos, Minos. § 227. HETEROGENEOUS AND DEFECTIVE. 167 226. 3. Heterogeneous Nouns. The names of things without life naturally vary in gender, according to the conceptions formed by the mind (175). Hence there are many words in which two genders are associated, either throughout or in part ; chiefly the neuter, as the natural gender of things without life, with the masculine or feminine, the genders of personification. E. g. a. Of Dec. I. 77 n&pa or 6 ridpas Hdt. 1. 132, tiara or tiaras, turban. b. Of Dec. II. 6 8«t|jl<$$ band, PI. rot, deo-fid, ol Seafxoi, and poet, rd oVcr/tara • to £vyov and 6 £vy6s, yoke, PL ra £vyd • 6 o-itos com, PI. r& o~ira • rb ordSiov stadium, PI. to, arddia and ol (rrddcoi ' 6 crra9|x<$$ station, balance, PI. ol arad^ol and rr;,/«£pll.392, G. Kdprjros Kapr/aros Kpdrds Kpddros tcprjdevX. 588 Kapfyov D. Kdprjri O. 75 Kap-q&Ti Kpdrl u. 99 /cpaanx-218 Mar. 12 P. JST. A. Kapd Cer. 12 Kap-ffara Kpara 6. 92 KpadraT. 93 Kdprjva G. P. 437 Kparuvx- 309 Kaprjuuv D. *cpaos, cup. B. Defect of Declension. 227. a. Some nouns receive no declension, as the names of the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few other words, chiefly foreign : thus, t6, tov, tg> aXcf)a • 6, tov, t<5, tov 'A/3paa/x • t6, tov, tu irao-x a > passover. A word of this kind is termed in- declinable, or an aptote {anrol Delphi, ol ernaiat the trade-winds. 228. Some nouns are employed only in particular cases, and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of ex- pression : as, a. Neut. Nom. and Ace. : 6vap sleep, dream, -uirap waking, reality ; 6<|>e\os advantage; i-lxuap and Ep. Tiptop, mark: Poet., Sc'jxas instar, body, form; r\Bos pleasure; 8<5 (s. 8wp,-, 160) A. 426 (rb SQ/na domus, house), pi. Hes. Th. 933 ; «pt (s. Kf>i0-, cf. Ppl, pi, 238b) 9. 564 (77 KpWr) barley). b. Neut. \Cira ivith oil, indecl., chiefly as Dat. f. 227 ; Du. N. and A. 5 axilla, arm-pit), in the phrase vtto p.a\vs, under the arm, secretly, Hel. 2. 3. 23 ; D. Sat (1) battle, Ep., N. 286. d. Dat. Xir£, Ep., 2. 352, A. sing, or pi. Xira 0. 441 (rb \Lvov linum, linen) ; Voc. masc. and fem. S> jxeXe, my friend, in familiar address, Ar. Lys. 157 ; Voc. cD rav or rav (also written & Wav or Srrav), my good sir (6 Ztvs, -ov, comrade), Attic, PI. Apol. 25 c. e. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote (jxbvos single, irrQais case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in three,- a triptote ; in four, a tetraptote. CHAPTER III. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. (For paradigms, see 22 - 26, 28.) 229. Adjectives are declined like substantives, except so far as they vary their form to denote variation of gender (173 s). In this respect, they are divided into three classes, adjectives of one, of two, and of three terminations. a. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is regard- ed as the primary gender, and the stem, theme, and declension of the masculine, as the general stem, theme, and declension of the word. The mode of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the theme the other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings ; and, if neces- sary, the form of the Gen. sing. Thus, &5ikos, -ov • s (26). a. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a distinc- tion must be made between the stem, affix, connecting vowel, and flexible ending of conjugation, and those of declension : thus, in Gen. \douros, the stem of conjugation is Xv-, and the affix -ovtos ■ while the stem of declen- sion is Xvovt-, and the affix -os. 2.) All comparatives and superlatives in -os : as, o-oTcpos, -a, -ov, wiser ; o-oTaTos t -rj, -ov, wisest. 3.) All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive : as, diaKoaioi, -at, -a, two hundred, rplros, -17, -ov, third. 4.) The article and adjective pronouns (28), except rls (t\s). 5.) Of adjectives commonly so called, simples in -os, -«s, and -vs, with some others : as, p.5>pos, ao(pos, ^a/uW, rjdvs, nets, p.e\as (23) : 4ko>Pj -o0o"a, -of, willing ; raXas, -uiva, -av, wretched. b. For the most part, simples in -os have three terminations, and coin- pounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many simples, particularly derivatives in -eios, -10s, and -ip.os, have but two. Derivatives from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially those in -ikos, -t<$s, and -nreos, have more commonly three terminations. A distinct fern, is most found in oxytones, and least in proparoxytones. In many words, usage is variable (d, e, f ). c. Adjectives in -«s, of the Attic Dec. 2, have but two terminations : as, d7i7po)s (22), 0, i) euyews, to evyeuv, fertile. For ir\ews, see 236. d. In words in which the fem. has commonly a distinct form, the form of the masc. is sometimes employed in its stead : as, Adjectives in -os (particularly in Att. writers, 174 b), brfhos Eur. Med. 1197, dvaytcaLov Th. 1.2; Adjectives in -us and -«s (chiefly in the poets), i)8vs /x. 369, yeveav 6r)\6i>, female sex, Eur. Med. 1083 ; Comparatives, Superlatives, Partici- ples, and Pronouns (all rarely, except in the dual, e), aTroptirepos Th. 5. 110, 6\o6tcltos 0. 442, ridevres iEsch. Ag. 560. § 236. IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 171 e. This use of the masc. form for the fern, is particularly frequent in the dual, in which, from its limited use, t'.ie distinction of gender is least important : as, tw xe?/36, the two hands, vi. 1. 8 (the fern, form tu is especially rare, Soph. Ant. 769) ; toutu rcb y;xepx, t/iese two days, Cyr. 1. 2. 11 ; ibovre nal iradovaa Soph. 0. 0. 1676 ; rrXrryevTe 0. 455. f. On the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the fem. in words in which it is commonly the same with the masc. : as, dOavdrr) K. 401, avTofj-cLTcu iv. 3. 8. This use is especially Epic and Lyric. 235. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied from a kindred or derived stem. These forms may be either re- quired to complete the adjective, or they may be only special feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by the side of forms of the common gender (174 b). The feminines thus supplied most frequently end in -is, G. -idos (21 7 f), but also in -as, G. -ados, in -cia, -eipa, &c. Thus, a. Masculines in -tjs of Dec. 1, and in -cvs of Dec. 3, have often cor- responding feminines in -is, -i8os. These words are chiefly patrials and gentiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as sub- stantives. Thus, o iroXiTTjs, -ov, belonging to a city (deol ttoXltcii JE&ch. Th. 253), citizen, i] 7roXiTts, -idos • 6 Meyaiev's, -cws, r? Meyapis, Megarian. b. The compounds of £ros year (in -ns, -€S of Dec. 3, but sometimes in -TjSi G. -ov of Dec. 1), have often a special fem. in -is, -i8os : as, 6, ij ewT€- rrjs, rb orreres, seven years old, and t) eirrerLS, -ibos. c. Some compounds in -rs, -es have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in -eta : as, rjpiyev-qs, -es, early -b>rn, i) rjpiyeveia A. 477 ; rjdveweia, Hes. Th. d. Add 6, i) irlwv, and rj wieipa, rb iriov, fat ; 6 Trpeafivs, old, venerable, fem., chiefly poet., irpeapZ, Trpecrfieipa, and irpea^rjts • 6, i) p.dicap, and i] ii6.Ka.ipa, blessed, poet. ; and some others. 236. Irregular Adjectives. Among the adjectives which deserve special notice are the following : a. ue'-yas great, and iroXvs much (24). In these adjectives, the Nom. and Ace. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the stems p.eya- and woXe-, according to Dec. 3. The other cases are formed from the stems p-eyaX- and 7to\\-, according to Dec. 1 and 2. The Voc. /xeydXe occurs once, iEsch. Th. 822. From its signification, iroXOs has no dual. In Hdt., the forms from iroWos prevail throughout, yet not exclusively. b. 6 irX&os, v rrXed, rb irXew, full. The masc. and neut. are formed from s. 7r\a-, according to the Attic Dec. 2 (200) ; the fem. is formed from s. 7r\e- (with Nom. pi. trXeq. in imitation of masc, according to some editors, Soph. El. 1405). Ion. irXtos plenus, Ep. irXetos, -rj, -ov. So, likewise, in Att. writers, the neut. pi. irXia Cyr. 7. 4. 6, and the pi. compounds fyvXeoi, ZKirXea. In like manner i'Xea K. pi. from i'Xews. c. 6 irpaos (24 ; by some written irpyos, 109 a), mild, borrows fem. and plur. forms from Trpdus, which occurs Find. Py. 3. 125. d. 6, i) o-»s, to ov Hdt. [32. P. K. ii. 2. 21 (tljol, (aQes ) 5s, faiv, living (iii. 4. 5). 237. a. Some adjectives vary in the mode of declension from the same stem : as, Dec. 1 and 3, neXaivdnrav Soph. Aj. 954, and KeXcuvJnreao-i Pind. P. 4. 377, dark ; Dec. 2 and 3, dXdaTwp accursed, dXao-Tdpoiaiv Soph. Ant. 974. b. In compounds of -yAxos laughter, and Kc-pas horn, we find both the Att. Dec. 2 and Dec. 3 : as, . 87 ; dpYtjTi V. 419, dpyiri A. 818, dpyrJTct and dp- yera ; dp\v<{>eov 2. 50, tipyvipov O. 621 ; ttoKlv . . . €VTe£x € °v A. 129, toXlu evreixea II. 57 ; Tpoir)i> €pi(3c£\aica V. 74, Tpolrjv ipl(3wXoi> I. 329 ; iroX-vrXas e. 171, tto\vt\7]pui}v o~. 319, woXvtXtjtoi X. 38. 238. Among defective adjectives, we notice, a.) The following, chiefly poetic : d, r) aSaicpus, rd ti.8a.Kpv, tearless, Ace. aSaKpvv (the other cases supplied by dddKpvros, -ov) ; so iroX-iSatcpvs tearful ; 6 irpeo-p-us (for fern, see 235 d) oZe?, as subst. elder, ambassador (in the last sense G. irpecfiem Ar. Aeh. 93), A. Trptafiw, V. irpea^v • PL 7rpepov8os, -rj, -ov, gone, which, with the Nom. throughout, has the Gen. (ppoiSov Soph. Aj. 264. b.) Poetic feminities and neuters, which have no corresponding masc. : as, i) ir<$Tvia A. 357 (sometimes itotvu v. 61) revered, rrjv troTviav, ai irorviai (yet irbrvie Orph. H. 10. 20) ; t) GdXaa rich, H. 475 ; avSpoXc'-mpa man- destroying, ^Esch. Th. 314; KvSidveipa ennobling, A. 225; eupvd-yvia widc- strected, A. 52 ; evpvoSelrjs X. 52 ; iiriroSdcma crested, P. 295 ; dp.(piddcreiav O. 309 ; i] Xis and Xio~&s A. 387 (yet Tap xfyv a > also PL x^PV^s, X^PV - or X^P eia > A. 80, A. 400, &c. (as fr. x € P- hand, 224 f ; under the hand of, subject), inferior, worse. §240. NUMERALS. ADJECTIVES. 173 CHAPTEE IV. NUMERALS. 239. I. Numeral Adjectives. Of numeral adjectives, the principal are, (1) the Cardinal, answering the question, n6voi; how many ? (2) the Ordeslvl, answering the question, iroaros ; which in order ? or, one of hoio many ? (3) the Temporal, an- swering the question, irocrraios ; on what day .?«or, in how many days ? (4) the Multiple (multiplex, having many folds), show- ing to what extent anything is complicated ; and (5) the Pro- portional, showing the proportion which one thing bears to another. 240. 1. Cardinal. The first four cardinals (25), and those above 100 are declined ; the latter as adjectives of Dec. 2 and 1. The rest are indeclinable. Cf. the Lat. cardinals. a. Eh, from its signification, is used only in the sing. ; 5tfw, only in the dual and pi. ; and the other cardinals only in the pi., except with col- lective nouns in such expressions as au Horn. Cer. 15. d. In the derivatives from evvia, hva-, for iva-, is a less classic form. e. In recraapeaxaidexa, and the later dexariaaapes, dexarpeis, the rpe?s and re'craapes are declined : dexarpets, dexarpia, dexarptCiv • rots reacrapcrixai- dexa. Yet we sometimes find reaaapeaxaihexa, and later even Teaaapaxal- 8exa used as indeclinable ; as in Hdt. 1. 86, Mem. 2. 7. 2. The com- pounds from 13 to 19, both cardinal and ordinal, are often written sep- arately : as, rpeh xal 8e"xa i. 5. 5, rpla xal 8exa Hdt. 1. 119, re'craapes xai 8e"xa • Tphov xal dixarov Th. 5. 56, Te'raprov xal Sexarov, lb. 81, irhre 9) exxaidexa Cyr. 1. 4. 16, irepLirTV 9) ^xry /cat dexdry Hel. 4. 6. 6 ; also 2v /cat elxocrrbv Th. 8. 109. f. The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with aiv • as, avvdvo bini, two together, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, avvrpeis terni, t. 429, awSibSexa duodeni, Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also expressed by means of the prepositions dvd, /card, and, in some connec- tions, els and iiri. ■ as, 2% Xbxovs dvd exarbv tivdpas, 6 companies, each 100 men, hi. 4. 21 ; xard rerpa/ctcrxtXtoi/s, 4,000 at a time, iii. 5. 8 ; els exarbv, 100 deep, Cyr. 6. 3. 23 ; iiri reTrdpwv, 4 deep, i. 2. 15. 2. The Ordinal Numbers are all derived from the cardinal, ex- cept irpcoros, and are all of Dec. 2 and 1. They all end in -tos (Eng. 174 NUMERALS. ADVERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. §240. -th), except Scvrepos, eftbopos, and oydoos • and those from 20, up- wards, all end in -oaros (Lat. -esimus). 3. The Temporal Numbers are formed from the ordinals by changing the final -os into -aios, -a, -op : as, rpiros rpirdios, v. 3. 2. 4. The Multiple Numbers end in -tt\6os, contracted -nXovs (Lat. -plex), and are declined like 8nr\6os, dinXovs (23). 5. The Proportional Numbers have double forms, in -nXaa-ios, -a, -op (Lat. -plus), and, more rarely, -7rAao-iW, -op, G. -opos. Thus the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by dnrXdo-ios duplus, or SwrXacriW. 241. II. Numeral Adverbs, a. The numeral adverbs which reply to the interrogative iroo-dius ; how many times ? all end in -gkis (Lat. -ies), except the three first : as, beicdius decies, ten times, ippea- KauiKoai.KaieirraKoo~i.oTrkao-i.aKi$ 729 times, PI. Rep. 578 e. b. These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher cardinal and ordinal numbers : as, 8iaxlXioc b!s mille, 2,000, irevTaKio'x'-Xioo'Tbs. c. Other numeral adverbs relate to division, order, pface, manner, &c. : as, 8ixa or 8ixfj, poet. bixQd, in two divisions, rpixa, -xf), or -x@d, in 3 divisions ; devrepop secondly, rpirop thirdly ; rpixov in 3 places. III. Numeral Substantives. These, for the most part, end in -as, -aSoy, and are employed both as abstract and as collective nouns. Thus, fj pvptds may signify, either the number 10,000, considered ab- stractly, or a collection of 10,000. These numerals often take the place of the cardinals, particularly in the expression of the higher numbers : as, deica pvpidBes, ten myriads =z 100,000, i. 7. 10. 242. a. When numerals are combined, the less commonly pre- cedes with Kal' but often the greater with or without kclL: as, Trevre Kal duoaiv, five and twenty, i. 4. 2 ; rpidKovra Kal -rrhre, thirty and five, lb. ; TCTTapaKOvra irtvre, forty-five, v. 5. 5 ; crradficl rpeis Kal ive- vf)KOVTa, irapaadyyai irevre Kal TpidKOvra Kal irevraKbcrioi, crdbici TrevTTjKovTa Kal e^aKtax^ 101 Kac V^pioi, ii. 2. 6 ; ffrad/xol diaKtaioi. beKairtvre, irapaady- yai X'Xiot eKarbv irevT'qKovTa irivre, crdbia Tpia^pia rerpaKiaxi-Xia e|a/c6T-f)KovTa, vii. 8. 26. See v. 5. 4, and § 240 e. b. From the division of the Greek month into decades, the days were often designated as follows ; /xr/vbs f3o7}bpo/j,iQuos Zktiq eirl 54m, upon the [6th after 10] 16th of tlie month Boedromion, Dem. 261. 12 ; dvdeaTrjpiuvos 2kt% iirl deKarr}, Id. 279. 17 ; fiotibpofu&vos 'eKTrj /mct eUdba, 'the 26th,' Id. c. Instead of adding eight or nine, subtraction is often employed : as, pr\e$ . . . fiias dtovaai recrcrap&KovTa, forty shi2)S wanting otic [40 - 1 = 39], Th. 8. 7 ; vaval bvoiv beofoaii irevT-fiKovra [50 - 2 = 48] lb. 25. d. In fractions, the denominator may be expressed ; or, if it is only greater by one than the numerator, it may be understood : as, rCbv ir^re t&s bvo fioipas, § , Th. 1. 10, tQv 5vo fiep&v, o/f, lb. 104, t, lw£ and uiiv, and the Ion. ccpea are added in 27 a. 244. 2. Reflexive, epavrov, o-eavrov, iavrov. These pro- nouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first also the neuter. They are formed by joining the personal pro- nouns with clvtos. a. In the plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and often of the 3d, the two elements remain distinct : rnxG>v avrCbv. Otherwise, the old Direct Case of the personal pronoun unites with the forms of avrds ; while, in the 1st Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place : (efie-avrov) ifxavrov, ae-avrov aavrov, e-avrov avrov. 3. Reciprocal. This pronoun is formed by doubling tikkos, other : aXkyXav, for dXXdWcov. From its nature, it wants the Nom. and the sing., and is not common in the dual. 245. 4. Indefinite, 6 Belva. This pronoun may be termed, with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. a. It is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the speaker either cannot, or does not care to name ; in the language of Matthire, it "indefinitely expresses a definite person or thing " : Tbv 5e?i>a yiyvuirKeis ; Do you know Mr. So and So ? At. Th. 620. '0 Setva rod delvos rbv Sdva elvayyiWei, A. B., tlie son of G. D., impeaclies E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In the sing, this pronoun is of the three genders ; in the plur. it is masc. only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indecl. : rod 5dva Ar. Th. 262. b. The article is an essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better written as a single word, oSeiva. It appears to be simply an extension of 176 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 245. the demonstrative 68e, by adding -iv- or -iva, which gives to it an in- definite force (cf. 253 b), making it a demonstrative indefinite. It belongs properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aristophanes. 246. Histoky. a. The distinction of person, like those of ease and number (186 b, c), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely sep- arating the person speaking from all others, whether spoken to or of. b. To denote ourselves, we naturally keep the voice at home as In^^ch as is consistent with enunciation ; while we denote another by & forcible emis- sion of it, a pointing, as it were, of the voice towards the person. The for- mer of these is accomplished by closing the lips and murmuring within, that is, by uttering m, which hence became the great root of the 1st per- sonal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending the voice out forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place of the aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a lin- gual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d and 3d personal pronouns. c. The |jl- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old plur. (which afterwards be- came the dual, 186 g) into the kindred v- (cf. Lat. nos) ; and in the sing., when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial a which passed by precession into €. In the new plur., the idea of plurality was conveyed by doubling the p. (d/t^i-) ; or more commonly by doubling the u to r\ (115 a), pronounced with the rough breathing (rjp^). d. From this the new plur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, by changing a, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (vpfi-, *v\i.'). With the exception of tliis imitative plural, the plur. and dual of the 2d and 3d Persons have the same root, in which plurality is ex- pressed by joining two of the signs of these persons (- = tr + r, the latter remaining in the Lat. vos). In the separation of the two persons, the sign e A. 8 ; (with precession, in imitation of the Gen.) v&'C A. 418 ; ff A. 338 : <*e0 Hdt. 7. 209, aev Id. 1. 9, eS T. 464. § 249. HISTORY. DIALECTIC FORMS. 177 c.) From lengthening or repeating the connective (134 a, 135) : ip.e?o A. 174, . 432, tip.es Ar. e.) From the retention of primitive forms having no flexive : dp.?, ip.e, V/i/ie, Ar. Lys. 95, 87, 1076, &n,ue A. 59, tifi/ie ^. 412, ae (often ; also in sing.) Id. Ant. 44 ; tip.p.e lb. 846, dp.lv iEsch. Eum. 347 ; rifuv or rjfiiv Soph. El. 17, 41, iftiv or tifUP Id. Ant. 308, v (131 e) : ifi€(o-av)v avrav) rovroav (roaos avros) roaovros, (too~q avrrj) roaavrq. c. To demonstratives, for the sake of stronger expression, an i is affixed, which is always long and acute, and before which a short vowel is dropped, and a long vowel or diphthong regarded as short : as, ovrooi, avrfji, rovri, hicce, Fr. celui-ci, this here (28) ; ineivoo-l ilhc, Fr. celui-la, that there ; 681, roaovroal. d. This i paragogic is Attic, and belongs especially to the style of con- versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs : as, ov- rwo-i, &5L, vvvi, iuravdi, hrevdevi. So, in comic language, even with an inserted particle, vvv/xevL Ar. Av. 448, ivycravdl Id. Th. 646, ey/xevrevdeui. 5. Possessive. The possessive pronouns are derived in Greek, as in other languages, from the personal ; and are arranged in 28 according to the person and number of the pro- nouns from which they are formed. § 255. INDEFINITE. DIALECTS. 179 B. Indefinite. 253. 1. The simple indefinite is t\s, which has two stems : Tiv-, declined throughout after Dec. 3 ; and re-, declined in the Gen. and Dat. only, after Dec. 2 (except that the Gen. sing, imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction : thus, tis, rt (the v omitted as in the theme, 208 d), tIv6s, &c. : G. rko tov Cyr. 8. 5. 7, tov; Soph. 0. T. 1435, D. rc V r V A. 299, i. 9. 7, rw ; Soph. El. 679 ; and, in the compound, 8tov i. 9. 21, iEsch. Pr. 170, 6'rp ii. 6. 23, PL G. Sreuu 8twv vii. 6. 24, D. oreois 8tois Soph. Tr. 1119, 8toio?, -a, -ov, and the superlative in -TaT09, -v, -ov. In receiving these affixes, the end- ings of the theme are changed as follows : 1.) -0?, preceded by a long syllable, becomes -o- ; by a short syllable, -co- : as, kov<|>cs light, Kovcpdrepos, -a, -ov, Kovcpbraros, -v, -ov. crowds wise, aocpurepos wiser, o-oTa.Tos wisest. a. A syllable before a mute and liquid is here regarded as long : as, a£\o$ dear, cpiXrepos, (plXraros • (-os -cu-) i\os friendly, (piXairepos, -aiTaros • (-os -e {irpbaros) irpwros, ihraros (262 d) ; and Poet. p.i>x aT0S inmost, inj^aros last. 258. 2.) -«?, and -?/? of Dec. 3, become -ea- ; and -u? becomes -v- : as, § 261. SECOND FORM. 181 \api6is agreeable, x a P t ^°" r€ P 0S f -^crraTos • ToXp.(?7ecs)TJs daring, ro\- fi{^(x)-f\- : as, rdXas, -avos, wretched, TaXdVrepos, -toltos \ so ,u.Aas black, fid/cap, blessed, fiaKapraros • (-€pov€o-Tepos, -ev are well ex- plained by reference to -lav as their common origin, and to the various changes of the consonant I. Thus, we notice, besides the use of the corresponding vowel t, a.) Contraction (sometimes with transposition), or omission between two vowels (142, 140) : as, iroXvs much (base 7roXe-, sync. 7rXe-), irXeiwv or irXewv more, irXetaros most, Lat. plus, plurimus ; (xiKpos small (ue-) lidwv minor, rare poet, /neio-ros minimus ; paSios easy (pd-) pduv, pharos (Ion. pv'toiu, prji'o-Tos, 8. 565) ; (X«-, akin to Dor. X<3 to desire, neut. pi. Xdold desirable, Theoc. 26. 32) Xw&v, /3. 169, Att. Xuxav, vi. 2. 15, X^rros; (dp-, ape-, in dper-rj virtus, valor, virtue) dpeiwv poet., braver, better, &pt- (ttos best ; (aucv-, cf. amcenus) d^eivuv better ; (X € P _ or X €l P"> 238 d) xefy>&w (Ep. xepeLw A. 114) inferior, worse, x^P t0 " r0 ^' 182 COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. § 261. b.) The change into olicrpos, /3a66s deep, ppaxte short, &c. f. New poetic or late comparatives are made by changing -«v into -<$T€pos or -T€pos • as, x e ' L P l3}V X €l P 0T€ P os > peioTepos, fiei^orepos • Xwtrepos. C. Irregular Comparison. 262. Many adjectives (a) are defective or redundant in com- parison ; and some comparatives and superlatives are formed (b) from positives which are not in use, (c) from words which are themselves comparatives or superlatives, or (d) from other parts of speech. Some of these are usually referred to positives in use, which have a similar signification. Thus, (a) Only those words which express properties that may exist in dif- ferent degrees, are compared ; except in a modified sense, for hyperbole, or for comic effect : as, pMvos alone, p-ovibraros alonest, most emphatically alone, Ar. PI. 182. See c and d. (b) Several forms, not strictly synonymous, are commonly referred to dyadds, good : thus, d-yaOos, dp-eiviav, dpicrros • (ieXTiwv, jSeXrio-ros • Kpeia- cruv, KpdTKxros • X ety &v Tl Aristl. Metaph. 10. 4), kaxo.riiiTaro%, Hel. 2. 3. 49 ; iXaxurros least, eXax^Torepos less tlian (lie least, Ephes. 3. 8 ; trp&ros first, irpumaTos first of all, B. 228. (d) Comparatives and Superlatives from other parts of speech. |3acus (ft'. more wisely, s (rax^s, 261 b) quickly, Bdaaov, Oolttov, r&xurra • &v« up, dvwrtpw, ai>u)T&T(a • «kC\os, , to wash, eXovo-dfirjv I washed myself, I bathed. b. The middle and passive voices have a common form, ex- cept in the Future and Aorist. In Etymology, this form is usually spoken of simply as pn^^sive, or as middle. Even in the Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between the two voices is not always preserved. c. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the mid- dle voice takes the place of the active. This is particularly frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme (172 c), the verb is termed deponent (deponens, as if putting off its proper sense to take that of another voice). E. g. 1.) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the middle form : clko6co to hear, aKotio-oiAat. • fiaLvoj go, f3rjo~ou.ai • yiyvtbcrKco know, yvivcrofiaL • ei/ud be, 'toojxai • /xavdavto learn, /xadrjaofiai. 2.) Deponent Verbs : aia06.vop.aL to perceive, f3o6\o{iai will, yiyvo/JLai become, 5{x°f JLCU receive, dvvaixat. be able, -^dofiai rejoice, otofiat think. d. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent passive, according as its Aorist has the middle or the passive form. § 267. tense. 185 267. B. Tense. The Greek has seven tenses : the Present, Imperfect, Future, Aorist, Per- fect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect. a. Tenses may be classified in two ways : I. with respect to the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the relation which the action bears to this time. b. I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present, 2. future, or 3. past. The reference to time is most distinct in the Indicative. In this mode, those tenses which refer to present or future time are termed primary or chief tenses ; and those which refer to past time, secondary or historical tenses. c. II. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time. The tenses which denote the first of these relations are termed definite ; the second, indefinite ; and the third, complete. These constitute three great formations, or classes of forms, in the Greek verb. d. The Aorist (dopia-ros indefinite) represents an action simply as performed. Its place is chiefly supplied in the Latin by the Perfect. Thus Zypatya scripsi, / ivrote. e. Of the Future Perfect (also called the Third Future, and in old grammars the Paulo-post Future), the simple form is found in only a few verbs ; and, with this exception, this tense and those which are marked in 30 as wanting, viz. the indefinite present and the definite future, are supplied by forms belong- ing to other tenses, or by participles combined with auxiliary verbs. f. For the general formation of the Greek tenses, see 31. In respect to the details of formation, they are naturally asso- ciated in six systems : 1. the Present, or Definite System, in- cluding the Pres. and Impf. j 2. the Future System, including the Fut. Act. and Mid. ; 3. the Aorist System, including the Aor. Act. and Mid. ; 4. the Perfect (or Perf. Act.) System, in- cluding the Perf. and Plup. Act. ; 5. the Perfect Passive System, including the Perf. and Plup. Pass, and Mid., and the Fut. Perf. ; and 6. the Compound System, including the Aor. and Fut. Pass., which are formed with an auxiliary (274). Of these systems, the 1 st belongs to the great definite formation ; the 2d, 3d, and 6th, to the indefinite ; and the 4th and 5th, to the complete. For the so-called second systems, see 289 b. 186 CONJUGATION. TENSE. MODE. §268. 268. In some verbs the sense of the complete tenses, by a natural transition, passes into that of other tenses ; and the Perfect becomes, in signification, a Present ; the Pluperfect, an Imperfect or Aorist ; and the Future Perfect, a common Future. Thus, ton^u (45) to station, Perf. cornica (I have sta- tioned myself) I stand, Plup. iarf)K€ip I stood, Fut. Perf. ion&i / shall stand ; p.ipvf)(TKa> to remind, Perf. Pass, fxkp.vnp.ai (I have been reminded) I remember, Plup. ip.epvrjp.nv I remembered, Fut. Perf. pepvfjaropai I shall remember. a. In a few of these verbs, the Pres. is not used, and the Perf. is regarded as the t/ieme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the theme, are termed treteritive. In like manner, those Perfect systems in which the Perf. is used in the sense of the Pres. may be termed, for convenience, pretcritivc systems ; and even a Perf. so used, a Prcteritive. 269. C. Mode. The Greek has six modes : the Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Impera- tive, Infinitive, and Participle. a. For a table of these modes, classified according to the character of the sentences which they form, see 30 c. b. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Pres. and Aor. have all the modes ; but the Fut and the Fut. Perf. want the Sub- junctive and Imperative ; and the Perf, for the most part, wants the Subjunctive and Optative, except as supplied by compound forms, and likewise, in the active voice, the Imperative. c. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each other as present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses (267 b) ; and some have therefore chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general conjunctive, or contingent mode, calling the Pres. and Perf. Opt. the Imperfect and Pluperfect Conjunctive. With this change, the number and general offices of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between tno Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes more obvious. In the Infinitive and Participle, the forms called Present and Perfect belong also to the Imperfect and Pluperfect. Without changing familiar names, the relations of the modes and tenses are illustrated by the arrangement in 37. The Imperative, from its very signification, cannot belong to a past tense. d. The passive verbal adjectives in -tos and -reos (Lat. -tus and -ndus), as closely akin to participles, are often included in tables of inflection. In the form of the stem, they commonly agree with the Aor. in -6nv, except as a preceding mute is changed before r (147) : as, OpeTrreos, fr. rpi(pa> to nourish, Aor. i6pi(p6nv. 270. D. Number and Person. The numbers and persons of verbs correspond to those of nouns and pronouns (265). § 273. NUMBER AND PERSON. HISTORY. 187 a. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person; the Infinitive, from its character as partaking of the nature of an ab- stract noun, wants the distinctions of number and person altogether; and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an adjective, has the distinctions of gender and case, instead of person. b. The 1st Pers. sing, of the Pres. ind., is commonly regarded as the theme of a verb (172 e) ; while, in adding its meaning, the Eng. Inf. is more frequently used : as, Xv, and Verbs in -/«. For a full paradigm of regular conjugation, see Xu'w (37) ; for shorter paradigms of the several classes of verbs, see 39 s. d. In \6-qal (45 u, 143 b). See 296 s. b. In some forms, cr fell out between two vowels, which were then usually contracted (140) : as, 4\4y(ea.tx ftevos (45 u). 276. a. We observe three corresponding periods in declension and in conjugation. The oldest inflection in both, that of Dec. 3, and of the nude Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Perf. and Plup. pass.), was without connecting vowels. The next in order, that of Dec. 2, and of the euphonic Pres. and Impf. (followed by the Fut.), took the connecting vowels o and e (Lat. o and u, e and i) ; while the latest form of simple in- flection, that of Dec. 1, and of the Aor. and Perf. act. systems, made use of a (Lat. a or i) as a connective. b. In the Perf. and Plup. act., we find a series of euphonic devices, to meet the alternate demands of pure and impure stems ; and, as the result, four successive formations: 1. the primitive nude formation; 2. the formation in -a, -eiv ; 3. the formation in -tea, -iceiv after a vowel ; 4. the formation in -Ka, -k&.v after a consonant (after a labial or palatal mute, softened to -d, -elv, 149). The last formation nowhere appear;; in. Horn., and the third only in a few words. See 289, 317 s. §278. PREFIXES OP CONJUGATION. — AUGMENT. 189 CHAPTER VIII. PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. 277. The Greek verb has two prefixes : the Augment and the Eeduplication (32). I. The Augment (augmentum, increase) pre- fixes e- in the secondary tenses of the Indica- tive, to denote past time (271 d). a. If the verb begins with a consonant, the e- constitutes a distinct syllable, and the augment is termed syllabic : as, Avo> to loose, yvcopiCa recognize, piVra> throw ; Impf. ? A£oi>, eyva- pi&v, eppiiTTOv (14G) ; Aor. eXikra, eyi/coptcra, eppiyjta. b. If the verb begins with a vowel, the e- unites with it, and the augment is termed temporal. c. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time), because it in- creases the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic augment before a vowel, see 279 b. The breathing of an initial vowel re- mains the same after the augment. 278. Rules for the Temporal Augment (7). a. The prefix e- unites with a to form rj, and with the other vowels, if short, to form the cognate long vowels : as, 'aSuoEcu to injure, 'dOXico contend, cXir^a) hope, 'ikctcvw supplicate, opGeco erect, 'v(3pii;a> insult ; Impf. (4a)1\Sticow, tfdXovv, (ee)i\\Tri{ou, (eL)'iK€Tevop t (eo)&pdovv, ( increase, oIkti£g> pity, ol'ojxai think ; Impf. (eat) •§tovv (109), nv^avov, Qkti^ov, qj/atjv • Aor. rJTrjcra, Tju^cra, tyKTiaa, (xsrjdrjv. c. In other cases, the e- is absorbed by the initial vowel or diphthong, without producing any change : as, Tjveoficu to lead, c!>cj>e\t'co profit, cI'ko) yield, cuovi£oficu augur, oirat,(a wound; Impf. {er))v{yoi>ixnv, ibcptXovv, eluov, oluvi^ofivv, ovra^ov • Aor. rjyrj- ad/X7]v, uicptX-qaa, el£a, oiwvLO-a/iwv, ovraaa. d. But in verbs beginning with cv, a few beginning with 01, €iKd£ to conjecture, and avalva to dry, usage is variable : as, eiKafov and in Att. also rjnafav, av&vdnv and rjvdvdnv ■ €i5\op.ai pray, ev^afiTjv and -qv^aixriv • olorpdw goad, otarp^aa or toarp-qaa Eur. Bac. 32. Et is also changed in -flew and rjdeiv (45 m, 46 a). 190 PREFIXES. AUGMENT. REDUPLICATION. §279. 279. a. The verbs fiovXopai to will, dvvapat to be able, and fxeWa to purpose, sometimes add the temporal to the syllabic augment, particularly in the later Attic : as, ij3ov\6fM7)P and 7j/3ov\6p,7}v, eSvvr/drjv and 7}8vv^0tjv, fyteXXcw and tf/xeWov. Like forms are found from airoXaijcj enjoy, and irapapofieu transgress. b. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment : as, fryvufu to break, 2ai;a • dvoi-yco to open, aviipyov (278 b), avi^a. Add dXto-Kojiai to be captured, avSdvco (Ion. and poet. ) please, 6pd« see, ovp&a mingo, wGeco push, wvc'op.ai buy, and some poetic, chiefly Epic, forms : as, icpvoxoei A. 3. c. In a few verbs beginning with e, the usual contraction of fe into ei takes place (121) : as, €aco to permit, elW, elacra. Add kQCtfi) to accustom, IXicrcrco roll, ?Xkg> draw, £irw be occupied toith, 4p"yd£op.ai work, 2pira> and epinjfa serpo, creep, co-rido) entertain, %\ to celebrate a feast, (e€o)enpTafov. So, in the Plup., icpicecv, and the poet. iu>\iren>, eupyeiv, fr. Perf. coiko, seem, &>\ira hope, ?op-ya have wrought. e. The forms in b, c, and d are to be referred, in part at least, to an original digamma or to loose, Perf. XeXi/xu, Plup. £\4\vKeiv • •ypd^c* write, yty pa8la> prate, ippa^/u)8r]Ka (159 e), ippa\f/u)Sr)Keiv • -yva>pii;io (277 a), eyvibptKa, eyvwp'meiv •■ X,y\K6(a emulate, e^Aw/ca ■ \j/€vSop.ai lie, £iJ/evo-p.ai • d8iK€a> (278 a), rjSiKrjKa, rjSiKTjKeiv • av£dva> (278 b), vS^/iai. • ij-ycofiai (278 c), rfyvfj-ai • opdco (279 b), iuipdKa, eupdi • ep\d£op.ai (279 c), etpyacrpLai • efra, eUeiv (45 k). § 282. IN COMPOUND VERBS. 191 b. In a few cases, the first of two other consonants is repeated, espe- cially if there has been syncope : as, ireTdvvvp.i to spread (s. irera-, irra-) irtTTTafAcu • p.ip.vr) take, etX-q^a, etXr};xp.ai and Xe'Xrjp.p.ai. • Xeyot collect, etXoxa, etXeyp.ai and XiXe- yp.at • p.eipop.ai share, etp.app.ai, elp.dpp.rjv • s. pc- say, elprjKa, etprjpxn. b. Some of these forms seem to have arisen from an omitted consonant (the rough breathing in eip.app.ai, as in 'iarrjica, pointing to an original drive out, i^r)Xavvov, e^eXrjXaica. a. Before the prefix €-, prepositions ending in a consonant which is changed in the theme, resume that consonant ; and those ending in a vowel, except irtpC and irpo, regularly suffer elision (128). The final vowel of irpo often unites with the €- by crasis (126 7). Thus, €ji/3dXXw to throw in (150), euefiaXXov cK/SdXXw throw met (165), eZifiaXXov • airo/JdXXw throw away, dire^aXXov • irepi/SdXXw throw around, wepi^aXXov • irpo/3dX\a> throw before, rrpoefiaXXov and rrpovfiaXXov. b. A few verbs receive their prefixes before the preposition ; a few re- ceive them both before and after ; and a few are variable : as, €iritrrap.at to understand, r)rriaTdp.rjv • hoy\is Zcparo, &s )0£>, \v{0c-ir)v)0cir)v • \v-0c-vrcov, \v(0c-vts)0cis ' c\v-0r)-v, Xv 0t)-ti. 289. The letters k and 0, of the tense-signs, are sometimes omitted. Tenses wanting these letters are termed second ; and, in distinction, tenses which have them, though commonly later forms, are termed first : as, 1 Perf. TrcnciKa, 2 Perf. niiTot0a • 1 Plup. circtrcUciv, 2 Plup. circiroi0cw (39); l'Aor. pass. r)yye\0r)v, 2 Aor. pass. rjyycXrjv • 1 Fut. pass. dyyc\0r)- and -e- to -77- (§ 272 d ) : Ind. and Subj. Xu-o), Xvtr-a) • Xv-« s Xv-tj-s, Xu-« Xv-77, kv-ojuv Xv-tt-pc*, Xu c-re \vt)-T€, Xv^o-vaijovai Xv^ca-vaijaxri • Xvcr-e-rai Xixr-rjTai. 293. 3. The Optative has, for its connective, t (the general sign of the mode, 272 d), either alone or with other vowels. Rule. If the tense has no connecting vowel in the Ind., and its base ends in a, e , or o, then the Opt. has -trj- in the subjective forms, and simply -1- in the objective ; in other cases, it has -at- or -01- : XvQe-irjv (37) : iiKoir}-v (42) ; (fiavoifii or cfravoirjp (40). c. The form of the Opt. in -oitjv, for -oiju, is called the Attic Optative, as especially used by Att. writers, though not confined to them : ivupJrrj Hdt. 1. 89, oiKolyTe Theoc. 12. 28. It is most employed in the sing., where it is the common form in contracts in -€« and -da>, and still more in those in -do). In the 3 Plur. it is very rare. It is also found in the 2 Perf., as ire7roi0oL7) (38) Ar. Ach. 940, and in the 2 Aor. of the simple verb ^x w to have, though its compounds have commonly the form in -oiju ■ axoir] Cyr. 7. 1. 36, Kardcrxois Mem. 3. 11. 11. So ioi-qv (45 m). d. The Aor. opt. act. has, in the 2 and 3 Sing, and the 3 Plural, a second and far more common form, in which the connective is that of the Ind. with « prefixed : as, Xvar-eia-s, Xva-eie, Xva-eia-v. e. This form, like many other remains of old usage, was termed by grammarians JEolic. It was little used in the Dor. It greatly prevailed in the Att. and Ion., but not exclusively : fielveias Y. 52, xpawete Hdt. 3. 30, dptetav Th. 6. 11 ; X- con- nective, is wanting ; after -oi- and -at-, and in the nude Present (303 a), it becomes -fu ; in other cases, it becomes v (275 a) : 2\va-a, \4\vK-a, rj8-ea ydr) (46 a) ; Ai5(o-/*)w, Xi5(w-/a)« ■ Xi*-oi-/a, \tia-ai- fu (293 f), &rri7-/u (45) ; t\v-o-p, iXeXvK-ei-v (273 e), i\vd v -v, Xvddy-p - (120 s) ; \6-aoL-o, Xda-ac-o • \t\v-crai, \4\v-(ro, £\4\v-ao ■ tara-aai, 'Lara-ao and i'o-T(a-o)ft), ride-aai and ri0(e-ai)T), 8i8o-iv6-fi€0a or, for the sake of the metre, \v6fieo-0a. b. The 1 Dual primary had a special form in -peOov, of which only three classical examples have been found, all in poetry before a vowel : xeptdJ)- Hedov *. 485, XeXelfifiedov Soph. El. 950, 6p/x(Jbfiedov Id. Ph. 1079. 198 CONJUGATION. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. §299. c. The 2 Plur. always ends in c The 2 Dual is obtained by changing this vowel into -ov ; and the 3 Dual, by changing it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -rjv in the secondary, and into -, \), and a lingual, middle (8) : as, from rpiirw (s. rpair-) to turn, (reTpair-vTai) T€Tpd(f>arac PL Pep. 533 b; from rd Cyr. 4. 6. 10, and Itwv JEsch. Eum. 32 (45 1, m), the old plural form (afterwards the dual, cf. 186 g, 271 c) remained without change. 301. Infinitive : -v, -vai, -i ; -)yKG.v (150) ; )vti», icp(va> to judge, ktcCvw to slay, tcCvo) to stretch, and irXvvco to wash, v is omitted before the affixes which remain close (152) ; except sometimes in poetry for the sake of the metre, and in late writers : KetcXifiai, iKXidrjv (£kXLv6tj Z. 468) ; idicpiKa, iKptd-rjv. b. In other verbs, v characteristic, before p, more frequently becomes op, but sometimes becomes p or is dropped : as, irtyaapuzi (40) ; %t)patva» to dry, i&foaaptu, j^paftf/at, and late i^papuii. 305. 2. Future Tense-Sign, -a--. In the Fu- ture active and middle, changes affecting the tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which are then contracted : a. Attic Future. In Futures in 4 from verbs in -i£w of more than two syllables, the -a- becomes -e- : as, KOfi(c- drop the -a- : as, cXavvo) or £Xdu to drive, F. A(a-)», 4X(d)iav ' reX^-crw, ^-w)», reX(^aet)€t, reX^-ao, 4-o)ovpLcu (42 g) ; 200 FUTURE AND AORIST. TENSE-SIGNS. INSERTION. § 305. \i, x(^Uvvv\u clothe ; in all verbs in -dvvv|ii, as vvfu scatter ; and sometimes in verbs in -d£«, /3i/3dfu> make go. c. This form of Futures in -euro, -&rw, and -t€i>va> flee, ev^o/j.ou and (pev^ovfxai. Other Att. examples are kAoXu weep, vi sport, -jrCirrw fall, irWu bloio, iruvGdvojiai inquire. So iaaecrai B. 393. e. The Liquid, Att., and Dor. Futures, from their formation, are in- flected like the contract Pres. (42). In a few verbs, the Pres. and Att. Fut. have the same form : iXG>, reXQ, kclXQ. f. In a few verbs, the old Pres. remained as a Fut., after the formation of a new Pres. ; or the poets used the same form as both Pres. and Fut. (273 a, d) : as, itrQita to eat, F. Z8ojjlcli, Ar. Nub. 121 ; irCvw drink, F. irio- /aou Cyr. 1. 3. 9 ; dvvw accomplish, 4pva> draw, Tavtiw strctcli, also as Fut. A. 365, 454, 0. 174. For xetfw as Fut., /S. 222, see 50. 306. 3. Aorist Tense-Sign. a. The sign of the Aor. is omitted in tma said, rjveyica bore, *x ea poured, Zkco poet., burned; and in a few Epic forms, as eaaeva E. 208. See tfnjfit, (fxpa>, x*°h Kala>, (tcvco, aXevw, baTcopai, in 50. For the Liq. Aor., see 152. b. The Aor. borrows the Perf. tense-sign in eOijica, e8oo/ca, and Jjm (45). These Aorisjs are used by classic writers only in the Ind., and chiefly in the Sing, and 3 Plur., the other forms being supplied by the 2 Aor. : idtbuare vii. 7. 10. In the Middle, the Att. has only the Ind. i}K efo, 5^- 5pd/j.ai, rarely 8e"5paap.ai, edpdadrjv ■ kXelw shut, KixXeifxai and Ke"KXeia/xcu, iKXeiffdyjv • pljiVT] fiat renumber, £p.vf}adrjv xpdofiai use, K^xpvP^-h &XfripOw* f. The labor, re fxva> cut ; Pf. (3tfi\r)Ka, KeKjir]Ka, T6Tfir)Ka, for /3ej3a\Ka, &C. ; /3f/3X»7/uai, CTprjOrjv. B. Vowel Changes. 309. 1. Contraction". The regular open af- fixes are contracted with a, e, or o preceding. a. Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed Contract Verbs or, from the accent of the theme, Perispomena. In distinction, other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs (768). b. The verbs K to burn, and xXdu weep, which have likewise the forms Kaioo and /cXcuw, are not contracted. Dissyllabic Verbs in -i sail, 7rX^ets 7rXets, 7rX^et 7rXei, ir\4o/xev, irX^ere TrXeire, irXe'ovat. Except 8«»> bind (thus distinguished from di(a need), to 8odv, rq> dovvn PI. Crat. 419 a, b; and a few rare cases. c. The Inf. is now commonly regarded as contracted from the old form in -cv (301 a) : Tip.(a-ev)av, rather than Ti/-i(a-eu>)q.v, iX&>, iiX^aofxai, TrelX-q~ fiat, TrecpiXTfjaofiai ' StjXow, edrjXuadfXTjv, edeorfkdjfxrfv (42) ; Tt» honor, poet., fiau), irTaa. ' v» produce, (pvaoj, iritpvKa ■ caw, idau, etdaa. • fortcta, eiaridKa (279 c) ; 0r]paco, edrjpddrjv (42 g) ; aKpoaop.cu licar, dtcpodaofxai. a. A few verbs vary from the rule in respect to the use of d or r\ : thus, a becomes tj, in TiTpdw bore, and tenses from XP a_ to supply need (F. rprf- aw, XPV™* XPV (TO f xat ) 5 a, in Troi.vdop.ai avenge one's self, ira- acquire (iroi- ydaofiai, iriwdpLcu) ; a and tj, in Goivdw feast, Tropirda) fasten, and dXodco thresh : doivdaopxn Eur. Cycl. 550, iK0otvrjaop.at iEsch. Pr. 1025. b. In the Perf. of t£0t||u and Ktjui, e becomes ci • rideiKa, etna, et/xai (45). c. In some verbs, the short vowel is retained; and (d) some are variable : as, (c) onrdw to draw, a-rraau, ^airaKa • reX4u», iriXeaa, reriXeapMi (42 g) ; dpow plow, apbaw, r/pddvv • (d) 8&o bind, d-rjacj, ^8-qaa, de'dena, 8£8e/u.ai • 0va), Ovab), ridvKa (44) ; Xva> (37) ; 8w» sink, Svaw, didvua, iSvdyv. COMP. GR. 9* 202 CONJUGATION. VOWEL CHANGES. §310. e. Verbs in -dvvvui and -cvvvui, and stems in Xa-, or in v- after a short syllable, for the most part retain the short vowel : as, 0qv • &|/o> to boil, tf\J/-rj-aa ■ feppco go away, -fjppTjKa • u&Xa> delay, /xeXXrfvu (41) ; fijw smell, tifoaa • jdoo-Kw /bed, fioGicfjVw ' but ir^JLirtt, tt^^w ■ apx<*>> fy>£a ' o-irc'vSw, (Tireiau (41). b.) To liquid stems in which a diphthong precedes the stem- mark ; and to a few in which e precedes : as, (3ovXopcu to will, ^ovK-'fj-aofiai, j3e(3oijX-T]~p.at ■ yaipo? rejoice, xatp^crw • €8e'Xa> or Se'Xw wish, edeX-Zjcru} or deX-qcu) • \Uk • ip- inquire, epfoopt-ai • pivw remain, F. ixtvw, but Pf. pep-tv-qna. (cf. 150 e). c.) To a few other stems : as, Zi sleep, eu5^, (s. av-) ir^-qva, iire^veiv (40) ; 6dXX» to bloom, TiOyjXa • but tcpaXfit cry out, (icpay-) kiicp&yd • Kpi^w creak, (icpiy-) Ktuplya ■ p.vKaop.at bellow, (p.vk-) fi4p,vKa. After the Att. reduplication, the short vowel com- monly remains : as, iX-qXvda (281 d, 134 a). b.) e becomes o, and « (lengthened from V) becomes ot : as, KTetvo> to kill, (tcrev-) ficrova • depicopai see, poet,, dedopKa • XeiVa> (Xitt-, Xet7r-) leave, XeXotzra, ir'eTroiOa (39) ; eoX7ra, coikci, olda (280 c). c. This change of an E to an O vowel is also found in foprijp to break, 2 Pf. Zppwya ; and in the 1 Perf. System of a few verbs : as, Tpeirtt to turn, rirpo steal, k£kXofirjv> the nude forms ofytcu, $prjv, are commonly used, especially when the verb is parenthetic : p.d\\ olfiai, epwvrts toijtov, greatly desiring this, mcthinks, iii. 1. 29. 314. Before the nude affixes, the short stem-mark is lengthened (a becoming v, unless preceded by p, 115 ; and I, ei), a.) In the Indicative sing, of the Pres. and Impf. act.: as, Zffrrifii, tLOtjs, 8iduai, deiKvvfit (s. 1 (s. s, 5(6-w)(3//,cu, 8(6-y)u>. b. In like manner, o>tj is sometimes found in the Opt. for oitj ; chief- ly, but not wholly, in the later Greek : as, aXcpy £. 183 (aXol-qv X. 253), Pl<$7)v (2 Aor., thus distinguished from the Att. Pres., 293 c) Ar. Ran. c. In a few instances, the Subj. and Opt. of verbs in -vjju. are irregularly formed, or supplied by the Ind. : thus, used as Subj., diaaKed&wvcri, 5ta- (45 h), 5vtj du^rjv) k. 51, QOIto A. 330. d. In the Opt. act., the forms without tj (293 a) naturally prevail more in the longer Pres., than in the shorter 2 Aor. D. Complete Tenses. 317. The complete tenses are wholly wanting in many verbs. They are more used in the passive than in the active system, and more by later than by earlier writers. The use of their simple forms is chiefly limited, except in preteritive systems (268), to the Perf. and Plup. indic, inf., and part., other needed forms being commonly supplied by the Perf. PART, with the auxiliary dpi a. The Perf. subj. and opt. are chiefly so supplied : Subj. AeXvfcws S, XeXv/zeVos 3> • Opt. XfXwco)? WJtt, XfXu/xeVoy ctrjv. b. The Perf. act. may also form these modes by inflection, especially when used as a Pres. : as, iar^Ku, vi. 5. 10, earQ, PI. Gorg. 468 b, £, ^. 101, Sedlw, Rep. A. 1. 11 (46 d, b), TreiroiBol-qv (293 c) ; d\^- (puaiv PI. Pol. 269 c, ireiTTWKOi v. 7. 26, ireiroi.7]Koi Th., ^XrjKOLev Id. c. In the Perf. pass., these modes have a simple form in only a few pure verbs : as, Kraopcu to acquire, |ju|j.vt|o-kco remind, koX&o call ; Pf. P. or M. K€KT7]fxai I have acquired, I possess, ^ixvq^ai I remember, /ce/cX^at I have been called, I am named (268) ; Subj. K€KT(Tj-(o)(a/xai, k€kttj, jceKrij- rat. Symp. 1. 8, fiefivdifiai, PI. Phil. 31 a ; Opt. K€KT(r}-i)wr)v, KCKTrJTO PL Leg. 731 c, fiefxvriixriv Q. 745, fx.efj.i>rJTo Ar. PL 991, k€k\tiix7}v, kckK^o Soph. Ph. 119 (292, 293) ; also k€kt(7j-oi)^/x7)v, KenTy/ieda Em. Heracl. 282, fi€fjM'^r]v, ixefxv^o i. 7. 5 (v. 1. fxe/uLvrjo, /xi/xvoio), fiefivyro Cyr. 1. 6. 3 (cf. 315 c). So Subj. (pa\-, j3Xa-) ^Xijade Andoc; Opt. \e\(v-i)vvTO vpa-ea0at Pind. N. 1. 104, elpfjacTai Cyr. 7. 1. 9, XeXijo-erai (Pf. Xe'Ai?o>iat) Eur. Ale. a. The Fut. Perf. is frequent in those verbs only in which it is used as a common Future (268). Its Participle is scarcely found in classic Greek. b. Of the active form, only two examples belong to Attic prose, both formed from preteritives, and both giving rise to equivalent middle forms : Pf. 'iarriKa I stand, r^dvrjKa I am dead, Fut. Pf. ear^w and iffr^oficu I shall stand, Tt&rtfaa and Tcdrffconat. Other examines of the Fut. Pf. mid. with the Perf. act. are KticXayya.I scream, Keic\dy£ofw.i Ar. Vesp. 930, K^Kpdya I cry, KeKpd%op.ai Ar. Ran. 265. See 284 f, g. c. The Fut. Perf. unites the base of the Perf. with Future affixes ; and a vowel lengthened before the tense-sign - A. 189, dvibyere \£>. 132, and tivwxOe Eur. Rh. 987 ; KeKpdya (319 b), Imv. ntupaxdi. Ar. Vesp. 198, Keicpdyere lb. 415, and K^Kpa(y-re)\Q€ Ar. Ach. 335 ; 4-yetpw rouse, 2 Pf. iyp-qyopa 1 am awake, Imv. 2 pi. iyprjyopde 2. 299 ; ird XP^, Id. Subj. of Verbs in -ui, dweibpeda Hdt. 4. 97, 2 Aor. oTeaxri Id. 3. 15, £, and o with d, 135) ; and sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly € used for a to «i : as, opdu, contr. opu F. 234, extended 6p6w E. 244, 6p6cpre A. 347, 6p6- hxrai A. 9, 6/)(deis)£s A. 202, 6/odo.s H. 448, ip.vibovro B. 686 ; pydaadai. a. 39, Spibuxn o. 324 ; 5pwoip.i 317 ; Att. Fut. (305 b) t\6w) Id. 1. 75, d/iweuo-i 9. 6 ; Aor. Subj. airaipedeu Id. 3. 65, dtuai 4. 71 (316 a) ; 2 Sing. j3oi;\eat, retreat, Id. 1. 90, eyeveo 35, $6ev 7. 209. (b) In like manner, co, used for ao (322 a), may become ev : as, elptb- revv Hdt. 3. 140. So in the Dor., -fipurew Theoc. 1. 81 ; y&evm 90. c. The Epic commonly omits contraction, if the last vowel is «, o>, 01, ij, or fl (except in the Aor. pass, subj., and in the Perf. subj. d8Co) ; but otherwise employs or omits it according to the metre (co and cov, when contracted, regularly becoming ev. Synizesis is frequent when c precedes a long O vowel, and sometimes occurs in eov, and even in cat. The Ep., also, often protracts e to ci, and sometimes doubles the vowel of contrac- § 326. CONTRACTION. TENSE-SIGNS. CONNECTING VOWELS. 207 tion tj. Thus, A. 515 ; t\4ei I. 342, Zppei P. 86, ippee N. 539, ^77 r. 2 A, taeai A. 563, ftrcrtcu f. 33 ; 0/>dfeo E. 440, cppdfcv 8. 395, /cdXeov 0. 550, naXevvTo B. 684 ; retxeUa A. 359, ireXeiero A. 5 ; Aor. Pass. Subj. 8a,ueiu} a. 54, Sap-vys, v. 1. Sa/za'fls, Y. 436 ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -|u, 0etw II. 83, dvrjV B - 34, Wwuev a>. 485, tfeiV"' A. 143. d. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. often extends the 2 Aor. Inf. in -€tv, as if formed by contraction, to -&iv : as, id^ir, opto Hdt. 7. 52 (0o/3eO 1. 9). f. For the Doric contraction of co and eov into cv, and, in the stricter Dor., of €6 into tj, see 131 b, 130 c : eXtyev Theoc. 1. 86, p&xev 113, ty^ew 2. 89, edaa 76 ; 7rot?/ Ar. Lys. 1318. So, in Horn., direCX-frr-riv X. 313. 324. III. The first vowel 0. a. Here the Ionic and Doric usually employ contraction, following the common rules, except that the Ion. sometimes uses ev for ov, and the Dor. « and u> for ov and 01 (131 b, 130 c) : as, diiccuevat Hdt. 1. 133, fiaarlyQv Epich. 19 [1]. • b. The Dor. <■> is likewise used by other dialects in pi-yow to be cold, and in the Ion. L8p6o> sweat : as, piywv Ar. Vesp. 446, pcytp PI. Gorg. c. The Epic sometimes protracts the o to «, and sometimes employs the combination ou after the analogy of verbs in -da> (322 c) : as, idpuovra 2. 372, apbuxnv 1. 108 ; 2 Aor. Subj. yvuw if. 118, durj p.. 216, dibyaiv A. 324. B. Tense-Signs, and Union of Stem and Affix. 325. a. In verbs in -£», the Dor. commonly employs £ for ) aVw Theoc. 1. 145, (4-£« 7r. 404, A. ijvoj^a, Hes. Sc. 479 ; fr. &\em, oX^koj destroy, 2. 172. d. Where the Inch has a short connective, the Ep. often retains this in the Subj. (292. 2), for the sake of the metre : as, dyelpop.ev A. 142, top.ev B. 440, (pdierai T. 173, pdayeat B. 232, eldere 9. 18, Xdperov K. 545. e. The poets, especially the Epic, much extended the use of nude af- fixes in the Pres., Impf., and 2 Aor. ; introducing them into euphonic systems, and even using them after a diphthong or a consonant, chiefly in the Pass, and Mid. : as, dvvu, ipvo>, Tavvw (305 f ), Pres. rdvvrat. P. 393, 2pvcr0ai e. 484 ; Impf. -jjvvto e. 243, "dvvro, "dvvix.es, Theoc. 2. 92, 7. 10 ; \dcrora> watch, Imv. vyal Id. Bac. 1350. Cf. 158. d. For the Impf. hlthp and fy, the Ion. has erldea Hdt. 3. 155, and 9ja p. 313, unaugmented Ha A. 321, Hdt. 2. 19. So fas Hdt. 1. 187, $ftf A. 381, fore Hdt. 4. 119, fcurav 9. 31. Cf. 306 c. 330. The flexives of the 3 Plur. are interchanged, espe- cially in the Alex, and Hellen. Greek, and the Ep. and Dor. poets : thus, a.) Alex, and Hellen., -dv for -curt of the Perf., and -crav for -v or -ev : as, ir4pTKav Lye. 252, ffyMMCO* Jn. 17. 7 (so Zopyav Horn. Batr. 179) ; erxafraav Lye. 21, ijXdoo-av Ps. 79. 1, iroi^craiaaM Deut. 1. 44. b.) In the Ep. and Dor. poets (sometimes imitated by the Att.), the older -v for -dyeaai Lk. 17. 8. 332. Iterative Form. a. The Ep., to express with more emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action, or sometimes perhaps for metrical effect, often formed the Impf. and Aor. in -o-Kov, -a-KOfirju. b. This form, called the iterative (itero, to repeat), and akin to the Lat. formation in -sco, also appears in Ion. prose, and rarely in Dor. and Att. poets, (c) Of the connectives of the Impf. and Aor., it used -6- and -a- (290 a), (d) sometimes dropping the -€- after a or €, and (e) rarely using -a- for -€-. (f) It was almost strictly confined to the Ind. sing, and 3 plur., where it was inflected as an Impf. (-ctkov, -ctkcs, -otcc, &c), but commonly without the augment, which was now less needed, (g) Be- fore the -o-K-, a short vowel was not lengthened. Thus, (c, f ) Impf. ix e(TK0V I was i n the habit of carrying, N. 257, ?x ecrKcy E. 472, ^cecr/ce 126, Hdt. 6. 12, 3 pi. $xe<™ov 8. 627, for el X ov, -es, -c, -ov ; v Theoc. 2. 18, o^otw^evcu A. 187. c. In other tenses, the nude Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form -jxev, in the iEol. -v and -pevai, and in the Ep. -vox, -p.€v, and -fievcu : as, et/xev Theoc 5. 21, X. 315, teftevai Insc. Cum., B. 285, detveu A. 26 (cf. A. 57), yvibfievai a. 411 ; vUdv (335 b) Ale. 86 [15] ; redydfievai 0. 225, tdfxeu A. 719, tBfxepai N. 273. So eard/ievai Hdt. 1. 17. Before -|«v and -fievai, a short vowel in the 2 Aor. does not pass into a diphthong (314 d). d. In like manner the non- Attic poets employ, for -eiv (originally -cv, 294 b), the prolonged -4\lw and -Ipevcu : as, &icov(€v){pw A. 547, Pind. 0. 3. 44, Theoc. 8. 83, ijcovifupcu X. 380, d#/i«» *. Ill, d^erat 50. e. Verbs in -6m and -&> have a contract form in -T|p.€vcu : as, yo(d-€t>)1\- jitvai £. 502, irew^fievai. v. 137, KoX^-e^^jievai K. 125, Trevd^/ievai av, Ar. Lys. 1297, &c. E. Verbs in -/«. 335. a. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the forms with a connecting vowel (315), especially in the Pres. sing, of verbs whose characteristic is € or o : as, ndeis Pind. P. 8. 14, ndei a. 192, Hdt. 1. 133, didois I. 164, 81S01 519, Hdt. 1. 107, SiSovrtv B. 255 ; larq. Hdt. 4. b. On the other hand, the JM., Dor., and Ep. retain the form in -p in some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in -w : as, KdXrj/xi Sap. 1. 16, 8pr)/u 2. 11, rUnyu Theoc. 7. 40, for /caX^w, &c. c. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another a to « (cf. 322 a), and sometimes inserts € before a (135 a) : as, ivy- Z(pvyoi> irtvy/j.ai, n. s. 6vy- i4>e6x^V J/ Trefevya i, new Att. tolttw (169 a) ; opdw, Ion. ope'w. c. In the following sections of this chapter, and in some of the tables, small Roman letters, and figures annexed, are used to mark classes of stems and their subdivisions : as, a, a 1 , b 2 . 212 THE "VERB. PRIME AND MODIFIED STEMS. §340. I. Prime Stems (a). 340. 1. Prime Stems may be roots, either (a 1 ) giving rise to modified stems, or (a 2 ) remaining alone ; or they may be derived stems, either (a 3 ) giving rise to other stems, or (a 4 ) re- maining alone. Thus, (a 1 ) the root ti-, to pay (itself found in the poet. Pres. tLw), gives rise to the stems tiv- and tivv-, used in the later Presents tlvoj and poet. rivvuac ; while (a 2 ) the root 4\ir-, to cause to hope, remains alone in the Ep. verh 2\ir, &c. : as, (b 1 ) 2 Aor. P. €$apr)v, Pr. A. hipio flay ; eVXaK^j', ttX^kw plait ; crpa- trt]v, rp£irw turn ; (b 2 ) 2 A. Ztskov, Pr. tiktw bring forth, beget ; ap.f3\6a> and dfj.f3\{o-Kw miscarry ; (b 3 ) 2 A. Zrpayov, Pr. (Tpoty-) rputyu eat. 342. c. Contraction, Syncope, Metathesis, Antithesis (103 s). 1. Some stems (c 1 ) are contracted: as, aeCSu $8a> sing, dttrora? a', cf. 222 a) shut. 2. Some stems are (c 2 ) syncopated in the theme, chiefly in cases of redu- plication; (c 3 ) others, in the 2 Aor. (340. 3) ; and (c 4 ) others, in other tenses : as, (c 2 ) 2 A. iyivdfirju, Pr. (yiyeu-) yCyvo/xai become (cf. Lat. gig[e]- no) ; iirerov (Dor.), irforrw fall ; pivw and poet. p,£p.vw remain; (c 3 ) (eytp-, l-yp-) 7ryp6,aT)u awoke ; (c 4 ) tcaXlu call, Pf. (kX.€-) KiicXvKa, fce/cX^ca. 3. In some stems there is transposition, chiefly by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs (c 5 ) in the theme ; (c 6 ) in the 2 Aor. ; (c 7 ) in otJier tenses : as, (c 6 ) 2 A. ZQopov, Pr. (6po-) dp&anu leap ; ZQavov, (0va-) dvriffKw die ; (c 6 ) (to.\-, r\a-) ^tXtjv endured, (-) rpe'c/xu, (dpex-) rpexv, (ix-) fy 1 *, (&-) ere'^i/, (6v) irCOrjv (159 b, d, e). 2. A few stems (d 2 ) have both aspirated and unaspirated forms : as, Ppvx w an( l Ppw*« J ^x w coo h 2 A. P. €^v\7}y and i^yriv. 344. e. In some stems, a consonant is (e 1 ) dropped or (e 2 ) added for the sake of euphony or the metre : as, yCyvofxai, become, (7V0-, vivvo-) yiyv&VKw [gjnosco, know, later softened forms -yivo/mt, yiisuaKU) ; XeijSo;, poet, €l'|3w, pour. In other verbs, the in- sertion of a consonant, especially v, renders a syllable long, and thus relieves the succession of short syllables, particularly in objective forms. See 351. 345. f. (Digamma Verbs, &c.) In some verbs, the (f 1 ) dropping or (f 2 ) change of F, or (f 3 ) of X eu "> X u ") X* w P our > Aor. ^X €a > Ep. £\ €va > A. P. iyyd-qv ; /cai'w (44) : (cex-, &" 141, ex* d 1 ) 2\w Aaw, F. (€X-0"w) ^£ w > 2 A. 2 drag ; irvfyrju, tvw fumigate. (h) Fut. dvw, Ka.Qa.pQ, Pr. <|>a£vw (40), KaQaCpu purify ; arirepu, o-ircCpw soiv ; T€Vv\uk-, pu8-, pd£a> tell ; ovopur-, 6vopd£a> name ; (j 2 ) 2 A. fapiiyov, ia-fy&yrjv, Pr. Kpd£w cry, or slay ; o"T€vd£a> groan ; ( j 3 ) KXayy-, KXd£w clang ; ( j 4 ) vl-, v^w, later viirro;, wash. 1 (/or k, see 350). The I unites with X, to form XX : as, F. (3uX&, crcpaXu), dXXu deceive, oriKkw send. a. Palatals in -£a> are mostly onomatopes (words formed to imitate sounds). Some verbs in -£» or -. They are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses and, by reason of euphonic changes, nowhere showing the stem in its prime form. This may often, however, be ascertained from a cognate word. It ends most frequently in 8, and may be assumed to do so, if the contrary does not appear : as, 6pi8-, 6pi£- (39 d). 7. Most linguals in -£&> may be practically regarded as having but a single form of the stem, with £ as the stem-mark. And in some, (z) the stem may be regarded as having for an added consonant simply £, either (z 1 ) alone or (z 2 ) with a vowel (the modified stem marked with z, to avoid double notation) : as, (z 1 ) irpiw, and later irp^w, to saw ; ovTdu and ov- Ta£w wound, poet.; (z 2 ) 2 A. iiropov, Pr. Tropica; furnish. 350. k (for 1, see 349). Inceptive Form. In this form, -o-K- is annexed, (k 1 ) either alone, or (k 2 ) with a vowel, com- monly 1. When -ox- alone is added, (k 3 ) a consonant preceding is dropped or (k 4 ) transposed, or (k 5 ) rarely unites with the a, excluding the k ; while a vowel preceding, particularly o, (k 6 ) may be lengthened or (k 7 ) changed to 1. Thus, ^ (k 1 ) F. dp&rw, jmGvo-w, Pr. apio-tcw please, p-cOvancw intoxicate ; (k 2 ) 2 A. evpov, Pr. €vp£crKw find ; (k 3 ) t\avoi>, \ao-KU) (151) gape ; 2ka.Koi>, Xdo-tcw sound, utter, poet.; tiraQou, (iradaK-, 151, 159 g) irdorxw suffer; (k 4 , c ) ZQopov, (dopaK-) GpwcTKw leap, tQavov, {dawn-) Ovtjo-kw die (342. 3) ; (k 5 ) dXcK-, (a\eK (41) ; 2 A. g$\aaroi>, pXacnravw bud ; ZoapQov, 8ap0dva> sleep; tfp.apTOV, ap-apravw err ; (n 5 ) £\i$ov, XavGdvw fo'e /a<2; ?aa0oy, p,av6dvct> learn ; ZXafiov, Xap-Pavw (150) take ; ^tv\ov, Tvyxdvw happen; (n 6 ) (6or v - 1- Klxavu, j£na. 3. When -W- is added, the preceding syllable is by rule long. Hence, while -w- can be (n 7 ) annexed without further change to consonants (chiefly palatals and liquids), (n 8 ) the v is doubled after a short vowel (o also becoming o>) : as, (n 7 ) 2 A. iplyrjv, p.Cyvvp.i mingle ; ftrrapoj', irrapvu^tat sneeze ; ol'-yw and otyvv/u open ; F. Spew, 6pvvpu rouse ; (d-y-) a£u>, &yvvp.i break ; (n 8 ) icepa- 0ivtf0a>, consume; tow, poet. (, comm. €' v ^ w ai) d poet, v^x.^ swim ; (o 2 ) &o> to be sated, Ep. A. (dSc-) "ddrjaa • <£\Q0-) #0-0, &Qiw push ; (w) £Xko>, late IXxvoj iraw ; (op.-, 6p.vv- n 7 , 6^0-) fyvv/u swear, F. op.6Vo>. a. (u 2 , v 2 ) When a is affixed, c in the preceding syllable usually be- comes o> ; but when € is affixed, o : as, Tp£ira>, poet. Tpcoirdw and Tpoirew, turn ; crrp6pa>, chiefly poet. o-Tpoxpdw and orpocpew, twist. 356. p, r (for q, see 353). III. Prefokma- tiyes lengthening the stem consist chiefly of (r) three kinds of reduplication ; and (p) the few others may be rather euphonic than emphatic. : as, . (p) aircUpw and do-Trcupw gasp ; Svpo/xcu and 68vpo/icu lament. 357. r. Reduplicated Stems. Reduplication in the stem is most frequent in verbs in -fit and -o-ko>. It is of three kinds : 1. (r 1 ) Proper, prefixing the first letter with -X- (rarely with -e-) to stems beginning with a single consonant, with a mute and liquid, or with fiv- : as, (8o-, 8180-) 5L8w/j.i, (0«-, dide-, 159 a) rW-qiu (45) ; (xp°<-> X l XP a ') k<-XPW- lend ; (irXa-, iri-p-irXa-, 344) Trljj.TrXr),ui fill, (irpa-) irlfiirprjiM burn; 2 A. iSaov poet., 8i8do-Ka> teach; £Spcu/ (45 h), 8i8pdo-Kw run; (yvo-) 'iyvwv, yiyvuMTKw k 6 , know ; F. (rpa-) rp-qaw, TCTpaivw bore. Cf. Lat. gigno ,sisto. 2. (r 2 ) Attic, prefixing the two first letters to stems begin- ning with a short vowel followed by a single consonant : as, (dp-) dpap£o-Kw fit, poet. ; (d\-, d%ax-, 159 a) a.Ka\ilo) ajjlict, Ep. So, with the familiar vowel of reduplication i, in place of the initial vowel repeated, (6ra-) duivyfju benefit ; ut&XXu) and oltlt&XXu) rear, poet. 3. (r 8 ) Improper, simply prefixing t with the rough breathing to stems not included above : as, (ora-, o-tora-, 141) tor^u, (i-, i-i) it) (it (45); 2 A. iirra^v, Inrafxai fly. IV. Adopted Stems. {For t, see 352 ; u, v, w, 355 ; z, 349 7.) 358. x. Some themes, to complete their inflec- tion, adopt tenses from stems that appear to be radically distinct : as, alp^w take, 2 A. (IX.-) etXov ; '4p\ofiai come, F. (IX.v8-, eXevd-h.) eXedcrofxai, 2 Pf. i\7)\v6a ; la-0iw eat, 2 A. tyayov ; 6pda> see, F. (oir-) 6\pofxai, 2 A. (18-, 279 c) eWop ; rpixca run, 2 A. ^Spapc^; vy-) to flee, vy--q flight ; rpicpu to nourish, rpo to live, fiioT-q and filoTos life. e.) -u(Js (G. -uov, m.), or -ji/rj (G. -utjs, f) '• as » tSOp-op-ai to lament, 68vp-fx6s lamentation ; ftd-fanj-fteu to remember, p.vr)-p.r\ remembrance. f.) -os (G. -«os, n.) : as, K-qb-opxti to care, ktj5-os care. g. Other suffixes appear in 6 yeXus, -ottos, laughter, 6\e6pos destruc- tion ; i] aXyrjSwv pain (cf. Lat. cupldo), 86vapus, -ews, power, &c. h. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals of Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as an effect, object, circumstance, &c, of the action, and thus blend with other classes : as, ypap.p.7] line, d6fw to save, v (G. -uovos, m.) : as, -rjye-o/xai to lead, rjye-fxdjv leader. g. Other suffixes appear in 6 tcktwu, -ovos, workman, rpbx^, runner, &c. 366. 4.) The place, instrument, or other means or cir- cumstances of the action. These are formed by adding to the stem of the verb, a.) -T^jpiov (G. -ov, n.), more frequently expressing place : as, aKpod- op.au to hear, dupoa-T-qpLov auditorium, place of hearing, auditory. b.) -rpov (G. -ov, n.), or -Tpd (G. -as, f.), more frequently expressing means : as, £tfa> to curry, ^varpov and ^varpa currycomb, dporpov plough. c. Other suffixes appear in to KkeWpov bar ; 6 of the Fut. or -o-ai of the Perf. pass. ; those beginning with p. and t, of -aai and -rat of the Perf. pass. ; and those beginning with a vowel, of the 2d Perf. It is convenient to re- member, that verbal nouns following the 1st Pers. sing, of the Perf. pass, more frequently denote the thing done ; the 2d, the doing ; and the 3d, the doer. Thus, Tre-Trotrj-pMi, ire-irol-q-aai, ire-trolri-Tai, Trolr]-p.a, poem, iroirj-o-is, poesy, Troirj-Trjs, poet. 367. II. From Adjectives. Nouns formed from adjec- tives (or from common radicals, 359 c) usually express the abstract of the adjective, and are formed in, a.) -Ca (G. -Cds, t), or oftener, if the stem ends in e or o, -id forming, with the stem-mark, -€td or -ota : as, aofi-bs wise, aocp-La sapient-ia, wis- dom ; aXydris, -e-os, true, dXrjdeca truth; evvo-os, kind, efooia kindness. b.) -Ttis (G. -ti]tos, f.), from adjectives in -os and -vs : as, foos equal, labrvs aequalitas, equality ; raxte swift, raxvT-rjs celeritas, swiftness. c.) -crvvTj (G. -Tjs, f.), from adjectives in -os and -tav : as, 8Uaiosjust, dinaioav'vq justice ; aucppuv discreet, crueppoavpn discretion. d.) -os (G. -cos, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -vs : as, /3a0tfs deep, .fiidos depth; edpds broad, edpos breadth; raxvs (b), rd^os speed. e.) -as (G. -d8os, f.), from numerals : as, 5i5o two, dvds duad ; rpids. 368. III. From Other Nouns. Nouns derived from other nouns are chiefly, 1.) Patrials, and similar words denoting persons related to some object. These end in, a.) -tt]s (G. -tov, m.) and -ns (G. -tiSos, f. ; 235 a), with the preceding vowel long in patrials {-\tt\s, -^tt]s, -4nft -icIttjs, -icott]s) and also in other nouns in it^s, -ins : as, 2tf/3ct/ns Sybaris, ^v^apir-q^, a man of S., a Sy- barite, Zvpapiris, a woman of S.; Aiyiv^rvs, Uiaarvs, ^irapTidrys, 2tKe- Xiwttjs, a man of JEglna, &c. ; rb^ov bow, to^otvs archer, ro£6ris archeress. b.) -cvs (G. -&>s, m.) and -Cs (G. -{80s, f.; 217 f) : as, Miyapa Megara, Meyape)j$ Megarian man, Meyapis M. woman ; app.aids sorceress; Xttttos equus, iirirevs eques. c A patrial noun (patria, native land) denotes a person belonging to a particular country ; a gentile noun (gens, nation), one belonging to a particular nation. Adjectives have like distinctions. 220 DERIVATION. NOUNS. § 369. 369. 2.) Patronymics (so called from containing the fa- ther's or an ancestor's name, irarpbs ovofxa). These end in, a.) -8t]s (G. -8ov, m.) and -s (G. -80s, f), preceded by -&- if from names in -10s or of Dec. 1, but otherwise by -t- (-18ns uniting with a pre- ceding € or o) : as, Boptds Boreas, Bopeddr/s son of B., Bopeas daughter of B.; Qicrrios, QecrTiadrjs, Gecrrtds ' IlpLauos, UpLa/Judrjs, Upiapis ■ K^Kpoxp, KeKpoiriSyjs, KeKpowls ' HyXeijs, -^ws, llrjXeidrjs Pelldes ; 'H/oa/cXeiSris (19 b) ; At?tc6, -jos, ArjToidTjs. The Ep. often uses the form in -idSrjs after a long syllable, for the sake of the metre : ^TjprjTidSris, B. 763 ; n^X^i'dS^s, A. 1. b.) -lav (G. -twos, rarely -Covos, m.) and -iwvt] or -Ivtj (G. -tjs, f), only poetic : as, Kpovos Saturn, Kpoviwv, ^ilovos or iovos, son of S., A. 397; Hr/Xetis, HyXetuv, v. 1. -eluv, A. 188 ; 'A/cpiVios, 'AKpiotcvvw, daughter of A., S. 319 ; "A5pr], -ovos, artisan, " riicTaiva. c.) -€ia (G. -€ias) : as, (iaaiXefc rex, king, fiaclXeia regina, queen. d.) - ZuicpaTldiop, Socrates ! dear Socky ! Ar. Nub. 222. c.) -is (G. -£8os and -t8os, f.) : as, irlva% tabula, table, irwaicis, -idos, tabella, tablet ; t>r)s, m. ; of the young of animals) : as, deros eagle, deri- devs eaglet ; Xaytbs ho.re, Xayidefc ; also vios, v'uSevs grandson. e.) -l\vr\, -dicvii, -oXos, -eXos, -&x\ t -iXos, -vXkls, -vXos, -vXtj, &c: as, w6\is city, iroXix v V ' irtdos wine-jar, iriBdnvr) • kokkos kernel, kSkkoXos • CKOirbs peak, o-kottcXos scopiilus ; vtyos nubes, cloud, veQiX-q nebula ; coi;- rvs sailor, pavriXos nautilus (little sailor) ; duavBls finch, aKavdvXXls. f. Some diminutives (especially in -iov) have lost their peculiar force : thus, drip, commonly in prose Brjplov wild beast. 372. 5.) Augmentatives, words implying increase or large- ness, either of number, size, or degree. These end in, a.) -wv (G. -wvos,*m.). This ending may express either a place, an animal, or a person, in which any thing exists in numbers, or in large size or degree : as, d/j-ireXos vine, dprreXdjv vinetum, vineyard, Itriruv (iwiros) horse-stable, yvdBosjaw, yvdBuv glutton. Cf. Lat. Naso, -onis, Big-nose.^ b.) -a£ (G. -&kos, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and ani- mals, but harsher in its expression : as, irXovros wealth, vXotJTai; a rich churl. So Xdppos greedy, Xdppa£ sea-wolf. Cf. Lat. adj. loauax, rapax. § 375. ADJECTIVES. 221 B. Adjectives. 373. Adjectives derived from verbs express, in general, relations (active or passive in their character) to the actions or states denoted by the verbs ; and those derived from nouns express relations to the persons or tilings denoted by the nouns. But, from their very nature, relations are distinguished with less precision than things or actions ; and, to some ex- tent, the offices stated below blend with each other. 374. I. From Verbs. These end in, a.) -ucos, -r\, -ov, active : as, apxw to rule, dpx-tfcbs able to rule ; ypd-ip.os fitted to impart or to receive nourishment, nutritious, vig- orous; xpr\%"s) fit for use. d.) -uwv, -pov (G. -povos), active : as, iXetw to pity, iXe-^-fiwv compas- sionate ; p.vqp.uv (pLt?p,v7]p.ai) mindful ; voi)p.wv (votia) thoughtful. e.) -tos, -4\, -ov, passive, signifying that which is done, either as a mat- ter of fact (like the Lat. Part, in -tus or -sus), or more commonly as a matter of habit or possibility : as, opdco to see, opd-rbs visus, seen, visibi- lis, visible ; s, -a, -ov, passive (269 d), expressing necessity or obligation (like the Lat. Part, in -ndus) : as, iroitu to make, ttolv-t^cs faciendus, tliat is to be made. Often in neut. as impers. : ypairrtov scribendum. g.) -v6s, -4\, -ov, passive (compare the Part, in -pevos) : as, opds fruitful ; \£yw to choose, Xoyds chosen. 375. II. From Nouns. These have the following end- ings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed : a.) -ios, pertaining to ; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it in a diphthong (-aios, -€ios, -oios, -«os, -vios), and often, without respect to this, assuming the form -€ios (Ion. -4\'ios, 132), especially from names of persons and animals (iv. 5. 31). Many patrials (properly adjectives, but often used substantively) belong to this class. Thus, obpavbs heaven, ovpdv-Los ccelestis, pertaining to heaven, heavenly ; 'AOyvctios ('Adrian) Athen- ian ; Mos (de-bs) divine, 'Apyeios Argivus ; 'O^petos ("Op-Tjpos) Homeric. b.) "ikos, -i\, -ov (commonly -kos or -okcs after i or v, while -aios often makes -clI'kSs), relating to. These adjectives in -kos are often formed from words that are themselves derivative. They apply to things rather than to persons. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in quality, or fit for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations. Thus, rexvrj art, rexv-mbs relating to art, artistic, iro\ep.iKbs (irbXep-os) bel- licus, military ; veavi-ubs (vefivias) youthful, Alftvs Libyan, Ai(3vk6s per- taining to tlie Libyans ; 'Axaios Achozan, 'Axdl'Kos. See 374 a. c.) -«os, -d, -ov, and -ivos, -r\, -ov (proparoxytone), denoting material, -en : as, %pi7cos) Cyzicerie, ~Zap8idu6s (SctoScis) Sardian. Cf. Lat. Latlnus, Romdnus, &c. f. ) -pds, -epos, -Tjpos, -ctXt'os, -y\\6s f -wX<$$, -eis (-€, to be or do that which is pointed out hy the primitive : as, , and (chiefly when formed from words which have aort] in the last syllable, or when preceded by t, cf. 369 a, 375 b) -d£a> ; from names of persons or animals, imitative (denoting the adoption of the manners, language, opinions, party, &c.) ; from other words, used in various senses, but mostly active : as, M^S-tfw (M?~5os) to imitate or favor the Medes, 'E\- \rjvifa speak Greek, irXovrifa (7t\ovtos) make rich, dticdfa (8ikv) judge. d.) -idco, rarely -d», expressing desire (Desideratives), or morbid state : as, /xadrjTrjs disciple, [xadrjT-i&w to wish to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 183. e. -» with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently active : as, KaOaoSs pure, KaOalpw to purify, ixakdaaui (pLaXanos) soften. f. Other endings appear in kovioj (k6vis) to bedust, daupvio (Sdicpv) weep, ) wish for war, Th. i. 33. b.) Various prolonged forms in -£o>, -Qs sapienter, wisely ; tolXvs, raxtuv, swift, to-x^us swiftly. b. ) -tj8ov or -8ov (perhaps kindred with &5os, form), chiefly from nouns; -8tjv or -d8rjv, chiefly from verbs (those in -dSijv conforming to 366 d ; and -8a : as, tt\u^^58ov (381 b), ivrds intus, e/cr6? extra. d. These adverbs in -«, with Comparatives and Superlatives in -rip<* and -t&tcd, as well as ttui yet, diricoj behind, &c, have the Dat. form. II. FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS. 383. In the union of two words to form a compound, A.) The first word has commonly its stem-form with sim- ply euphonic or imitative changes. These changes, besides those which the general rules of orthoepy require, consist chiefly, a. ) In the addition of a union-vowel (termed the composition-voiccl), which, after a substantive or adjective, is commonly -o-, but sometimes -i]-, -a-, -i-, -oi-, or -ai- ; and, after a verb, -o-, -e-, or -v- : as, p.vd-o- § 386. FIRST AND LAST WORDS. 225 ypd(pos (/j,Q$-o$, ypdbpo% death-bringing, iro8-iC- vnrTTjp foot-bath, wvp-L-yei/rjs fire-born, 68-oi-iropos wayfarer, p.€€pt,os) wind-allaying, vav-crl-Tropos navigable, de-cxr- exdpia impiety, Tap.-eai-xpus {r^fivca, 340. 3) flesh-cutting, A. 511. d. ) In using a shorter form, sometimes, perhaps, suggested by the theme, or another stem : as, alp.-o-pa(pr)s (atpa, -aros, /3a7rra>) blood- bathed, ai-irdXos (aft;, aiyds) goat-herd. So, for tfpuavs half, the old short stem ijpu- is commonly used : fytA-Mp half '-dead, ij/xt-ovos mule. e. ) In conforming to the theme with respect to vowel-cliange, &c. : as, Pov-k6\o5 (/3oGs, /3o-6s) ox-herd, vav-irrryds ship-wright, woXl-apxos. f. ) It results from these changes or from direct adoption, that the first word has sometimes the form of one of the cases : as, Nom. vacw-Qopos bringing victory, dyopd-vop,os clerk of the market ; Gen. ve&s-oiKos ship- house ; Dat. vvktl-ttSXos roaming by night, Eur. Ion 718. See 388 b. 384. If the first word is a particle, it is commonly un- changed except by the general laws of euphony. a. For crasis in trpb, see 126 7; for elision in prepositions, 127 s. Ani, like irepi, often retains its vowel. In the other prepositions, the elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., particularly in the Ep. be- fore some words which begin with the digamma : as, diroYenreiv I. 309. 385. Some particles occur only in composition, and are hence called inseparable. Of these the most important are, a. ) d-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called a- privative, as, &-irais without children, 5-{\ov, taking T. as a friend, i. 1. 2. (d) Parti- tive : OCrot . . dXXos &\\a Xtyei, these say, one one thing, and another another, ii. 1. 15. (e) Of generic and specific terms, especially of com- mon and proper nouns : '0 MaiavSpos iroTafxbs, the river Mceander, i. 2. 7. "Avdpes o-TpaTnorai, gentlemen soldiers, i. 3. 3. (f ) Of a noun and a pro- noun : ' AXKi^iddrjs . . Kaxeivos i)^\t](Tev, A., he also neglected, Mem. 1. 2. 24. (g) Of a sentence and word (396), &c. h. Appositives, more frequently, agree with their subjects in gender and number, as well as in case : 'Enta^a, ij SvejWtrios yvvi\, rod KlXLkwv PacriXe'ws, E. } tlie wife of S., the king of the Gilicians, i. 2. 12. §397. SYNTAX. E. I. — APPOSITION. 229 394. a. Ellipsis. The appositive or the subject may he omitted, when it can he supplied from the connection : Aikios 6 JloXvarpdrov [sc. vlos], L., the son of P., iii. 3. 20. Q€pu, tlie allies, two thirds of them, in- vaded, Th. 2. 47. EvcpXeKTa 8£ rd irp60vpa avr&v, oip7/cos fx-ev at Qvpai Treiron)p.evcu, their portals are easily set on fire, the doors being made of tlie palm-tree, Cyr. 7. 5. 22. '08vp/j.bs toXvs, 'Pa\^ Kkalovaa, Mat. 2. 18. h. Hence by a poetic, especially Epic, construction, an appositive is used to specify the part affected : BoOXei trbvov /xot rfj8e irpoadeivai \tpl ; do you wish to impose labor on me, viz. on this hand 1 Eur. Heracl. 63. "Zdfros ?/x^aX' eKdaTip xapSu], imparted strength [to each one, to the heart] to the heart of each one, A. 11. 'Aya/x^uovL rjv8cwe 0vp.u> A. 24. c. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an ad- junct ; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other would seem more appropriate : Tofrrov rb e&pos Sjjo ir\#)pa, of this the breadth is two plethra, i. 2. 5 ; but, ToO 8£ Mapatiov rb edpbs e, MeviXetp \virx\v irucpdv Id. Or. b. This use of the Nom. and Ace. may be often explained by attraction to the subject or object of the verb. Cf. 395 a. c. Anacoluthon. Apposition is sometimes prevented by a change of construction : as, M-qrpi r , 'Eptpoiav Xeyu, to my mother, Eribcea I mean (for M.T]TpL r 'E/3i/3oi'p, to my mother E.), Soph. Aj. 569. See also 402. II. USE OF THE CASES. 397. Cases serve to distinguish the relations of substantives. These relations are regarded, in Greek, (i.) as either direct or indirect, and (n.) as either subjective, objective, or residual. 230 SYNTAX. R. II., III. USE OF THE CASES. §397. I. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of the sentence. The principal direct relations are those of the subject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad- dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as INDIRECT. ii. The second distinction is founded upon the kind or char- acter of the relation. The relation is, 1. Subjective, when the substantive denotes the source, or subject, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING COMES. 2. Objective, when the substantive denotes the end, or ob- ject, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, that TO WHICH ANY THING GOES. 3. Residual (residuus, remaining), when it is not referred to either of the two preceding classes. 398. a. The latter of the two distinctions appears to have had its origin in the relations of place, which relations are both the ear- liest understood, and, through life, the most familiar to the mind. These relations are of two kinds; those of motion, and those of rest. b. Motion may be considered with respect either to its source or its end ; and both of these may be regarded either as direct or in- direct. We may regard as the direct source of motion, that which produces the motion, or, in other words, that which moves; as the indirect source, that from which the motion proceeds ; as the direct end, that which receives the motion, or that to or into which the motion immediately goes ; and as the indirect end, that towards which the motion tends. c. By a natural analogy, the relations of action and influence in general, whether subjective or objective, may be referred to the rela- tions of motion ; while the relations which remain without being thus referred may be classed together as relations of rest. These residual relations, or relations of rest, may likewise be divided, ac- cording to their office in the sentence (397), into the direct and the indirect. d. We have, thus, six kinds of relation, each of which, with a sin- gle exception, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case, denot- ing in general as follows : i. Direct Relations. 1. Subjective. The Nominative. That which acts. 2. Objective. The Accusative. That which is acted upon. 3. Residual. The Vocative. That which is addressed. n. Indirect Relations. 1. Subjective. The Genitive. That from ichich any thing proceeds. 2. Objective. The Dative. That towards which any thing tends, 3. Residual. The Dative. That with which any thing is associated. § 401. NOMINATIVE. 231 399. a. For the historical development of the Greek cases, see 186 s. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as the Dat.), a special form was separated to express the subjective relations, hut none to express the objective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to express the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any cause, were not referred to either of these two classes ; and hence the Dat. is both an objective and a residual case. b. In the Latin case-system, which so closely resembles the Greek, there is a partial separation of the indirect objective and residual, or, as they are termed in Lat., Dative and Ablative cases. c. A more important difference between the two languages appears in the extensive use of the Lat. Ablative. The Romans were more con- trolled than the Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less ob- servant of the minuter shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence, even after the full development of the Lat. case-system, the primitive in- direct case continued to retain, as it were by the mere force of possession, many of the subjective relations. d. As most verbs express action, and the Active is the leading voice, the use of the Nominative as the subject of a finite verb became so established, that it extended to verbs of state as well as of action, and to the Passive no less than the Active voice. e. The Nominative, from its high office as denoting the subject of discourse, became the leading case, and was regarded as the representative of the word in all its forms (its theme, 172 e). Hence it was employed when the word was spoken of as a word, or was used witltout grammatical construction (401). f. There are no dividing lines either between direct and indirect, or between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations seem to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not only varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same language, but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the same author. g. A case may sustain the same relation to more than one word in the sentence : as, Kpt'a tyomes ijadtov, tJiey boiled and ate jlesh, ii. 1. 6. A. The Nominative. 400. Rule II. The Subject of a finite verb is put in the Nominative : as, 'E7ret57/ 8k eTeXeiT-qae Aapetos, Kal KaT^arrj els rnr\v pacriXeiav 'Apra^p^s, Tt£pvT]S 5ta/3dX\ei tov KOpov, and when now Darius was dead, and Artaxerxes was established in the royal authority, Tissaphernes accuses Cyrus, i. 1. 3. 401. Eule III. Substantives independent of grammatical construction are put in the Nominative. Note. The Nom. thus employed is termed the Nominative indepen- dent or absolute (absolutus, released, free, sc. from grammatical fetters). To this rule may be referred the use of the Nominative, 232 SYNTAX. R. A., IV. GENITIVE. §401. a.) In the inscription of names, titles, and divisions : as, Ku- pov 'AvdPao-is Cyri Expeditio, The Exjyedition of Cyrus; B t /3 X L o v Tlparop Liber Primus, Book First. b. In exclamations : as, dXarra, Q d\ arret, the Sea ! the Sea ! iv. 7. 24. *Q dva-rdXatv' eyd>, wretched me ! Eur. e.) In address. — The appropriate case of address is the Voc. (186 g). But there is often no distinct form for this case, and even when there is, the Nom. is sometimes employed in its stead (182). # 1. The Nom. is particularly used, when the address is exclamatory or descriptive, or when the compilative is the same with the subject of the sentence : 'Iinrias 6 naXbs re nal v Acts 7. 40. b.) In specification, repetition, or description : "AXXovs 5' 6 ptyas . . NeiXos tirefiipcv 2ovv ttovt]- pCbv Koiurjv €Tru)vvp.iav dvr»]s, he has obtained the common appellation of the vile, "sycophant," ^Eschin. 41. 15. B. The Genitive. 403. That feom which any thing proceeds (398 d) may be resolved into (i.) That from ivliich any thing proceeds, as its point of departure ; and (n.) That from which any thing proceeds, as its cause. § 405. OP DEPARTURE. OF SEPARATION. 233 Hence the Greek Genitive is either (i.) the Geni- tive of Departure, or (n.) the Genitive of Cause ; and we have the following general rule for subjective adjuncts (397) : Rule A. The Point of Departure and the Cause are put in the Genitive. a. The Genitive of departure is commonly expressed in English by the preposition from ; and the Genitive of cause, by the preposition of b. Hence the rule may take this general form : The Genitive is used to express that of or from which something is or is done. c. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by other prepositions, and sometimes without a preposition. i. Genitive of Departure. 404. Departure may be either in place, in time, or in character. Hence, Eule IV. Words of separation and distinc- tion govern the Genitive. (1.) Genitive of Separation. 405. a. Words of separation include those of removal and distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and failure, of abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of protection and &c. : as, Xo>p^€pi\a-ev avr^rov dpb- vov, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him [iEschylus] the throne, Ar. c. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, commonly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a prep- osition ; but in poetry, often without a preposition (ef. 450 b) : \bp,uv . . oiviko>v ii. 3. 14 (cf. i. 5. 10). a. The Gen. of source or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets, for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. : as, Uprjaat 8£ irvpbs drjtoio OOperpa, burn the gates with raging fire [from fire, as the source], B. 415. Xelpas ntf/dpepas iroXirjs aXds, liaving waslved his hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, /3. 261. 413. That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of dis- course, a matter of complaint, the subject-matter of a composition, &c. Hence, not unfrequently, both in immediate dependence upon another word, and even in the introduction of a sentence, Rule VII. The theme of discourse or op thought is put in the Genitive : as, ToD to£<$tov ox) Ka\u>s ?x et X£y«", Sri, k. t. \., it is not well to say of tlie bowman, that, d-c, PI. Pep. 439 b. Aiadeuj/meuos avr»v, 8o-rjv fib xw- pav . . £x ote "> observing in respect to tlicm, how great a country tJiey Imve, iii. 1. 19. Ttjs 5£ yuvaiKos, ei . . nanoiroiti, but in respect to tlie wife, if she manages ill, 02c. 3. 11. K\i/a»> L\w 2pTip.os, devoid of friends. c. The Gen. which belongs to 8eop.ai and xPTlt** as verbs of want may be^retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreat : OiStivos olv dfyade, whatever you may desire, i. 4. 15. AikcUcdv Seiadai, to request what is reasonable, Cyr. 8. 3. 20. MaKpov XPVfa 1 ' P^° v i to desire long life, Soph. Aj. 473. 236 SYNTAX. E. IX. GENITIVE PARTITIVE. § 415. 4. Genitive Partitive. 415. Eule IX. The whole of which a paet is taken is put in the Genitive : as, "Hp,ii> AWcav 'EXX^wv rive's, some of the other Greeks, i. 7. b. Adjectives of Number : Els rdv o-Tpar-qyCbv, one of the generals, vii. 2. 29. "H./J.QV 5' ov8efe, none of us (416 b), iii. 1. 16. c Superlatives, and words derived from them (by virtue of the includ- ed adjective, cf. 408) ; and the otJier degrees when kindred in force : 'Ev rots dpio-Tois Ilepo-Qit, among tlie best of the Persians, i. 6. 1. TQu . . dv- Opu-Kuv dpto-T€vv oTriadocpvX&Kwv rods Tjp,C I am ^ lus i n [have myself in this state of] fortune, Eur. Hel. 857. Ilais odv 2x ets 86ijr)S ; [in what state of opinion] of what opinion are you ? PL Rep. 456 d. IIws dywvos ^KOfiev ; how do we come on in tlie strife [with what progress of the strife] ? Eur. El. 751. c. Of the Superlative Degree : ' AjpctSeVraTa trdvrwv eTi/nupeiTo, lie pun- islied most unsparingly of all [he of all, 418 b] i. 9. 13. 421. IV. Verbs. The Genitive partitive, in connection with a verb, may perform the office either of a subject, an ap- positive, or a complement ; taking the place of any case which the verb would require, if referring to the whole. See 418 b. 1.) Tlie Gen. Partitive as a Subject, (a) Of a Finite Verb : Elcrl 8' ai- tcSv, ods ovd' av . . biafiairjTe, there are some of them, which you could not pass, ii. 5. 18. IloXefiov, nal p-axis ov fxeTr\i> avrrj, of war and battle, there fell to her no share, Cyr. 7. 2. 28. (b) Of an Infinitive : 'Eiripnyvvvai cwv, that some of tliem mingled, iii. 5. 16. "fitero TrpoarjKeiv ovdevl dpxrjs, he thought that [a share of] authority belonged to no one, Cyr. 8. 1. 37. 422. 2.) Tlie Gen. Partitive in the place of an Appositive is most common with substantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs, particularly those of reckoning, esteeming, and making : Ou/c iyu tovtwv el/xl, I am not one of these, Cyr. 8. 3. 45. "TXas p.a,Kapa>v dpid/xelrai, Hylas is nuvibered as one of the blest, Theoc. 13. Movotiktjs . . tLOtjs \6yovs ; PL 423. 3.) The Genitive Partitive is used as a Complement, a. Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the whole object, but a, part only : as, Aa(36vras rod papfiapiKov or-parou, taking a part of the barbarian army, i. 5. 7. Twv KTipi'wv . . £poaXf]s Kartaye, he broke [was fractured in] his liead. 427. 4. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and receiving, govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily either to distribution or to touch. Thus, "Ira T77$ TrpocrrjKo6s iptpeiv avrav Th. 2. 62. d. With Nouns : 'ftSiVas avrov irpoa-fiaXuv, causing pangs on his ac- count, Soph. Tr. 41. rwcfov rovd' . . \irds, entreaties by this beard, Eur. e. With Interjections : 3>eO rod dvSpds, Alas for the noble man ! f. In Simple Exclamation : TtJs tvxtjs* My ill-luck 1 Cyr. 2. 2. 3. 430. a. The Genitive of the end in view is put with some words of direction, claim, and dispute. Words of direc- tion include those of aiming at, throwing at, going towards, and reaching after. Thus, 'AvdpcoTTuv o-Toxd^€pcuv€cr8ai, to smell wine, v. 8. 3. Qoptifiov 4ji Xbywp XaGcojicOa, let us forget tlie former words, Eur. Hipp. 288. d. Of Care and Concern : KrtSco-Oai letdov, to care for Seuthes, vii. 5. 5. Toijtov col 8eT pe'Xeiv, of this [there must be to you a care} you must take care, Cyr. 1. 6. 16. 'AftcXciv w&p avrCop, to be careless of ourselves, i. 3. 11. Mt) p^TapeXetv p . . 0avp,d£w, 7 wonder at you, Hel. 2. 3. 53. OCs ovk clp &va6ov^, which I shall not grudge to you. g. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy transition, into that of obedience (obedio, to give ear to, listen to, obey, fr. ob and audio). Hence, words of obedience often govern the Gen. (cf. 455 g) : To&rovs . . paciXtios ovk aicoviciv, that these did not obey [or were not subject to] the king, iii. 5. 16. 'YtHjkooi tup MoccvpoLkup, subject to the M., v. 5. 1. h. Verhs of sight commonly govern the Ace; and many verbs which are followed by the Gen. according to this rule, sometimes or often take the Ace. (especially of a neuter adjective) : E'i8op.ev rovs iroXep.lovs, we have seen the enemy, vi. 5. 10. KXvw poyp, I hear a cry. See 472 b, d. 4. Genitive of Time and Place. 433. The time and place in which any thing is done may be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as co- operating to produce it. Hence, § 434. OP TIME, PLACE, AUTHOR, &C. 241 Rule XIV. The time and place V? which are put in the Genitive (cf. 46 9, 482) : as, a. Time : "ftix 67 " T V S vvktos, he went in the night, vii. 2. 17. Hotel Sk touto ToXXaKts tov fJi-qvos, 'many times [in the] a month,' Cyr. 1. 2. 9. Eire wkt&s 8e"oi tl, etre teal TJjis'pas, ' whether [in the] hy night or by day,' iii. 1. 40. BaaiXevs ov puxeirai 8iKa Tjfiepwv (cf. iu . . tclutcus reus ijp.e'pais), the king will not figM [within] for ten days, i. 7. 18. HoXXov xpovov, Maxpov xpovov, Xpbvov avxvov, for a long time, i. 9. 25 ; &c. b. Place : Avtov [sc. tSttov] p.eivavres, remaining in that place, i. 10. 17. T H owc"ApY€o$ 9}ev ; was he not in A. ? y. 251. Horepas rijs X € P^s; *Ev 8e%L$ 8ev eixofiev, ' [in] during the last seventeen day's-marches,' ii. 2. 11. f. The idea of cause appears especially in such expressions as Adxreiv . . rpia rip.Ldapa.Ka tov iltjvos, to pay three half-darics a month, i. 3. 21. 434. C. That which produces any thing, as its active or efficient cause ; or, in other words, that by which, as its author, agent, or giver, any thing is made, written, said, done, bestoived, &c, or from which any thing is obtained, heard, learned, inquired, requested, demanded, &c. To this division, which refers chiefly to persons, belongs the following rule, which will of course be understood as applying only to adjuncts. Genitive Active. Eule XV. The author, agent, and giver are put in the Genitive : as, a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Receiving, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring, Requesting, &c. : Tavra de" xv d/cXavros, unwept of friends, Soph. Ant. 847. ' ' AyairrjToh 0€ov, beloved of God, Rom. 1. 7. —This use of the Gen. is rare in prose, and is most frequent with the Participle or Verbal. c. With Substantives : £J€vo<|>dj3a (442), irX-qaiov in Tr\i] to smell, irvita to breathe, and irpoa-pdXXw to em-it, may take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs or understood with them : "Ofovai irfrmjs, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of pitch], Ar. Ach. 190. Mvpov irviov, breathing of myrrh, Soph. Fr. 147. d. Some adverbs govern the Gen., as originally substantives (380), or by virtue of an included substantive : Tovde tou eias, a [dress of daintiness] dainty dress, Eur. 2. Genitive of Relation. 441. The Genitive of relation, in its full extent, in- cludes much that has been already adduced under other and more specific heads. The relations which remain to be con- sidered are chiefly, (a) those of domestic, social, and civil life ; (|3) those of possession and ownership ; (y) that of the object of an action to the action or agent ; (8) those of time and place ; (e) those of specification, explanation, and emphasis ; while yet others are left for observation. The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a) the Gen. of social relation, (|3) the Gen. possessive, (y) the Gen. objective, (8) the Gen. of local or temporal relation, (c) the Gen. of specification, &c. 244 SYNTAX. R. XVI. — GENITIVE OF RELATION. § 442. 442. eu Genitive of Social Kelation\ '0 r?,s pao-iXews yuvai- kos a5e\(pos, the brother of the king's wife, ii. 3. 17. BacriXevwu [— j3aai- Xevs (bv, 436 a] avrwv, being their king, v. 6. 37 (cf. 407). Ydrwv . . rrjs 'EXXdBos, a neighbor of Greece ; Toi)s ckcivov ix^^ a " rovs > • • T0V * Kvpov s opio-rios fipor&v, Jupiter dwelling vnth mor- tals, Soph. Tovtojv dvTtppoirov, counterpoising these, Dem. Cf. 450 s. b. In some of the examples falling under this head, an adjective may be regarded as used substantively. 443. j8. Genitive Possessive, a. The Genitive posses- sive denotes that to which any thing belongs as a possession, power, right, duty, office, quality, characteristic, &c. Thus, Ta Hv€W€(Tios fiaaiXeia, the palace of S., i. 2. 23. "Haav ai 'Iawt/cai irb- Xeis Tiv rb airody-fjaKeiv earl, for it is the part of victors to kill, but of the vanquished to die, iii. 2. 39. b. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in connection with some verbs of praise, blame, wonder, and the like : Tovro iiraiva' Ay rjaiXdov, I commend this in Agesilaus [this characteristic of Agesilaus], Ages. "Ev o~ov Sc'Soikci, one thing [of you] in you I fear, Eur. c. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of the Gen. possessive (435 d) : Tb (BacriXeiov [ = ./JacriXews] vXaKd$ ^gerdgei, the commander reviews tlic guards, G£c. 9. 15 ; but, Kvpos Hgirao-iv iroieirai tQ>v 'EXXtjvcdv, C. makes a review of the Greeks, i. 7. 1 ; TQu roiovrcav Upywv €|6Tao-TiK<5v, fitted to review such matters, Mem. 1. 1. 7. Ad6pa (or Kpva) 8e tG>v orpaTitDTaiv, witlwut the knowledge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8 (cf. Aa0€iv avrbv aireXO&v 17), &c. 'ApeTTJs Stodcr/caAos PL Meno 93 c. b. Genitive of tlie Indirect Object : EvX€or9ai rots . . Scots, to pray to the gods, iv. 3. 13 ; but, ©caiv €vx<*s> prayers to tlie gods, PL Phanlr. 244 e. Trjv rav Kp€iv dovXeiav, subjection to the stronger, Th. 1. 8. c. Genitive for a preposition with its case : ' Airier) Is ttjv yfjv, descended upon tlie land ; but, 'Ev airofiao-ei rrjs yijs, in a descent upon tlie land, Th. d. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with nouns, to denote rela- tions, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted by the Dat. : T??s tG>v 'EXX^vwv evvolas, from good-will to the Greeks, iv. 7. 20 (cf. Eu- vovs 5i croi wv vii. 3. 20). 'Av8pos evp.iveiav Soph. O. C. 631. e. A participle may so perform the office of a substantive or common adjective, as to take the Gen. objective : "O r Ikc'lvov tckwv, his fatlier, Eur. f. To the Gen. of tlie direct object may be referred the Gen. with aiVios and its derivatives : O ep.bs s rovrou atrtos, my desire is [causative of] the cause of this, ii. Tovrwv ov ad atria, you are not responsible for this, die. g. The Gen. in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent, § 448. POSSESSIVE, OBJECTIVE, LOCAL, &C. 245 possessor, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, in distinction from the Gen. objective. They may both modify the same word : T qv LTeXoTros p.ev airdaris n€\oTrovvT|s pLvpiuv, nearly 10,000, v. 7. 9. Me'xfH ecnrtpas, until evening, Cyr. 1. 4. 23. 446. c. Genitive of Specification, Explanation, or Emphasis. This makes the statement more precise or em- phatic, by adding a more specific name, or by showing in what sense or with what special application (in respect to what) the statement is made, or by repetition, &c. Note. In some of these uses, the Gen. rather denotes a relation be- tween two expressions for the same thing, than between two different things. In some cases, an appositive might be substituted for it ; and in others, we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a substantive implied. a. With Substantives. Tpohjs rrroXledpov, city of Troy (395 c ; cf. urbs Roma?), ©avdrov reXevrdv, the end [of life] in death, or simply, death, Eur. Med. 152 (cf. § 445 a). Tvpdvvou xPV^y a [thing of a tyrant] vile tyrant, PL Rep. 567 e. 'Yos xPWa p^eyiarov, a monster of a boar, Hdt. b. With Adjectives. NewTaros . . -yovoio, youngest of birth, T. 409. LTXTj-ytov ad~pv, free from the punishment of blows (436 b), Ar. Nub. 1413. v A7rcus 5^ elju appevwv iraftW, / am childless [of] as to male children, Cyr. c. With Adverbs. 'Acr^aXcDs tt}s dedp' 6Sov, safely as to his journey hither, Soph. O. C. 1165. Cf. 420 b, 429 c. d. With Verbs (436 a). T^s €irft>Pe\£as . . KivSvpctovra [= ev Kivdvvip 6vtcl], being in danger of the prescribed fine, Dem. 835. 14. Tdcf>ov . . dri^do-as, having denied the honor of burial, Soph. Ant. 21. e. With words of number or quantity, the Gen. is often used to specify the class or hind : Kairldrjj' dXevpcov, two quarts of flour, i. 5. 6. 447. General Remark. Great care is requisite in dis- tinguishing the various uses of the Genitive. C. The Dative Objective. 448. That towards which any thing tends may be resolved into (i.) That toivards ivhich any thing tends, as an object of approach ; and (ii.) That towards ivhich any thing tends, as an object of influence. Hence the Dative Objective is either 246 SYNTAX. E. D., XVII. DATIVE. § 448. (i.) the Dative of Approach, or (n.) the Dative of Influence ; and we have the following general rule : Rule D. The Object of Approach or of Influence is put in the Dative ; or, in other words, since neither approach nor influence are regarded as direct action, An Indirect Object is put in the Dative. a. The Dot. of approach is commonly expressed in English hy the prep- osition to, and the Dat. of influence, by the prepositions to and for ; both, in Latin, by the Dative. An imitation of 403 b would give to the rule this form : The Dative is used to express that to or for which something is or is done. b. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by other prepositions, especially by with ; and sometimes without a prepo- sition. c. The Dat. of approach may denote either person or thing ; the Dat. of influence oftener denotes person. d. The Dative Objective is the converse of the Genitive ; the Dat. of approach contrasting with the Gen. of departure, and the Dat. of in- fluence with the Gen. of cause. See 397, 398, 403. i. Dative of Approach. 449. Approach, like its opposite, departure (404), may be either in place, in time, or in character. Hence, Rule XVII. Words of nearness and likeness govern the Dative. (1.) Dative of Nearness. 450. a. Words of nearness may imply either being near, coming near, or bringing near ; and to this class may be referred words of union and mixture, of companionship and intercourse, of meeting and following, of sending to and bringing to, &c. : as, IlcXdo-ai . . rrj elaodcp, to approach the entrance, iv. 2. 3. Oivui Ktpcuras avr-ffv, having mixed it with wine, i. 2. 13. "E\|/ovtch vfuv, they xcill fol- low you, iii. 1. 36. AidSoyos KXedySpy, successor to C, vii. 2. 5. Tdrwv oIkw rfi 'EXXdSt, I dwell a neighbor to Greece, ii. 3. 18 (cf. 442). 'Eiropevero . . &p.a r Fi(X(raei, marched in company with T., ii. 4. 9. h. So words which become words of nearness through their application : Ktfpy Uvtu, to go to C, i. 2. 26. nCirrovTos W5y, falling to the ground, Soph. El. 747. Ilcjnrttv avry dyyeXov, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8. § 454. OF APPROACH. OF INFLUENCE. 247 (2.) Dative of Likeness. 451. a. Words of likeness include those of resemblance, assimilation, comparison, identity, equality, &c. : as, "Ofiotoi rots &\\ois, like tlie rest, vi. 6. 16. t\ocr60y pJev ?oucag, you resemble a philosopher, ii. 1. 13. 'E/xe d£ 6e$ ixh ovk efceurev, but me he did not liken to a god, Apol. 15. To a\r)d£s evo/jufe to avrb t£ rjXcdi^ elvai, he thought sincerity to be the same with folly, ii. 6. 22. b. Many derivatives or compounds of ativ, dfxou, 6/xoios, and Zeros, govern the Dat. by this rule. n. Dative of Influence. 452. The Dative of Influence expresses a person or thing which is affected by an action, property, &c, without being directly acted upon. Note. Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand, it may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished from direct action, and the Dat. expressing it is used interchangeably with the Ace. ; and, on the other hand, it may be so remote, that it can scarcely be ap- preciated, and the Dat. expressing it might have been omitted without impairing the sense. Rule XVIII. The object of influence is put in the Dative. The Dative is governed, according to this rule, by, a.) Words of address, including those of call and command, of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex- hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and threatening, &c. : Ovtos Ki//xy etirev, this man said to C, i. 6. 2. KXedpxv cp<£a, called out to C, i. 8. 12. AiaA€x.6evTCS dXX^Xots, liaving conversed with each otJier, ii. 5. 42. Awry navrevros, pointed out to him by oracle, vi. 1. 22. 453. b.) Words of advantage and disadvantage, includ- ing those of benefit and injury, of assistance and service, of favor and fidelity, of necessity and sufficiency, of fitness and unfitness, of convenience and trouble, of ease and difiicidty, of safety and danger, &c. : Xp^jo-ijta . . roh Kprjvt, useful to the Cretans, iii. 4. 17. 'Avdpuirounv «€\%ctTa, benefits to men, iEsch. Pr. 501. $l\ois dp^-yeiv, to succor friends, Cyr. 1. 5. 13. TLapvaans . . virfjpxe r£ Kvpy, P. favored C, i. 1.^4. 'Eyc6 tlvl 4p.iro8»v elfu ; am I in tlie way [to] of any one ? v. 7. 10. Trj ijXiKia girpeire, it suited his age, i. 9. 6. 01 fioi, Woe to me ! Alas! 454. c.) Words of appearance, including those of seeming, showing, clearness, obscurity, &c. : Ilao-i 8-qXov iytvero, it became evident to all, Hel. 6. 4. 20. "A8t]\ov fth iravri, obscure to every one, vi. 1. 21. *Hi> ko.1 tois AWois avTjs oloo-irep ifioi Sokcis el^at, if you appear to others such as you seem to me to be, Cyr. 248 SYNTAX. R. XVIII., E. DATIVE OP INFLUENCE. § 454. d.) Words of cause, destiny, obligation, and value : *K.yaMQ>v afcrtoi dXXTjXots, authors of good to each other (444 f ), Cyr. 8. 5. 24. IIcirpwTcu aol, it is fated to you, iEsch. Pr. 815. Tots o-rpariuTais a>4>€tX.ero aiadds, pay was due to tlie soldiers, i. 2. 11. Baa-tXet av ttoXXoO di|ioi yevoivro (431 b), would be worth much to the king, ii. 1. 14. e.) Words of giving, including those of granting, offering, paying, distributing, supplying, &c. : ACSapX ooi euavrdv, I give myself to you, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. Aiavetpai rots crpcvrrryois, to distribute to the generals, vii. 5. 2. Efrre/j iuol ctc'Xci rt Zeodrjs, if S. paid me anything. Geols Sup-fj/jucLTa, gifts to the gods, Ar. Nub. 455. f.) Words of opposition, including those of contention, dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, &c. : AifjLbv {ip.lv avTurdijai, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5. 19. 'EpC|ovTd ol vepl no one fought with him, lb. 23. g.) Words of yielding, subjection, and worship, including those of homage, obedience (cf. 432 g), prayer, sacrifice, &c. : Il&m-a. rots deois vtto\o, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. *E/tol ou diXere ir€i0etXaiT€pov, more friendly to C, i. 9. 29. Tot/rots \os, C. was pleased with these, i. 9. 26. *£lv epuol \aXerraiveri, for which you are angry with me (429 a), vii. 6. 32. Xatpets . . l\ois dryadols, you delight in good friends, Meni. 'Eirfarewov yap avrtfr they trusted him, L 457. i.) Words expressing the act or power of exciting emotion : as pleasure, displeasure, care, fear, &c. : ' ApeoTcctv vpuv, to please you, Cyr. 3. 3. 39. *EfAol (te\^fjwurr&v Tcicri, wonderful to all, iv. 2. 15. "Ira poi €virpaKTOTepov 77, iluit it may be easier for me to effect, ii. 3. 20. Horap.bt . . ijpuv eeri 81a- Partos, there is a river for us to cross [to be crossed by us], ii. 4. 6. 'llpuv . . Trdm-a iroi-qTea, everything [is for us to do] should be done by us, iii. 1. 35. Note. So rarely other verbals : Tota-t dvorvxoiknv evicraCa debt, Eur. 459. k.) Substantive Verbs implying possession (in forms of expression which may be variously translated). § 462 OF POSSESSOR, AGENT, &0. 249 Rule E. Substantive Verbs take a Dative of the Possessor : 'EvravOa Kupcf} /3 Pou\o|xe vw tclvt earl, tliese things are [to him willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, Hel. 4. 1. 11. Ntidq. irpoo-Scxoncvw ?>, were as N. had expected, Th. 6. 46. 460. 1.) And, in general, words expressing any action, property, &c, which is represented as being to or for some person or thing : Iipoiriva) aoi, I drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Kevor&cpiov avrois iirolripovov yap fy fyXurrbs, ws Iftol [sc. 456k€l], 'as it seemed to me,' 'in my opinion,' lb. 1161. e. The Dat. is termed ethical, when it is introduced, not as an essen- tial part of the sentence, but to render it more emphatic or subjective, by referring to some one as interested (t)6ik6s, relating to the slate of mind). The pronouns of the 1st and 2d Pers. are especially so used : Mefc^o-o pot, COMP. GR. 11* 250 SYNTAX. R. F., XIX. DATIVE RESIDUAL. § 462. (j.T]3e7roTe avafiivetv, remember [for me], / pray you, never to defer, Cyr. 1. 6. 10. Nocre? 8e poi irpoTras ctry€V eXirls r&vte fiot, 'lias fled [for] from me,' Eur. Td axpa iyuy . . irpoKa/raXappdveiv i. 3. 16. 464. 3. A Bat. depending upon a verb is often used instead of a Gen. depending upon a substantive : 01 . . Xiriroi avrots dtdevrai, the horses are tied for them, — ol iWoi ai- r&v dtdevrcu, their Jwrses are lied, iii. 4. 35. Tots (3ap(3dpois t&v re ire&v diredavov iroWoi, [for] of the barbarians, many of the foot tcere slain, iii. 4. 5. *H . . rod iraurbs apxr) Xeipurocjxp ivravda KareXCdrj vi. 2. 12 (cf. 3. 1). a. The Dat. for the Gen. is sometimes joined directly with a substan- tive, chiefly the Dat. of a personal pronoun : Ol 6V i fides . . ov irapeyi- vovro, [the oxen for them] their oxen did not come, Hdt. 1. 31. b. A Dat. is sometimes joined with a substantive, where the sense is more fully expressed by supplying a participle or adjective : 'Air6&\eire . . irpbs tt]v v4av Tjp.iv ttoXiv, look upon the new state [planned] for lis, PI. c. Except as above, substantives governing the Dat. are commonly derived from verbs or adjectives so construed. D. The Dative Residual. 465. The Dative Residual is used in expressing adjuncts, which are not viewed as either subjective or objective (397 s). It simply denotes indirect rela- tion, without specifying the character of that rela- tion ; or, in other words, it denotes mere association or connection. Hence we have the general rule : Kule F. An Attendant Thing or Circum- stance, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE Dative. a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in express- ing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its character, would be expressed either by the Gen. or Ace. (399 a, f). b. The Dative Residual is commonly expressed in Lat. by the Abla- tive ; in Eng. most frequently by the preposition with, but likewise by the prepositions at, in, by, through, &c. Cf. 403 a, 448 a. § 468. INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 251 c. The Dative Residual may be resolved into (i.) the In- strumental and Modal .Dative, and (n.) the Temporal and Local Dative. i. Instrumental and Modal Dative. 466. Rule XIX. The means and mode are put in the Dative. Instrumentality and mode may be either external or internal, and mode may apply either to action or condition. Hence, to these heads may be referred, 1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any thing is done, or through which it comes to pass : 'AKovTifa Tis iraX/ru, one shoots with a dart, i. 8. 27. SxcSCcus 5ta/3a£- vovres, crossing with rafts, i. 5. 10. 'EfeiTrovro . . liririKui, pursued with cavalry, vii. 6. 29. ©avdxw ^ryxLovv, to punish with death, Cyr. 6. 3. 27. 'AirodvqcTKei. votrta, dies through disease, vii. 2. 32. Euvota ewoue'vovs, ii. 6. a. Means and Cause, to some extent, cover the same ground. Hence some of the examples above, and others like them, might be referred to a Dative of Cause (for which the Gen. could be used, 465 a).. b. Xpao|icu, to use [to supply one's need with, 50], takes the Dat. (originally of means) : T£St|/a> crtry xM°" CTat > he will use meat as bread (394 b), Mem. 3. 14. 4. (c) So the compounds diro-xpdouai, &c. ; and sometimes vop.l£w, after the analogy of x/><£o/«u • G>vf] . . vo/xltovtri, Hdt. 467. 2.) a. The way or manner, in which any thing is done or affected, together with attendant circumstances; and also (b) the respect in which any thing is taken or applied : (a) Ov yap Kpavyfj, dXXa forira>, riding with his horse in a sweat, i. 8. 1. Toury t£ Tp<5ira> e-rropeid-qaav, in this manner they marched. (b) II\t|8€i ye tj/j-wv Xei^dhres, inferior to us in [respect to] number (406 b). T# fieT^iretra ttoXX£ Hdt. 2. 110. So often a neut. adjective (fiaicpu) by far, oXlyip by little, &c.) : Ov iroWai 8e varepov, not [later by much] long after, ii. 5. 32. "Ocrcp 5e fidXXov iriarevoj, toowtw fidXXop diropd), [by how much] the more I believe, [by so much] the more 1 am at a loss, PI. Rep. 368 b. See i. 5. 9. Minor anno, Hor. 252 SYNTAX. R. XX., XXI. — DAT. OP TIME, &C. § 469. ii. Temporal and Local Dative. 469. Kule XX. The time and place at which are put in the Dative (cf. 433, 482) : as, a. Time (in prose, chiefly in stating some day, night, month, season, year, or festival, as the time at which an event occurred) : T# irpibrri 5Z TifJ.e'pa olQIkovto, the first day, tJicy came, iv. 8. 1. T<£ 5' i-ribim Irak, & $p '0\vfM7rias, ^ rb o~t6.8lov eviita Kpoidvas, the following year, in which was the Olympic at which C. won the foot-race, Hel. 2. 3. 1. "12pa trout Th. ^ b. Place (in prose, chiefly in adverbs of place which are properly da- tives, 380 c ; and in stating some town or Attic deme, as the place at which an event occurred) : ravrrj and T-rjde [sc. x^pq-] in this region, here, iv. 5. 36, vii. 2. 13 ; rjirep where, ii. 2. 21 ; icvicXy in a circuit, around, i. 5. 4 ; olkoi at home, i. 1. 10. Td rpbtraia t& re Mapa0«vi kcu 2aX.ap.tvi koX nXaratats, the victories at M. and 8. and P., PI. Menex. 245 a. Kduevov viSio A!yio-0op Eur. El. 763. M//tm aypta X. 188. Alttpi valoov B. 412. c. This Dat., while at expresses its general idea, is often translated by in, on, &c. ; or without a preposition. d. To the local dative may be referred the use of the Dat., chiefly poetic, to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs : A6- vapuv dvOpwirois ^X^ v > to have power among men, Eur. Bac. 310. E. The Accusative. 470. The local idea upon which the uses of the Accusative are based (398), appears to be the idea of that into which an action goes. a. Locally viewed, as the Gen. is the Whence-Case, the Dat. Residual the Where-Gase, and the Dat. Objective the Whitfier-Case, so the Ace. is the Whcreinto-Case (10). b. Under the local form of conception, an action is conceived of as going towards or to an indirect object, but into a direct object; or, in famil- iar grammatical language, this is regarded as the receiver of the action, (c) In another view, the action passes into its effect, (d) It goes, in a special sense, into the part affected. And (e), in going through an object, it necessarily goes into successive parts. Hence, 471. Upon this general idea, are based (i.) the Accusative of Direct Object, (n.) the Ace. of Effect, (in.) the Ace. of Specification (specifying the particular part, property, &c. affect- ed), and (iv.) the Ace. of Extent (denoting the space, time, &c. through which anything extends), (v.) In some uses, which may be referred to these heads or to its generic office (472 a), the Ace. has been termed Adverbial. L, ii. Accusative of Direct Object and Effect. 472. Eule XXI. The dikect object and the effect of an action are put in the Accusative : as, § 474. ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT, &C. 253 Aapuu TnrL\ovs axpeXeiv, to benefit friends (453), Cyr. 1. 4. 25. "E/cro/ja dire, spake to H. (452 a), M. 60. See e. c. The same principle applies to circumstantial adjuncts (485 e). (d) This generic use of the Ace. is far more frequent in respect to things than persons, since the relations of the former are less varied and require less careful discrimination. For bike reason, and also to distinguish the gen- der (181. 1), it is most frequent of all in the neuter adjective used sub- stantively (478 a, 483 a), (e) It is sometimes chosen for distinction from a Gen. or Dat. modifying the same verb : as crov da.vp.afa (432 f), but roiJ- rov ae 0avp,dfa (429 a), or tovt6 crov davfiafa (443 b). f. As many Greek verbs govern the Gen. or Dat. while the correspond- ing verbs in Eng. govern the Objective case ; so many verbs governing the Ace. in Greek are translated into Eng. with a preposition : "Op.vv|u 6eovs Kal Beds, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6. 17. 'H/xas . . et5 irowSv, doing well by us. vX.aTT6ft€vov . . was, guarding against us, ii. 5. 3. g. With verbs of motion, the place where it ends is commonly expressed with a preposition ; but sometimes, chiefly in the poets, as a direct ob- ject : 'Acpl^erai t6itov vXivdrj, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6. 2£ irip.\f/ai 4>dos, to send you into the light, Eur. Ale. 456. Kvicrn 8' ovpavbv lice, the savor ascended to heaven, A. 317. (h) This construction applies less frequently to persons : MvTjoTfjpas dcpUero, ca.me to the suitors, a. 332. i. The poets sometimes even join an Ace. of the place with verbs of standing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation) : "Ev o?/3o? lb. 956. j. This rule primarily applies only to the adjuncts of verbs (a). Verbal adjectives and nouns, however, sometimes take the Ace. by virtue of the included verb : 2£ . . x« [ = P- 01 Xbyovs or \6ytov], if you had always begun your addresses to me thus, Soph. El. 556. b. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, often takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in the Ace, by attraction : "Hi8ei avrov, otl fieaov %x 0L i ^ e knew [him] that he occupied the centre, i. 8. 21. (c) Nor is this anticipation confined to the Ace. : Bappdpwv eirefueXelTo, ws iroXefietv re luavoi et-qaav, he took care that the barbarians should be prepared for war, i. 1. 5. See 402 a. 475. Periphrasis, a. The place of a verb is often supplied by an Ace. of the kindred noun joined with such verbs as uWu (or more fre- quently Troieofiai), &y T^&rjpi, &c. : Kvpos e^eraatv koX apiOfibv t&v 'EXXfyuv e-jroirjaev [= e^rfraae ical -ffpldpL-qae rods "EWrjvas], C. made a review and numbering of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2. 9. b. These and like periphrases sometimes take an Ace. by virtue of the implied verb : 'Av8pdiro8a apway^v iroirjo-dfievos [= apTrdaas], having made seizure of slaves, Th. 8. 62. S^ua ridels (= arffiaipw) . . vfrcqv, 6. 171. 476. Ellipsis. 1. The verb which governs the Ace. is sometimes omitted ; particularly, a.) In EMPHATIC ADDRESS or EXCLAMATION : OCroS, & , lw, Xiyeias popov arjdovos [sc. irodCo], oh, oh [I long] for the fate of the melodious nightingale/ iEsch. b.) In ENTREATY : Mr), irpbs £a>, but, by tJie gods, I will not pursue them, i. 4. 8. Nat /id Ala, Yes, indeed ! v. 8. 6. e.) Some familiar verbs : '0 rbv icdvSvv [sc. i\ iAV \ m later writers], he with the cloak, Luc. D. C. 9. 2. The Ace. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omitted: cf. AtareXeaai ttjv 686v, to finish the way, iv. 5. 11, and irpbs £>5wp f3o6XoiTO diareXeaat i. 5. 7 ; 'EXativovros rbv tirirov, riding his Iwrse, and TJapeXat- vovros, Cyr. 8. 3. 28, 29. Mkios ijXaae i. 10. 15. 3. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Ace. is sometimes employed, especially by the poets, for energy or brevity of expression : $iX6TVTa . . Ta.fiap.ev, let us strike friendship [a victim in pledge of friend- ship], r. 94 (cf. fcedus ferire). Cf. 474 s, 479. Accusative of the Effect. 477. The effect of a verb includes whatever the agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Ace. expressing or denning its action. The Ace. thus employed may be either (1) a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the verb ; § 480. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 255 or (2) a neuter adjective used substantively ; or (3) a noun simply defining or characterizing the action. 1. Kindred Noun (with this, the verb is often translated by a more general word) : Evt&xvw touto to €v-ri>XT|p.a, they had [succeeded] gained this success, vi. 3. 6. 4»v\aKas iav, being wise with their wisdom, PI. b. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Ace. of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for an adverb : 'fis ddvduvov §iov £G)p.ev = '12s aKivbuvus &p.ev. This adjective not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun : T6 IleporiKbv upxeiro [sc. dpxvM-a], he danced the Persian [dance], vi. 1. 10. See 478. 478. 2. Neuter Adjective (commonly translated by supplying a noun, or by an adverb) : Toiavra p&v TreiroliqKe, such acts has lie com- mitted, or thus has he acted, i. 6. 9. Afyeis ouk a\dpifrra, you speak pleasantly enough, ii. 1. 13. KXeirrov ^Xeiret [sc. /3\e,u/m], he looks [a thievish look] thievish, Ar. Vesp. 900. 'Aviicpaye re iroX.ep.iKov vii. 3. 33. a. This construction of the neuter adjective is very extensive in its use, and often occurs where a substantive would be constructed differently (472 d) : '0K€iv tt]v o~t par-fry lav , to teach you the military art, Mem. 3. 1. 5. 256 SYNTAX. R. XXII., &C. ACCUSATIVE. §481. in. Accusative of Specification. 481. Kule XXII. The Accusative is used in specifying to what part, property, &c, a word or expression applies : The force of this Ace. is expressed in Eng. by as to (nark, secundum), though other forms of translation are more frequent : Td> \ilpd Se8ep.evov, [bound as to the hands] with his hands bound, vi. 1. 8. TlorapLos, K6Svos 6vo|xa, evpos dvo trXedpuv, a river, Cydnus by name, two plethra in breadth, i. 2. 23. ndvTa KpaTcaros, best in every thing, i. 9. 2 (cf. 416 b). a. When a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the con- struction (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to partitive apposition : Tory* . . \Itt oa-ria 6vp,6s T. 406. See 395 b. b. An Ace. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence : Ta fxev yap irapcXOovra, i/p-eh p.h Kvpov vv^rjcraTe, as to the past, you have exalted C, Cyr. 8. 6. 23. Toi>s d-ypovopovs toOtovs, . . 6vd8n (pep'cadwaav PI. Leg. iv. Accusative of Extent. 482. Rule XXIII. Extent of time or space is put in the Accusative : as, a. Time : "Efieivev Tjpe'pas iTrrd, mansit dies septem, he remained [through] seven days, i. 2. 6. 'Edaicpve iroXdp xp^vov, he tuept a long lime, i. 3. 2. "EirXeov ^pipav ical vvicra vi. 1. 14. Efaoaip i-rr\ yeyopfa, viginti annos natus, twenty years old, Mem. 3. 6. 1. *Os rtdpvKe ravra rpla Irq, ■ these three years,' Lys. 109. 12. (b) So sometimes repeated time, as implying extent : Ttjp coprjv eirayip'eetp a, irapao-dyyas oktc6, he advances through P. one day's-march, eight parasangs, i. 2. 6. Mvplas efieye icara yrjs opyuias yev'ecrOai, that I may be 10,000 fathoms under ground, vii. 1. 30. T6 /3e\os avr&p Kai 8iir\d we mzist first run, Ar. Th. 662. So jxatcpdv a long way, &c. F. The Vocative. 484. Eule XXV. The Compellatiye of a sentence is put in the Vocative. a. The usual sign of address, in Greek, as in so many lan- guages, is S>. It is commonly employed in prose, except (b) in abrupt or familiar address ; and (c) is frequent in poetry, (d) It is commonly followed by the emphatic word in the address, unless (e) this has already preceded ; and is (f) sometimes doubled for special emphasis. (a) *£l <£aX.iv€, dav/x&fa, Phalinus, I wonder, ii. 1. 10. (b) KXiapxe Kal IlpdSjeve, . . ovk tare 6 tl Troieire, Clearchus and Proxenus, you know not what you do, i. 5. 16. (c) *£l 'AxtXeu A. 74. (d) "fi Qav\uxcruaraT6 &v0pu- ire, most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. *tt kcucuttc avdpibTrw'Aptcue ii. 5. 39. (e) Goundou & Kplrw PL (f) *ft t£kvov & yevvouov Soph. Ph. 799. g. The term of respectful address to a company of men is dvSpes, with which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation : 'Opart p£p, & avdpes, you see, gentlemen, iii. 2. 4. "Avdpes aTpctTtOrcu, i. 3. 3. Remarks on the Cases. 485. It is important to distinguish not only the specific offices of the cases, but also their generic uses. Thus, a. The Nom. is the generic case for substantives independent of gram- matical construction (401) ; while the Voc. is the specific case for address, and the other cases are also used in exclamations (429 e, f, 453, 476 a). — • Hence the union of the Nom. and Voc. is not deemed a violation of the laws of agreement. An appositive with a Voc. is usually in the Nom. b. The Gen. is the generic case for the adjuncts of substantives, adjec- tives, and adverbs ; and thus may even express direct or indirect objects, more specifically expressed by the Ace. or Dat. (435, 444). c. The Dat. is the generic case for a thing or circumstance simply viewed as an accompaniment (465). COMP. GR. Q 258 SYNTAX. REMARKS ON THE CASES. §485. d. The Ace. is the generic case for the adjuncts of verbs, and thus ex- presses much which is also expressed by the Dat. or Gen. (472 a, b). It often expresses as simple object, what is expressed by the Dat. as the object of approach or influence, or by the Gen. as the point of departure or the cause: ' A, living with unharmed life (modal Dat., 467), Soph. El. 650. e. If a circumstance is merely viewed as modifying a verb, it is put in the Ace; if simply viewed as an accompaniment, in the Dat.; but if viewed as having some causal relation, in the Gen. These differences of view, and the prevalence of different analogies, have led to much variety of construction. Thus, (a) Manner : Tbv ai/rbv rp6irov vi. 5. 6, T$ airy Tpoirw iv. 2. 13, in the same manner (483, 467). (f5) Measure of dif- ference : Qvp-oeidtarepoL bk iroXv, much more spirited (483), iv. 5. 36 ; IIoXXw be iiarepov (468) ; Totrovrov i. 8. 13 ; TWovtw i. 5. 9. (y) Re- spect : IIXfjGos ws 5i yj&ot bebe^vov (481) ; ^aueiv x««f os, to take by the hand (426 a). («) Time : To Xoiirov ii. 2. 5, Tov Xoiirov (433 a), afterwards ; Te'Xos, at last (483) ; Xpovw irore ei7rev, [with time] at length he said, Hel. 4. 1. 34. (£) Cause': Tovt' £(pii<6p.r)j>, on this account I came (483 b), Soph. O. T. 1005 ; Tovrov ere . . frXw (429 a) ; Tw, wherefore (466). 486. The construction belonging to a word in its primary sense and form (a) is extensively retained in figurative or secondary senses, and in composition (414 c, 427, 432 g, &c.) ; but (b) is often changed to another more appropriate. Thus, (c) many verbs become transitive through a sec- ondary sense, or through composition with a preposition, even though the preposition may not itself govern the Ace: Kivbvvov i!g&)aaadai, these things we will endeavor to relate (the author's plural), Cyr. 1. 1. 6. (c) 'Hfieis KTevovp.ev, ol'irtp i^e iraXtie the two children, i. 1. 1. T<3p dvdpQv vi. 6. 29, rd> &v8pe 30, rods &v8pas, . . rotiruv, . . t« &v8pe 31, &c. Upoa- trpexov Svo veavicncw, two young men came running up, iv. 3. 10. 'Etye- \aadr-qv odv &fi& . . ir6ir\TJ"Y|j.€0a, I and you both are smitten, Eur. Ale. 404. Oi) ad fibvos ovdt ol col L\oi . . 'io-yer* PI. Leg. 888 b. e. Syllepsis is sometimes found, where the relation of the subjects to each other is disjunctive : Et 8£ k "Apvs &pxres iro\ifj.u)v Kai KLvdxjvuv Kai rapaxys, efr ^v . . Kadecrra/jLev, delivered from the wars, perils, and trouble, in which we are now involved, Isoc. 163 b. a. Zeugma is the common construction of the adjective used as an epithet. It is least frequent in the pronoun. b. In the construction of the verb, zeugma is especially frequent when the verb precedes or directly follows the first subject : Kdpov airoTCfivcTat 7? Ke£cravTO, the majority voted, Th. 1. 125. See f. . b.) With the plural used as singular (especially fjpets for eyd) ; and with the singular used as plural, or so modified as to render the idea plu- ral : Jleirbvdajxev, $\ . . Kevqv Kartaxov iXirida, ive have suffered, [yes I] w/w cherished a vain hope, Eur. Iph. A. 985 (see 489 b). Artfioadevrjs /j-era t&v ^vaTpaTrryuiv . . i\TaT* Alyiadov pia, dearest majesty of ^E., ^Esch. Ch. 893. 'EXOwv . . ply 'HpaKXrjelr), the mighty Hercules coining, A. 690. 262 SYNTAX. R. XXVL, XXVII. ATTRACTION, &C. § 499. e.) In general, with words for which others might have been used, or with which others are implied (as inhabitants with places, crews with ves- sels, troops with commanders, &c.) : Ilacra. 8e yewa [= Xaos] ^pvyQv . . 8wcra)v, the whole race of tlie Phrygians, about to offer, Eur. Tro. 531. <£etf- yei . . es KtpKvpav, &v avrcSv evepyervs, he flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor of theirs, Th. 1. 136. UevT-rjKovTa Tpir/peis . . ovk cISotes lb. 110* f. A double construction sometimes occurs, chiefly with intervening words. Thus, a collective noun may take a singular with reference to the united whole, and then a plural with reference to the individuals compos- ing that whole ; &c. : 'H 8e (lovXr) 7)crvxia.v &yj£V, opewra . ., ko! ovk a/yvo- ouvTcs, the senate remained quiet, seeing . ., and not ignorant, Hel. 2. 3. 55. 500. 5. Attraction. An appositive often attracts from the regular form of agreement : Tb fieaov tw reix&v ?\CXTaTOV 7r6Xis, to me tlie state is the dearest object, Eur. Med. 329. T£ odv Tavra iariv ; wliat then [are these things] is this ? ii. 1. 22. 503. 8. A change of person sometimes takes place, a.) From the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially in quotation : "Ayotr' av [laraiov &vSp' iniroSuv, 5s . . k6.kto.vov, take out of tlie way a senseless man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. b.) From a speaker's addressing a company, now as one with tliem, and now as distinct from them : Aavdaveiv vjjtas els bo-qv rapax^v i) iroXis i\y.av Kadio-T-qKtv • cotea/re yap . ., oirives TtGvKajMV Isoc. 141 d. § 506. " ADJECTIVE AND PRONOUN. 263 CHAPTEE II. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PKONOUN. I. AGREEMENT. (See 492 s : for the union of the Dual and Plural, 494 ; for Compound Construction, 495 s ; for Synesis, 498 s ; for Attraction, 500 ; for change of Number and Person, 501 s.) 504. Kule XXVI. An Adjective agrees with its subject in gender, number, and case. a. The word adjective is here used in its largest sense (173) : Uapd8eibv, u>s eirifiovXeijoi avT<3. 'O 5£ ireiderai, lb. 3. b. A pronoun, for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in anticipation or repetition of its subject, or is itself repeated : Keivo kcLXXIov, t£kvov, lxP°"V i v - 2 - 17. b.) Feminine, yvvf\ woman, -yfj or x^P^ land, 68ds way, fipipa day, \dp hand, "yvwp/q opinion, poipa portion, T{\vr\ art, wpa season : 'H Ki- 264 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE. § 506. \i ye ry (pavepq), openly, i. 3. 21. Aid ra-x^v, rapidly, i. 5. 9. Aid iravrbs, throughout, vii. 8. 11. e. The neuters irXetov or irX^ov, pclov or 2Xo,ttov, oVov, p/qSev, and tI are sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; and (f ) from this, sometimes pass into an adverbial use : MvpidSas irXeiov r) 8w8ei araSioiu, the H., not less than two stadia in breadth, v. 6. 9. ' Air okt€Ivov elvcu t£, appearing to be something, PI. 508. 3. An adjective (a) sometimes agrees with a substan- tive, instead of governing it in the Genitive partitive ; and (b) often so governs it, instead of agreeing with it. In the latter construction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the substantive, or else in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.). (a) Tiepl picas vvktiis, about midnight [the middle of the night], i. 7. 1 (cf. hp-fay vvkt&v Cyr. 5. 3. 52). Aid \Ltpo- vovvras twv avSptoirtov [for dvdp&irovs], neither virtuous actions [the virtu- ous of actions], nor wise men [the wise of men], Isoc. 24 d. Aapirpo"- ttitos ti., [something of distinction] some distinction, Th. 7. 69. § 511. USE OF DEGREES. 265 509. 4. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and adjuncts, and, by the poets, even for appositives, and dependent clauses ; to express, a.) Time : UpoTcpa Kvpov . . d0t«:ero, she arrived^ before C, i. 2. 25. b.) Place : ^K-qvovp-ev im-atdpioi [= inrb ttjs aWpias iv. 4. 14], we en- camp in the open air, v. 5. 21. So demonstrative pronouns (especially 88« in poetry) : LToXXa 5' bpQ ravra [ = tclijtt], 469 b], Tpoftara, I see here many xep, iii. 5. 9. 'J3s a?/;/) 88e, as £/tc man is here, Soph. 0. C. 32. c.) Manner : ^wepdWovTo . . 7r6A«s ckovotli, cities contributed will- i. 1. 9. Wirovro da-acvoi, sequebantur laeti, vii. 2. 9. d.) EFFECT : E&j>r|pov [— ware eii^>r)p.ov ewai] . . Koip\7jUov (Tropin, hush your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent], JEsch. Ag. 1247. e.) Various Relations and Circumstances : "AXXoi 5k %v, dying he would be happier, far happier than living, Eur. Hec. 377. 511. 2. The comparative is commonly construed with the particle fj, than, or with the Genitive of distinction ; and the superlative, with the Genitive partitive : as, 4>tXoi? rod (petiyeiv, more honorable than to flee [honorable in preference to fleeing], PI. Phsedo 99 a. Ile'pa rod Stov- tos (Tocp&Tepoi, wiser than is proper [wise beyond what is proper], PL Gorg. b. The construction of the Gen. with the Comp. is often elliptical : AdXi&repov eaTL p^ vyiovs oriopa-ros p,r] vyiel \pvxy avvoiicelv, it is more wretched to live ivith a diseased soul than [to live with] a diseased body. By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the Comp., — (c) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows irXetov, peipv, or gXcmrov, ^ is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em- ployed (the Comp. being now construed as an adverb) : ' kiroKTelvovci tCsv avbpQv ov p\elov irevTaKoaiovs, ' not less than 500 ' (507 e). (d) To the Gen. governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed with ¥\ : Ti Todd' Soph. Ph. 65 (cf. 262 c). b. From the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to have arisen the phrase ev rots, which is used to modify the Sup. ; and, as an adverbial expression, without change of gender : 'Ev roTs [sc. icp&Tois] irpCbroi, [among the lirst also first] among the very first, Th. 1. 6. c. The numeral cts is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea of individuality prominent : as, AtDpa be trXela-Ta . ., efs ye ibv avfy, iXdp.- fiave, he received the most presents, [at least being one man] for a single in- dividual, i. 9. 22. Urbem unam mihi amicissimam, Cic. 513. 4. Certain special forms of comparison deserve notice: a.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, &c. : Mei^ov eXirlbos, majus spe, [greater than our hope] above hope, Msch. b.) The Comp. followed by ^ Kara, or sometimes fj irpds • as, Mel fa, % Kara d&icpva [sc. iartv], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great for tears, Th. 7. 75. (c) Sometimes with an Inf. added : Mel fa . . ij nwr ipi kcu ae e£evpeiv, too great for me and you to discover, PI. Crat. 392 b. d.) The Comp. followed by ^ ware (or «s) and the Inf. (sometimes an- other mode) : Bpax^repa 7\kqvti^ov t) ws e^iKveladai, they sJwt [a shorter dis- tance, than they must that they may reach] too short a distance to reach, iii. 3. 7. Metfrv t) ware epeiv, for the malady is too great to bear, Soph. Taireiv^ vp.Q)v ij biavoia kyKaprepeiv, your mind is too weak to persevere, Th. 2. 61. f. ) The Comp. and Sup. (for the most part joined with avnJs) followed by a reflexive pronoun, to denote the comparison of an object with itself ; the Comp. representing it as above what it has been or would be in other circumstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point : 'Av- dpeibrepos ylyverai avrbs avrou, he becomes more manly [himself than him- self] tJmn he was before, PI. Rep. 411 c. "Iv avrbs avrov rvyxdvv ^Xtl] ?) airoXtcrdai, I wish the people to be safe, rather than perish, A. 117. 514. 5. The comparative and superlative are often used without an express object of comparison. In this case, the super- lative increases the force of the positive, while the comparative may either increase or diminish it, according to the object of comparison which is implied. Thus, "Q 6av|xao-i<&TaT€ avdpuire, most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. Trjp ra\C- o-rqv, immediately, iii. 3. 16. ILWa> [sc. rod diovros] XtXeKrai, [more § 517. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 267 than is proper] too much has been said, Eur. Ale. Maiq><5T€pov . . Siriyi^- &c.). IV. USE OF THE ARTICLE. A. Broad Use. 516. 1. Epic. The article (6, 17, to) appears, in the Epic language, as a general definitive, performing the office not only of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (249 s) : as, 'O yepejp, the old man, A. 33 ; Td r airoiva, this ransom, 20 ; Tb gov p.i- pos, that wrath of thine, 207 ; 'O yap ?}\de, for lie came, 12 ; Tdv, wlwm, 36. Note. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, — (a) The art., as usually understood, is simply a less emp/iatic form of the demonstr. pron.; and so, for the most part, the personal pron. of the 3 Pers. (but used as a substantive). Cf. " That man whom you see," and " The man whom you see"; " Those that love me," and " Them that love me," Prov. 8. 17, 21. (P) The demonstr. pron. used connect ively becomes a relative : " Blessed are th ey that m ourn . " , In Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper use as such, is commonly not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great extent in other kinds of elevated poetry, (b) When used as a personal pronoun, it is most frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek (518) ; and is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the substantive to which it refers : 'H 5' ev, &s e-rrireWe, those instructions which he gave, E. 319. (d) The article when used as a personal or demonst. pron. has sometimes, from its position (518 f ), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the Nom. with the common relative : "Os yap detraros ^Xdev, for he returned last, a. 286. 517. 2. Ionic and Doric* In the later Ion. and in the Dor. writers, this extended use of the article was, in great 268 SYNTAX. ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. §517. measure, retained. E. g. in Hdt., the relative has in the Nom. sing, and pi. the forms 6s. rj, to, ot, at, ra • and has elsewhere the t- forms of the article, except after prepositions which suffer elision, in the phrases of time, iv a, 4g ov, es 6 (or ov), pexP 1 ( or axpi) ov, and in some doub'tful readings. 518. 3. Attic. The use of the article as a demonstrative and personal pronoun remained in Attic Greek, (a) in connec- tion with ficv and de ; (b) in poetry with yap ; and (c) as the subject of a verb, after Kal, and : (a) 'O %\ [sc. ade\v, he who said, Lys. 167. 15. Ilpoo-rjuei Kal puaelp tovs otdo-ircp oSros, it is proper to hate [those such as] such men as this, Dem. 613. 9. (b) IIp6 tov (also written trporov) before this ; Top6i$ /xh yap Kvvas robs XaXewovs, savage dogs, v. 8. 24. Xradp-Qu t&v iyyvrdru) ii. 2. 11. Td ttjs rod frivovTos ri\vr\s ipyov, the work of the carder's art, PI. Pol. 281 a. Tds peydXas i]8ovds kclI to dyadd rd fieydXa Cyr. 3. 3. 8. b. (Order of Statement.) On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to that which is said about it in tlie sentence, regularly either (4) precede the article, or (5) follow the substantive without a repetition of the article : 'Ay adds 6 dvrjp or 6 dvrjp dyados [sc. £, tliey completed their own long walls, Th. 1. 108. k. A modification is sometimes divided between two positions (oftenest the 1st and 5th) : To?s TJvov roi>s dpiarovs t»v ircpl avrbv eirrd i. 6. 4. 524. Remarks. 1. It is common to employ the article even when the substantive is rendered definite (a) by a posses- sive or (b) demonstrative pronoun : (a) '0 ip.bs irariip, my father, i. 6. 6. T£ vbw r<£ b^rip^ vii. 3. 39. (b) The pronouns o^tos and 88c, as themselves beginning with the article (252), do not take it immediately before them, and ckcivos follows their analogy. These pronouns are therefore placed according to 523 b, except when separated from the article by another modifier : Tai/ras ras 7r6X«s, these cities, Tbvde rbv rpbirov, 'E/ceu^s r^s ijutpas, Tbv dvdpa tovtov, L 1. 8, 9 ; 7. 18 ; 6. 9. 'H ecial deictic uses, 543 s), the pronoun is regularly employed as a subject, and the noun as an attribute : "Ean uh yap irevia avnj ca^-qs, this is manifest poverty, (Ec. 8. 525. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is prefixed to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper name or a personal pronoun to give dejiniteness or emphatic distinction : Tbp PcuriXevovra 'Apra^ep^rjv, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxes tJie king, i. 1. 4. Mtvuv 6 OcttoXos i. 2. 6. 2i> . . 6 irpeo-pvra-ros Cyr. 4. 5. a. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted: Revocp&v 'A0r}vahs, X., an Athenian, i. 8. 15. Uarayvas dvnp U^po-qs lb. 1. 526. 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often the force of an adjective. This construction may be explained by- supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly &v or y^vo^vos : Top vvv xP ovov i ttw [now time] present time, vi. 6. 13 (Tbv 6vra vvv x/>6- vov Eur. Ion 1349). Toy tots xPVVttjplov, the Delphic ora- cle, Cyr. 7. 3. 15. 'Apuevla, . . 17 irpbs carrepav, Western Armenia, iv. 4. 4. b. This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either substantively or adverbially (527 s, 529). 527. 4. The substantive which is modified is often omitted, as a familiar word or supplied by the context j and in the former case, the article is commonly regarded as iised substantively with the word or phrase following (506 d, 520 a) : Twv wo/ad /ScunX^ws [sc. avdpwv], of those from (lie king, i. 1. 5. Td ir&pav rod irora/xov, tlic opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2. 'O firjdev &v (507 e). a. The phrases ol dpxpC and ol irep*, followed by the name of a person, commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates ; and sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than the person merely : Ol 5e dpupi Ti77S' ko.1 ol M ie course of fortune, = r/ tijxv, fortune, Eur. Ale. 785. 'RTryvei to. /3as, extolled the king, Hel. 7. 1. 38. 529. 6. The neuter accusative of the article is often used in forming adverbial phrases, in connection with, a.) Adjectives (483 a) : T6 wpOrov, at first, i. Td Trpbrepov, before, iv. b.) Adverbs (526 b) : Td 7rd\cu [sc. 6V], [as to that which was of old] anciently, PL To rpbaBev, before, i. 10. 10. To^xaXw, back, vi. 6. 38. c. ) Prepositions followed by their cases : Td dird rovde, [as to that after this] henceforth, Cyr. 5. 1. 6. T6 xpbs eo-rtpav, to the ivest, vi. 4. 4. 530. ii. A substantive not employed in its full extent may also be definite (a) from previous men- tion, mutual understanding, general notoriety, or emphatic distinction; (b) from contrast ; and (c), in general, from the connection in which it is employed : as 3 (a) 0opvf3ov iJKovae . ., ical ijpero ris 6 0<5pvpos etv, he heard a noise, and inquired what the noise was, i. 8. 16. Tbv &v8pa 6pQ, I see the max, i. 8. 26. 'AvaKaXovvres rbv irpoBornv, exclaiming, ' the traitor ! ' vi. 6. 7. (b) Contrast may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which are otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the employment of the article with the indefinite pronoun rls : "Iinrovs . ., tovs piv nvas trap ip-ol, tovs 8* rip KXedpxv KaraXeXeLfx-^vovs, horses, some with me, and others left by C, iii. 3. 19. So with numerals denoting part of a whole : Td 8vo pJprj, [the two parts from three, 242 d] two thirds, Th. Cf. 518 a. § 533. PREVIOUS MENTION, CONNECTION, &C. 273 (c) 'EireiSq de eYeXetfrTjcre Aapeios, kclI Karearn els ri\v fiaciktiav 'Apr a- £^/j£j?s, ' had succeeded to the throne [sc. of Persia],' i. 1. 3. d. A substantive is often definite as denoting that which is natural, usual, necessary, proper, &c, in the circumstances : 'E^ fiev rrj aparrepq. %etpi to 8dpu ex^v, ev 8e rrj de£tiros PI. Leg. 902 b. Distributively, "Eva dirb tpyXijs, one from [a tribe] each tribe, Hel. 2. 4. 24. d.) Familiar designations of place, time, and related persons or objects ; Els rb do-Tv, Ets do-rv, into the city ["into town"], Hel. 2. 4. 1, 7. "E«s (io-ircpa) eye'vero, it was morning (evening), ii. 4. 24 ; iv. 7. 27. So with ttoXis city, dyp6s country, yrj land, oIkos house, vv% night, irar-Z/p father, yvvrj wife, irais child, o8os, lest the departure should be a flight, vii. 8. 16. 'Ep,w6- piov b' 9jv rb \wptov i. 4. 6. Td 81$ trivrt 56ca ecr'iv, twice jive is ten. 4. When words or phrases are coupled by conjunctions, they are more closely united in conception, if only a single article is used ; less closely, if the article is repeated : Toi)s iriarobs ko.1 eHvovs /ecu fiefiaxovs, the faithful, friendly, and steadfast, i. 9. 30. Twv 'EWtjvuv /ecu tup fiapfidpuv, of tlie Greeks and of the barbarians, i. 2. 14. V. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS. 535. a. Of the observations which follow, many apply- equally to pronouns and adverbs of the same classes. b. In the use of pronouns, especially those first presented below, it is important to distinguish between the stronger and weaker forms of ex- pression ; that is, between those forms which are more distinctive, emphat- ic, or prominent, and those which are less so. A. Personal, Reflexive, and Possessive (27 s). 536. 1. The personal pronouns (a) are commonly omit- ted in the Nom. (as implied in the affixes of the verb, 271), except for emphasis or distinctness of reference, (b) If needed in the Nom. of the 3d Pers., they are supplied by the article, or, as a stronger form, by the demonstrative pronoun, (c) They are also omitted in the other cases, when understood from the connection, more freely than in English, (d) In the iveaker form for these cases, they are enclitic in the 1st and 2d Per- sons sing., and are commonly supplied in the 3d Person by avros ', while (e), in the stronger form, they are orthotone throughout, and are supplied in the 3d Pers. by the article or still stronger demonstrative. Thus, "AwaPTa o-wo air£8wK& crot, iirel icai fiev, & avbpes, ijbv tyas ktraivG) • 67rws be /ecu vpcis cp.^ eiraivtcreTe, Ijtol p.e\-q avyyevbuevos 6 Kvpos, rfy&adv re avrov i. 1. 9. 537. 2. In reflex reference, the distinctive and emphatic forms are those of the so-called reflexives (244) ; while the forms of the common personal pronouns and of avros are also used as weaker forms, chiefly when the reference is both in- direct and unempliatic. § 539. PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND POSSESSIVE. 275 'EfiavTui 7e doKw awe&ivai, to myself at least I seem to be conscious, vii. 6. 11. AiVxw'eo'flcu' pot 8oku>, [I seem to myself to be] I feel ashamed, i. 7. 4. 'Opbvras, . . 6V faro iriarbv ol elvai, raxb avrbu evpe Kvpip (piKairepov, 77 4avTw, 0. soon found the man whom he believed to be faithful to him, more a friend to C. than to himself (0.), i. 9. 29. a. If a pronoun used, rcflexively and its subject are both related the most closely to the same verb or participle, the former is termed a direct reflex- ive ; (b) but otherwise, indirect : (a) OOs iyw . . Karedtw ipoi, which I laid up for myself i. 3. 3. (b) UpdrreTe birotov dv tl t»(iiv oirjade p.d\i- s rjpercpovs ^ ie mar- riage you talk of, Soph. Ant. 573. <&i\lq. tt} €T€- pos, which is used reflexively, and with no great frequency ; while the poetic or dialectic 6s, 16s, and crxprfs (28 e, n) are very rarely used except as reflexive. f. The weaker form of the Gen., from its want of distinctive emphasis, is rarely preceded by the article, and therefore follows the rule of position in 524 b ; while the stronger form of the Gen., and the possessive adjective- follow the rule in 523 a : T£ (rw/xari avrov, To p.h eavToi) (T&/j.a, his {own) body, i. 9. 23. (g) The Gen. of avrds, however, in its stronger, and espe- cially its reflexive uses, may take the position of eavTov. 539. 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively in other ways, the pronoun ol became simply a retrospective pronoun, i. e. a pronoun referring to a person or thing pre- viously mentioned. As such, it performed the office both (a) of an unemphatic reflexive, and (b) of a simple personal pronoun ; rarely (c), in Epic, of a general reflexive, without respect to person, (d) This last use appears oftener in its deriva- tives (even in the Attic, in cavrov and o-<|>€Tepos). — (a) See 537. 2, a. (b) 'Zvvecpaadv ol, they agreed with him, Cyr. 3. 2. 26. (c) Eto /xev ovb' rj(3aibv &tv£oijlcu, I tremble not in tlie least for [one's self] myself Ap. Eh. 2. 635. (d) Adbpuxaiu oto-iv dvdaaois, may you rule [one's own] your own house, a. 402. Ae? i)p.as aveptaOai lavTOvs, we ought to ask ourselves, PI. Pha?do 78 b. Tow o-fytrlpav 6 276 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS. AYTOS. § 539*. properly plur., but also (especially in the tragic poets) sing, (y) i, ical Tavra [sc. eTroi^aav] eibbres (491 c). b.) The use of tovto and Tavra in assent : Ael virapx^Lv fcal bwarovs. . . "Eoti ravra. " They ought also to be competent." " This is so." PL 545. 2.) "Ode surpasses in demonstrative vivacity; but oItos in emphatic force and in the extent of its substantive use : *H tovSs (pp&fcis ; Tovtov, Svirep d\vdpwv, this man [you] will not cease trifling, PL Gorg. 489 b. (c) Ovtos , oo-tis . . dird^ei, to ask C. for some guide wlw would conduct them, i. 3. 14. a. Indefinite relatives are formed, either from the definite relatives by adding tIs or a particle (commonly &v), or from the simple indefinites by prefixing os (in the shortened form 6-) : bans or 5s dp loJwcver, biroios of wlmt kind soever, birbaos how much soever, birbre wliensocver. See 254, 377, 389. (b) The use of an indefinite relative is sometimes explained by resolving it into an indefinite pronoun and a relative, the indefinite part seeming to belong more strictly to the antecedent clause : "Earip 6 ti 77s 8s [= toiovtos otos] el, as long as you are what [= such, as] you are, PL Phsedr. 243 e. d.) A relative of quantity, quality, &c, for a simpler relative: TaOra . . XPV iroieiv, 8 ddes, odros kjriv, &c. \\.Trb T7)S apX'MS, ^s [sc. apxys] avrbv aarpdir^v eiroirjo-e (505 a). 'Airo- ir£p.-pai irpbs eavrbv [sc. rb arpdrevpux,] 5 etye s biroiovcr$1\iroQ' t>|X€is ilerrefxireTC o-rparrryovs, [the what sort you sent out generals] tlie generals such as you sent out, Dem. 276. 10. f. A demonstrative or indefinite pronoun or adverb is very often omitted in the antecedent clause, as implied by the relative ; but the simple ellipsis of the relative pronoun itself, which is so common in Eng., is not allowed in the Greek. Compare the ellipses in, 2«V [sc. rotrrois] ols p-dXiara . . 8n irXeiorovs, to take as many as pos- sible, i. 1. 6 (8ti the neut. of tfo-ris, according to whatever may be, or is jwssible ; though words denoting possibility are not expressed with it). 'fls (idXiorra eduvaro iinKpvn-Tbpievos, [concealing it as he best could] as secretly as lie could,, i. 1. 6. 'EXavvuv tcs bvvarbv fy tcLxioto, riding as fast as was possible, Cyr. 5. 4. 3. 'Us p.dXi rots d-qaavpols, ots 6 7rarrjp KartXiTrev, with tlie treasures which my father left, Cyr. 3. 1. 33. "Apxovras eiroiei ^s kolt ear peeper o xwpas i. 9. 14. Xet- p,Q>vos ye fvros o'lov Xeyecs v. 8. 3. 'M.rjduv p.euroi, 8v ea>/)d/ca Cyr. 1. 3. 2. Note. If this antecedent is a demonstrative prononn y it is commonly omitted (551 f ) : Si^ [sc. toijtols] ols ix^* with those whom I have, vii. 3. 48. (b) The Dot. and even Nom. are rarely attracted in like manner : T2v [= iKeivwv, ols] -qiriareL, ttoXXoijs, many of those whom he distrusted, Cyr. 5. 4. 39. BXawrecrdaL d(p' <£v [= rotiruv, b\] ijpuv 7ra,oe07cet5cicrrcu, to be in- jured by those things which have been ])repared by us [in respect to which preparation has been made by us], Th. 7. 67. — When the subject of a verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. 282 SYNTAX. — RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 554. (c) Inverse Attraction. The antecedent is here treated, except in position, as if a part of the relative clause ; and sometimes omits an article, as if supplied by the relative (cf. 523 g) : 'AvelXev atrip 6 'A-rrdWuiu Oeois ols [= roi>y deoi/s, ols] ¥5ei 66eiv, Apollo made known to him [to what gods] the gods to whom he must sacrifice, iii. 1. 6. TcurSe [= At5e] 5' ixo-xep d el], obliging a man such as you are [a such as you man], Mem. 2. 9. 3. Oi 8e oloi mp vjicts &v8pes, but [the such as you men] men like you, Cyr. 6. 2. 2 (cL Tots olos oCros avdpibirovs Dem. 421. 16). "Ovtos tov irayov otov Savora/rov [ = toi- otirov, oli>s eo-ri deivbraros], tlic cold being [such as is most dreadful] of the most intense kind, PI. Conv. 220 b. — But if a substantive following otos as above is in a different number, it remains in the Nominative : Neavias 5* otovs [= toioijtovs, olos] s . . p.r} tolovtol Haovrai ol iroXiTai, oloi irovrjpou tlvos f) alffxpov tpyov ecpLeadai, that the citizens should not be such as [they would be] to desire any wrong or base act [or, such as would desire], Cyr. "Oo-ov p,bvov yeijo-aadaL eavrip KaraXiirdv, leaving for himself only [so much as] sufficient to taste, vii. 3. 22. "Oaa p.e'irroi f)5rj doiceiv aircp, but [according to so much as now seemed to him,] so far as he could now judge, Th. c. Through their frequent use as above, with the ellipsis of the cor- responding demonstratives, otos and bVos (particularly the former with T€, 389 j) came to be treated as mere adjectives of quality or quantity : Oto£ t« Zceo-de tj/uuv avp-irpa^ai ; . . 'Ikcivoi kap.ev. " Shall you be [stich as to] able to co-operate with, us ?" "We are able." v. 4. 9. Otic olov re fy . . biwueiv, [the state of things was not such as it should be to pursue] it was §559. CONDENSATION, COMBINATIONS. 283 not possible to pursue, iii. 3. 9. Abyovs oiovs eh ra diKaar^pia, spceclies J such as for] adapted to courts of justice, PI. Euthyd. 272 a. d. In this construction, 8 # re [ = ori roirry, (bare] irXola o-vXXeyew, in order that we might collect transports, vi. 6. 22. M^x/h off [= tov xpbvoV) ore] ddov, until [the time when] they saw, v. 4. 16 (cf. M^- Xpt roaoijTov, £ws Th. 1. 90). M^XP' (&XP L ) off [= T0 " X w /°ioi;, &>0a], to the region where, as far as, i. 7. 6. 'E£ otov (off, off re), ex quo, since, vii. 8. 4. a. The Attic poets sometimes use ovveKa, and Hdt. pe'xpi ov (6to\i), as compound adverbs governing the Gen. : TwaiKos oiW/ca, for tlie sake of a woman, iEsch. Ag. 823. Mo,] ovtlv oi>x virijieivav, tliere was no danger which they did not meet, Dem. 295. 7. Ovdevbs orov ov, Ovdevl orip ov, PI. See also 556. 560. Remark. Forms of comparison are especially liable to attraction and ellipsis (cf. 438 b, 511 b) : Movoi re 8i-res ttpoia ^irparrov, iiirep [— eKeivois, &wep] av fier dXXiov fires, '[like things, which] things like to those which ' (cf. idem qui) v. 4. 34. 561. v. A relative sometimes introduces a clause which (a) has another connective or a participle absolute, or which (b) is properly coordinate (as imperative, interrogative, ' "The vote concerning us. " " f Which will decide what ?] And what will this decide ? " Eur. Or. Kd- thtov . . hus, or [one might mention ten thousand others] ten thousand others whom one might mention, PI. Apol. 41 b. (d) Kvpov 8e fieraire purer at dirb ttjs dpxvs, fjs avrbv aaTpdir-qv eiroirjve, Kai arparyfybv 8e avrbv aire'Sei^e i. 1. 2. This construction is adopted chiefly to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with Rule K. 562. Rule K. The repetition of the relative is commonly avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a jjersonal pronoun or of a demonstrative : as, 'A/ncuos 8e, 8v ijfieTs ijde'Xofiev fiacrCXia Kadurrdvai, koX [sc. $\ £des airoKpivovvrai, Ilplv SrjXov elvai, tC iroi7\aov ; "Ho ! what are you doing?" "What am I doing?" Id. Ran. 198. 565. 3. Condensation, a. Expressions like Qavp\ao-r6v iariv oa-os (oa-ov, it is wonderful how much re- gard he has for you (mirum quantum stadium), PI. Ale. 151 a. Merd IbpQros 0av(j.ao-Tov 8s «S iireiadrjv, I was wonderfully convinced, Id. Phsedo 92 a. , A|A^x avov 8crov xpbvov, an in- conceivably long time, lb. 80 c. 'Yir€pv<»s a>s x a ^ w Id. Conv. 173 c. b. A complementary word may take the place of a connective particle and a demonstrative (cf. 558) : KaroiKreipwv rfy re yvvaina, o'iov avopbs [ = Sn roiotirov avbpbs) arepolro, commiserating the wife [what a husband she had lost] that she had lost such a husband. Cyr. 7. 3. 13. 286 SYNTAX. — V AAA02 AND "ETEP02. § 566. 566. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than the English, in the construction and position of both interroga- tive and complementary words, especially in connecting them with dependent words and clauses ; and even (b) allows the use of more than one in the same clause : (a) It . . t8uv irotovvra, ravra Kareyvwnas avrov ; [having seen him do- ing what, do you] what have you seen him do, that you thus judge of him ? Mem. 1. 3. 10. "Orav tC iroiyaojcn, vopuets avroi/s gov cppovri^eiv ; [when they have done what, will you think] what must they do, before you will think tlcat they care for you, lb. 4. 14. "Iva ti [sc. yiv-qrai] ravra \e~yeis ; [that what may be] with what intent, or why, do you say this ? Id. Apol. (b) T£s rlvos alribs i si Ixdvv eij/eiv, &XXw oirrav, it is work enough for one man to boil meat, for another to roast it, &c, Cyr. 8. 2. 6. Mei- vavres dt Tavnjv ttjv yp.e'pav, rrj dXXrj eiropevovro, 'on the next," iii. 4. 1. (b) Prospectively. Ov8ev &XXo irpd^avres ?) SrjivGavres, loaving done noth- ing else than ravage, Hel. 7. 4. 17. (c) Prospectively and Retrospec- tively. "AXXos &XXov el\K€, one drew up another (alius alium), v. 2. 15. 'O grepos top grcpov iratei, the one strikes the other (alter alteram), vi. 1. 5. (d) Distributively. "AXXoi AXXoOcv, [different persons in different di- rections] some in this direction, and others in that, i. 10. 13. Ofrroi . . &XXos &XXa Xefyet, these s/iy, one one thing, and another another (393 d, 489 d). EUa^ov 8t &XX01 dXXws, alii aliter, i. 6. 11. e. The Greek idiom oddly permits these pronouns (esp. &Wos) to be used with reference to a larger class than the grammatical subject ex- presses : B6es . . teal irpbfiara &XXa, oxen and [other sheep ! i. e. other ani- mals, viz. sheep] also sheep, vii. 3. 48. "Eicrodev &XXa>v fivijGrTjpwv, (Mi- nerva was placed) apart from the rest, the suitors, a. 132. See 509 e, 515. f. The neuter &XXo is often used prospectively with rC, r\ oiZiv, or p.T]8lv, with the ellipsis of a verb, commonly iroiw, irpdcr 6p$s, tu vides, ii. 1. 12. 'H proclamation was made to the Greeks, Hi. 4. 36. (c) A^-yovo-iv, <}>aa€i, pluit, ningit, it rains, it snows. 'Eirel (rvvta-Koraa-i, when it grew dark, Cyr. 4. 5. 5. Mdxvs 8«i, there is need of a battle, ii. 3. 5 (see 473 b). Me'Xei p.oi tovtwv, [there is to me a care] I take care of these, CEc. 11. 9 (432 d, 457). Mera^Xci iwl, me pcenitet, I repent, Cyr. e. An impersonal verb, from its very nature, is in the M pers. sing. ; and an adjective joined with it is in the ncut. sing., or in the neat. plur. for the sing. (489 d, 491c.) As it expresses an action or state without predicating it of any particular person or thing, its force may be commonly expressed by a kindred noun with a substantive (or ot/ier appropriate) verb: A« [ = XP € ^ a co-riv] Xbyuiv, opus est verbis, there is need of words, Cyr. 6. 1. 7. . llapecrKevaaTo, preparation had been made, Th. 4. 67. f. A verb is often introduced as impersonal, of which the subject is afterwards expressed in an Inf. or distinct clause : 'ESoko. avry rfbrj irope6- eadcu, it now seemed best to him to march, i. 2. 1. Ovk ?\v Xa}ie1v, [it was not for any one to take them] it was not possible to take tJiem, i. 5. 2. 572. 2. The substantive verb is very often omitted, espe- cially if it is merely a copula; most freely in the forms earl and tlat. Its omission is particularly frequent with verbals in -t*o$, in general remarks and relative clauses, and with such words as dvayKTj, cikos, Bepis, Kaipos, &pa, S^Xos, dvvaros, olos re, padios, ^nXe7ro's : ToOro ov iroi-qriov [sc. early], hoc non faciendum, this must not be done, i. 3. 15. '0 fieyas 6Xj3os ov fiovipios, greed prosperity is not permanent, Eur. Or. 340. Yi.OTap.bv, 6b to edpos arddiov (cf, o5 fy rb eftpos), a river, of which tJie width teas a slade, i. 4. 1. "ttpa X^yeiv, it is time to say, i. 3. 12. a. Other verbs may be omitted, if supplied by the context, or readily understood from the connection ; especially in familiar expressions, and familiar verbs, as of coming, going, doing, saying, giving, &c. : Ovre ticelvas iXeis, otire enelvai ae" [sc. iXovcri, 536]. 'H ap.ai-a rbv fiovv [sc. £\- ' Ket], " The cart before the horse," Luc. *ft cu8pe, irol 8r) /ecu irbdev ; Dear P., whitlier now (are you going) and whence (do you come) ? PI. b. A verb expressed sometimes suggests a different, and even an oppo- site verb : 'ApxXr) 2injda," 6 Ktfiys, "You, speak well, S.," said C, PI. Phsedo 77 c. 'ATTOKplverou 6 Xeiplaoipos • " BXtyov," €evyovTa (431 c). b.) The middle for the active: Kbirru smite, Koirro|ii- X^o-eai, you will be kindly received, a. 123. Elp|6fx.€0a, we shall be ex- cluded, vi. 6. 16. 'Ov€i8i€to-0€, you will be taunted, Soph. O. T. 1500. b.) In the use of the Aorist passive for the Aorist middle. This occurs chiefly in deponents (266 c), and in other verbs in which the proper comp. gr. 13 s 290 SYNTAX. R. M. — VOICES. J 5 76. passive is wanting or rare : as (m. marking verbs which have also an Aor. mid., less common or differing in sense), (a) Deponents Passive, fryafiat m. (rjydadT) re avrbv, he admired him, i. 1. 9, rbv 5' 6 yipcov r}yd m. (Oik axQtvQMy p.ot; . . 'Iladrja-ofxau '** Will you not be displeased with me?" "I shall be pleased." Cyr.). d. The use of the Aor. mid. as passive (except through simple transi- tion of meaning, 575 c) is rare. It scarcely occurs, except in the 2 Aor. (originally the Impf. mid. and pass., 273 d) : Aovpl rv-wete t) pX%evo$ iy, struck by a spear or sloot by an arrow, A. 191. Karto-xero epun Eur. A. Active. 577. In many verbs, the active voice is both transitive, and intransitive or reflexive, in its use ; or both causative and immediate, (a) In some, the double use belongs to the same tenses ; but (b) in others, to different tenses,, the intransitive sense falling especially to the complete tenses and 2 Aor. (c) In some verbs, the intransitive or reflexive use may' be explained through the ellipsis of a noun or pronoun (476. 2); (a) 2rp€\|/avT€S rb &.y-r)fxa, turning tJie corps, Lac. 11. 9. Srp^iJ/avTts tcpevyov, turning they fled, iv. 3. 32 (cf. (TTpcupevTes t, E/s rrjv (iaaiXeiav KaOco-rqKcv, was (is) established on the throne, i. 1. 3, Cyr. 5. 2. 27. 'AiroXwXeKcv, has destroyed, iii. 1. 38. 'AiroXcoXev, has perished, Symp. 1. 15. See also, for in trans. 2 Aor. and 1 Pf., fialvu}, 56u>, ap4wvfii, ovcAXw, ovro, (hey all anointed themselves, Hel. 4. 5. 4. Avop-qv, {nrc'Xvcra 5 eraipovs, t. 463. 579. b.) Indirect ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Dat. or Gen. of a reflexive pronoun : ^rparrryovs ph i\eo-0cw [= e\eiv eavroh] SiWovs, ra 5' eiriTT}deia dyopaXfo-Qai, to [take for them- selves] choose other generals, and buy (for themselves) provisions, i. 3. 14. Ilcuda . . ae iroiovpcu, / make you my son, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. "On irepl ir\ei- arov iroiotTO, that he [made it to himself] esteemed it of the utmost con- sequence (582 "y), i. 9. 7. Tpirrjv ka-x]ydyiro yvvalica . . tt)p 8evTepr)i> diro- Trcpxpdpcvos, he took to Jmnself a third wife, having [sent from himself] divorced tJie second, Hdt. 6. 63. Kupov 8£ pcTairc'pircTai, he sends for Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1. 2. Tovrov v\dTTccr0cu, to watch him for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, i. 6. 9. 'AirodL- 8o/xai [give up for one's own profit], sell ; rCOcpai or -ypd2&). Tiatiu) cause to cease, iravcpcu cease: eiravae fnh ro&rwv toX- \o6s Mem. 1. 2. 2 ; ravra ei7ruw eiravaaro i. 3. 12. ^o^cj frighten, 4>of3c- opcu/ear; pdfa tell, eavrtp, lie has rendered it less secure for himself, Dem. 584. 2. As the Future so extensively denotes purpose (what a per- son will please himself by doing), it is the most subjective of the tenses ; and henbe, in so many verbs (266 c), the middle here takes the place of the active, (a) In some of these, the Fut. act. is not used at all ; and (b) in others, only as a second, usually later or less common, form. (c) In some, the action of the body is thus connected with the state of the mind. E. g. (a) yiyi>u)o~Ku> and oI5a know, ivavdavu) learn, el/j.1 be, ird- sing,- (3odu) shout, yeXdia laugh, yodw wail, K\al and rpwyw eat. See 50. 585. 3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so in- distinct, that it may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the sense ; that is, the active or the middle may be employed at pleasure ; IIoXv 4>€povT€s, Mucpbv v, bringing much (little), Mem. 3. 14. 1. *Er)dr)i> i-if avrolu, I was despised by them [= KaTe^pov^ffdr-qv p.ov, they despised mc,~\ PI. Act. governing Dat. Ovk£ti de direi.Xovp.ai, dXX' tfdw direiXQ fiAAois, lam no longer threatened, bid I now threaten others (452 a), Symp. 4. 31. (c) 'I-mre'ttv 6 \6' eKdaTiov iXtyovro, opinions were expressed [from] by each, Th. 3. 36. 'Ek jSao-iX^ajs 5edop.frai, given [from] by the king, i. 1. 6. Ilapd irdvTuv bp.oXoye?rai, 'OuoXoyelrai irpbs irdvrwv, it is conceded by all, i. 9. 1, 20. (e) See 434 b, 461. (f) 'Txb rip irarpl reOpa^vos, brought tip [under] by his father, PI. Rep. 558 d. 'Eu 'Adrjvalwv itriTeTpawtvot. tt)v e, Indefinite View : eypa\f/e, ( -) ( • ) scribebat, Tie was writing, scripsit, he wrote. 592. Hence the action is represented, 1.) By the definite tenses, as continued or prolonged ; but by the Aorist, as momentary or transient : or by the former, as a habit or continued course of conduct ; but by the latter, as a single act : • Toi>j fib otiv ireXraaras cS^avro ol pdppapot ml l^.&.\ovro • ^TreiSr? 8t £y- yi/s 9jaap ol oTrXirai, crpdirovTO • /cttl ol pip ireXraaTal evdtis tXirovro 8iw- kovtcs • tlie baifbariaiis received the targeteers (momentary) and fought xvith them (continued) ; but when now the hoplites were near, they turned to flight (momentary) ; and the targeteers immediately followed pursuing them (continued) ; v. 4. 24. Aapt&v . ., i\otv, having taken (momentary), having (continued), i. 1. 2. 'Eirel 5£ cISov avrbv, o'iwep irpdvdev irpc\bv, . . ivl toijtov pacriXevovros, that a blind man became king, and while he was reigning, Hdt. 2. 137. So fiovXetiu), irXovrtw, I am senator, rich, £po6\evo-a, iirXo^rrjaa, I became senator, rich. 593. 2.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time of, or until another action ; but by the Aorist, simply as done in its own time : 'EiropcvOTjo-av aradfiovs r^rrapas, fylm hk rbv ■k&pmtov erropcvovTO, ct8ov (3ao-l\€i6v tl, tliey made four day 's-marches, and while they were making tlie fifth, they saw a palace, iii. 4. 23. 594. 3.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted, designed, or imminent (doing, not done) ; but by the Aorist, as accomplished (done) : §598. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE.. 295 KXiapxos rods avfov (rTpaTiibras £p\d£?ro i£vai • oi 8e avr'ov re 2(3aXXov. . . lAiKpbv itjtyvye rb pvi] KaTair€Tp»0t)vai, V&Tepov 8' eirei Zyvw, 8tl ov 8vvq- cerai pido-as t&xktto.; Kal . . &, lOlXw or OcXco, |3ovXop. &c., with the Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., Aor. or Fut., according to the view taken of the action in respect to definiteness and nearness : M^XXw yd.p vp,as Si- 8ai;eiv, I am about to teach you, PL 'O araOfibs e"vQa 'iueXXe KaraXtieiv, tJie station where he was to halt, i. 8. 1. Ovk idtXa eXdeiv, I am not will- ing to go, or I will not go, i. 3. 10. BovXeOeadai, 6 tl XPV iroieiu lb. 11. b. The ideas of destiny, necessity, purpose, &c. are often expressed by the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut. Fart., both with and without cos, used continually to express purpose, particularly with verbs of motion : T£ diafapovat . ., et ye ir&.vf\ ireirotTjia, such things has he done, i. 6. 9. (b) "H <[>e&- yeiv . . fj raxv Karate ecavcrOai, eitfier to flee, or to be quickly and utterly consumed, Cyr. (c) EItov ryv 6vpcw iceicXcio-Oai, they commanded the door [to be closed and to remain so] to be kept closed, HeL "Op^pov Zywye /id- AwTa rcOavuaica, Homer I have most admired (as I still do), Mem. 1. 4. 3. d. The Perf. Imv. commands the completeness of the action ; and hence may forbid its continuance, or may command emphatically its full (often instant and final) performance : Taura . . ir€iraia-8a>, let [so much have been played] Hie sport end here, PI. IleirapdaBw, let a full trial be made, Ar. 600. a. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the conse- quences of the action, rather than narrate it, the transition in § 268 is natural and easy ; and we find verbs in different stages of the transition. Compare the Pres., Aor., and Preteritive, in examples like the following: Gv^jo-Kw, I am dying, Eur. Ale. 284 ; T«8va clp^jcerai, the whole [shall have been] shall be stated, Hdt. 4. 16 (cf. a above). Ileirpdr w dyu.T7x a " 0S > I [ was born] am, by nature incapable, Soph. (§ 50 ). "ftc{>e\e fikv KQpos ffiv, [C. ought to be living] Would that Cyrus were living ! ii. 1. 5. Ovk iyjpr\v p.4vroL GKoirelv ; Apol. 3. 612. 4. The tense belonging to the effect of an action is sometimes used for the tense of the action itself (Pres. and Impf. for Perf. and Plup., or Aor.). ISo commonly in ijKco and otxopMi (I am come, I am gone) ; often, as in Eng., in verbs of hearing, learning, and saying ; and some- . times in others : Ei's KaXbv {jkctc, you [are here, having come] have come opportunely, iv. 7. 3. KOpos 5c otf-nru ^kcv, C. had not yet come, i. 5. 12. '£2s r//ie?$ cucovepev (audimus), as we have heard [are informed], v. 5. 8. IV. USE OF THE MODES. (For a general view, see 30 c, 269.) A. Intellective. 613. Eule XXXI. The Indicative expresses fact ; the Subjunctive, present contingency; and the Optative, past contingency. a. The Ind. presents the action as decided in point of fact (it is or is not, has been or has not been, xoill be or will not be, &c), whether this decision is declared or asked about, is known or unknown, is according to 300 SYNTAX. R. XXXI. MODES. CONTINGENCY. § G13. the terms of the statement or contrary to them ; but the Subj. and Opt. present the action as undecided, and have respect to its contingency or chance (i. e. whether the action may be or may not be, might be or might not be, might have been or might not have been, &c). b. The Subj. and Opt. are achronic with respect to the action itself (590 a), but have a distinction of time with respect to its contingency. The Subj. expresses present contingency, i. e. some chance at the present time that the action will occur ; but the Opt., past contingency, i. e. some chance at some past time that the action would subsequently occur. 614. a. If there will be some chance that an event will occur, there is of course now some chance that it will occur ; and if there is now some chance, then, whether recognized or not, there always has been. Future contingency, therefore, is contained in present ; and. all contingency, in past. b. Hence, the past is the generic time for the contingent, as the pres- ent for the actual (602 c) ; and whatever is contingent is referred to past contingency, unless it is supposed with some degree of present expectation or looking forward to a decision, in which case it is referred to present contingency. A. Present Contingency : I will go, if I can have leave (and I in- tend to ask for it). I think, that I may go, if I can have leave. I wish, that you may go. He reads, that he may learn. B. Past Contingency. (1) Past supposition : / thought, that I might go, if I could have leave. I wished, that you migM go. He read, that lie might learn. (2) Present supposition not implying expectation or the looking forward to a decision : I would go, if I should have leave (but I have no thought of asking for it). I could go with perfect ease. I should like to go. (3) Present supposition contrary to fact : (a. In regard to the present.) I would go, if I Jutd leave (but I have none, and therefore do not go), (p. In regard to the past.) / would Imve gone, if I had Jucd leave (but I had none, and therefore did not go). c. The range of past contingency is vast ; for there is nothing which it is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may not conceive that there was some chance at some distant period in past eternity. . 615. That which is supposed contrary to fact is regularly expressed in Greek by the Ind., as already decided (613 a) ; while the very act of supposition presents it as having been at some time contingent (614 c). It is therefore thrown back into the past as the time of its contingency ; and to a time prior to that of the opposing fact, as then only could there have been a chance in its favor. It is therefore expressed by what is termed a prior tense, i. e. a tense of the Ind. referring to this prior time. a. Supposition contrary to present fact (what now is) is regularly ex- pressed by the Impf, i. e. the Pres. thrown back into the past ; and (b) supposition contrary to past fact (what has been), by the Plup. (the Perf. thrown back into the past), or (c) oftener by its equivalent Aor. : Ei fxr) v/xeTs ^XOere, eiropevofxtOa &v, if you had not come, we should now be marching, ii. 1. 4. Et d-rrcKpiva), ftrws Slv . . 4f«|xa0T|Kn, if yon had an- swered, I should perhaps have learned, PI. (d) So, " If I had time to-day, I would go "; " If I liad had time yesterday, I should have gone." §619. RULE O. — LAW OF SEQUENCE. 301 e. Homer sometimes uses here the Opt. : Keu' p6 kcv h0' oitoXoito . ., el /xrj dp 6£i> vbujae, lie would have pcrislted, had she not quick perceived, E. 311. f. If there will be no mistake respecting the time, the Impf. may take the place of the Aor. or Plup., to mark the act as continued or repeated (592) : Oi)/c hv irpoe\€Y€V, el ur] eirkrreuev aXrjdefaeu', he would not have predicted (thus often), had he not believed that his words would prove true. 616. That which is indefinite is so far undecided ; and hence often employs the forms of contingent expression : a.) The Subj. and Opt. are used in conditional, relative, and temporal clauses referring to the indefinite. See 634, 641. b.) The secondary tenses of the Ind. are used with &v to denote in- definitely any one of a past series of acts, (c) This construction seems especially appropriate to the Aor. as the general expression for a single past act (592) : IIoMdfas . . ^KOii£pa (thus ex- pressing more distinctly the idea of contingency). See 624 a, e. d.) That &v was thus combined before the Subj. (which grammatically it modifies), and not before the Opt., appears to have been due to the later and less strongly marked separation of the Subj. from the Ind. forms, (e) Dialectic, late, or rare exceptions, however, occur both ways (especially in the early poets) : El fitya veiKos dprrrat, if a mighty contest arise, w. 98. E? gov areprfdw, if I lose you, Soph, "fls K€ . . dotn 5' <5 k' edeXoi, that he might give her to whom he pleased, /3. 53. f. In the Epic, &v is sometimes joined more directly with the Subj. 620. a. In the Epic, &v is often used with the Fut. ind. as with the Subj. (chiefly in the form k4) : Ef k«v . . «8tX^orci, if he shall wish, 0. 213. (b) Rare and disputed cases also occur in the Attic, in which &v is used with the Fut.: lloiq. 8vvdfiet s, pr) • o(f>pa poet). 624. Rule P. After a final conjunction, (a) an object of present forethought is expressed by the /Subjunctive, or (b) in the Futjiire, by the Indicative; but (c) an object of past forethought, by the Optative, or (d), to mark it as now contrary to fact, by a prior tense of the Indicative : (a) rpd0w (yey paa, ypd\pu), 'iva p.d0r]s (p,av9dvT|s), scribo (scripsi, scribam), ut discas, / write (have written, shall write), that you may learn (be learning). 'E/xol 5ds avra, owcos . . 8ia8«, Cyr. 'Q,s 5' &v p-dGfls . ., avraKovffov, listen in turn, that you may learn (if you will), ii. 5. 16 (619 c). (b) Instead of the Subj., the Fut. ind. is here commonly used after words of attention, care, or effort, and sometimes after others (regularly joined by 8ir»s, sometimes by cos, 6d>pa, or pvrfj) : Uoi/x&a Set eTrip.eXe'iadai, oVajj aval re gtrovTai al oles, a shepherd must take care, [how his flock shall be safe] that his flock be safe, Mem. 3. 2. 1. (c) "Eypaxpa (eypa ^ thought he needed friends, that he might have coworkers, i. 9. 21. (d) "ExpW ae TlrTYdaov fcvt-ai irrepdv, oirws eaivov, you ought (rather) to have saddled the wing of Pegasus, that you might appear, Ar. Pax 135. e. The final conjunctions «s, 6ira>s, Vva, and 6<|>pa are in their origin relatives ; and p-^j seems to have become a connective through the ellipsis of one of these, the fuller form being still often retained : Ovtw irotetv, tfirws . . (pavel-r), to act [in that way in which] so that he might appear, Cyr. 625. a. To the English reader, the use of the connectives after verbs of fearing often seems reversed, as in Latin, French, &c. ; apprehen- sion for being indicated rather than apprehension against : "Oirias \dd(a, MboLKa, metuo ut lateam, [I am apprehensive for this, how I may elude] I fear I cannot elude, Eur. Atdoix 8irws fiij re^o/mt, vereor ne inveniam, [I am concerned for this, how I may not find] I fear that I shall find, Ar. b. Yet words of fear are sometimes followed by a complementary con- struction, as in Eng., especially if themselves modified by p,^ : Mr) delpri ydfiovs, ah, lest she prevent thy marriage! Eur. 627. This ellipsis appears to have introduced, 1.) The use of the Subjunctive or Future Indicative after ov firj, as a future of strong denial : Ov yap [sc. $6/3os icrri or Se'doiKa] fi€V . ., dXXa rjueis &p£a>|«v [sc. opare, or Spare forws], [see that we do not wait] let us not wait, but ourselves begin, iii. 1. 24. (b) This Subj. is often preceded by &ye, cp^pe, or some other Imv., after which a connective might be supplied : 4^p', aKoiau), come, let me hear, Hdt. 1. 11. (c) M77 iroiVj tf he wrote, lie did well {it is well). Et 7pdx|/ci, KaXQs iroi-fjcm, if he will write, he will do well. EZ 8ok€i (rot, ot€iX€ (ir\i^ KaXQs &v eirofei, si scriberet, bene faceret, if he § 634. IN THE HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. 305 were now writing, lie would he doing well. El £ypcu|r6, KaXcS? &v eirotr\n {ypd\pn), (ca\ws iroi^jo-ei, si scribat (scribet), bene faciet, if he write, lie will do well. XpcS avToh, edv 8ctj tl, use them, if you have any need, Cyr. *H.v . . a4>tX«- p.cu . ., a-rroXoip/qv, may I perish, if I take, Ax. — For idv, &c, see 619 a. (Form d. ) If the premise is undecided and witlwut present expectation of decision, the conclusion must also be, so far as depends upon the pre- mise ; and both are therefore appropriately expressed by the Optative, with &v in the conclusion (618). Et -ypdcjioi (ypdxf/ai), Ka\u>s &v iroiofoj (ironjaai), si scribat, bene faciat, if he slwuld write, he would do well. Ovde yap &v MiySo/coj . . eirtuvoty, el e£eXcu>voipA rods evepyiras, M. would not approve, if I should drive out our benefactors, vii. 7. 11. e. In forms b and d, &v is regularly used in the conclusion, but not in the premise, unless that is itself dependent upon some condition expressed or implied (618) : Etirep dXXcp Tip avdpibirwv im0oip.T]v &v, iced vol ireLOofAcu, if I loould trust any other man (should he so affirm), / trust you, PI. f. In the conclusion, the omission of &v with a past tense of the Ind. is chiefly for the sake of more decided expression ; (g) while its omission with the Opt. is almost wholly poetic, and chiefly Epic. See 632. 632. A past tense of the Ind. (commonly the Impf.) without &v may take the place of another form in the conclusion, to express more decidedly a habit or series of acts, a continued, unfinished, or threatened act or state, some property of an act (as possibility, propriety, necessity, &c), or some feeling respecting an act, even though the particular acts themselves may be indefinite, contingent, or unreal (cf. 611) : OvUv ijwov, ei fir] tov- tovs irelo-cufxi, I effected nothing, unless I slwuld persuade these, Cyr. Ov5£ yb.p, el rrdvv irpodvfioiTo, paSiov ■fjv, nor, if he should greatly desire it, was it easy (facile erat), iii. 4. 15. 'Hio-xwopiv fiivroi, el . . e^rprarijdTjv, I should be ashamed indeed, if I had been deceived, vii. 6. 21. See 634. 633. a. If the conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is commonly determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con- forms (617) : 'Eiropevbfirjv, ha, et tl Scoito, axpeXotTjv avrbv, I went tliat I might aid him, if he slwuld need, i. 3. 4 (624). b. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, expressed or understood, to which its verb conforms : 'Eav 5' ifie 'eXrjade, ovk dv 0av|xd- 8oko(t] . . pXaiceveiv, . . frraurev &v, Kal &/xa avrbs irpopovwv [= el eS povoLr}s], you would speak, if you were a friend, Soph. 0. T. Ma6ov, lb. "ilairep b.v dp&pwt rts irepl vCkt^s, as one would run [if he were running] for victory, -i. 5. 8. "AXXa>s Se ovk hv ToK/x^ev, they would not venture otherwise [if it were not so], v. 4. 34. 636. t Ellipsis. In a hypothetical period, the premise or the conclusion is often omitted ; the other part retaining its proper form (as also in 635) : i. Premise omitted. Among the conditions most naturally supplied, and therefore most frequently omitted, are those of inclination with possibility and of possibility with inclination; since these are the two great conditions of human conduct. a. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with &v (specially termed potential Opt. or Ind.), to denote one of these ideas, the other being implied as a condition. Other familiar ideas are also im- plied, as of effort, necessity, propriety, occasion, existence, actuality, &c. ; and (b) the premise is often involved in an independent sentence, or otherwise supplied by the context. Thus, (a) Avvauj &v . . tvpeip 8tu) hv Xapto-cuo ; [would you be able if you tried] could you find one whom you might oblige (if you should wish) ? Cyr. H5«rr &v dicovcrcHfu, / should rnost gladly hear (if I might), ii. 5. 15. (b) Otfre ia0iov■ (b) Airrb &v rb 84ov tfrj ■ OcLttop ykp &m\ibo-ov [f° r ] if it might be [it would be well]! Cyr. 6. 1. 38. (b) EW €l\€S . . fieXriovs (pptvas [scridofirju &v], if you b%d Imd a better mind ! Eur. El yap roaairnv 86vapui> d\ov,would I had such power I Id. c. From the great use of these elliptic forms, especially a, the connec- tive el (commonly in the forms rfOe, el *ydp, or at'0e, at -yap d. e.) came to be regarded as a particle of wishing, and the Opt. as the appropriate mode for the expression of a wish (modus optativus, the wishing mode). (d) Hence it was so used without the connective ; and (e) sometimes, as a less direct form, took the place of the Imv., especially in the 3 Pers. (the two modes being sometimes used together, and these again with the Subj.) : (d). Oi deol dirorCo-aivTo, may the gods requite ! iii. 2. 6. (e) "H rts . . 'AxtX^t irapoTaCrj, or [may] let one stand by A., T. 119. f. "Av does not belong to this Opt. of direct wish, which is often thus distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses. g. A wish in opposition to fact is also expressed by the 2 Aor. , and rarely by the Impf., of 6 ought (50) ; the particles of wishing being often prefixed, to add strength : 'OXtadat 8' &5s t fyepai, Would you were unborn! T. 40. 'fts Trplv & 8' av t$ rryefrfivi, & 8o£tj, frrecrflcu, I slwuld fear to follow the guide whom he might give us, lb. 17. 'EircC rts Sicokoi, irpodpa/xdvres 'taraaav, when any one gave chase, they would run before and stop, i. 5. 2. d. Most temporal clauses are also relative (as above) ; and those which are not, usually follow the same analogy (introduced by irp£v, («XP l > &XP»-, &c.) : M77 GTtvafc, irplv (ictGTjs (619 e), do not groan, before you [may] have learned, Soph. Ph. 917. llpiv fidOoipa lb. 961. 'Avtfxevev . ., tare ejMpd- ■yoiev, he waited until they [should have] liad eaten, Cyr. 8. 1. 44. e. "Oo-ns, as requiring no additional mark of indeliniteness, is oftener joined with the Ind., than 8s used indefinitely : "0€ito, i. 1, 5. 642. 2. Final Relative Clauses. A relative clause having the force of a final clause (558 a) has commonly in Attic the Fut. (Ind., rare- ly Opt. except in Indirect Discourse, 643) ; but oftener in Epic the Subj. or Opt. (except Fut.) : "07rXa kt&vtcu, oh duvvovvTcu Mem., lltfixf/ov tlv, 6'o-rts (iSot, S\|/oito), he said tliat he saw (had seen, should see). 'AvrjpwTa, ri (3ov\oivto, he asked, what they wished (quid vellent), ii. 3. 4 (directly, tI fiotiXeade ;). "0 ti 8£ iroi^jcroi, oil heo-f^ix-qve, but what he would do, lie did not indicate, ii. 1. 23. 'Hyvbet 6 ti rb irddos €% he knew not what the matter zvas, iv. 5. 7. b. In the change from Direct to Indirect Discourse, the tense is not commonly changed, even though the mode may be. It continues to ex- press relatively (i. e. with reference to the time of the leading verb), the same time which it expressed absolutely in Direct Discourse ; while the English idiom commonly requires us to translate it according to its abso- lute time as now used. See 607, and bp$, tdoi, 8\j/oito, above ; and cf. 660. c. The rule applies not only to leading verbs in the quotation, but to others connected with them : - E\e7<»' . ., bri iravrbs ct£ca \4yoi Zevd-ris, Xetp-uv yap dr\, they said, that the proposal of S. was worth everything, for it was winter, Vii. 3. 13 (directly, \4yet 2., x- y. € ^vfiaivdfieda tx\v irpd^iv," showing, that it was folly to ask a guide from him, * ' whose plan (said he) we are frustrating" i. 645. 2.) Indirect Discourse (a) retains freely the modes and tenses of Direct Discourse ; and often blends them with its own proper forms, whether (b) in a leading and dependent verb, or (c) in verbs not so related : (a) "EXeYev Sri airo8£8axri (607), he said that he [resigns] resigned (a compromise between the regular airodidoiw and the direct " diro5L8w[XL "). (b) "EXeyov, 8ti irepl airov8Q>v -fJKOiev, dvbpes ol rives licavoi &rovrVTO, for he could say that they liad assisted (cf. o-Tpare^iadLVTo), Hel. 7. 1. 34. (b) 'Ev iroXXrj 5/j diropla fjaav ol "EXXyves, hvooip.evoi p.ev, tin iirl reus /3as 6 Eevocp&v olxolto . . & vir£s] XdJ3ojfiai; wilt thou [that] I take ? Soph. Ph. 761. (c) il HapaivG> aoi (nuwdv." "[Sc. Hapat- veis u>s] 'E7d> o-iwrrCo ;" " I advise you to be silent" " [Do you advise that] I be silent?" Ar. Ran. 1132. d. Hence the Subj. is used in asking ivhat one is to do, can do, &c, chiefly in the 1st pers. and the indefinite 3d : [Sc. BoOXei ws] Etircopicv q 310 SYNTAX. R. U. INTERCHANGE OF MODES. §647. |i€V, -J) H 8pd ; whither can I go ? where stop ? what say ? [sc. diropQ, I am at a loss whither, &c] Eur. Ale. 864." 648. Optative of Doubt, a. Indirect Discourse in past time may change this Subj. to an Opt. : 'E^ovXetfero . . ei ir^iroiev. he consulted whetlier they should send, i. 10. 5. "Rrrbpei 6 tl xp^fryoi ; whither could one fly ? [sc. dtropol-qp dp]. Ar. d. A different ellipsis explains the poetic use of the Opt. with «s to express wish : [Sc. BovXoifiTjp dp] 'fis SXoito irayKaKus, [1 should wish] that slie might perish miserably ! Eur. Hipp. 407. 'fts m ddpoi o. 359. v. Interchange. 649. Rule U. The uses of the finite modes are often interchanged. a. Especial freedom belongs here, as elsewhere, to the poets ; partic- ularly to Homer, and others who sung before the use of the modes became fixed. b. The Greek has also great freedom here, as elsewhere, in combining different forms of construction (392) ; and (c) one part of a sentence often conforms to another, not as this is expressed, but as it might have been ex- f)ressed : Et p.h €iraiv» [ = iwaipotpa] avrbp, Sinalus &v p-e ical alricr6c, if I commend] should commend him, you would justly blame me, vii. 6. 15. d. If the form of a leading verb does not agree with the time of its action, a dependent verb sometimes conforms to the one, and sometimes to the other: Hist. Pres., Tpd|j.d£oi)U, may peace posscss^ the city, so that I may be merry with others, Theog. IIoi^o-atTo (dp), 'ipa . . th) (v. I. ■$) ii. 4. 3. 650. i. Dependent sentences often conform to relative, instead of absolute, time (607) : KariKavvep, ha p-tj Kvpos 8iaf3fj, he had burned (the boats), that C. [may] might not cross, i. 4. 18. "ETrpaavop 8ttws rts fiorideia fj^t, tltey negotiated that some succor [shall] should come, Th. 3. 4. Cf. 653. 651. ii. Generic Use. This has a varied application to the modes : 1. The Indicative is the generic mode ; and hence may be used for the Subj. or Opt., if it is not deemed important to mark the contingency: Xprjedwp 8 rt PovXovrai, let them use me as they [may] please, Ar. a. As the Impf. and Plup. have no separate forms out of the Ind., they often remain in this mode, for distinction from the Pres. and Perf., in cases where other tenses would take the Opt. or Subj. ; especially the Impf. expressing a repeated or continued act or state in past time : "EXe- yep, 8tl opdws t|tk5vto, Kai avrb rb Zpyop avrols |iapTvpofo], he said that they had blamed, him justly, and that the result sustained tliem, iii. 3. 12 (directly, yrida-de, vpup p-aprvpei). See 632, 634, 646. 652. 2. The Optative is the generic contingent mode, as the earlier developed, and as expressing past contingency (614 b). It is, hence, § 657 RULE XXXII. THE IMPERATIVE. 311 often used for the Subj., especially to render the expression more general; indefinite, vague, or doubtful, or from a reference in the mind to some- thing past, distant, or contingent : ' AiroTeixtt €t > &s diropos dr\ i] 656s, he is building a wall, so that the way might be impassable (for any one), ii. 4. 4. a. We observe here, as elsewhere, the Greek love of variety, and the tendency to drop into a more general form, after the use of one that is more special or definite (cf. 592 c, 605 b) : Mertyxo/JLai, u>s vfipiv 8€i£cop.ev Alyiadov deofc, yoovs r d^cC^v, / go, that I may show to the gods the inso- lence of JE., and [might] utter waitings, Eur. El. 58. 653. in. The freedom of the mind in its conceptions of time affects the modes, as well as the tenses (608 s). a. Especially is the Subj. often used for the Opt., from a view of the past as present (or sometimes, as extending to the present). Cf. 650. 654. iv. The contingent is often conceived or spoken of as actual ; and the actual, as contingent ; especially from strong assurance or vivid fancy in the former case, and from courtesy or modesty in the latter. Cf. 608 a. a. The taste, refinement, popular institutions, and civic life of the Greeks fostered a spirit of mutual concession and respect, which often led them, and especially the Athenians, to express even decided opinions and well-known facts, not as if asserted, but as if modestly and courteously suggested, and referred to others for a decision. Hence they often used the contingent modes, especially the Opt., instead of the Ind. ; and the Opt., as being still less direct, instead of the Subj. See 637, 639, 652. B. Volitive. 655. Rule XXXII. The Imperative is the most direct expression of an act of the will. a. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing from indirect to direct forms of expression (cf. 644), the Imperative is sometimes found in dependent clauses : Qurfrbs 5' 'Ope" (Try? * (bare /jltj Xlau crre'vc, 0. was mortal; so that [do not grieve] you should not grieve to excess, Soph. El. 1172. 656. a. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Imv. is sometimes used with iras, or tIs, or both, instead of the 3d : X&pet SeOpo 7ras vwnpirns ' rotjeve, irate • c. Come hither every man of you/ Shoot, smite. Let some one give me a sling. Ar. Av. 1186. b. Such familiar imperatives as &yc, type, l'0i, diri, and ISi may be used in the singular, as interjections, though more than one are ad- dressed ; and in the 2d Pers., though associated verbs are in the 3d : "A7e 5t), aKofoare, come now, hear, Apol. 14. "Idi . . rts . . 56rw Ar. C. Incorporated. 657. In dependent clauses, the Greek has great freedom in the employment of either distinct or incorporated forms, ac- cording as a more or less intimate union is desired ; and also in respect to the manner of incorporation. Thus (a) a depend- ent clause may be preserved entirely distinct; or (b) its subject 312 SYNTAX. — INCORPORATED MODES. §657. or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in the lead- ing clause, leaving it otherwise distinct ; or (c) its verb may be also incorporated as an Infinitive, or (d) yet more closely as a Participle. The union often becomes still closer by an attrac- tion, through which (e) the leading verb adopts, for a subject or object, the subject of the dependent clause ; or the Inf. or Part, adopts, for its grammatical subject, either (f) the subject or (g) an adjunct of the leading verb, (h) Different forms are often combined or blended. E. g., (a, b) "Hiadero, 8ti to Me'vuvos orrpaTeupa rfdv ev KiXucla ■fjv (v. I. "H. r6 re M. o-Tpa.T€vp.a, 8ti tfdr) iv K. fjv), lie perceived, that the army of Meno was now in Cilicia (the army of M., that it was, s irokefx-rjaovTes), they prepared to make tear, Th. 1. 115 ; 2. 7. See 598 b. (e) See 573. (f) 'EyofiL^ofiev &|ioi ttvcu [ = ■fyuas d£/ous elrai], we thought that we were worthy, Cyr. 7. 5. 72 (cf. vopi^oifxi yap epxurrbv iocK&ai lb. 5. 1. 21). N6- fiife . . avdpa dyadbv diroKTeivwv [= aeavrbv diroKTeivovra], consider your- self putting to death a good man, vi. 6. 24. 01/mi tlvai tCjuos (621 ; cf. oTp.ai ftb Xvjpeiv fxe PI. Charm. 173 a), (g) UpoaifiKei dpxovrc povi'|xw ttveu, it becomes a ruler to be prudent, Mag. Eq. 7. 1. See 667. (h) "AXXcp re Tp6ir(p ireipdo-avTcs, Kal ixt)x av V v irpcor^-ya-yov, both at- tempting in other ways, and [they brought up] bringing up an engine, Th. i. The Inf. and Part, may also be used impersonally. See 432 d. j. An especial variety of construction appears with s etvcu (f^c'peves, «8ioti), you seem to be king (pleased, like one fearing), Cyr., Hel., PI. So "O/xotoi Tjaav Oavpd^eiv (v. 1. 6avpd£ovT€S, = 6avp.d£ovai), they seemed to be wondering, iii. 5. 13. k. Some verbs may be followed either by the Inf. or the Part., with scarcely any difference of meaning, as in some of the examples above ; and others, with an obvious difference. In the latter case, the Part, commonly denotes that which is Jess dependent on the action of the lead- ing verb, or is a more immediate, positive, or personal object of percep- tion : Touto p.ev ovk alax^opxti X£y«v ■ rb Se alaxwoip.r]v av \iy&.v ' I am not ashamed [saying] to say this (which is said) } but I should be ashamed to say that (which from the shame is not said) ; Cyr. 5. 1. 21. *Av &ira£ fj.d6wp.ev dpyoi £tjv, if we once learn to live in idleness, iii. 2. 25 ; 'Ira p,d6y aos 8e . . ima-opai, let none of you speak of me as to take command, but (say rather) that I will obey (680), i. 3. 15. (d) "Ev) he went saying (having said, to say). A^yet opdv (IStiv, 8vj/€fir)v). (d) Bov\6/ul€uol . . ^x €iv {d-iroKX-rjcraadai, v. I. diro- KKfjaecrdai) , wishing to have (to intercept), Th. 8. 9 ; 6. 101. See 598. e. The Aor. Part, sometimes agrees in time with the leading verb, chiefly with another Aor. when both refer to a single act, and with such verbs as XavOdvco, Tvyxdvco, vT]s, p.€Ta£v, Sjjlws, Kaiirep, &c, joined with the Part, instead of the leading verb ; and sometimes (b) a particle joined with the leading verb instead of the Inf. or Part., particularly dv (621), and ovk with <|>T]p.£ : (a) "A/m ravf eiiruv avearrj [having said this, he at the same time rose], as soon as he had said this, lie rose, iii. 1. 47. Mera£i> 7rcu'£a>j> titripxerat, [playing, meanwhile] he enters in the midst of his play, PI. (b) Ovk Zs trpoQv\iordrov . . yevtadai, they besought C. to be as strenuous as possible, Hel. 1. 5. 2. See 657 f, g. 'laadai avrbs rb rpav/j-d (prjai (660 c). (c) ToOro 5' ewoiei e/c rod xaikeirbs thai, he effected this by being severe, ii. 6. 9. (d) OTp.ai be \ie dKVKoevai, I think that I have heard, PI. Pep. 400 b. 'Evbuiae l avribibuciv %X&.v, in return gives [to have] pleasure, Soph. 0. C. 232. Alr-rjco/jiai be" c ov fiaKpbv yipas Xa\€iv Id. Aj. 825. (b) Ets rb fiaKaveiov (3o6\oaai [sc. livai], I ivish to go to the bath, At. "Epdi;€iv [sc. £0c\e], do you [please to] tell me, PI. Soph. 262 e. Ilalba 5' euol Xvcrai A. 20 (so esp. in Horn.). Zev irdrep, $ ktavra Xaxctv, ' [grant] that either Ajax may draw the lot,' H. 179 (cf. Zed dva, 80s ricacdai, 'grant that I may punish,' T. 351). Tbv'Iwva XaCptiv [sc. Ke- Aetfco], / bid Ion. hail, PI. Ion 530 a. 'E/^ irafieiv rdbe [sc. Seivbv ten], or «X«fc«]; Hdt. 1. 88. a. So often in proclamations, laws, &c. : Tot>s Opticas airUvai [sc. Ke\e6e- rcu or del], it is ordered that the Thracians depart, or tlie T. must d., Ar. Ach. 172. (b) In exclamation, the article is usually prefixed : Tt?s rvxys ■' rb ip.e vvv K\7jd4vra bevpo Tv X elv ! My ill-luck I That I should happen now to have been summoned hither! Cyr. 2. 2. 3 (429 f). _ (c) In a few poetic passages, the Inf. follows el ydp or effle, to express wish :^El ydp . . ix^fiev [ac. &s (TvvavTTJaat, riding up [so as] to meet him, i. 8. 15. BovXerai iroveiv, uhttc iroXejxtlv, chooses toil, so as to be [or that he may be] at war, ii. 6. 6. 'E^' w fj.}] naleiv, *E<}>' s iirl rbv erepou dvafialvetv [v. I. avaj3a~iev], they were descending, so as to ascend the second [that they might ascend], iii. 4. 25. Kpavyrju ttoXXt]i> iiroiovv . ., wore /ecu tous TroXepuovs dxoveiv • ware . . Ic{>\ryov • tliey made so much noise that even tlic enemy heard (characterizing the noise by showing its effect) ; [so that] and there- fore they fled (narrating the result as a fact in the history) ; ii. 2. 17. e. 'fis and wcttc, originally relative adverbs of manner, often express with the Inf. purpose or consequence ; ws esp. the former, wore the latter. 672. f. The Inf. is also used elliptically after % than : Melfrv t) , C. received the exiles, and raising an army besieged M., i. 1. 7. (b) Of Xtji^6|1€voi fwert, who live by plundering, Cyr. 3. 2. 25. r H/ce . . birXiras *X«v xtXfoi/s, he came with 1000 hoplites, i. 2. 6 (so Xafitiv lb. 3, dyuv, 318 SYNTAX. R. XXXV. — PARTICIPLE. §074. v, both with and without an Ace, is joined with some verbs, chiefly of trifling or delay, to give the idea of persistency (cf. 679 b) : Aripeis ^x 03V y V ou trifle [holding on] continually, PI. Gorg. 497 a. (h) Ma- 0a>v or iraOwv, with rl or 8 ti, sometimes forms a sarcastic or wondering ' why ' or ' because ' : Ti yap /xadbvT is rods deovs v(3pL&T7)v; [having learned what new notions, &c] what possessed you to insult the gods] Ar. Nub. 1506. Ti Tradovaai . . et^dai yvvaiijiv ; [having met with what, &c] what 1ms happened to them tliat they resemble women ? lb. 340. 675. The Circumstantial Participle is often so loosely connected with the leading verb, that it is said (though not in the strictest sense of the term, 401 Nv) to be put absolute. BlJLE XXXV. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTAN- TIVE are put absolute in the Genitive ; an imper- sonal participle, in the Accusative : as, TovTwv Xex&VTwv, dvi/Brjcrav, these things having been said, they arose, iii. 3. 1. 'Avtp-r) iirl rd 8pr), ovhevbs kcdXvovtos, he ascended the heights [no one opposing] without opposition, i. 2. 22. 2vv8d£av ry Trarpi . ., yafiet, [it having seemed well to] with the approval of his father, he marries, Cyr. 8. 5. 28. "AStjXov 8v, birbre . . dcupr)0ev 8k ovSiv, nothing having been fixed, Th. 4. 125. IIpov], by us, while marching in order, v. 8. 13. HapeTo, ws tcujttj irpo9dva> anticipate, dvvoi despatch, SiaXefrrca leave an interval, may either take complementary participles, or be themselves used as circumstantial participles ; and Xav- 0dva> may express concealment either from others or from one's self, according to its object expressed or understood : Aadetp avrbv d-rreXdwv, [to elude him departing] to depart without his knowledge, i. 3. 17. T/>e- tpoixevov tXdvdavev, was secretly maintained, i. 1. 19. 'EXdvOave §6 iKweirT^Kdres, were fallen, ii. 3. 10. b.) "Ex» commonly gives or strengthens the idea of possession, continu- ance, or persistency (holding on ; cf. 674 g) ; and is most frequent with the Aor. act. part., and in the dramatists : IloXXd. xp^ara gx t xev dvripTa- Kores, we have [many things, having seized them] seized many things, i. 3. 14. 'ATip,a h e has persistently dishonored, Soph. Ant. 22. c.) "Epxo(*at with the Fut. Part, forms a more immediate Future. *EpXop.at aTro8avot)p.evos wvi, I am going to die now, PI. Theag. 129 a. d.) The Part, of a verb of motion with ol'xoiwu is a stronger form of expression for the simple verb. "Siixero a-n-iibv vvktos, he [departed going off J went off in the night, iii. 3. 5. So Br) s or &a7T€p, chiefly to mark it as subjective; That is, as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement of some one, whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part, thus construed may be either (a) dependent or (b) absolute, (c) It often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf. ; and is sometimes complementary in force, though circumstantial in form (with words of thinking, saying, &c). E.g., (a) HepacXda iv alrig. elxov cos ird\- \ap.(3avei Kvpov cos diroKTevcov (598 b). (b) Uaprryyei^e . ., cos iiriPovXcv- ovtos Ttercracpepvovs, he gave command, [as he would, T. plotting] as if T. were plotting, i. e. on the ground alleged (whether truly or not), that T. was plotting, i. 1. 6. Ka.TaKeLp.eea, coenrep efjov, we lie, as if it were per- mitted, iii. 1. 14. (c) 'fls p-rjSev €t8oV tudt p.e, [know me as knowing] be assured that I know nothing, Soph. Ph. 253. '&s iroX€[u>v flvros, , % . dxayyeXQ, I shall report [as I should, war existing] that there is war, ii. 1. 21. 'Os ip:ov odv tdvros, . . ovtcj ttjv yvAp-wv £%ere [so have your opinion, as if I were going] be assured that I shall go, i. 3. 6. § 685. VERBAL ADVERB. R. Y., XXXVI. 321 681. So the particles &t€, otov, ota, worre (Ion.), may precede the Part., especially in presenting a cause or other circumstance as actual: Kvpos, are ircus 8m . ., tfdero, C., as [he naturally would be] being a boy, was pleased, Cyr. Ota 5r) irats cpiXoaTopyos ibv foei, 7)£Xa [sc. Bira], the displeasing cannot be pleasing, Eur. Tro. 466. f. The Epic Subj. for the Fut. ind. naturally takes o* (617 b). g. After et whether, and in dependent sentences of the form "whether . . or not," or "what . . and whatnot," both ov and p,Vj are used. h. After juL a second negation in the same clause is usually expressed by ov ; and after ov, by u^j : AtSoiKa \ii\ ovk ?x w > I f ear ^ esi I ma V noi Imve, i. 7. 7. Ov u^ \a\r) . i. Ov forms combinations with single words (akin to composition), in which it may remain where general rules require \l4\. These often belong to the figure Litotes, so prevalent in Greek (70 m, cf. 654). E. g., oH (prjfiL /[do not say] deny (662 b), ovk edw I forbid, ov iroWolfew. 687. Interrogative Particles, a. The chief are &pa (Post- Homeric, a stronger form of &pa, accordingly) and ^ (indeed), (b) These do not themselves indicate the answer expected ; while dpa ov (or simply ov) implies that an answer is expected in the affirmative, but dpa \i.-f\ § G89 PREPOSITION. R. XXXVII. 323 (or ^ p^j, or simply jj^j, or |xcov contracted from pjj o$v), in the negative : *A/)' oik Ap eirl trdv 2\doi ; would he not resort to every means? iii. 1. 18. Mrj t even in prose, chiefly Ion. : 'A/*0i re fiovaiKrj, about music, Hdt. c. The eighteen words above mentioned are all which are commonly termed prepositions in Greek (from the use in 387), though other words may have a prepositional force (703 a), (d) 'Ev and trp6, by the addition of s (expressing motion or action), become (evs, cf. 156, 154) «ls or 4s, and irpos (689 a, i). Els prevails in Att. prose, except Thue ; but «s in Ion. and Dor. ; while the poets may choose according to the metre. e. To the prepositions governing the Ace, must be added the Ep. suffix -8c, to (cf. 252, 382) : OtiXvfiirdvde, to Olympus, A. 425 (cf. irpb^OXvfnrov 420). 689. The prepositions have primary reference to the rela- tions of place, and are used to express other relations by reason of some analogy, either real or fancied (many similar extensions of use appearing in our own and other languages). The use of the different cases with prepositions may be commonly re- ferred with ease to familiar principles in the doctrine of cases. 1. Place. Some prepositions merely show what place is referred to, while the relation to this place is marked by the case employed ; so that the same preposition may be used with different cases. From the place is expressed by the Gen. ; into (or, with like sense, to) the place, by the Ace; in or at the place by the Dat., or sometimes the Gen. ; through the place, commonly by the Ace. Cf. 398, 433, 470 a, e. The following are the chief distinctions of place denoted by the prepositions. a. Within. 'Ev, Lat. in with Abl., [in the space within] in : iv M iXrp-cp, in M., i. 1. 7. Els, Lat. in with Ace, [into the space within] into: els ireSLov, into a plain, i. 2. 22. 'E£, ex, [from within] out of: e/c rrjs x^>- pas, out of Die land, i. 2. 1. Aid, akin to hio and Lat. dis-, [through the space within, dividing it in two] through: with Ace poet.; commonly with Gen. : did $pvyias, [in a line dividing] through Phrygia, i. 2. 6. b. With. Svv cum [in the place with] with : abv vpup, with you, i. 3. 6. ' Air 'iirirov, mounting [to a position] on horseback, iv. 7. 24 ; iirl ddXarrav, to the seaside, iv. 8. 22. h. Over against. 'Avti, akin to Lat. ante, very rare in its local sense. i. Before. Up6 prae, pro : irpb irobQv, [in the way] before the feet, iv. 6. 12. To mark more active relations, and the idea of fronting, $ is added to irpb (688 d) : dyei irpbs fiaaCXe'a, he is leading [to a position fronting] against the king, i. 3. 21 ; irpbs Neuias, [in the direction fronting] towards Nemea, Th. 5. 59; irpbs Ba(3vXC>vi, in front of Babylon, Cyr. 7. 5. 1. j. Over, above. 'Yirip super: virep . . irir pas, from above the rock, iv. 7. 4 ; virep KetpaXrjs, over head, Ages. 2. 20 ; pnrre'ovcn virep rbv &p.ov, they throw it [to a place over and beyond] over the shoulder, Hdt. 4. 188. k. Under, beneath. 'Yird sub : virb £fryov, virb dud^vs, from under the yoke, 5. 39 ; vi. 4. 22 ; virb to?s 5ipois, [in the space] under the seats, i. 8. 10 ; el/x virb yalav, I shall go [to the region] beneath the, earth, 2. 333. 1. Up. 'Ava. . . fitXadpov, up to the roof, x- 239 ; dvd t' ■fjjxuiv, in our time, i. 9. 12. Aid, wkt6s, through the night, iv. 6. 22. 'A|a<{>1 5elkr)i>, about eveni'ng, ii. 2. 14. Ilpb rrjs iidxns, before the battle, i. 7. 13. MeTd rqv fidxyv, after the battle, lb. 'Airb yeveds, from birth, ii. 6. 30. 691. 3. State. 'Ev iroXi/icp, et$ ir6Xep.ov, Ik iroXi/xov, in (into, out of) a state of war, vi. 1. 29 ; e£ taov, [from equal ground] on an equality, iii. 4. 47. 'Eirl t£ d8eX i)/juv, in our power, v. 5. 20. 'YinJ s . . ck Ai6s, a light from Jove, iii. 1. 12 ; iK %vXwv, [out of] of wood, Hdt. 1. 194. AtVeZV irapd roirroi;, to ask from him, i. 3. 16. 'OXiyoi dirb itoXXCjv, few [from] of many, Th. 1. 110. 7. Protection (defenders stand before, over, around). Mdx^Oai . . irpb yvpaiKwv, to fight [before] for their wives, 0. 56 ; irpb v/jlwv, in your behalf, vii. 6. 27. Maxbp-evoi virfcp Ktipov, fighting [over] in defence of C, i. 9. 31. 'AfiOvovrai irepl tIkvwv, figM for their young, M. 170. § G99. IN COMPOSITION. RULE z. 325 694. 8. Cause, Motive, End, Aim. 'Airb tovtov, [from] on ac- count of this, Hilt. 2. 42. 'E£ viroxf/Las, [out of] /mw. suspicion, ii. 5. 5. Aid irlo-Tews, through confidence, iii. 2. 8. Aid Kav/xa, [through] by rea- son of t/ie heat, i. 7. 6. LTcpl yi/c^s, [ahout] for victory, i. 5. 8. 9. Action. This is commonly conceived of as proceeding out of the agent, or from him, or from his spJiere, or from under his influence (ck, dirp, irapd, irpcs, vird, 586, d, f). 695. 10. Means, Instrument, Manner. 'Airb Xrjareias, [from] by means of robbery, vii. 7. 9. 2i>v alxp-v, w ^ ^ e spear, i&seh. ; criV r£ diKaicp, with justice, justly, ii. 6. 18. Mer* dSi/a'as, unjustly, lb. Aid ra-X^v, [through quick measures] rapidly, i. 5. 9. 'Ara Kpdros, [up to one's strength] a£ ,/wJI speed, i. 10. 15. Ilpbs piav, [resorting to] by force, JEsch. Pr. 208. 'Yirb /tacrriywj/, ttiufer the lash, iii. 4. 25. 696. 11. Connection, Conformity, Separation, Opposition, Substitution. Evv roh deois, with the help of tlie gods, ii. 3. 23. Ilpbs rod Kvpov rpdirov, [looking towards] according to the character of C, i. 2. 11. Kard cirovdqp, [according to haste] Jiastily, vii. 6. 28; see 513 b. ITapd (pvcriu, [beside] against nature, Th. 6. 17. Keywv ko.8' thjlCjv, speak- ing against us, Soph. Ph. 64. 'Avrl rofrruv, [over against] in return for this, vi. 6. 32 ; dvr iiceLvov, instead of him, i. 1. 4. 697. 12. Appeal, Theme, Reference, Specification, &c. Ilpbs 0euw, [before] by the gods, vii. 6. 33. 'Ap €ir* awovs lb. 1. 11). (c) 'Evei.pQvro cl \ocybv dpvvcu (388 c) A. 67. (i) Aid p ftpOcipas, K & i $re, on condition that, see 557 a. (g) Concessive (denoting concession, or ad- mission) ei Kal, icalct» etsi, even if, though; to which Spws tamen, yet, corresponds. See 674 f. (h) Temporal (marking a relation of time) irpiv before, akin to irp6 and Lat. prius ; irplv -fj priusquam ; pcypi, d\ps <&s> &tt€ (es, ri, 389 j ; Post-Hom.), donee, until. Most temporal connectives are relative adverbs (641 d). (i) Complementary (66 d) 6r\, 8 Ep., quod, that; «s, tfirws chiefly poet., [how] that; d (f), 1\ Ep., num, whether; ir<$Tcpov § 703. INTERCHANGE OF PARTICLES. 327 (Trorepa) . . V\, el . . V\, rfre . . efrre, &pa . . 4), 4) . . 1) Ep., utrum . . an, whether . . or. See 643, 639a. (j) Causal 8ti quod, quia, because; cos, as, SMW0 ; 8tc, e'lrel', quando, swice ; Stdri (8t 8 Tt), ovvexa, oOovveica [on ac- count of this that, 557 a] because ; "yap (7^ &pa, at least in accordance with this, 685 c) nam, for, since, (k) Consecutive (denoting result, or conse- quence) omttc, cos, ut, 50 that (671 d, e). (1) Comparative ij quam, than (511, 513). (111) Exceptive irX^v, dXV ^ [o£/ier ffiattj 11], A pvtf| nisi, (irt [ii\ (n ; after a negative), except, d /xij el (714. 2) nisi si, #eccp£ [if]. Note. In Greek, as in other languages, conjunctions have their origin, for the most part at least, in other parts of speech used connectively. E. g., (n) Neuter Puonouns, 8ti, 8, quod, that, as A^yei tin &£ei, he says [what follows] that he will lead, iv. 7. 2Q ; 6n jx^ (m), as ov Sets . . 6Vt (xt) yvv-f), no one [that was not] except a woman, Hdt. 1. 181 ; 8ioti, ovvexa (j) ; dXXd (from neut. pi. of ttMos, 483 a) otherwise, on the con- trary, but ; dXX' V\ (m), as apytipiov p,eu ovk £x w > <*^X' V fUKpov re, / Imve no money [other than] except a little, vii. 7. 53. See h, 624 e. 702. a. "On {that, the thing which) is stronger, more positive, di- rect, or actual in expression than «s (how, the manner in which). Hence, in indirect discourse, 8ti chiefly introduces what is simply said and not questioned ; cos, what is described, or what is sate? but questioned, or what is wo£ said, or what is presented as thought or wo£ thought : Ac-yei cos d,7re- Kb-K-qvav . ., koX 8ti redi'SLai . . ctXXot, Ac spates how £Aey /tac£ foe?i beaten off, and that otliers are dead, iv. 2. 17. 'EpckuXouv e/ioi, cos fiaWou fi^Xoi /not, tJiey brought against me tlie charge (which I do not admit), tliat I cared more, vii. 7. 44. Ov touto Xt'-yco, cos ov 5e?, / cfo ?io£ say this, tlvxt one ought not. b. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not so much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word or phrase in it : Ylpoo-fiaXKovai. . . KaTaXiirovres &(f>oSov rots -rroXepiois, d PovXoivto (fttv-yeiv, they attack, leaving a wa,y of escape for the enemy, if they should wish to flee, iv. 2. 11. c. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admis- sible, the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms are sometimes blended. See 511, 644, 659 e, 671. A conjunction is sometimes used in Greek, where none would be usual in English. A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, according as a word is regarded as belonging (d) to a compound part of a sentence, or (e) to a new sentence : (d) II\ou flip av . . ^ €|iol e8L8ovs, you would give to a richer man than I [am], Cyr. (e) Tots . . fidWov aKfidfovariv, -j) ty) . . dcrcu, before lie satiates, E. 288. (t) llpiv y 8tc . . 8u>k€v, until [when] he gave, M. 437. (t) O&Sc ris ItXt] irpiv irie'tv irpiv Xeltpai, nor did any one dare to drink [previously] before offering, H. 480. e. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently in the Epic, either one or both of the prepositions are used adverbially, or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of the other : 'Ap.os avrcp exaXeiravdrj, it was now the third day, and C. was angry with him [= when it was now, &c], iv. 6. 2. 'AireiprjKevav fiev, fyiws 8* eboicei, [they were weary indeed, but yet] although they were weary, yet it seemed, vi. 5. 30. The student will not fail to remark, — (a) The frequent use, in the "Epic, of 8« for -yap, and in general of coordination or simple succession, in the connection of sentences, for subordination (62) : Hide8e 8rjXov i)v • Tr} p.ev -yap irp6 . . virlp -fjfuo-v . . 'A/a/fdSes, above half were Arcadians, vi. 2. 10. Ace. Ets fxiv &ira£ Kal $paxi>v xpovov, for once and a short time, Dem. 21. 1. Adjectively, UeXraffral 5£ d\L$\ tovs 8«rx».Xious, about 2,000 targeteers, i. 2. 9. See 526 s. (b) An adverb and a preposition governing it are often written together as a compound word : kaael forever, e/Mwpoadev. 707. in. In the doctrine of particles, especially connec- tives, the figures of syntax hold an important place : thus, a. Ellipsis. Ellipsis here consists either (a) in the omission of the par- ticles themselves, or (£), far more frequently, in that of words, and even whole sentences, related to them. a. A particle belonging alike to two parts of a sentence is either (a) ex- pressed in both (the most distinct and emphatic form) ; or (b) in the first only ; or (c) in the second only (more rarely and chiefly in poetry) ; or (d) is sometimes even omitted in both, (e) A like variety obtains in respect to other classes of words, and (f ) when more than two parts of the sentence are affected, (a) 'Ev Alyrhrrip iced iv Si/ceXip, in E. and in S., Mem. 1. 4. 17. (b) IIpos re \p&xv Kai 0o.\ttj, to cold and heat, lb. 2. 1. 6. (e) "H dXos •*) €irl 777s, either on sea or land, j*. 27. (d) *E7xos fipidv, fitya, CTifiapbv, a spear, heavy, huge, stout, II. 801. (e) Ovdfr fiaWov ij rts dXXos 2\€i, you have no more than any other one. PI. See g. g. Copulative conjunctions are often omitted (especially if more than two particulars are joined) ; (h) less frequently, those of other classes, (i) When not joined by a connective, a clause is sometimes in parenthetic or inverted order, or placed in apposition with another clause, (g) Ilddov irarpiduv, yoviwv, yvvaucCbv, iralduw, from longing for country, parents, wives, children, iii. 1. 3. (h) 'O^tta . . [sc. 8ri] €0v6firjp, I swear [that] I sacrificed, vi. 1. 31. (i) Tavra, . . 6p.vvp.i . ., Zira&ov Cyr. v. 4. 31. 'A ijdr) &pa, bid [no more, for] it is now quite time to stop (sed enim), 330 PARTICLES. ELLIPSIS. § 709. iii. 2. 32. ITapa rty 6d\arrav rjet • Kal [sc. ravrig fjei] y&p ^8tj ii. 487. El p.ep ds vfids Xe"yeip [sc. X^ye 8if)] • cl 5e fxrj [sc. 2x ets ]> 7//*«s irpbs f or the time when, /3. 99. 2iV ols fy" (554). See 557, 699 e, 703 b. b. Pleonasm. 713. Under this head we remark, 1.) The redundant use of negatives. This appears chiefly, a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all regularly combined with a negative : Oti-nroTe ipei ovdels, no one shall [never] ever say, i. 3. 5. Ovdevl ov8ap,ij ovbafiQs ovdep.iap koivuvIclv ?x« PI. b.) In divided construction, and (c) in the emphatic use of ovU and p.T)84: Mrjdh reXelrw p,^JT€ ep.ol \l1\tc dXXy p.r)5epl, let him pay nothing either to me or to any one else, vii. 1. 6. Ou p.ep 8r] ov8e tovt'&v tis enrol, nor surely could any one say this, i. 9. 13. M77 toLpvp p.r}8£ vii. 6. 19. d.') In the common (but not necessary) use of \ii\ with the Infinitive, after words implying some negation : Nau/cX%ots dirctirc p-y Sidyeip, he forbade tlie shipmasters to transport [saying that they should not trans- port], vii. 2. 12. "E|«i too p.Tj KaraSvpat, will keep from sinking. ^ (e)^ Oi is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite verb after 6ti or «s : Ap- peladcu . ., 8ti ou Traprjp, to deny that he was present, Rep. A. 2. 17. § 716, PLEONASM. 331 f.) In the use of |x-f| ov for |i.4j } with the Infinitive (commonly) and Par- ticiple (sometimes), after negative and interrogative clauses (sometimes after expressions of shame, fear, and the like, from the negation implied). The ov (as simply continuing the general negation of the sentence, cf. a, b, c) may be here joined with \ki\, (g) even when this is redundant. E. g., (f) Ovdeis ye" p. dv ireiaeiev dvdpuirwv rb firj ovk e\6e?v, no one could per- suade me not to go [no], Ar. Ran. 65. Ov yap dv p,aKpav txvevov avrbs, p.r) ovk ^x o3V Tl vtiftpoXov, I could not trace it far of myself, [not having] with- out some clew, Soph. 0. T. 220. "LVre irdo-w aicrx^W elvai, p.r) ov avairov- bdfciv, so that all were aslvamed not to share his zeal, ii. 3. 11. (g) Ovk €vavTiu>o~opLcu rb p.r} ov yeywvelv, I will not refuse to speak, iEsch. Pr. 787. h.) In the occasional use of ov to strengthen the negative force of ij, than : U6\u> oXrjv 5ias tc kcxC, both otherwise and in particular, especially : OvSev vo~ fiifa dv8pl, &XXus re Kal dpxovri, KdXXlov etvai KTrjp.a vii. 7. 41. b. 8fj\ov 8ti, it is evident that, evidently, ev 618' 8ti, 618' 8ti, nty dXXd, yet no, but, i. e. nevertheless : '0 brros . . pUKpov KaKeivov ei;eTpaxvXix o'ttojs, p.rj Sttws, ovx 6lov, I do not say that, not to say that, &c, i. e. not only, or not only not: "Ax/o^o-toi ydp Kal yvvaitjlv . ., yu.77 8tl duSpdcri, useless even to women, not to say men, PI. Ovx ^ 7rws Supa Sou's, not only bestowing no gifts, vii. 7. 8. . CHAPTEE V. ARRANGEMENT. 718. In the direct, or normal order of arrangement, which, however, various influences are continually changing or modi- fying, a.) A general connective or interrogative leads in its sentence : and (b) a compellative-part (60), as calling attention, is placed early, if not first ; though, as independent, it may have any place which will not interfere with the required connection of other words, (c) Of the remain- der, the subject-part precedes the predicate-part, (d) Exponents precede the words whose offices or relations they mark (65). E. g., 'AXX' eyco, & $aXlv€, davp.dfa . ., but I, Phalinus, wonder, ii. 1. 10. § 719. DIRECT ORDER OP ARRANGEMENT. 333 Modifiers (except as above, a) are thus placed in respect to their principals : (e) Adverbs and equivalent words or phrases precede them, (f) Other modifiers follow substantives without the article, (g) adjectives, and (h) adverbs ; and (i) may either follow or precede verbs, (j) For the arrangement with the article, see 520, 523 s. (k) Of several modifiers of the same word, the more closely related are placed nearer to it (a Bat. of person, from more interest in the action, usually nearer than an Ace. of thing). E. g., (e) 'Ev i'o-a> /cai PpaS&os irpoa-geaav, tliey advanced evenly and slowly, i. 8. 11. See 510. (f, g) Kw|icu 7ro\Aa2, (Jtetrral crirov, many villages, full of corn, i. 4. 19. (n) Xwpls r&v dXXojv (405 a), (i) KOpcp Sovvcu xPVf ia ' ra , to give 0. money, i. 2. 12.' (k) AiafidWet. rbv KiSpov irpbs rbv dbekipbv, traduces C. to his brother, i. 1. 3. Alboxnv avrw fivpiovs 5a- peiKovs, gives him 10,000 darics, i. 1. 9. 1.) An infinitive follows the principal verb ; (m) a participle follows or precedes it, according to the natural order of the thought, (n) Coordinate sentences follow each other according to the order in which they lie in the mind, (o) Substantive and adjective clauses, except the indefinite rela- tive (641), follow the words upon which they depend, (p) Adverbial clauses may follow or precede the principal clauses, according to the nat- ural order of the thought ; and (q) are sometimes inserted in them, for the sake of a closer connection. E. g., (1, m) SvWe£as crpdrevfia . . iireipaTo KaTa-yeiv, having raised an army, he (then) endeavored to restore, i. 1. 7. See 571 f. (n) 'O 5e it elder at re kclI v ed iwadov vw enelvov i. 3. 4. r. An order different from the preceding is termed, in general, indirect, -varied, or abnormal ; or, more particularly, inverted, divided, parenthetic, mixed, confused, &c, as the case may be. See 71. t. If a complex or compound sentence is so arranged that there is no complete sense without the final clause, the structure is often termed periodic ; but otherwise, loose : Et donei vol, aretxe (631 a). XpQ avrois, eav ben ti (631 c). The Greek well illustrates the progress, in advancing civilization, from the looser to the closer connection of thought. 719. The order of the sentence is varied, chiefly, a.) To render certain words more emphatic or prominent, or (b) through the attraction or repulsion of other words. (a) a. The beginning and close of the sentence have a special promi- nence ; and of other places, the earlier are in general more favorable to emphasis than the later. It is but natural, that a sentence should com- mence with that which is most prominent or foremost in the mind, and that it should then proceed with that which is closely related to this, or next in prominence ; while the last word leaves the freshest impression. E. g., M-qviv deide . . ov\o\l£vt\v, sing the fatal wrath, A. 1. Hepl 'Opbv- tov Tovrovt i. 6. 6. (P) Any unusual order attracts attention ; and in prose, commonly expresses emphasis or emotion : Otk dv6pa>7ra>v airop&v pap(3dp(\i]s t\a> (ptpeiv yvvaxKbs dvSpl, to bring from a dear wife to a dear husband, iEschlCh. 89. Kai iiroiow ovtws oiStoi i. 1. 11. See 541 h, 567 d. (£) If a word modi- 334 SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT. §719. fying the verb comes early in the sentence, it often attracts the verb to a place before the subject : 'Evrav0a •fjerav Ktofiat, here were villages (6), i. 4. 19. 'Eircl 8e T)o-0c'v€i AapeTos, and when D. was sick, i. 1. 1. (ij) A particle is sometimes attracted from its proper place : Oik old' av el irel- aaifxi, I know not whether I could persuade (ttcictcu/u &p, 621 a), Eur. Med. 941. Kai vvv 6ri iroXiopKovprai, and that they are now besieged, vi. 3. 11. c.) In conformity to the natural order and connection of the thoughts ; or (d) to present sooner an outline of these, some details being deferred. Thus, (c) Aapciov koL IlapvcrdTiSos ylypoprai ircuSes S6o (412 ; the well-known parents being naturally mentioned before their children). See £. (6) A word referring or corresponding to what is contained in the preceding sen- tence, has commonly a leading place, as introducing the new thought and connecting the thoughts : '0 pCep oOp Trpea^ihepos irapcop eTvyxo-ve ' Kvpov (corresponding to ir pea fivr epos) 8e neTa.Tre'p.ireTcu dwb ttjs dpxv^ ^S (refer- ring to apxys) a.vTov o-a.Tpairr)v eirol-qae • ical OTparr\ybv (corresponding to aarpdjniv) 8e avrbv aire'8ei£e tt&vtwv, 8 6 KO- pos. i. 1. 2. (t) When a question is made without an interrogative ex- ponent, the predicate, as in Eng., often leads, as the part on which the force of the question most directly falls : T40vtjk€ $L\uriros ; is P. dead ? Dem. 43. 10. (k) A word pointing to a following sentence has naturally a late place : &iaf3aivovTes cMte, crossing as follows, i. 5. 10. (d) 'EvTaGBa aucv€iTai 'Eirua|a, rj 'Lvevve'o'ios yvpq, tov KlXIkcop ^ao-ikicos, vapa Kvpop, here comes E., the wife of S., king of the Cilicians, to C, i. 2. 12. An outline is here first presented in "Evravda (6) ap tovs dpio-Tovs tup irepl avrbp lirrd, (lie, seven noblest of his Persian attendants. e.) For the symmetry of the sentence ; or (f) that it may close with a stronger or more important word. E. g., Otfre yh.p T)fxets ckcIpov to battle (the metre forbidding ^s fjLdxv v )> 0- 59. — The in- fluence of these three causes was very great, and is often quite obvious, though its full extent and manner are now beyond our cognizance. 720. From their general want of emphasis, the following words can- not stand first in the sentence ; and are therefore called post-positive : the particles av (not for idp, 619 a; Ep. k4), &pa (not dpa, 685 c ; Ep. pd, &p), al (poet, ai/re) and a$0is (Ep. and Ion. adris) again, yap, yi, -yovv, 8a£, $i, 8if) (exc. Ep. 5?? ydp } drj rdre), 8f)0ev, 8f]Ta, 0^v, pfr, pevroi, p^jv, § 723. PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS. 335 vvv (not vvv * Ep. vv), odv, Trip, ri, rot, roiwv (see 685 c, 701) ; also tIs, and the indefinites beginning with ir (the rather for distinction from the interrogatives) : 'O 8t TrelderaL re, nal ov\\ap.fidvei (718 n). See 518, 548. a. When these words naturally lead a sentence or part of a sentence, they have commonly the second place or the earliest place allowable ; and, from their frequent need of an early position and their lack of prom- inence, they are often permitted to separate closely related words ; indeed they are often so inserted to give strength or emphasis to such words. Enclitic pronouns are sometimes placed in like manner. E. g., 'O p.kv odv irpeo-pvTepos, the elder, then, i. 1. 1. Ilpbs 5e dpKTov, and to the north, i. 7. 6. 'Ek 5£ twv (518 a). Ilpds ere 6«3v (476 b). See 520 b, 621 e. 721. a. Variation of place extends to clauses, as well as words and phrases : "On 8t inl /3acri\6x &yoi, . . iJKOvaev ovdeis, but, that he was lead- ing against the king, no one heard, i. 3. 21. fl O eWes, ovt6s iariv (551 c). b. A subject common to a dependent and principal clause often pre- cedes the connective : 01 5' dXXot iireidr) iJKov, . . bi-qp-K a), vofio-dtTTjs legis-lator. (d) Indirect Object : l-Soi-05 in repute (iv 86i-y), avd-Oiraros pro-consul, (j) Ka\o-K-dyadLa honor and virtue, Mem. 1. 6. 14 ; $>-ya\a eggs and milk, Galen. k. A modifier or exponent has commonly the first place in a compound, except that the object of a verb often follows it : having swift feet, (c) Each part of a compound may have an ex- ternal relation : du having pillars around it. BOOK IV PBOSODY. JEschylus, Eumen. CHAPTEE I. QUANTITY AND VERSIFICATION. 725. In Greek all vowels and syllables are divided, in re- spect to quantity (i. e. the time of their utterance according to the ancient pronunciation), into long and short ; and the long are regarded as having double the time of the short. a. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity is the short syllable, or the breve (brevis, short), and a long vowel or syllable is equal to two breves. For the marks of quantity (— — ), see 96 c. b. Quantity is of two kinds, natural and local. Natural quantity has respect to the length of the vowel in its own nature ; but local quantity, to the effect which is produced by the position of the vowel in connection with other letters or syllables. In 8pru|, quail, both syllables are short by nature, i. e. in the natural quantity of the vowels ; but both become long by the position of these short vowels before two consonants (137 d). c. The quantity of a syllable is always the natural quantity of the vowel which it contains, unless some change is produced by position. Hence it is usual, in prosody, to regard the vowel as the representative of the syllable ; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict propriety belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in 6pru£, it is common to say that the vowels are long by position ; while, in strict accuracy, the quantity of the vowels themselves is not changed, but the syllables become long from the time occupied in the utterance of the successive consonants. I. NATUKAL QUANTITY. 726. Rule 1. «• and o are short : as in (pepopev. Rule 2. rj and ©, diphthongs, and all vowels that are cir- cumflexed, or result from contraction or crasis, are long : as in Tjfiwc, 7rXe tovs, nas, rjfiiv, 7rvp' pis, bvs (156) ; kov (126). Rule 3. Other vowels are commonly short : as in xkapubt. § 730. NATURAL QUANTITY. 337 a. All vowels which result from the union of two vowels have, from their very nature, a double time. See 115 s. (b) To the general rule for tlie doubtful vowels (Rule 3) there are many exceptions ; which renders it necessary to observe the accent, the special laws of inflection and derivation, the dialect, and authority, by which is here meant the usage of the poets. 727. A. Accent. From the general rules of accent (770 s), we learn, that in natural quantity, a.) In proparoxytones and properispomes, the last vowel is short : as in dpovpa, bivafus, viXetcwi ■ /3u)\a£, irpa£is, 8iu>pv%. b. ) In paroxy tones, if the last vowel is short, the vowel of the penult is also short , and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penult is long, the last vowel is also long : as in fjuxiv&dos, Kaptavos, xXa/iuSos ■ Arjdd, $oiVI£. 728. B. Inflection. In the common affixes of declension and conjugation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of contraction, -a in the Sing, of Dec. 1, and dat for vox in the nude Present. Thus, Dec. 1, Gen. sing, and Ace. pi. -as, Nom. du. -a (13, 122), Aor. Pt. -eras, - ; i is commonly long ; and v variable: goyd/ca, eautddo-a (310c, e), but etdaa, idvpdOrjv (310) ; erlaa (310), but (pdtau, i sonants, or a double consonant) ; to Rule 6, by position before a vowel ; to Rule 7, at the end of the verse. III. VERSIFICATION". 740. Greek verse is founded upon rhythm ; i. e. the regular succession of long and short quantities. a. Elementary combinations of syllables, showing the rhythm, are termed feet (as if steps in the rhythmic movement) ; regular combina- tions of feet, verses (versus, a, turn) ; and regular combinations of verses, stanzas, strophes, or systems (744). For a table of feet, see 77. b. A single foot, taken by itself, is called a monopody (wots, foot) ; a combination of two feet, a dipody ; of three, four, five, six, &c, a tri- pody, tetrapody, pentapody, hexapody, &c. ; of a foot and a half, a triemim (Tpi7)p.Lfjt.€prj$, of three half-parts) ; of two and a half, three and a half, four Wid a half, &c, penthemim, h-ephthemim, enneemim, &c. See 745 c. ,^^741. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with a greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is termed arsis, (apo-ts, elevation), while the alternate weaker tone is termed thesis (Oco-ls, depression). These terms are also ap- plied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced. a. The arsis (also termed metrical ictus or rhythmic accent) is here marked thus ( ' , ', or to indicate greater force, "). b. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substitution of J_ w for J_ in the arsis (resolution), and of — for ^ ^ in the thesis (con- traction), may be made without affecting the rhythm. c. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by the prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot 340 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION. § 741. receives the ictus upon the first syllable , while, m'lambic and Anapsestie Terse, every foot receives it upon the second, except the anapaest and pro* celeusmatic, which receive it upon the third, (d) Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verse has commonly a stronger ictus upon every other foot ; and is hence measured, not by single feet, but by dipodies (740b). 742. The simplest and most familiar rhythms are those in which a long syllable alternates with one, or with tivo short syllables (iwi^i-, or I^wl^iJi), In the latter, the thesis is equal in time to the arsis, and the rhythm is termed equal or quadruple (— ~— = 4 breves, 725 a) ; but in the former, the thesis is only half the arsis, and the rhythm is termed triple (— -- = 3 breves). a. Of these, the equal is the more stately in its movement, and the more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed from common discourse ; while the triple has more nearly the movement of com- mon conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds of verse, and to dialogue. b. Other rhythms are formed by doubling the arsis, by prolonging the thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms.' (c) Verses, in which the equal and triple rhythms are united, are termed logacedic (\6yos dis- course, aoid-q song, see a). 743. Verses are named, — (a) From the prevailing foot : Iam- bic, Dactylic, (b) From some poet who invented or used them, or the species of composition in which they were employed: Alcaic, from Alcaeus ; Sapphic, from Sappho ; Heroic, as used in singing the deeds of heroes, (c) From the number of measures (i. e. feet, or dipodies, 741 d) which they contain : monometer (ixovofierpos, of one measure), dimeter, trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter, (d) From their degree of completeness ; thus a verse is termed catalectic (icara- Xrjyco, to end abruptly), when its last foot is incomplete ; brachycata- lectic, when it wants a whole foot at the end ; acatalectic, when it has its just measure ; hyper catalectic, when it has one or two sylla- bles beyond ; hypermeter, when it exceeds in any way its just meas- ure ; acephalous (dice(pa\os, headless), when it wants a syllable at the beginning; anacrusic, basic, or syncopated, when affected as below. e. A long or short syllable or pyrrhic is sometimes prefixed to a lyric rhythm beginning with the arsis. This is called an anacrusis (avdKpovev! Eur. Ale. 536. Tl : UriXrfidStu, XPvai^ djud, A.JU 15 ; see 27 f, 197 c, 222 b, 323 c. We find more rarely ae ; ia, uxi, ir;, iy, to ; oo ; va, voi ; &c. Synizesis sometimes occurs between two words, when the first is fj, ?\, S-rj, p.-^, hrtC, or a word ending in the affix -r\ or -to : f)~bvx E - 349, 5rT6y5oov v. 261, eVei !>v. c. In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly in the endings -ecus, -ecov, -ea of Dec. 3 (220 d) ; in a few single words and forms (as dels Eur. Of. 399) ; in the combinations ^ ov and jrij ov, regularly pronounced as one syllable ; in some j)ther combinations in which the first word is % % \lt\, eircC, or €-yw : tirfelSe'vai Eur. Hipp. 1335, i-rrtl ovdev, eyib ei/x Soph. Ph. 585. d. In scanning, observe not only the division into dipodies and feet, but also the arsis or metrical ictus (741), and the verse-caesura (745). Unless these are carefully marked, the metrical character and expression of the verse are, to a great extent, lost, (e) In the following exhibition of metres, the division of feet will be marked by a single bar ( | ) ; the divis- ion of dipodies by a double bar ( || ) ; the verse-caesura by an obelisk ( t ), sometimes doubled ( f ) ; and sometimes the omission of a syllable by a caret ( a ). An anacrusis will be denoted by A, and a basis by B ; and of syllables metrically long or short (whether by nature or position), the former will be printed in full-face, and the latter in common Greek type. 342 VERSIFICATION. DACTYLIC. §747. A. Dactylic Verse. 747. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often supplied by a spondee (X «- w == JL — .). See 741 b. 748. i. The common Hexameter or Heroic Verse consists of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or spon- dees, the fifth commonly a dactyl, and the sixth always a spondee. a. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic, and has commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs most frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables, (b) The favorite caesura of the verse is the penthemim (the "heroic caesura"), which is almost equally masculine anal feminine (745 c). After this, the most frequent caesuras are the masculine hephthemim (often preceded by a triemim), and the pastoral (745 d). (c) Even when the penthemim is not the principal verse -caesura, it is yet seldom wanting as a foot -caesura. d. Scheme and Examples. I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. twtw|jLtw~tjX. II-- 'AXX& /ca|K(3s a(pi\t] } t K/>are|pbv 5' iirl j pvdov e'JTcXXcv. A. 25. El' K€V I inas apjvwv kvi|v re re|\c£aiv. A. 66. St^ucit e\\. Al 8e | S»/>a | pf| 5^/cer, | #XAa | 8<»J-ei. Sapph. 1. 22. B. Anapaestic Verse. 751. The place of the fundamental anapaest is often sup- plied by a spondee or dactyl, and, very rarely, by a proceleu- smatic (__j_ z= L = —S^. = ~ ^ ^ ~). 752. i. The Anapaestic, from its strong, even movement, was a favorite metre for marching songs; and was greatly employed in systems, by the dramatic poets, as intermediate between the Iambic of the common dialogue, and the lyric metres of the choral odes. a. These systems are scanned continuously (738 b), but are usually arranged so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of this species of verse, the ANAPJEstic Dimeter). They uniformly close with the dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (wapoijuai.) the parosmiac verse (744 d). (b) This verse requires a ccesurcc after each dipody, except in the parcemiac. He\c£o-€i|e Sojxois, t II <»v r e7ri'|voiav H-ttevScis | Arar^x^v t || irpa|€i|as, itreX Tevvaijo? dvfjp, At-ycv, | trap ip.o\ || 5e56tcT] | del | /caret, irdv| ra 8^ | rporrov. Ar. Av. 451. C. Iambic Yerse. 755. The place of the fundamental iambus may be sup- plied by a tribrach (~ ±- = ~ X ~), except at the end of a line. To add dignity and variety to the verse, the first foot of a di- 344 VERSIFICATION. IAMBIC. §755. pody (where the arsis is less strong) is very often lengthened to a spondee, and not unfrequently to a dactyl or anapaest. a. Comedy admits the anapsest in every place except the last of a verse or system ; and also tragedy, when it is wholly contained in a proper 756. i. The Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic (also called, from the number of its feet, the Senarius) is the principal metre of dramatic dialogue (752). a. This verse has for its caesura the penthemim or, much less frequent- ly, the hephthemim. The latter is sometimes anticipated by the elision of the syllable after which it would properly fall, forming what has been termed by Porson the qiiasi-cassura. lines occur, though rarely, which have neither of these csesuras. ' b. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ; the spondee in the 1st, 3d, and 5th places ; the dactyl in the 1st and 3d ; and the anapsest in the 1st. The feet which are admitted only in proper names or in comedy (755 a) are placed, below, in parentheses. 1. Iambus. ^ J_ Tribrach. ^ S ^ 2. ii 3. wt JL ~tJ,~ 4. . 5. 1 6. Spondee. - Dactyl. -±~ Anapsest. ^ ^ JL ( JL -t JL _t^~ ^ ^ JL ( :~lj 'E^cb ( 5' &ro\\\fi6s tl]fii t U!|p^cre|T€. Ar.Vesp. 1101. 762. ii. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in systems of the common form (744 d). 763. hi. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds of Trochaic verse (for logacedic examples, see 750) : Tripody (Ithyphallic). ILdvTpo\<\>os 7re|\€icts. Msch. Th. 294. Trim. Aco||vdv eV|app.. Pind. O. 3. 9. Trim. Cat. Tlv ybp \ kv ttovIItw /cu|p€pvtov||T, a icXder ApoXoardTai. Ar. Nub. 1155. E. Other Metres. 764. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the most part admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the substitution of two short syllables for one long, or of one long for two short : a. Cretic (_L^_!_). #p<$vr«rov | ical 7evov. ^Esch. Sup. 418. b. Bacchic (^,-L-L). Ti'sdx», | rts 68p.a | irpoffiirro. \ ft dcpcyyrjs. ^Isch. c. Choriambic (±^,^±). Tv\ivaalov \ \eyew tl wS, At. Vesp. 527. d. Rising Ionic (^ LJ-). Ile-WpaKcv | fiiv 6 iripcrrc)7re8ov Xiirwv. iEsch, CHAPTER II. ACCENT. 766. In every Greek word, one of the three last syllables was distinguished by a special tone of the voice. 1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the accent. 2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity without regard to accent ; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon ac- cent without regard to quantity. 3. The accent, even if not regarded in pronunciation, is still useful, as serving, — (a) To distinguish different words, or different senses of the same word : dpi to be, etfu to go ; 6 tlic, 6 which (249 c) ; irdre ; when ? COMP. GR. 15* 346 PROSODY. — ACCENT. § 766. Ttor£ once ; #XAa oilier things, d\\d but ; Ai0o/36Xos throwing stones, \i65- (3o\os stoned (386. 1). (b) To distinguish different forms of the same word : Opt. in-Xfoai, Inf. £K-X0, 0iAw, 5t?AcD, marks them as contract forms of TLfido), 0iA^o>, drjXou. (e) To show how a word is employed in the sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained by a proclitic or enclitic (785 s). 767. a. In a final or initial, and often in an intermediate syllable, a long vowel is treated in accentuation as consisting of two vowels (108, 115), and thus forming two tone-places (i. e. places in respect to accent), (b) But final -at and -oi in affixes are regarded in accentuation as short vowels, except in the Optative. c. By long voioels, in accentuation, are meant those that are long by nature, including diphthongs ; and by slwrt vowels, those that are short in natural quantity, without regard to their position (725). d. It is not strange that this treatment of final -irol. g. It is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark unaccented syllables, and when the two marks (") fall upon the same syllable, it is more convenient in writing to unite them into one ( A , or, as rounded for greater ease, * or ~). Dropping, therefore, the marks over the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus : Qte, irats, S6\os, 8d\ov, SdXoi, ravpov, Tavpos, ravpot, ckovctcus, cKovo-a, €KoC- fiva, rrjs, 6ea, atov, yvncbv, npco • cpdrj, to, toov, cu£, alyos, ifioi. ' Oxytone, ) ( Acute. Perispome, V if its Ultima is < Circnmflexed. A word is J Barytone, ) ( Grave, termed * Paroxytone, 1 -f •+ p u • / Acute. Properispome, J \ Circumflexed. Proparoxytone, if its Antepenult is Acute. a. The terms ahove, and those applied to the marks of accent (94), are formed from the Greek and Latin words rbvos accentus, tone, \a£, -a/cos, though iplfiuXos, fertile. 771. Law II. a. The circumflex can only fall upon a long vowel, (b) It cannot recede beyond the penult ; and can fall upon this, only when the last vowel is short, — (c) being the only accent which a penult long by nature can then receive. Hence, (a) /SoOj, ^Os, 7ras (19, 23), become in the Nom. pi. /3<5es, pves, iravres : (b) povaa, prjaos (15 s), in the Gen. potio-ws, vrjcrov : (c) af£, d-qp (17 s), 'Arpei5??s (15), in the Nom. pi. afyes, 0%>es, 'ArpetSat (767 b). II. Accent in Yowel Changes. 772. a. Contraction. Law III. In contraction, the acute folloived by the grave produces the circumflex : voos vovs, ooTtov dorovv (16),ri/ia&> TipLco, (jitXeeiir (friKeiv (42). 348 ACCENT. IN DECLENSION. §'772. 1. Otherwise the accent is not affected by contraction, except as the general laws may require : rl/me tI\lci, ti/j,cl£tu> Tipdro), Tt/xaoi^TjyTifttojtqv • io-Tadros €o-tp.cu, p.ip,jnjro (317 c). (h) This is usual in the depo- nents Mvaiitu, €TrL _< 5> -&v, -°' ? > -°fc (16) ; yvirCbv y -dip (17). (b) Except in the datives £p.ol, fwl, v of the Gen.pl. is circumflexed, as contracted from -dcov (197 c) : Tpdncfc, rpane^Suf. 2. In adjectives in -os, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the masc. : thus, i\la, friendship, , aval, apvi. § 783.] IN CONJUGATION. 349 "b. Except those which have become dissyllabic by contraction, participles, and the Gen. pi. and dual of these ten nouns, das, fytws, d&s, icdpa, oOs, irais, o-qs, Tpcis, 0ys, Qs (light), and of the adjective irds (also Dat. iraai, 23) : 7r6\ei' irdXct (19), eapos fjpos (209 a) ; dovros, Qhn, dvci (26) ; traldwv, /c/>ares, 'Hpd/cXees (19). So a few other neuter adjectives, when used adverbially : dXuOes ; really ? (c) In comparatives in -i, -0i, -8ev (190 s), the accent usually falls upon a short vowel in the penult, but is otherwise retentive, (g) For peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, see 25, 27 s. 780. B. Conjugation has exceptions to the law of reces- sive accent ; chiefly in the Infinitive and Participle. 1. These forms are accented upon the penult: — (a) All Infinitives in -ai not preceded by -a-0- or -fxcv- : Xwat, XeXvicfrcu, Xvdijuai, ridivai • but Xtfos ; except a few pre- teritive participles, and Epic infinitives, as -ftueros, d/cdx^tfcu T. 335. 781. 2. These forms are oxytone : — (a) Participles in -s, Gen. -tos, except in the 1st Aor. act. : XeXvKws, Xvdeis, fords, dots • but Xvcras (37, 45). (b) The 2 Aor. act. Part. : XiwAv (38). (c) The Pres. partici- ples (as if 2 Aor.) Idv (45 m), tcubv (fr. kIw go, poet., II. 263), lT]p.£, see 45, 787 c ; for KeijJtai, 50. Other examples of irregular or various accentuation are %P^ &XPW (50 Xpdud) ; 1 Aor. Imv. elirov or dirbv (50 £T]fj.£ to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. ; and even here in the Ep. form els : vrjinjs els, stultus es, t. 273. (d) The particles -ye, vvv (vi), ire'p, tc, toi, with the poetic Qi\v, k(, pa., and -B4 (688 e). e. Some familiar combinations of this kind are commonly, and others sometimes, joined in writing, and viewed as compounds : eire, iJTot, /jltjtls, Saris (observe the accent, 28 h), ovUiroTe, &rj{xl ydp, for I say. (b) After the apostroplie : iroXXol 5' do-Lv, Met tliey are many, (c) If it is emphatic or strongly reflexive : ov Kvpov, &\\cl v coi, against you rather titan with you, vii. 7. 32. Yet irpbs fie (sometimes s, tovto) : *Eid, crwcppoavvv, iraideld. (e) Most other verbals in -a long or -tj are oxytone : bs. (b) On the contrary, in primitive nouns with a mute stem, the accent is more frequent- ly recessive : kjjttos, /c/>6kos, ttXovtos, \pdp.ados. (c) All ordinals not end- ing in -o-tos have recessive accent : cVkxitos. (d) Adjectives in -Xos, -pos, and -vos (except those in -ivos denoting material or country, 375 c, e) are commonly oxytone : \pCXbs, Qs, raxtws. (b) Derivative adverbs in -8ov, -8a, -t, -€i, and -£ are commonly oxytone ; those* in -8ir)v, -axis and -co, paroxytone (381 s) : irXivdrjSou, M^Surri, dpuxxei, irapaW&i- • ffiropddrjv, woXX&kis, ^w. 5.) Prepositions. The eighteen prepositions proper (688 c) are all oxytone : d7r6, /card. For the removal or loss of the accent, see 785, 786. B. Rules for Compound Words. 795. In composition, there is a general tendency to recessive accent. But, — (a) Compound adjectives in -tjs are more frequently oxytone : as, evTrpeirris. (b) Compounds in which -os is affixed to the stem of a verb united with a noun are commonly oxytone, if the penult is long ; but if the penult is short, they are commonly paroxytone when active in sense, and proparoxytone when passive (386b) : ctltottolos (387 a) ; XtdofioXos and Xido- fioXos (386. 1). (c) Compound adjectives of Dec. 3, with a palatal or lin- gual stem-mark, in which the latter part is a monosyllable derived from a verb, are commonly oxytone : awoppwi;, rjfiidvrjs. (d) Words derived from compound words are commonly not accented as though themselves compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule : thus, KaTOLcrnevafa, Ka.Tcw/ceucwT6s (792 a), d-/caTa represent the forms at the angle as arising by contraction or some other change, chiefly euphonic, from the forms at the opening, or as used in their stead. The sign x denotes opposition or distinction. Dialectic use is marked by an older style of figures in the ref- erences (as, 329). For abbreviations, see 798. To increase the practical value of the Index, the form or construction of a word is sometimes referred to the appropriate rule or remark, although the particular word may not have been cited as an example in the present edition, perhaps not even in the larger Gram- mar. In the latter case, the reference is marked with an accent ( ' ). The index for the conjugation of verbs is contained in § 50. A 4, 106 ;<> 138, 142. d- cop. 385 : priv. 385, compounds w. gen. 436. a 109s, 118 d, 7, lis. ayaQos cp. 262 b, 260 a, 261 a, b ; w. ace. 481'. dydWw mid. 5827. a-yaucu w. ace, gen., 429 a, 443 b, 432 f. COMP. GR. dvavaKTc'co w. dat. 456, w. pt. 677'. [pt. 677'. dycurdu w. dat. 456, w. AyyeXos dec. 16. &yt imv. 656 b. d\T|paos, -ws, dec. 22. dyvdts 386, w. gen. 432 b. &7XS -° c j cp. 262 d, 263 d ; w. gen. 445 c. dSe\os w. gen. 442 a, w w. dat. 451; &5eXe779. "AiSns dec. 225 b ; 'Ai- 86a8e 688 e ; 483 a. dSiic&o w. 2 acq. 480 b, w. pt. 677 a ; pres. as dStKos dec. 22. [pf. 612. -a0- in 2 aor. 353 a. "A0»s, -o> ace. 199. 3. w 354 INDEX I. yiyvofiat § 797. ttt 108 ; in accent. 767. ctl, d., e., for el if, 701 f. alStis 219 b, 214, 215 c. ai| dec. 17. alpcoj w. 2 ace. 480 a ; mid. 579, pass. 588'. -awri old dat. pi. 198. 3. alo-0dvofj.aiw.gen. 432 b, h,w. dep. verb 657, 677. aUrxpos, -pQs, cp. 260, 261 e, 263. alo-x^voixai w. ace. 472 f, w. inf. x pt. 657 k. airita w. 2 ace. 480 c. afrios, -dofiai, w. gen. 444 f, 431 c, dat. 454 d. aKoXovQos w. gen. 442 a, w. dat. 450. dxovw w. gen. and ace. 432g, h, 434a; as pass. 575 a ; pres. as pf. 612 ; \v. inf. orpt. 657 k, 677. aicpos, use 508 a. d\-yeivds cp. 260, 261 e. a\is w. gen. 414 a. dXio-Kopai w. gen. 431 c, w. pt. 677'. dXXd 701 b, n, x dXXa 766 a ; introd. 708 e &\\d ydp 709, dXX' 1j 700 m, n. aX\da-s re kclI 717 a. aXs dec. 208. a\&Tn\l dec. 203 b. aXtasdec. 225 j. [662. &pa w. dat. 450 ; w. pt. dpapxdvw w. gen. 405. duetvwv compt. 261 a, f, 262 b. ap/TT6x w. 2 ace. 480 c. du£688, 689 e; oi dfupi 527 a. [480 c'. dps dec. 219 f. dpveopai 6V1 oil 713 d. dpvos dec. 18, 210. dpirail 230 a ; cp. 259. dppTjv dec. 22, 208 a. dp\w w. gen. 407, 425 ; pt. as adv. 674 b. clo-o-a, &a w. gen. 407 ; aor. x pres. 592 d. PcXtCwv, &c, 260, 261 e. po^0€a),&c., w. dat. 453. (Sopeas, -/Spas dec. 15, 196, 198. 1. (3ouXeva>, mid. 579. povXopat, /3otfXei 559 c, 647 b ; povXofLfrij) 455 n. Govs dec. 19, 214 s, 217. T 4, 137 c; v const. 442, 450. Y^Xws dec. 207 c ; com- pounds 237 b. -ye'vos, "y^pas, dec. 19, 216 s. [473. •yevtt w. gen., ace, 432 a, •ytyas dec. 17, 205. -y£-yvopai w. gen. 412, §797. yiyvofxai GREEK. 'Eppeas 355 437 a' ; w. dat. 449 ; w. pt. 679. [657 k. yiyvJiVKV w. inf. x pt. TXovs dec. 21, 227 b. y6vv dec. 224 c. 7pacpa>, mid. 579, 581, w. gen., ace, 431 c, 480 c. YvWj dec. 203, 779. yity dec. 17, 203. rwppvasdec. 15, 198.1. A 4, 137 ; in dec. 217. SaCptov dec. 18, 208. §a.Kpvov,-pv dec. 14, 225 f. Sdpap dec. 17, 153 a. 8av€^ w , mid. 581. 84 685 c, 701 c ; for ydp 705 a ; introd. 708 e j pos. 720 : 6 84 518. -8c local 688 e, 382, 252; enclit. 787 d, f, g. Setva dec. 27, 245. Se'vSpov, -eov, dec. 225 f. ScViroTa voc. 779. hi w. pt. 677. [208 f. AimTJTTip dec. 210 b, 8ia 688, 689 a. SiaXi-yopai 580, w. dat. 452 a. [677 f. 8iaXeiTr<«>, pt. or w. pt. 8iaTpij3to w. pt. 677 a. Siatpe'pco (-(popos) w. gen. 406 ; mid. w. dat. 455'. SiSdcrxco w. 2 ace. 480 c ; mid. 581. 8iSa)p.i, pres. x aor. 594. Staaids etju w. inf. 573. Sijcqv \v. gen. 436 d. Sidn conj. 701 j. 8iirXdcrios W. gen. 409. 8tirovs dec. 22, 231 c. SokIco personally 573 ; (ws) Soicetv epcol 665, 671 c' ; pt. abs. 675 c, d. SdXos dec. 14, 11 s. Srfpv dec. 21, 224 c. Sous dec. 26, 205, 233. Svvapxu w. ace. 472 f ; or -ros, w. rel. 553 c. Svo, Svu, dec. 25, 240 c. 8vs dec. 26, 205, 233. Svcr- 385 c ; ang. 283. Scopedv adv. ace. 380 a. Swpov dec. 14, lis. ,l E xJ/iXdv 4, 98 b, 106 ; < a 138, 142, 152 s; ins. in cont. 120 i. -€a- in plup. 291 c : -ca, -id's, in ace. 220. edv (el 6m) 701 f, 619 a. lavTov > auroO dec. 27, 244, 248 ; use 537 s ; as gen. refl. 539 d. Idco w. ov, forbid, 686 i. lyyvs cp. 263 d ; w. gen. 445 c ; w. dat. 450. iy& dec. 27, 243, 246 ; use, 536 s; £7076 78 7 h. m V for od 27 f, 247 f. €i, e'Cirep, el p\i\, etre, el /ecu, el p.7] el, 701 f, g, i, m, 631 s, 639 a, 643 s, 674 f; el ydp, etOe, el, in wish 638 ; el tls 639 ; ell. w. el 84, el Se p.-q, &c, 710,717 c; eiprocl.786. -€ia- in opt. 293 d, e. «l8»s dec. 26, 233 c. €i'Koo-i(v) 52, 163 a. el'icco w. dat., gen., 455 g, cIkwv dec. 224a. [405 b. elpC be x eluu go 766. 3 ; enclit. 787 c : w. gen. 421 s, 437 ; w. dat. 459 ; w. pt. 679 ; % in hypall. 474. e'fapvos w. ace. 472 j. if-qs w. gen. 445 c, w. dat. 450 a. [426. 4£(€ cp(re) 557a, w. inf. 671 ; eiri 785. emxwpios w. gen. 437 b. €pT]uos, -6oj, w.gen. 41 4 b. ept- in compos. 385 d. epis, -ifw, w - dat. 455 ; dec. 17, 204. 'Epp^as,-7)y> dec. 15,196. 356 Zppcopevos INDEX I. §707. €ppw|X€vos cp. 257 d. ^pXO|4.at w. pt. 598 b, c ; pr. for fut. 609 c : i\04 oxyt. 781 d. IpJJvdec. 26, 152, 121. epwrda) w. 2 ace. 480 c. ?£\kvo-tik<£v (v) 163 c. «x9pos cp. 260, 261 e. 'dXs, -e«v, Att. gen. 220. &0S dec. 225 j, 199. F 4, 98 e, 100, 138 s ; in dec. 217; incj. 345; in pron. 27 f, g, 246 s ; in pros. 736 b. Z4, 137 d; w. ace, dat. 485 d : $auv, {Qv, dec. 26. Zevs, Zap, dec. 21, 224 f. -t«, verbs in, 349, 378 s. H 4, 106 ; ins. 311. XI 109 s, 118 d, 7, lis. *) or, than, 701 d, i, 1 ; w. compt. 511, 513, om. 511 c ; 7/ Kara, ?) ws, &c, 513 ; 1) ov 713 b. fj indeed, 685 c, 687. fj 8' 8s 518 f. [553 c. ■ft as adv. 380 c' ; w. sup. •f|8€ (184 e.) conj. 701 c. ■rj8op.ai w. dat. 456 ; in dat. 459 N. ; w. pt. 677. TJSiJsdec. 23, 213 s, 217, 233 ; cp. 260. fJKKTTos sup. 262 b : ijiu- "Tl " 1 * dat. pl- 198. -t)s in form. 386. 2 ; cp. 258. [262 b. ■fjo-o-ttv, -TTU3V, compt. fjorvyos cp. 257 d, 259 a. fjrc, ijroi, 701 d. [779 a. f|X«dec. 19, 214 s, 772 e, Acjs, dec. 225 j, 219 b. 4,137; changes 147 s. Oavd-rov, use 431 d. 8a w. ace. & uen. 432 f, 472 e ; w. el 639. Gavjicurrbv 6aXf]s const. 426 b. K-npijo-irei (6 KT)pv£) 571 b. KivSuveuco w. gen. 446 d. K^sdec. 19, 216b, 217c. kXcCs dec. 17, 207, 222 a. KX£rm]s cp. 262 d. kXvw w. gen. 432 a, 434 a', 413 ; as pass. 575 a ; as perf. 612'. Koivds & der., w. gen. & dat. 424, 437 b, 450. KdirTop.cu as act. 575 b. Kopafj dec. 17, 203. Kdpvs dec. 17, 204. Kop^vvvp.i w. gen. 414 a. KpdTos & der.w.gen. 407. Kpeio-crcov, kpoltlcttos, cp. 261b, 262 b. KpvirTa w. gen. 444 a. Kvpo), -4u, w. gen. or dat. 427, 450'; w. pt. 677 a. Kvtov dec. 18, 210. A 4, 137 ; XX < v\, XI, 150,143a,349l;changes of Xcr 152. §797 \ayxava GREEK. OfXOV 357 Xa-yyo-vw w. gen. 427. Xd0pa w. gen. 444 a. XdXos cp. 257 d. Xap|3dva> w. gen. 423, 426 ; Xa/S, mid. 578. \vy£ dec. 17, 203. Xvpa dec. 14, 194 s. Xvo) w. gen. 405 : XiW, X6cras, dec. 26. XuW,X£cttos, 261 a, 262b. M 4, 137 ; changes of &w. 148, 150, 152, 160. pd x V7} w. ace. 476 d, 685 c ; fia rbv — 532. pdicap, -aipa, 235 d. paitpds cp. 261b, e; /xa- tcpy, by far, 468. pdXa cp. 263 a ; llcLXXov, fidXicTTa, in cp. 510 ; /xaWov om. 513 i. pdX-ijs, virb, 228 c. pav0dvo> w. gen. 434 a, 413; w.inf. xpt. 657 k; rl /xaOujv ; 674 h. McwTKds dec. 227 b. pfyas dec. 24, 236 ; cp., 261 b ; ivelfau dec. 22, 211. -p.€0a, -^60-0(1,299: -jxedov 299 b, 9 c, page 7. peiwv cp. 261 a ; fielov as indecl. 507 e. [cp. 259. p&a$dec.23, 208 c, 233; pe'XXw w. inf. 598 a. p€X«i&der.w.gen.432d ; w. dat. 457 : 571 d. piv, fxivroi, 685 c, 701b, c; pos. 720: 6 fiiv 518 ; As Hiv 519 f. pg'o-os cp. 257 d, e ; use 508 : -oo) w. gen. 425 a. peo-Tds, -6w,w.gen.414a. pcrd 688, 689 c ; com- pounds w. gen. 424. peTairepiro), mid. 579. ptTaijv w. part. 662. p^rccm w. gen., dat., 421, 459. H^XP l (s) 164 ; w. gen. 445 c ; w. oO, &c, 557 ; conj. 701 h, 703 c. \lj\ adv. x ov, 686 s ; redund. 713 ; m^ emph., fiTj ov, 713 c, f ; ix-f) ri ye, p.r) 8ti (oirus), 717 d, g : conj. 701 e, 624 s : LLvbe", firire, conj. 701 c, a. \ir\Sels dec. 25, 240 b; p.-qd£v as indecl. 507 e. p.T}K€Tl < fMT] €Tl 165 c. pijXov dec. 16, 11 s, 771. p^v 685 c ; pos. 720. p^JTTjp dec. 210 b. -pi form 45, 313 s, 335. piKp w. dat. 466 c. vdos, vovs, dec. 16, 225 g. vv(v) 163 a, 685 c ; pos. 720 ; encl. 787 d. vv£ 17 f ; gen., dat, ace, 433, 469, 482. H4, 137; 655. Ol8£irovs dec. 21, 214 s. o'lkcios w. gen. 437 b ; w. dat. 450. o!kos om. w. gen. 438. olKTpds cp. 260. ol'poi 453 ; w. gen. 429 e. -010 Thessal. gen. 201. otopca > olp.a.1 parenth. 313 e ; w. gen. 413. o!os53; use 549 s, 563 s; in condens. 555 s, 565 ; in exclam. 564 b ; w. inf. 671 : olds re 556 c ; olov, ota, w. pt. 681. o'Cs, oh, dec. 19, 21. -ouridat.pl. 201 d. [679. OL\opaL as pf. 612 ; w. pt. oXLyos cp. 261 b, 262 b ; w. art. 523 f : oXiyov (delv) 665 ; dXiycp 486. 6Xos w. & wt. art, 523 e. opvupi w. ace. 472 f. opov & der. w. dat. 450 s, w. gen. 442 a ; w. ical 705 c ; 6p.ot.bs eip.i const. 657 j ; S/xus w. pt. 662. 358 ovojia INDEX I. vp* § 797. Svop.a in periphr. 437 c ; ace, dat., 485 y. 6ir- in pron. & adv. 377. 8irov, oitol • ttou, iroi • o5, of, 53 ; w. gen. 420 ; interchanged 704. 'Oirovs dec. 17, 207 c. Sirws adv. 53, 559 a, 624 e ; conj. 701 e, 624 s ; in ell. 626. opdeo w. oVws, fxr), 626 ; w. pt. 677. ope'-yop-ai w. gen. 430 b. 6pvis dec. 224 e. 6p\eo(JLai w. ace. 477 b. 5s rel., dec. 28, 250 : u,se as rel. 549 s, as complem. 563 s ; attr. 552 s, Att. 554 a, in- verse 554 c ; w. modes 640 s : 6? povXei 559 b : 8s as demonst. 518 f, 519 f : 8s possess. 252. 5 ; use 538 s. 8(ros53; use 549 s, 563 s; in condens. 556, 565 ; in exclam. 564 b ; w. inf.671: oVovasindecl. or adv. 507 e, f, 556 d ; 6' ovk, o\>x, oi>xh 165, 685 c ; x fi-q 686 ; interrog. 687 ; redund. 713 ; wt. fid 476 d : ov fir} w. subj. or fut. 597,627; oti x 6't 1 (8a ov,8ir as), "< '17 '. ov8€ls(oiWefs240b)24: ovdels 8ans ov 559. ovkovv therefore 687 c. oSv < ibv (&v d., 1.) 389 g, 685 c ; pos. 720. oi!v€Ka 126, 557a, 701 j. o«s dec. 17, 207, 778 c. oi»Tos dec. 28, 252 : use 542 s; x6'5e543s; in repetition, assent, 544; in address 401. 3, 546 ; pi. for sing. 489 d ; w. art. 524 : ovroal, 252c. oi»TO)(s) 164 ; x &Se 547. 6€t\« in wish 638 g. 6pa 701 e, 624, 53 v. 6tyi cp. 263 a ; w. gen. 420 ; w. ijv 571 d. II 4, 137 ; changes 147 s. iraidv dec. 18, 208. irats dec. 17, 204,778 b. iraXatds cp. 257 d. irdXiv in compos. 166. irapd (irapai 134, irdp 136) 686, 689 d ; in cp. 511 a ; w. pass. 586 d; in compos. 699 g: wdpa 699 e, 785. IIapdprnp.a, App., 80. iras dec. 23,729.2,778b, 793c ; w. gen. 416b ; w. art. 523 e; w.rts548c; w. rel. 550 f ; w. imv. 656 : trdv in compos. 166. [674 h. irdo-x«575a'; TLiradwv; irar^p dec. 18, 210, 208 f. [222 d. IlaTpoicXos dec. 21, iravw w. gen. 405 ; mid. 582 /3 ; w. pt. 677. irelOw w. 2 ace. 480 c ; w. dat. 455 g, 456. IIcipaLcvs dec. 220 e. ir&.as & der. w. gen. 445 c ; w. dat. 450. irtp/n-tt w. dat. 450 b ; w. 2 ace. 472g. [414b. Wvtjs cp. 258 ; w. gen. ircvOtKciis w. gen. 429 c. ir£p 389 h, 685 c ; w. pt. 674 f; pos. 720: end. 787 d. ir € pt (7r^ t £) 688, 689 f ; not elided 129; as adv. 703 b: 7rept785; oiwepi ir€pvo-i(v) 163 a. [527 a. irqvtKa ; w. gen. 420 a. •n-TJX^S dec. 19, 213 s. irXetojv, -£uv, -eiaros, -elv, 261 a, d ; ir\elov as indecl. 507 e, 511 c ; TrXeZo^-eio-rajin cp.510. irX£ov€KTT]s cp. 258 a. irXe'ws dec. 236 b ; & der. w. gen. 414 a. ttXt]0os ace, dat., 485 7 ; w. pi. 499 a. ttXtjv w. gen. 406 ; conj. 701 m : ttXV el 710. irXovo-ios, -Tt, mid. 582 5. iroXvs dec. 24, 236 ; w. art. 523 f ; cp. 261 ; w. ml 702 c : iroWov 431 a, 7roXX£ 468. -rroppo), Trpdo-ft), w. gen. 405, 420 a. iropepvpeos cp. 257 c IIocr€i8<»v dec. 208 f, 211a. trorifiroifiraSfkc, Xir6- re; &c, 53, 563 s ; pos. 720; enel. 787 b: ttot 164 a), irpore- pov, w. irplv 703 d. irpoTgpos cp. 262 c, d. 6s dec. 23, 232 ; -6s, -fit, cp. 257, 263. crir€os dec. 21, 222 d. o-to%6s dec. 226 b. c-Tox,d£o|i.cu w. gen. 430. crii dec. 27, 246 s ; use 536 s; aov, croi, at, encl. 787 s ; aol ethical 462 e : €T€pos 252. 5, 538 s. crooSpos cp. 257 a. crcj>w,cr W €,&c., 27,246 s. "Si\r\[ia A\KfmvLKovi97 c; 'Attuc&v, lliv8apu<6v(Bot.- ibrtou), 569 d. crw^w w. gen. 405 a. SwKpdrqs dec. 19, 213s. cj>p to V cp. 259. T4, 137; changes 147 s. TcLXas cp. 259. Tap.d = iyd) 428 b. Taptasdec. 15, 195. TavTTj adv. 380 c. TavTov, tclvtS, 199 a. Ta\vs, -€ws, cp. 261 b, e, 263 : T)}VTaxi-o-T7)v 483 d ; ws Taxi-crra, &c, 553 b,c. t« 389 C, 685 c, 701 a ; pos. 720 ; encl. 787 d. TcXevTao) w, gen. 405 ; pt. as adv. 674 b. tc'Xos adv. ace. 483. -T€'os,verb.in, 269d, 374f; w. dat. 458; const. 682, 572. [257 s. -T€pos, -raros, cp. in, TcVcrapes dec. 25, 240 e. ttjXIkos, -ovros, -6o~de, 53, 252, 547'. rffniU) mid. 579. Tip. aw w. gen. 431 b. Tipa>p60), mid. 579. tIs indef. dec. 28, 253, 255 e ; pos. 548 b, 720, 520 b; encl. 787 b; affixed 389 a : use 548 ; w. pi. 489 d, 501; rlas indecl. 507 e, g. tIs interrog. dec. 28, 253,255 e ; use 563 s; w. art. 531 a; in condens. 555 : ri yap, ri St, &c, 564 c ; tva rl 566 a. Ticnra6pvr)sdec. 225 d. t6 -ye, rb xal rb, irpb tov, 519 b ; rb vvv elvai 665 b: Tol, ral, = oi, al, 28 j. [pos. 720. cj>€, o (v, 27, Tot encl. 685 c, 787 d ; ;' toios, -ovros, -babe, 53, 252, 199 a, 547. to£€v« w. gen. 430. -tos, verbal in, 374 e, w. dat. 458. toctos, -ovtos, -babe, 53, 252, 199 a, 547. [253. TOV =S TWOS, &c, 28 f, g, Tpdire^a dec. 15, 791 c. Tpets dec. 25, 240 e. TpiT|pT]s dec. 213 c, 219 a, Tpta-ov Tj^iirdXavTov 242 e. Tpoira), -ov, -ovs, 485 a. rvyx&vo* w. gen. 426 s, 434 ; w. part. 677. tvvvos, -ovTos, 53, 252 a. t<3 th(wh)erefore 519 b. *Y i|/iXdv 4, 98 b, 106 ; v- 93 c, v- 93 c ; v < F, eF, 138, 142, 217 b, c. vPpicrr^s cp. 259 a. tryi^S cont. 120 f. v'8a>p dec. 206. vlds dec. 21 ; om. 438. -vpi, less Att. -vio, 315 a. vpiv, 3pas, &c, 247 g, i. im-dya) dav&Tov 431 d. {rcraKov6>, -T//COOS, w. gen., dat, 432 g, 455 g. vir&pyja w. gen. 425 ; w. dat. 459 ; w. pt. 677'. tnrep {vireip 134') 688, 689 j ; cp. 262 d. •utto {viral, vir, 136) 688, 689 k ; cp. 262 d ; w. pass. 586. -■us adj. 213 c ; cp. 258. vcrrcpeo), -ifw> -cubs, w. gen. 408. ■iitrT€pos,-Taros, cp. 262 d. #4, 137; 147 s, 159, 167. <{>alvco, mid. 582/3. oavepos elfxi 573 c. cj>€pTcpos, -tcrros, &c, cp. 262 b. , mid. 578 a, 585 : €v684b; w.gen. 429 e. oevryw as pass. 575 a. oTjpl, (f>aalv 571 c ; trj 574 ; ov 6ovc&> w. gen., dat., -cpi(v) old dat. 190, 163. 360 (fiikos GREEK INDEX. &4*\m> § 797. IXos cp. 257 d, 261 e. Xex|/ dec. 17, 151, 778. op€«, mid. 582 £ ; or 0j/?OS, W. 07TCOS, fli], 624 s ; om. 626 s. povTiv\ao-, mid. 579. v|t}jLos w. ace. 472 j. vo> w. gen. 412. »s dec. 17, 206, 224 f. X 4, 137; 147 s, 159. Xatpo) w. dat. 456. XapUis dec. 23 ; cp. 258. XaX*Jra(va> w. dat. 456. Xopis dec. 203 a ; x*P LV 380 a, w. gen. 436 d. Xelpdec. 18, 224 f: x ^- pwv, -lo-tos, 261, 262 b. Xoprfs dec. 16, 775. Xpdop.ai w. dat, ace, 466 b, 478. XP^ w. gen., ace, 473 b ; W. inf. 595 : ipf. 611. XPu£ w w - gen. 414 c. XP'np-a in periph. 446 a ; tL xpwa why 483 c. Xpovos, gen. ' 433, dat. 469, 485 e, ace. 482. XpvVeos dec. 23, 772 c. Xp«s dec. 224 e, 207 a. ^4,137; < 7nr, pa, 109 s, in cont. 7, 118 d, 11$ 8 j in dec. lis. <3, grave 784 : Additive particle 685 c. [syll. 768. Address 57 ; voc. 484, nom. 401. 3. Adjective 55, 173; dec. 22 s, 229 s; num. 25, 239 ; pron. 28, 249 : compar. § 798. adju LATIN & ENGLISH. ATTR 361 256 : der. 373 ; compos. 385 s : synt. 492 s, 506 s: pos. 718 f, s: Adj. Clause 62 h; pos. 718 o. [circumst., 58. Adjunct, prepos. x nude, complem. x Adopted stems 358. Adverb 55,685 ; num.52,241,pronom. 53, 377, charact., neg., interrog., &c, 685 s : cp. 263, 262 d ; der. 380 : synt. 685, 703 s • w. art. = adj. 526 ; attracted 554 d, 558 b; as prep'., as conn, and non-conn., 703; used subst. 706: pos. 18 e, s. Adverbial clause 62 h, pos. 718 p ; ace. 483, 380, gen., dat., 380; phrases 529, 698; inf. 655; pt. 674 d. Adversative conjunctions 701 b. ^olic dialect (Mol., M.) 82, 84, 87 a ; opt. 293 e ; verse 750. [tor, § 85. iEschines (iEschin.) fl. 345, Att. ora- jEschylus (iEsch.) fl. 484, Att. tra- gedian, § 85 : Agamemnon, Choephori, Eumenides, Persae, Prometheus, Sep- tem contra Thebas (Th.), Supplices. Affixes, open x close, 172 c; nude x euph. 183, 303: of dec. 11, 180 s, 20, analyzed and compared 12 s : of pers. pron. 27 e : of 9., subjective x obj., pri- mary x sec.,imv., inf., partic, 32,35 s, 285 s, 4.8, 321 s; nude 290 a, 313, 320; regular 303 ; union w. s. 304 s. Afformatives 360, 32 f. Agent, suff. of, 365 ; w. pass., gen. 586, 434, dat. 586, 461, 458, ace. 682 b. Agesilaus, see Xenophon. Agreement 63 a, 492s ; ace. to form x sense 493 s ; of subst. 393, adj. 504, pron. 505, verb 568. Alcseus (Ale.) fl. 606, Mol. lyrist. Alpha privative 385, 436. Alphabet 1 s, 90 s ; hist. 97. Alternative adv. 685 c ; conj. 701 d. Anabasis, see Xenophon. Anacoluthon 70 1 ; in synt. of appos. 396 c, nom. 402, adj. and pt. 504 b, compt. 511, art. 532, fin. verb 644 s, 649 s, 655, inf. and pt. 659, 667 g, ver- bal 683, particle 716. Anacreon fl. 540, Ion. lyrist : poems in imitation of, Anacreontica ( Anact.). Analysis of sentences 57 s, 72 s, words 75 e, cp. 29, verb 32, affixes 12 s, 27 e. 32, 35 s, metres 78. [verse 751. Anapaest 77 : anapaestic rhythm 742, Anastrophe 71 a ; of accent 785. Antecedent, def. or indef., 549 ; in clause w. rel. or om. 551; attracted 553 s : clause un. w. rel. clause 555 s. Antepenult 111, 767 f, 770. Antistrophe 744 e. COMP. GR. 16 Antithesis 6, 104 ; or contrast, 71 a. Aorist 30 b, 267 c, 273 s ; w. j 628 ; inf. 660, 598; pt. 674 e, 660 e; pass, and mid. interch. 576; aor. sub. = fut. pf. Aphaeresis 6, 103 c, 124 b. [617 c. Apocope 6, 103 c ; in particles 136. Apodosis 62 j ; see Conclusion. Apollonius Ehodius fl. 200, Epic poet. Apologia (Apol.), see Xenophon. Aposiopesis 68 e, 532. Apostrophe 6, 103 d, 127, 135 b ; accent 774, 788 b: rhetor. 70 g. Apposition, -tive, 58 ; dir., pred., modal, &c, 393; partitive 395, 417: synt. 393 s ; w. sentence 396, w. voc. 485 a, by synesis 394 c : appositional verb 59 a, 437. Apud (ap.) = quoted in. Aristophanes (Ar.) fl. 427, Att. come- dian, § 85 : Acharnenses, Aves, Eccle- siazusae, Equites, Lysistrata, Nubes, Pax, Plutus, Ranae, Thesmophoria- ztisae, Vespae : Aristophanic verse 753. Aristoteles (Aristl.) fl. 347, philos- opher (§ 85 b) : Rhetorica, &c. Arrangement, log., rhet., rhythm., 64; hyperb. 71 ; dir. or normal x indir. or varied, periodic x loose, 718; why varied 719 s. Arsis 741 ; affecting quant. 736 c. Article, prepos. x postpos., 28, 249 s ; incrasisl25; proclit. 786: synt., use as ffen.defin.518 s : as art. proper 520 s ; generic, 522 : limiting 523 s ; order of description x statement 523 ; w. avrdc 540 b ; w. ani, ntpi, 527 a ; in contrast, &c, = poss. pron., 530 : repeated 523 b, j, 534.4; omitted 533 s. Aspirate mute 4, 137 : breathing 93 : aspiration om. 159, 343, 167 ; trans- ferred 159 g, 167. [554. Assimilation 104 ; of rel. or antec. Asyndeton 68 d, 707; Eng. x Gr.707j. Attenuation of vowels 107, 114 : at- tenuated stems 341. Athenaeus fl. 228 A. D., scholar. Attic dialect 82, 85 ; old, mid., new, > Common, 85 a, b : dec. 200 ; gen. 220 f; redupl. 281 d, 357.2; opt. 293 c; imv. 300 d; fut. 305; accent 790. Attraction 70 q : in synt. of appos. 396 b, ace, &c, 474, agreement 500, 362 ATTR INDEX II. DAOT §798. adj. 508 s, pron. 552 s, 565, verb 573, 649 d, inf. and pt. 65V, 666 s, particle 715, 702 d; affecting pos. 719, 553, 662. Attribute 60 b, 492 b. Augment, syll. x temp., 277 ; rules 278 s; in dial. 284; in accent 783. Authority in prosody 726 b, 733. Auxiliary verbs 274, 285 a, 317, 679. Base in cp. 29, 256 a ; in cj. 289 e. Bekker's Edition of Homer, 1858 Bceotic (Bceot., b.) dialect 82. [(Bek.). Breathings 4, 93 ; < f, 2, 141 ; in dial. 167 c: marks 98 b. Breve (short syllable) 725 a. Cesura, of foot, verse, masc, fem., &c, ca?sUral pause, syll., 745; affect- ing quantity 736 c. Cases, dir. or indir., right or oblique, subjective, obj., or resid , 10, 179, 397s; affixes lis, 180s; hist. 186s: use 397 s, generic 485, in denoting place or time 470, 482 e, absolute 675, w. prep. 689 : Latin 399 b, c. Catalectic verse 743. Causal conjunctions 701 j. Causative verbs 379, 473, 577, 581. Cf. = confer, compare, consult. Characteristic 172 d : exponents 66. Chief = principal clauses 626 : chief = primary tenses 267 b : -ly (ch.). Choral odes 744 e. Chorus using sing. 488 a. Chronic x achronic forms 590 a. Circumflex accent 94, 767 e, g; 771 : -flexed syll. or vow. 768 ; long 771, 726. Circumstantial adjunct, or circum- Cj. as conjugation, [stance, 58 d, s. Clauses 57 ; kinds 62, 58 h ; pos. 718 o, s, 721. [compos. 388 b. Close vowels 107 a : affixes 172 c : Cognate vowels 4, 110 b : consonants 4, 137 b, 167 : themes 338 d. Collectives 55 ; w. pi. 499. Comedy, comic (com.), 85 s. Common dialect 85 a : gend. 174 : commonly (comm.). Comparison (cp.) 29 (anal.), 256 s ; by use of adv. 510 ; accent 776 : see p. 11: Comparative (compt., comp.) w. gen., w. v, &c, 408, 511 s; w. dat. of measure 468; abs.,*oo, as pos., 514 s: Comp. conjunction >? 701 1. Compilative 57, 484 s : -part 60. Complementary adjunct, or comple- ment, 58 d, e, 63 f : pron., adv., 66 d, 563 s : conjunction 701 i : clause 643 s. Complete tenses 30 b, 267 c ; redupl. 280; auxil.and nude forms 317 s, 679 a: x def. and indef. 590, 599: special uses 599; preter. 268, 600; as pres. or fut. 610. [and parts 62 b, g. Complex modification 59 : sentence Composition 359, 383 s ; dir. x indir. loose x close,double, &c, 387 s ; vowel 383 a ; elision 128 a, 282 a ; augm., &c , 282; synt. relations 722; accent 783. Compound word 359 b ; verb 387, 699: sentence 62 c: vowel (diphthong) 108 : system 267 f : constr. 68 f, 495. Concession expr. by pt. or w. conj. 674 f, 701 g. [631 s ; omitted 638. Conclusion x premise 62 j ; forms of, Condensation, 555, 565. Condition 62 j ; see Premise: Con- ditional conj. 701 f ; sentences, forms of, 631 s, rel. 641 ; for oth. forms, 639. Conjugation (cj.), distinctions 30, 265 s ; hist. 271 s ; anal. 32, 35 s, 277 s ; paradigms 37 s, 48 b; prefixes 277, 284; affixes 285, 48, 321 ; stem 47, 49, 336: quant. 728 s; accent 776, 780. Conjunctions (conj.) 55, 65 s, 700, classes, origin, 701 ; om. 707 ; repeat- ed 714; pos. 718 a, 720. Connecting vowels, or connectives, of dec. 12 s, 183, cp. 29, 256 s, cj. 32 h, 35 s, 290 s, 326, compos. 383. Connective exponents, conj. x conn, pron. or adv., primary x sec, 66 : pos. 718 a, 720. Consecutive conj. 701 k, 671 d, e. Consonants 4, 137 s ; in Gr. alph. 98; old 138; changes 139 s; final 160; movable 162 ; dial, and poet. var. 167 s ; added or om. in s. 217, 344 s, 348. Construction, personal for impers. 573 : Construct™ prcegnans 704. Contingent sentence 61 f ; modes 30 c ; 613 s; particle 618,685 c: Contingen- cy, pres. x past, fut., 613 s. Contraction (cont, ct.) 7, 117 s, 131; quant. 726; accent. 772: in versif. 741 b : Contr. verbs 42, 309, in Lat. 43. Coordinate vowels 110 b ; consonants 137 b, 168; sentences 62 c ; conjunc- tions 701: Coordination 62c ; for subord. Copula 60 b ; omitted 572. [705. Copulative conjunctions 701 a. Correlatives, pronominal, 53, 377. Corresponding vowels and conso- nants 138 ; connectives 66 f. Cp., in § 50 = compounded ; in the Indexes = comparison, [accent 773. Crasis 117, 124, 133; quant. 726; Ct. = contracted. Cyropsedia, see Xenophon. Dactyl 77 : -ic verse 742, 747. 798. DAT! LATIN & ENGLISH. FLUE 363 Dative 10, 186 f, 190, 398, double office 399 : w. prep. 688 s, w. comp. verbs 699 f, g. See page 12. Declarative sentence 61. Declension 10 s, 173 s; distinctions 173; three methods 180; gen. rules 181; affixes lis, 183; hist. 186; par- adigms compared w. Lat. 14, &c. : Dec. I. 14 8, 189, 193; Dec. n. 14, 16, 187, 199; Dec. in. 14, 17, 186, 202; dial. 20 s; irreg. 21, 223; def. 227: adj. 22, 229; num. 25, 240 s; pt. 26, 234; pron. 27, 239: quant. 728, ac- cent 775 s. [verbs 337. Defective nouns 227 ; adj. 238 ; Definite tenses 30 b, 267 c ; x indef. 590 s ; for oth. tenses 602 s : article 520 : relatives 549. [479. Definitive, old, 249, 516 : noun (ace.) Degrees of compar. 256 ; use 510 ; interch. 515 : Degree-sign 256 a, 29. Demonstrative pron. and adv. 28, 53, 252, 377 ; synt. 542 ; om. bef. rel. 551 f; in attr. 552 s; for rel. 562. Demosthenes fl. 355, Att. orator, § 85. Dependent sentences 62 b, 58. 3, h. Deponent, mid. x pass., 266 c, 576 b. Derivation, -tive, 54, 359 s ; euph. changes 361; quant. 731; accent 789 s. Diaeresis 6, 105 ; accent 772. 3 ; mark 96 b, 110 a: in versif. 745 h. Dialects 81 s : variations in orthog. and orthoepy 130, 167, dec 20 s, &c, cj. 48, 284, 321, accent 790 ; Dia- lectic Forms {D. F.). Digamma = Vau ; see F, before Z, in Greek Index: verbs 345. Diminutives, gend. 175 ; der. 371. Diphthongs 4, 106 ; prop, x improp. 108 ; corresp. 115 a; resolved 105, 132 ; quant. 526, 737 ; in accent. 767. Direct cases 10, 179, 397, 186 c, in accent. 775: complement, obj., 58 e: discourse, quot., 62 k, 643, w. indir. 644, 659: compounds 388 : order 718. Distinct sentence, verb, mode, 62 a, 30 c; in depend, clauses, x incorp.,657. Distinctive adv. 685 c : conj. 701 c. Distributive pronouns 55, 501. Division of syllables 111. Doric dialect (Dor., d.) 82, 86 s : fu- ture 305 d, 325 b : accent. 790. Double accusative 480 : consonants 4, 137 a, d, 1 70; affecting quant. 725, 734: d. cons, verbs 41, 270 c, 311. Doubtful vowels 4, 106, 726. 3. Dual number 178 ; old plur. 186 g, 271 c; in cj. 299: used w. pi. 494. Elegiac poets 83 : verse 749. Elements of the sentence 57 : of the word 172; in dec. 183, cp. 256, cj. 32, der. 359 s, compos. 383 s. Elision, see Apostrophe. Ellipsis 68 ; in synt. of appos. 394 s, gen. 418 b, 438, dat. 450 d, 462, ace. 476, adj. 506, 511b, art. 527, 533, pron. 536, 551, 555, 562, 565, verb 571, 626, 636, 647, inf. 668, pt. 676, 678 c, particle 707. Emphatic changes in s. 346 : parti- cles 685 c : repetition 69 b : position Enclitics 787 ; accent. 788. [719 a. Ending, see Flexible. Epenthesis 6, 103 ; see Insertion. Epic, or Homeric, language (Ep., e.) Episema 1, 91, 98 d. [83. Epithet x predicate adj. 59 a, 492 b. Equestri, De Ee, see Xenophon. Equal, or quadruple, rhythm 742. Essential x inflective 172 a, c. Ethical dative 462 e. Etymology 172 s ; tables 9 s. Euphonic changes 99 ; of vowels 7, 113 s, of consonants 8 , 139 s, 147 s: affixes, dec, cj., 183, 187, 303, 271 f. Euripides fl. 441, Att. tragedian, § 85 : Alcestis, Andromache, Bacchae, Cyclops, Electra, Hecuba, Helena, Heraclidae, Hercules Furens, Hippo- lytus, Ion, Iphigenla in Aulide, Iphi- genlain Tauris, Medea, Orestes, Phoe- nissae, Khesus, Supplices, Troades. Exclamation, nom. in, 401 b, gen. 429 f, dat. 453, ace. 476 a, pron. or adv. 564 b, inf. 670, interj. 684 b : ex- clamatory sentence 61 d. Exempli gratia (e. g.), for example. Exponents for words 65, sentences 66; pos. 718 d, 720: exponential ad- junct 58 c. [3 2 4c, 48 c. Extension of vowels 103 b, 135,322c, Feet 77, 740 ; interch. 741 b, 747, 751, 755; ictus 741c; caesura 745. Feminine gender 174 s ; in adj. 232 ; w. masc. form 234 : cassura 745 c. Figures affecting letters and sounds 6, 99: of syntax, of rhetoric, 67 s. Final consonants 160, movable 162 : conjunctions 701 e : clauses, modes in, 624 : syll. of verse 738 : accent 769. Finite modes, sentences 62 a ; synt. of, 568 s; interch. w. incorporated 657, 659, 671. Flexible endings, or flexives, of dec. 12, 183 ; of cj. 32 i, 295, 328. Flourished (of authors ; fl.). Fluents (X, P ) 4, 137. 364 FORM INDEX II. INFL §798. Formation 172, 359 ; of simple words 362, compound 383; quant. 731; ac- cent 789: formative * radical 172 b. Fractional numbers 242 d, e. Fragment (Fr.). —French (Fr.). Future indef. 30 b, 266 s, 273 s ; subjective tense 584; wants sub. and imv. 269 b; liquid 152; Att., Dor., 305, 325 b: second 289: synt. 596 s; for imv. 597 ; gnomic 606 ; for pres. or past 610 ; in final clause 624 b ; inf. 598, 660 ; pt.674 e, expr.purpose 598 b ; mid. for act. 584, for pass., v. v., 576 a, c : def. and complete 596 a : Contin- gency 614. Future Perfect 30 b, 267 e, 273 e, 319: use 601. [490 s. Gender 174 ; rules 175 s : in synt. General or indef. premise, 634, 641. Generic use 63 g, 392 a ; of cases, 485, tenses 602 s, modes 651, connec- tives 705: time for fact 602 c, con- tingency 614 b : article 522. Genitive 10, 186 e, 398, 485 b: w. art. 523 c; in pron. 538; abs. 675; w. prep. 688 s. See page 12. Gentile x patrial noun or adj. 368 c. Gnomic use of pres. 602 d, aor., &c, Government, or regimen, 63. [606. Grammatical x logical parts 60. [768. Grave accent 94, 767 e, 784 : syllable Hdt. = Herodotus. Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Grseca, see Xenophon. [pated 756 a Hephthemim 740 b, 745 c ; antici- Herodotus (Hdt.) fl. 443, Ion. his- torian, § 83. [748. Heroic (Epic) poetry 83 : verse 743, Hesiodus (Hes.) fl. 800 ?, poet (Ep.): Opera et Dies, Scutum Herculis, The- Heteroclites 223, 225. [ogonia. Heterogeneous nouns 223, 226. Hexameter 743, 748 : -pody 740 b. Hiatus, how avoided, 99 s, 117 s, 162, 217 ; 190; in poetry, 746 a, 737 s. Hiero, see Xenophon. Hippocrates fl. 430, medical writer in Ion., § 83. [ondary tenses 267 b. Historic present 609 : historical = sec- History of Greek lang. 81, 359, orthog. 97, dec 187, pron. 246, 249 s, cp. 264, Cl. 271, 336, accent 789. Homerus fl. 900 ?, Ep. poet, § 83 : Ilias, Odyssea, Hymni (in Apollinem, Bacchum, Cererem, Martem,Mercuri- unij Venerem), Batrachomyomachia. Hypallage 70 r, 474 a. Hyperbaton 71, 719 s. Hypercatalectic verse 743. Hypothetical period 62 j, 631 s. Iambus, Iamb, 77 : Iambic rhythm 742, verse 755. [part of a work. Ibidem (lb.) = in the same work or Ictus in pronunc. 79 c : metrical 741. Id est (i. e.) = that is. Idem (Id.) = the same author. Illative, or inferential, adverbs 685 c. Imitative verbs 378 c. Immediate = nude adjunct 58 c : im- mediate, or included, x causative verbs 473, 582 /3. Imperative (imv.) 30 c, 269 s, 272 e, 655; in perf. 318, 599 d; x sub. w. nrj 628 : sentence 61 c. Imperfect (impf.,ipf.) 30 b, 267, 271 d ; x aor. 591 s ; x aor. and plup. as conting. or indef. 615 a, 616 b, in wish 638 b, g; for aor. or plup. 603 c, 604, 612, pres. 611. Impersonal verbs 571, pass. 589 ; inf. and pt. 657 i ;' pt. abs. in ace. 675 : verbal 682. Improper diph. 4, 108 : redupl.357.3. Impure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112. Imv. = Imperative. Inceptive verbs 350, 379 a. Incorporation, -ated sentence, verb, mode, x distinct or finite, 62 a, 30 c, 657. See Infinitive, Participle. Indeclinable (aptote) 227 a. Indefinite (indef.) pron. andaefa. 27 s, 53, 245, 253, 548 : rel. 549 : subject of verb 571, inf. 667 h : tenses 30 b, 267 c ; x def. 590 s, complete 599 ; how sup- plied 603: action 616: premise 634. Independent sentence 62 e : elements 57 f : nominative 401. Indicative (ind.) 30 c, 269, 271 s : synt., x sub. and opt. 613; expr. suppos. contrary to fact 615, habit w. av 616, purpose 624, wish 638; in hypoth. period 631 s, 634 s ; in indir. disc. 643 s; generic use 651. Indirect cases 10, 179, 186 c, 397 s : complement, obj. 58 e: compounds 388: disc, or qubt 62 k: order 718 r. Infinitive 30 c, 269, 272 : synt. 657 s ; x pt. 657 d, k ; in indir. disc. 659 ; re- lation to time 660 ; as neut. noun, w. orwt. art., 663 s; of specif, adv., abs., 665; w. ace. 666, other cases 667; redund. or om. 668 ; as imv., &c, 670 ; w. connectives 671 : pos. 718 1 ; accent 780 s. Inferential, or illative, adverbs 685 c. Inflection 172 ; three periods 276. Inflective x essential 172 a, c. §798. INSE LATIN & ENGLISH. OBJE 365 Inseparable particles 385, 252, 688 e. Insertion of cons, to prevent hiatus 99 s, 217, 190; of e in contr. 120 i; of P, mid. mute, 146 ; for metre 171 ; of i7, ei, 291 c ; cont. 615 : see Complete. Plural (plur., pi., p.) 178, 186, 271 ; signs 12, 33 a: interch. or joined w. sing, or dual 488 s, 494 s, 499 s, 569. Plutarchus fl. 80 A. D., biographer and philosopher: Pompeius, &c. Poetic (poet., po., p.), poetry, 83 s. Polysyndeton 69 f. Position of words and clauses 718 s, 721 e : in prosody 725, 734 s. Positive degree 256 ; joined or interch. w. sup. or compt. 512, 515 : sent. 61 e. Possessive pronoun 28, 252. 5, 538 ; w. or implied in art. 524, 530 e: geni- tive 443. [cles, &c, 720. Postpositive article 249 b, 250 : parti- Potential opt., ind., 636 a. Precession of vowels 107, 114 s, 130 ; in contr. 115 s; in aflix 195; in s. of dec. 114 d, 217, of cj. 341; &c. Predicate 57 ; -part, log. x gram., 60 ; pos. 718 c, s: adj., &c, 59 a. Prefixes 172 c; of verbs 32, 277 s, Preformatives 32 c, 356. [284. Premise 62 j ; forms 631 ; indef. or gen. 634 ; om. 636. Preposition 55 ; elided 128 ; apoc. 136; w. and wt. case as adv. 382, 703: synt. 688 s, 487; in compos., tmesis, 699, 486; constr. prseg. 704; pos., accent, 718 d, 785 s, 794. 5. Prepositional adjunct 58 c, 706. Prepositive vowel 106 : article 249 b. Present definite 30 b, 267 : generic tense, gnomic, 602 s; historic, pro- §798. PRET LATIN & ENGLISH. SUBJ 367 phetic, 609 ; for perf. 612 ; x aor. w. ixr, 628 : contingency 613 s. [600. Preteritive use, verbs, &c, 46, 268, Primary tenses 30 b, 267 b, 271 s ; followed by sub. 617 : affixes 32 i, 35 s, 286 : elements of sent. 67. Primitive x derivative 350. Principal word 57 h : sentence 62 b. Prior tense (impf., aor., plup.) 615. Proclitics, or atona, 786. Prohibition w. /aiJ 628. Prolepsis 71 b, 474 b, 657. [377. Pronominal correlatives 53, 362 e, Pronoun 55, 27 s, 243 s, 509, 535 s. See Article; Substantive, Personal, Adjective, Indefinite, Relative, &c. Pronunciation, four methods, 79. Proparoxytone 768, 770. Proper diphthong 4, 108 : redupl. 357 : name w. or wt. art. 522 g, 533 a. Properispome 768, 771. Protracted Stems 346 s. Protasis = premise 62 j. Pt., part., = participle. Pure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112 : nouns in Dec in. 19, 212 s; verbs 42 s, 270 c, 309, 313. Q. v. = quod vide, which see. Quadruple, or equal, rhythm 742. Quantity, natural x local, 725 s ; in dec. 728 s, cj. 728, 730, der. 731. Quotation or disc, dir. x indir., 62k. Radical x formative 172 b, 359. Rare (r.). [769. Recessive x retentive or final accent Reciprocal pronoun 27, 244. 3. Redundant nouns 233 b : verbs 338. Reduplication 280, 273 e, 284 ; Att., 281 d ; in compos. 282 ; in 2 aor. and fut. 284 e, s: in s., proper, &c, 357. Reflexive pronoun 27, 244, 248 ; use, dir. x indir., 537 s, 513 f, 541 h. . Regular affixes of verb 303, 35 s. Relative Pronoun and Adverb 28, 53, 250, 254 s, 377: synt. 549 s; attr. 522 s ; condens. 555 ; rel. for defin. and conn, particle 557: w. another conn., &c , 561 : Clauses 640 s. [Xenophon. Republica Atheniensium, De, see Residual cases, 10, 397 s : dat. 465 s. Retention, fig. of synt., 70 v. [769. Retentive x recessive or final accent Rhythm 740 s ; affecting pos. 718 g. Root 172 b, 340. 3, 359. Rough breathing 93 ; w. init. v and p 93 c, d ; < F, 2, 141, 345 ; mutes 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 147 s, 159, i67« Sappho fl. 611, iEol. lyrist : Sapphic verse 750. 4. [738 b, 744 b. Scanning 746 d : continuous scansion Scholia, notes of Greek grammarians. Scilicet (sc) = namely. Scripta Sacra (S. S.) : Septuagint (Lxx.), Psalms, Proverbs, &c; New Testament, Matthew (Mat., Mt.), Mark (Mk.), Luke (Lk.), John (Jn.), &c. Second tenses and systems 289 ; rel. to stem 47, 336 b, 340. 4; use 338 b. Secondary tenses 30 b, 267 b, 271 d, s; conting. and indef. 615 s ? w. opt. 617 ; w. av 618 ; in hypoth. per. 631 s ; expr. wish 638 : affixes 32 i, 35 s, 286. Semivowels 4, 137 ; four old, 138 ; changes of and w., 139 s, 147 s, 1 68 s. Sentence 56 ; parts 57 s ; kinds, con- nection, 61s; condensed 555, 565 ; pos. 718 n, s, 721 : words in appos. w., 396 : sentential analysis hi s, 72 s ; exponents Sequence of modes, law of, 615. [p^. Sequens (s) = following. Short vow. and syll. 4, 106, 725 s ; elided 127; >long in dec 194, 213 s, cp. 257, cj. 275 d, 288 a, 310, 314, 347, compos. 386 c [139 s, 151 s, 169 s. Sibilants 4, 137 s ; changes of or w., Signs of relation or case, number, and gender, in dec, 12 ; of degree, in cp., 29; of person, number, voice, mode, and relation, in cj., 32 i, 33; of tense 32 g, 35 s. Simple sentence 62 e : vowels x diph- thongs 4, 106: words 359: der. 362 s; accent 791s: succession 62 d, 705 a. Singular (sing., s.) 178 ; interch. or joined w. pi. 488 s, 499 s, 569. Smooth, or soft, breathiw) 93; for rough 93 c, 167 c ; < f 141 : mutes 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 147 s, 1 67 s. Sophocles 11. 468, Att. tragedian, § 85 : Ajax, Antigone, Electra, (Ecli- pus Coloneus, (Edipus Tyrannu*, Phi- Ipctetes, Trachinise ; Fragmenta. Specification, ace. of, 481 : nom. in, Spirants 4, 137s. See 2, F, I. [402b. Stanza x system 740 a, 744. Stem (s) x root 172 ; of noun 180b: ofuer6 270b, 32, 47, 336 s. Stem-mark, or characteristic, 172 d. Subject of sentence 57 ; -part, log. x gram. 60 ; pos. 718 c, s : of zoord 63 a, 492, finite verb 400, pass. 586, inf. 666; ora., subj. of appos. 394, adj. 506, art. 527, rel. 551, verb 571, pt. 676. Subjective cases 10, 397 s : gen., adj., 444 g: affixes 285, 32 i, 35: sense of middle 582: neg. 686, 53 IV. 3,68 SUBJ INDEX II. ZEUG §798. Subjunctive (sub.) vowel 108 : mode 30 c, 269, 272 d; x ind., opt., 613, 269c, 617 g; w.prim. tenses 617; w.ok combined 619; in final clauses 624. as fut. 627, as imv. 628 ; in hypothi per. 631 s, as indef. prem. 634 ; "in rel and temp, clauses 640 s ; of doubt 647 : for opt. 560, 653, fut. 617 b. Subordination, -ate clause, 62 b, h ; see Dependent: conjunctions 701. 2. Subscript, see I in Greek Index. Substantive 55, 57 s; dec. 173 ; cp. 262 d; der. 362 s; synt. 393 s: pron. 27, 243; synt. 536: verb w. gen. 437; w. dat. 459 ; om. 572, 676, 678 c, in conden. 555,565 : clause 62 h, 66 d, 643. Succession, Simple, 68 d ; early use Suffixes in der. 360. [705 a. Superlative 256 s, 510 s ; w. gen. 419 c ; w. dat. 468 ; w. positive, iv toIs, el?, doubled, 512; w. reflex. 513 f; abs., " of eminence," interch., 514 s. Syllables, division 111 ; union 117 ; quant. 725 c; accent 766 s: syllabic augment 277 : syllabication 111. Syllepsis x zeugma 68 f, g, 495 s. Symposium, or Convivium, - see Xen- Synseresis 6, 105. [ophon. Syncope 6, 103, 140, 144 ; in Dec. in. 207, 210, 217 ; in fut. 305 b ; in s. 342 j in der. 361 d: metrical 743 g, 763 a. Synecdoche 70 j, 481, 587. 2. Synesis 70 p ; in appos. 394 c, adj., pron., verb, 498 s, 569, tense 608 s, mode 653 s. Synizesis, or Synecphonesis, 117 b, 220 d, 222 b, 323 c, 746 b, c. [744. System in cj. 267 f ; in versif. 740 a, Tau form in cj. 352. Temporal numbers 52, 243 : augment 277 s : conjunctions 701 h : clauses 641. Tenses 30 b, 265, 267 ; systems 267 f, 289 b ; formation 31 ; hist. 271 s ; signs 32 g, 288, changed 152, 305 s, 325; base, or tense-stem, 289 e; first x sec- ond 289, 336, 338 b, 340: synt. 590 s. Tense-sign, -stem, -system, see Tenses. Tetrameter 743. [cj. 270 b. Theme 172 e; in Dec. 111. 202 ; in Theocritus fl. 280, Dor. poet, § 86. Theognis fl. 544, Ion. elegiac poet. Thesis 741 ; quant, in, 736 d, 737. Theta form in cj. 353. Third future, see Fut. Perf. [§ 85. Thucydides fl. 423, Att. historian, Time of verb 267 ; absolute x relative, 607 ; generic 602 c, 614 b : of vow. and3 : syll. 725 : cases expr , 482 e* 485 e. Tmesis 388 c, 699 d, h, s. Tone, or accent, 766 s : places 767. Transitive verb 55, 486 c ; or intrans. 577 : sense 70 c. [740 b, 745 c. Trimeter 743 ; Iambic 756 : triemim Trochee 77 : -aic verse 742, 760. Ultima 111 a ; in accent. 767 s. Union of syllables 117 s ; accent, in, Usually (usu.). [722 s: vow. 383 a. V. I. = varia lectio, various reading : v. v., vice versa = and the converse. Variable stems 49, 336 s : varied or- der 719. Vectigalia, Venatio, see Xenophon. Verb 55, 57 c ; cj., distinctions 30, 265 s; classes, in -w x - M i, 270 c, de- ponent 266, irregular, &c, 336 s, 378 s, appositional 59 a; hist. 271 ; forms ana- lyzed 32, translated 34 ; prefixes 277 ; affixes 35 s, 285, 48, 325 s ; generai par- adigm 37, 48 b ; mute, liquid, &c, 38 s, 304 s; contract 42, 309. 48 c, 321s; in -yu 45, 313, 335 ; preteritive 46, 268, 317s; stem-49, 336; catalogue 50: der. 378; compos; 387: synt , agreement 568 s, 492 s, w. subj. om., impers., 571 ; om. 572; pers. for impers. 573: use of voices 575, tenses 590. modes 613 : quant. 728, 730; accent 776, 780. Verbal 362 e ; noun 363, adj. 269 d, 374, adv. 381 : w. gen. 444, dat. 458, ace. 472 j; impers. 682. Verse, versification, 740 s, 766. 2 ; kinds 742 s ; caesura 745 ; dact. 747, anap. 751, iamb. 755, troch. 760. Vision, fig. of, 70 u, 609. Vocal elements 4, 106 s. Vocative 10, 179, 186 g ; same w. nom. 181 s, 203, 208 f; in Dec. 1. 194. 2: synt. 484 s : accent 775, 779. Voices 30, 265 s ; hist. 271 e, 274 : synt. 575 s. [655. See Imperative. Volitive sentence 61 : mode 30 c, Vowels 4, 106 s ; open x close 107 s ; pure x impure 112; precession, kin- dred, 114; union 117 s; dial. var. 130: connect, of dec. 12, 183 s, of cj. 32 h, 35 s, 290, 326, of compos. 383 ; v. form in cj. 355 : quant. 725 s ; accent 767 s. With (w.). —Without (wt.). Xenophon fl. 401, historian, biogra- f)her, and essayist (Att., § 85): Agesi- aus, Anabasis, Apologia Socratis, Cyropaedia, De Re Equestri (Eq.), Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Graeca, Hiero, Lacedaemoniorum Rcspublica, Magister Equitum, Memorabilia So- cratis, (Economicus, De Republica Atheniensium, Symposium, Vectiga- lia, Venatio. Zeugma x syllepsis 68 f, g, 495 s. 799. TABLE OF SECTIONS. In each division below, the numbers in the first column indicate paragraphs or sections In former editions of the Grammar ; while those in the second refer to corresponding sec- tions in the Revised and Compendious Editions. A small s signifies and the following. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. § § § § § § § § § 14 8 94s 83 s 186 153 254 s 217 304 306 364s 16 96 86 187 154 249 c V 148 a 307 366 17 s 79 87 188 155 s 256 s 218 s 310 308 367 21 2 88 189 157 258 220 345 309 368 97 89 190 158 259 221 307 310 369 22s 98 90 191 159 260 s 222 311 311 370 24 106 s 91 192 160 s 262 223 308 312 371 25 108 s 92 194 162 s 263 224 313 s 313 372 26 110 93 195 164 265 225 s 315 s 314 373 s 27 113 94 196 165 s 30a 227 313 b 315 375 28 114 95 s 197 s 266 P 340 316 376 29 115 97 199 167 s 267 228 s 50 317 377 30 117 98 200 169 269 233 268 318 378 31 118 99 201 170 270 234 317 319 379 32 119 100 202 171s 271 235 318 320 380 33s 120 s 101 203 176 s 272 236 312 321 381 38 124 102 204 178 s 273 237 s 320 322 382 39 125 103 206 180 274 239 319 323 722 k 40 126 104 207 181 275 240 317 324 383 41 127 s 105 208 tf 328 241 321 325 384 s 42 129 106 210 297 c 242 322 326 386 43 s 130 107 211 182 297 243 323 327 387 s 45 131 108 209 183 275 d 244 324 328 389 46 132 s 109 204 s N. 326 a 245 325 329 391 47 134 110 212 184 293 246 326 56 s 48 135 s Ills 213 s 185 276 a 247 s 328 s 330 392 49 137 113 215 313 s 249 332 331s 393 s 50 138 s 114 216 S 326 e 250 333s 333s 395 s 61 151 115 219 *,S 327 251 335 335 488 N. 137 d 116 220 186 276 b 252 50 336 489 52 147 117 s 217 187 277 253.1 325 d 337 494 53 148 119 218 188 278 2 338 397 54 150 120 221 189 279 254s 47 339 398 55 151 121 222 190 280 336 340s 399 56 152 122 223 191 281 340 342 400 57 153 s 123 224 192 282 257.2 337 343 401 58 156 124 225 193 283 3 338 344 402 59.7 145 a 125 226 194 284 258 339 345 403 8 157 126 227 195 285 259 341 346 404 60 158 127 228 196 286 260 s 342 347 s 405 61 149 128 229 197 287 263 343 s 349 406 62 159 129 230 198 288 264 345 350 407 63 160 130 231 199 289 265 346 425 64 145 s 131 232 200 305 266 s 347 351 408 65 161 132 233 201 306 271 348 352 409 66 162 s 133 234 202 290 272 352 353 410 67 164 134 235 289 e 273 s 349 354 411 68 165 s 135 236 203 291 277 s 351 355 412 69 167 s 136 237 s 204 292 3491 356 413 70 169 s 137 s 239 s 205 293 279 s 350 357 414 71 171 139 241 206 s 294 282 353 s 358 415 72 172 140 242 208.1 290a 283 s 357 359 416 73 173 141 243 2 313 287 s 355 360 417 74 174 142 247 3 320 289 s 351 361 418 75 175 143 246 209 295 s 296 350 362 419 76 176 s 144 s 244 210 297 297 349 y 363 420 77 178 248 211 298 298 352 s 364 421 78 10 146 245 N. 163 b 299 353a 365 422 179 147 249 212 299 300 345 366 423 79 180 148 250 213 300 301 358 367 424 80 181 149 251 214 301s 302 s 359 s 368 s 426 81 182 150 s 252 215 303 304 362 370 427 82 183 s 152 253 216 309 305 363 371 428 370 SECTIONS COMPARED. §800. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. 372 429 437 s 481 515 646 570 s 592 627 667 373 430 439 482 516 547 572 593 628 s 671s 374 431 440 s 483 517 s 548 573 594 629.1 656 c 375 s 432 442 s 484 519 549 574 595 630 673 378 s 433 444 504 520 s 550 575 603 631s 674 380 s 434 492 522 s 551 606 633s 677 382 435 445 491 524 552 576 609 634/3 657 k 383 s 436 s 446 495 s 525 553 603 635 674 386 439 447 s 506 526 s 554 577 s 599 s 636 678 387 440 449 507 y 559 b 580 605 637 679 388 441 450 v 502 528 555 581 596 638 s 675 s 389 442 507 e 2 559 c 582 601 640 680 390 443 451 489 529 556 583 598 641a 504 b 391a 437 b 491 530 557 584 s 610 657 h P 443 b 452 508 531 558 586 s 613 s 642 s 682 I 438 b 453 499 532 560 588 618 s 644 683 436 c 454 498 it. 556 d 589 s 614 s 645 684 392 s 444 455 500 533 561 591s 269 646 685 394 445 456 508 534 562 617 647 686 s 395 446 457 s 509 535 563 593 615 648 688 396 447 459 504 b 536 s 564 V 620 649 s 689 s 397 448 460 510 537 3 551 g 594 616 707 398 449 461 611 538 565 595 a 637 b 712 399 450 462 512 539 564 (3 637 c 652 s 699 400 451 463 s 513 539.2 566 i 647 d 654 s 700 s 401s 452 465 514 540 s 567 627 656 705 403 453 466 515 543 568 596 623- 657 703 404 454 467 s 516 s 544 495 s 597 a 597 658 706 405 455 469 520 a 501a 598 628 659 704 406 456 470 s 521s 545 s 571 599 s 638 660 707 407 457 s 472 523 547 672 648 d 661 708 s 408 459 473 624 548 499 601 624 662 711 409 460 474 625 549 569 s 602.1 650 s 663 709 s 410 462 475 526 550 500 2 625 664 s 713 411 463 476 527 551 573 3 626 667 714 412 464 477 528 552 674 603 631 668 715 413 395 b 478 529 553 s 575 s 604 635 s 669 s 716 414 465 479 530 555 677 605 632 s 671 717 415 s 466 480 531 556 575 a 605.5 639 672 718 d 417 461 481s 530 557 578 606 640 s N. 719 e 418 467 .484 532 558 579 607 s 643 673.2 718 a 419.4 468 485 s 533 s 559 580 s 609 644 a 720 5 466 b 490 s 518 560 582 610 645 /3 719 r, 420 s 469 492 s 519 561 583 s 611 643 y 708 f 422 470 s 494 505 562 586 •647 674.4 621 f 423 s 472 495 s 489 s 563 587 612 655 5 484 425 474 s 499 505 b 564 588 s 613 656 675 s 725 426 s 476 500 503 565 590 614 s 657 s 678 s 726 428 472 f 501s 535s 566 602 616 s 661s 681 727 429 472 g 503 s 537 s 567 608 s 617.5 657 i 682 728 i 506 s 539 /3 606 618 s 658 s 683 729 430 473 507.7 537 c 7 611 620 s 663 684 730 431 477 508 s 540 s 568 607 623 665 685 731 432 478 512 542 643 b 624 668 s 686 732 433 479 513 543 s 660 625 670 687 733 434 s 480 614 545 569 591 626 666 688 734 800. "Let me repeat, that so far from dissuading from the study of Greek as a branch of general education, I do but echo the universal opin- ion of all persons competent to pronounce on the subject, in expressing my own conviction that the language and literature of ancient Greece constitute the most efficient instrument of mental training ever enjoyed by man ; and that a familiarity with that wonderful speech, its poetry, its philosophy, its eloquence, and the history it embalms, is incomparably the most val- uable or intellectual possessions." — Marsh's Lectures on tJic Eng- lish Language. the end. AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS W1U1 . BE ^r^/oTTE CUE ^hTpENALTV THIS BOOK ON THE DATE THg pouRTH ^rN C O R TO^ O 0O S °o" N THE SEVENTH OAV OVERDUE. OCT 17 1939 l& |^&V9-Z9»- m ■ \\? ; '-C$ '/